Issuu on Google+


Th.· JnfnnnJt i�lft contollim,'d hl:"r'ln rrA«t" an ilcrumte pldul"t, of PllcrnC' Luthl'r,)n Unlvr-n:ltv .t the tlnw' ill pub1icDtitln. Howevpr, the uni\,f'�lly �rVL"S Ihe right h) "m .1k.t.1 nec�rv ch'J-n��eq in procf'dur�, fX'1i(les, Gl ! 'T1d. l f, curri{"uhnn, .and OJ""'"

Listed in this catalu),; are course descriptions and summaries of degree requirement' j r m�jors, minors. and the programs in the Collej.\" of Arts and Sctences dnd the hools of the Arts. Bu,in"s Administration, F.duc;)tio

·ursing. aod I'hysical Edu-

cation Detatled degre.. rt>qUIrement�, uften lndud lng upple­ m "ntar sample pn'gmm . �rI.' available in the offices of the individual

hool� and dep,rim nt

perionnel incon�i5(..nl

Adv";ng by unive�ity

with published

latements is ntlt

t>inding,

Pacific Luthera n U niver;ity compll s with t he Family duc"­ tion Righls and Pri v al)' Art of 1974. Inquiries concern ing the ap Ii II n uf t his act .. nd published fI'gulatiuns t thi� unlver· il

may

bEo

Seer lary 10 Ihe Vice Pr"$i­ 115, Hauge Administra­ University. telephone 535-7191.

referred to the Executive

dent .1nd Dean

for Student

J

of Edu.cation. 330 Independence Avenue SW,. 20201 r telephone 2021245-023J).

relatinl\ to

partment

Washington.

D.C.

its Statement oi Objectives And in compHance with federal law, Pacific Lu thera n University ,,"p\i illy forbids and will nnt t le M te an, condu t by e m ployed pe�onnel or by stud"nt that is c u lpa ble under the gl>neric legal tel'TTl, se)(ual hn s�ment. ::>e)(u, 1 harassment in this context understood (\5 any sex· oriented or �ex-related beh avi or, whether in ac t I o n or in speech, which I> unw... lcome 1< the perslJn who is th" obj<:et of such bl'havinr. Tac it acceptance of 'ueh behavio .. does not imply prvuf that it "'.. welcome II> the redpil!nl. In an employment cont ex l, sexual haras ment a: here under­ stood may atso bE' culpable as legally prohibited sexual discrim­ ination and h"nee subject to ..ll relevant mg"1 sanctions that perta," to �uch prohibited misconduct '5 we.!1 ;1S to those nc­ tiOM that pl.'rtain pecifically to se lhll hara� ment Any form a reprisal. actual or bv implication potential, w hether academic Or related to employment, is an �ggr.lvation of the prohibited behavior and will be construed as evidence of (ulpo· ke.:.ping witl1

aid

The Associate Dean (or Student Life, Room 115. Hauge Administration Bulldil1�. Pacific Lutheran University. tell'.­

phun e 5 5-71 1. for millli!J'S regard ing admin' rrative policie. s t udents, student ervices. ,1nd th" stud..nt

Life, Room

tIon BUilding. Pacilic l ulh�ran or th e Familv Educat ion Rights and Privacy Offic...

In

Pa ilk Lutheral1 Unlver!;ity dQi's not discrimil1ate On the ba5'ls of ....lI, race. neE'<!, color. national ori in, age. r handicapped condition In thc l'ducillional programs or acti viti"" w h ich il operates, and I required by Title IX of the Edu lion Amend· ments of 1972 and thc. regulations ad p led pu rs ua nt thereto. by Title VI and Title vn . f th Civil Rights Act of 1%4. and by Sec­ tion 50·j of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 not to dis,"mlO8le in such manner. The req uirem.... ts not to discriminate in educa­ t ional programs and activities ext ends to employment therein and to admission thereto. Inquiries cun ..ming Ihe app hc ation of said acts and pub­ lisht'<i . regulatiOns to th is university rna be referred to: 1. The Director Ilf Personnel. Room 107, Hauge Administrati n Building. Pacifi Lu heran UniVI'TSity. Telephone 535-718 • (or malll!rs rcloting to employmenl p li(l� and practices, pr\.l­ motion,. fringe benefit , training. and grievance procedures for per onnel emp loy ed by the tmiversily. 2. The Deputy Provost. Room 104,. H- use Administrallon Build­ ing. PaCific Lutheran UnIversity. telephone 535-7125. for mat · ters relalll1); 10 sludent a d missions. (\.1m ulum. and fin.ilncial

4

administrativ The

0 iJI

grievance procedure, Dean for Stu dt' nt Lirl', Room

tion �04 of the Rehabilitation Mt. AdVising and Assi tance Cen­ ter. Ramstad Hall. Pacific I ulh rom UniveJ;'Sity, dephone 535-

7519,

for mJtters relaLlng 10

the J dem;, grievance

procedure. 6. Or the Assistant Secrelary for Civil Rights,

of Education. Sw it zer Buildin)!., ton, D,C 20202.

330 C SIr

nol all equ"lly se"sitive tel how others may

behavior Ihal

is sex-Oriented or se�­

relaled--even when no harassment is intended-anyone who

finds such bEohavior otfensi e or unwelcome IS herewith 'trongly encouraged so to inform the pees n responSible and to llo so promptly, Il!St silen�e be mistakenly unJi!J'Stood as consenl.

Complamts regMding sexual haras�ment will be received. pompt ly investigated, and vigorously pursued to wha tever iin�1

be a ppro priate. Such complaints may be made the immediate upervisor 01 the alleged offend"r, or 10 it h.igher level supervisor. or to the di rector of personnel or to an a pmpnJt(· univeThity o[fic('r. Complaints regarding se 'uill h fa 'iTlIent may boi' fTL1de by rsons other th n the ppat'll nt n:clpient. To the .. tent po sibl.., ron plaints will bl' d..alt with confidentially and with a vi w to pr !eding both the.: mla m ­ ani and the persun who i accu�ed but may be found i n nocent. Th purpose of thi! poli cy is to preserv� for "JI the lIDiwrsity's students Bnd emp loyees an cadem , a.nd working environment th a t i� as cnnduciv e J possible to ach i eV i ng OUT personal and in . lit ull nal goals wit h lntegritv and good will resolution may to

J

Volume LXVn No.3 June, 1987

�· I"""""�� m

Pacific Lutheran University Catal g USPS 417-660 Published bi-monthly by Pacific Lutheran Uni­ versity, South Ulst and Park Avenue, Tacoma, Washington 98447-0003. Second Class postage paid at Tacoma, WA. Postmaster: send address changes to Offic f Admis ions, PLU, P.O. Box 2068, Tacoma, WA 98447-0003.

Hauj.\('

5. The Director of the Academ i

bihty.

Since individuals a pt't'('eive or intl.'rprel

115.

niv rsit ... tele­ Admini trati n Buildll1g, racili Lutheran phone 535·7191, for m. tier' relati ng to the application ofSe£­

T.�,

- ... poInt.-

T. ML Ibl.... ...,""" ,....

U . Department I S.W.. Washing.


1

-

-.-4


2

Objectives University

the

Pacific Lutheran U niversity, born of the Reformation spirit, maintains the privilege of exploration and learning i n all areas of the arts, sciences, and re li g ion. The basic concern of Martin Luther was religious, but his rejection of church tradition as primary aut hority, and his ow n free sea rch for religious truth, served i n ' effect to liberate the modern mind i n its quest for al l tr uth. The total impact of Luther's stand has permanently shaped the modern world and helped provide t he modern u n i ve rsit y with its basic methodology. Pacific Lutheran Univ ers it y is a community of professing Christian scholars dedicated to a philosophy of liberal education . The major goals of the institution are to inculcate a respect for learning and truth, to free the mind from the confinements of ignorance and prejudice, t o o rgan i ze the powers of clear thought and expression, to preserve and extend k nowledge, to help men and women achieve professio nal competence, and to establish lifelong habits of study, reflection, and learning. Throllgh an emphasis on the liberating arts, the University seeks to develop creative, reflective, and responsible persons. At the same time, the acqllisition of specialized information and technical sk ill is recog­ nized as a condition of successful involvement in the modern world. The Un iversity seeks to develop the evaluative and spiritual capacities of the students and to acquaint them honestly wi th rival claims to the true and the good. It encourages the pursuit of rich a n d enno bli ng experiences and the development of significant person h oo d t h rough an appreciation of humanity's in tellectual, artistic, cultural, and natural s u rround ing s. The Uni­ versity affirms its fundamental o bligat io n t o confront liberally

By providing a rich variet y of social experiences, Pacific Lutheran UniverSity seeks to develop in the student a joy in abundant living, a feeling for the welfare and personal i nt eg ri t y of others, good taste, and a sense of social propriety an d a d equa c y . Distin­ guishing between personal Christian ethics and normal social cont rols, t he U niversity ad o pts only such rules as seem necessary for the welfare of the educational community.

educated men and women with the challenges of Christian faith

educational and spiritual goals, maintains the right and indeed the

and to instill in them a true sense of v ocation.

The physical development of students is regarded as an integral part of their liberal education. Hence t h e University encourages

for health and fitness. Professing a concern for human nature in its entirety, the facul t y of the University encourages wholesome dev el opm en t o f Chris­ tian faith and l i fe by providing opport lmi ties for worship a n d meditation, offering systematic studies of religion, and enco urag­ i ng free investigation and discussion of basic religious questions. The University believes the essence of Christianity to be personal faith in Go d as Creator and Redeemer, and it believes that such faith born of t he Holy Spirit generales integrative power capable of g ui d i n g human beings to illuminating perspectives and wo rthy pllrposes. Th e Un ivers it y commun i t y confesses t he faith that the ultimate meaning and p urposes of human life are to be d iscovered i n the person and work of Jesus Christ. As an ed u c at ional arm of the Church, Pacific Lut heran U niver­ sity p ro v ide s a locus for the fruitful interplay of Christian faith and all of human leaning and culture, and as such holds it a responsi ­ bility to d iscover, explore, and develop new frontiers. Believ ing participation in physical activities and respect

that all truth is God's truth, the UniverSity, in achieving its obligation offaculty and students to engage in an unbiased search for truth in all realms.


3

The university is located at South 1215t Street and Park Avenue in suburban Parkland. Office hours are from 8:00 a.m. t05:00 p.m. Monday through Friday. Most offices are closed for chapel on Monday, Wednesday, and Friday from 10:00 to 10:30 a.m. during the school year, and on Fridays during June, July, and August all offices close at 12 noon. The university also observes all legal holidays. The University Center maintains an information desk which is open daily until 10 p.m. (11 p.m. on Friday and Saturday). Visiturs are welcome at any time. Special arrangements for tours and appointments may be mnde through the admissions office ur the un iversity relatiuns office.

FOR INFORMATION ABOUT:

CONTACT THE OFFICE OF:

General interests of the university, church relations, and community relations

THE PRESIDENT

Academic policies and programs, faculty appointments, curriculum development, aca足 demic advising and assistance, and foreign study

THE PROVOST College of Arts and Sciences Division of Humanities Division of Natural Sciences Division of Social Sciences School of the Arts School of Business Administratioll School of Education School of Nursing School of Physical Education

General information, admission of students, publications for prospective students, fresh足 man class registration, and advanced place足 ment

THE DEAN OF ADMISSIONS

Transcripts of records, schedules, registration, and transfer students

THE REGISTRAR OR THE TRANSFER COORDINATOR

Financial assistance, scholarships, and loans

THE DIRECTOR OF FINANCIAL AID

Financial management and administrative services

THE VICE PRESIDENT-FINANCE AND OPERATIONS

Fees and payment plans

THE STUDENT ACCOUNTS COORDINATOR

Campus parking, safety, and information

THE DIRECTOR OF CAMPUS SAFETY AND INFORMATION

Residence halls, counseling and testing, health services, minority affairs, foreign students, and extracurricular activities

THE VICE PRESIDENT FOR STUDENT LIFE

Gifts, bequests, grants, and the annual fund

THE VICE PRESIDENT FOR DEVELOPMENT

Work-study opportunities, student employ足 ment, and career options

THE DIRECTOR OF CAREER PLANNING AND PLACEMENT

Graduate programs

THE DEAN FOR GRADUATE STUDIES

Summer sessions

THE DEAN OF SUMMER STUDIES

Continuing education opportunities

THE DIRECTOR OF CONTINUING EDUCATION

Alumni activities

THE DIRECTOR OF THE ALUMNI ASSOCIA TION

Worship services and religious life at the university

THE UNIVERSITY PASTORS


4

Table

of

Contents

Objectives 2

Chemistry 35

Directory 3

College of Arts and Sciences 38

Academic Calendars 6

Communication Arts 39

General Information 8

Computer Science 41

Admission 10

Cooperative Education 44

Financial Aid 11

Earth Sciences 45

Costs 14

Economics 46

Student Life 16

Education 48

Advising 18 Academic Structure 18

Educational Psychology Special Education

Engineering 58

Majors/ Minors

Academic Procedures 20 General University Requirements Core Curriculum Alternatives

English 60 English as a Second Language 63

Anthropology 24

Environmental Studies 64

Art 26

Global Studies 65

The Arts 29

History 67

Biology 29 Business Administration 31

Humanities 69 Integrated Studies 70


5

Languages 72 Chinese, Classics (Greek, Latin), French, German, Norwegian, Scandinavian, Sign Language, Spanish

Legal Studies 76 Marriage and Family Therapy 76 Mathematics 77 Music 79 Natural Sciences 86 Nursing 86 Philosophy 90 Physical Education 92 Physics 96 Political Science 97 Public Affairs

Graduate Studies 110 Affiliate Resources 111 CHOICE KPLU-FM Center for the Study of Public Policy

Pre-Professional Programs 111 Health Sciences Pre-Law Theological Studies Air Force ROTC Army ROTC

International Programs 114 Global Studies Scandinavian Area Studies Study Abroad

Interim Program 116 Board of Regents 118 Administrative Offices 120 The Faculty 122

Psychology 100

Index 133

Religion 102

Application Form 135

Lay Church Staff Worker Program

Scandinavian Area Studies 104 Social Sciences 105 Social Work 106 Sociology 107 Statistics 109

Campus Guide 137


6

.......-...-ademic Calendar 1987-88 SUMMER SESSION 1987 Tuesday, May 26 .................. Early term begins Friday, August 21

................. Summer session closes; commencement FALL SEMESTER 1987

Saturday, September 5 to Monday, September 7 .......... .. Orientation and registration .

Tuesday, September 8 ........ .... Classes begin, 8:00 a.m. Opening convocation, 10:30 a.m. .

Friday, October 23 ..... . ... .. .... .. Mid-semester break Wednesday, November 25 ......... Thanksgiving recess begins, 12:50 p.m. Monday, November 30 ............ Thanksgiving recess ends, 8:00 a.m. Friday, December 11 ........

.

.

..... Classes end, 6:00 p.m.

Saturday, December 12 ............ Mid-year commencement Monday, December 14 to Friday, December 18 .. .. ... .. ...... Final examinations Friday, December 18 ........... ... Semester ends after last exam .

INTERIM 1988 Monday, January 4 ................ Begins Monday, January 18

.

.............. Martin Luther King, Jr., Birthday holiday

Friday, January 29 ..........

.

.

..... Ends SPRING SEMESTER 1988

Tuesday, February 2 ...... ........ Registration .

Wednesday, February 3

.........

.

.

Classes begin, 8:00 a.m.

Monday, February 15 .............. Presidents' Day holiday Friday, March 25 .................. Easter recess begins, 6:00 p.m. Monday, April 4 ... ............... Easter recess ends, 4:00 p.m. .

Friday, May 13 ...... ............. Classes end, 6:00 p.m. .

Monday, May 16 to Friday, May 20 .......... .. . .... Final examinations .

.

.

Friday, May20 . ................... Semester ends after last exam .

Sunday, May 22 ................... Worship service and commencement


7

ademic Calendar 1988-89 Tuesday, May 24

.

Friday, August 19

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

SUMMER SESSION 1988 Early term begins Summer session closes; commencement FALL SEMESTER 1988

Saturday, September 3 to Monday, September 5 Tuesday, September 6 Friday, October 21

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

Wednesday, November 23 Monday, November 28 Friday, December 9

.

.

.

.

Saturday, December 10

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

Orientation and registration Classes begin, 8:00 a.m. Opening convocation, 10:30 a.m. Mid-semester break Thanksgiving recess begins, 12:50 p.m. Thanksgiving recess ends, 8:00 a.m. Classes end, 6:00 p.m. Mid-year commencement

Monday, December 12 to Friday, December 16 Friday, December 16

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

Final examinations Semester ends after last exam INTERIM 1989

Monday, January 2

.

Monday, January 16 Friday, January 27

.

.

Tuesday, January 31

Wednesday, February 1 Monday, February 20 Friday, March 17 Monday, March 27

.

Friday, May 12 Monday, May 15 to .

Friday, May 19 Friday, May 19 Sunday, May 21

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

Begins Martin Luther King, Jr., Birthday holiday Ends SPRING SEMESTER 1989 Registration Classes begin, 8:00 a.m. Presidents' Day holiday Easter recess begins, 6:00 p.m. Easter recess ends, 4:00 p.m. Classes end, 6:00 p.m. Final examinations Semester ends after last exam Worship service and commencement


8

General In ormation GROUNDS

HISTORY P,1(ific

Luthpran

niver,ity was founded in IH90 by men and

Lllcated in suburban Parkland, PLU has a picturesque 126-acre

women of tht' Luth,'r,ln Church in the Northwest, ,lnd by the

campus, truly rt'prest'ntativeof t he natural grandeur llfthe Pacific

Reverend Rjug Harstad in particular. Their purpose was to

Northwest.

Ed llc�lt il l n \.... "s a venef,lted part of the Scandinavian and Ge.rman

ENROLLMENT

establish an institution in which their pl' opl t!' could be educated.

traditil)[1� from which thesp pioneers came. Thl' institution op� ne d .1S

Pacific Lutht.:'ran A(1dl:'m�. Growing

in stature, PLA b l'c .lnle i.'\ juniorcollegt' in 1921. Ten years iJh:'f, it was organizl'd into .1 three-yeilf normal school which became a

rollq;l' ll f educ,)tion in 1939.

Aih'f I lJ4 I. it t'xpilllded as Pacific Lu t heran College until it was

rpurgzlnizl'd as ,I univ ersity in 1960, rel1l�cting the g nnv th of both

its pnlt'essionill schools Mld l ibef il l .uts con....

FACULTY 218 full-time faculty 74 part.time faculty

STUDENT/FACULTY RATIO 15.4: I

ACCREDITATION P,lCific Lutheran Universitl' is flllly accredited by the Northwest Association of Schools and Colk'ges ,15 ,1 fOllr�year institution of highf'r t:'ducation and by the N ational Council for the Accrl'dita­ tipn of Tt'.:lcher Educ<ltion for the preparation of elementary and senmdarv te (lchcrs, princip '-1ls, and guidance counselor� with the master' � d l!gr t' c i.1S thl' highest degree a pproved. The university is

also approved by the Americ(lll Chemicc1i Society. The School of Nur5ing is <lccredited by thl' Natiul 1 <li League for N ursing . The

Srhl)o l nf B u sin t.� ss Administration is a(creditt.�d bv thE" American A"emblv l)f Collq;itit., Schools of Busi.1t'ss. T h e Social Work

Pr ogram' is ,Kcredited by the Council on Soci<11 Work

3,0 17 full-timt' students 840 part-time students

Education elt

ACADEMIC PROGRAM

I n 1969 Pacific Lutheran Universitv adll pted the 4-1·4 calendar ' which consists of twll fourteen-week semesters bridged by a four­ week interim

period.

COllrse credit is computed by hours. The majority of courses are offered for 4 hours. Each undergraduate degree candidate is expected to complete 12R hours with an oVl'rall grade point average of 2.00. Degn>e requirpments are specifically stated in this catalog. Each student should become familiar with these requirements and prepare to meet them.

the b,1(calaureak Il'vd. The Department of Music i s accredited bv

LIBRARY SERVICES

prospective studl:�nt may, upon request directed to the president' s

learning resource center serving the e.ntire university community.

the I <ltiondi As�ociJ.tilJn of Schools t,"1f Mu sic . Any current or oHio.:', reV ill \ ';' a copy of the docum(,-nts pert(lining to the univer� sit�/s

v ari Oll s

.)(creditations and approv<lls.

INSTITUTIONAL MEMBE RSHIPS Thl' University is a member of: American Association of Higher Education Americ(ln Council on Education

AssQciation of Americ(lTl

Colleges

Independent Colleges of Washing ton, Incorporated Lutheran Educational Conference of North American National Associatilln of Summer Schools Washington Friends of Higher Education \<Vestern Association of Graduate Schools \<Vl!sttt'rn Interstate Commission for Higher Education

The Robert A.,l. Mllrtvedt Library is the central multi-media Its collections are housed and services provided in a modern functional building which has study spaces for 850 students and shelving for more than 400,000 books, periodicals, microfilm, and audio· visual materials. The I.ibrary receives over 1 ,500 curre.nt magazines, juurnals, and newspapers. In addition to its general collection llf books and other materials, the library has a special collection devoted to the Scandin�vian Immigrant

Experience and

contains the university and negional

Lutheran church archives. Other speci.,l collections indude the Curriculum Collection of t he School of Education, the microfiche collection of collt'ge catalogs, maps, pamphlets, and national and trade bibliographies. The library is open for service 110 hours during a typical week in a regular term. A staff of twenty-seven full and part-time librarians and assistants offer expert reference, information, and media services. The reference staff providl's beginning and advanced Iibrarv instruct inn for all students. In addition to standard ' reference service, the library staff also offers computerized biblio­ graphiC information service. As the resu.lt of the library' 5 extensive collectilln of bibliographic tools, Cllmputer

access to other Cllllec­

tinns, and electmnic mail service, students and faculty have rapid access to materials which can be borrowed from other libraries.


9 COMPUTER CENTER The Computer Center's offices are located in the southeast corner of the lower floor of Mortvedt Library. The facility houses DEC VAX 11/785 and DEC VAX 1I/750 computers. Two large academic user rooms provide access to the VAX system and to IBM·PCs. The user rooms are open seven days a week. A variety of software programs are available for the V AX and IBM systems. Well known programing languages can be used on both types of hardware. The university has adopted standard PC software for word processing, spread sheets, data bases, and statistics. There is a charge (billed monthly) for use of the university's computer systems. The Computer Center offers a wide range of services, including free "how to" workshops. Information is available at the Computer Center regarding available workshops, the current software stand.ards, the current charging schedu le, and the use of computer facilities. The Computer Center's main offices are open from 8:00 a.m. until 5:00 p.m. during normal university operations.

WRITING CENTER The Writing Center, located in Ramstad Hall, provides a place for students to meet with trained student readers to discuss their academic, personal, and professional writingStudent staff memo bers ask leading questions that help writers to generate topics-, develop a thesis, organize material, and clarify ideas. In an at mosphere that is comfortable and removed from the classroom setting, student readers and writers talk seriously about ideas and writing strategies. Most sessions are one-hour meetings, but drop­ in students with brief essays or questiohs are welcome. The Writing Center is open Monday through Friday from 9:00 a.m. untiJ 5:00 p.m., and Sunday through Thursday from 7:00 p.m. until 9:00 p.m.

THE ELLIOTT PRESS The Elliott Press is PLU's studio·laboratory for the publishing arts. With the Press' large collection of letterpress type and equipment, students design and produce printed texts using the hand-controlled techniques that flourish today in the lively art form known a s "fine printing." In addition to its own publishing program, the Press houses a growing collection of innovative bookworks and is a working museum, where visitors may watch and try their hands at the technology pioneered by Gutenberg.

LATE A FTERNOON AND EVENING CLASSE S

To provide for the professional growth and cultural enrichment of persons unable to take a full·time college course, the uni versity conducts late·afternoon and evening classes. In addition to a wide variety of offerings in the arts and sciences, there are specialized and graduate courses for teachers, administrators, and persons in business and industry.

SUMMER SESSION

An extensive summer school curriculum, of the same quality as that offered during the regular academic year, is available to all qualified persons. In addit ion, summer session t y pically is a time when the faculty offer innovative, experimental courses which cover a broad range of contemporary issues and perspectives in many fields. The sum mer session consists of three discreet four­ week terms, and a one· week interim session, and begins the last week of May. Many courses are taught in the evening, two nights per week for nine weeks, and Master of Business Administration COurses are taught during two six·week terms, two nights per week. Designed for undergraduates and graduate students alike, the program serves teachers and administrators seeking Cre· dentials and special cou rses, freshmen desiring to initiate college study, and others desiring special studies offered by the schools and departments. Transient students who enroll for the summer session need only submit a letter of academic standing or give other evidence of being prepared for college work. A complete Summer Session Catalo g, outlining the curriculum as well as special institutes, workshops and seminars, is printed each spring and is available from the dean of t h e summer session at the university. Additional information may be obtained by calling 535-7143.

MIDDLE COLLEGE

PLU offers a special six-week summer program for high school juniors and seniors and for firs t·year college students. Called Middle College, the program is designed to ease the transition from high school to college by sharpening learning skills that are essential to successful completion of a college or university progra m. Middle College has both an academic program and a counseling and testing component. All students are thoroughly tested and evaluated in private sessions with regard to their reading, writing, verbal, and mathematical skills. In addit ion, career counseling is provided. The aim of Middle College counseling is to assess each student's talents and interests in order to provide direction and goals for the college experience. The academic program offers a chance to improve specific learning skills essential to college success. The classes, offered at several levels in several disciplines, are for Middle College students only, thereby allowing small class size and close contact between students and faculty. All students take a study skills course, which serves as a core of the program. In addition, st udents may select two or three courses from among those offered each year. Each student's program is individualized to promote maximum growth.

PROJECT ADVANCE

Each semester PLU offers Project Advan ce, a special enrichment program for high school juniors and seniors. Designed to comple· ment high school studies, Project Advance allows students to earn one hour of university credit and to experience college life and study. The topic of the course is different each semeste.r, and fall topics are chosen to coincide with the high school National Debate Topic. Project Advance classes meet once a week for six weeks in t.he late afternoon.

RETENTION OF FRESHMEN

The retention of students entering as freshmen has been monitored since 1972. Those data are presented in the following table:

Retention of Entering Freshmen To Sophomore Ye,u

To Junior Year

To Senior Year

1972

70.1%

51.9%

46.1%

1973

74.7%

54.3%

48.7% 49.8%

1974

74.0%

54.0%

1975

71.2%

52.9%

50.8'10

1976

69.3%

52.8%

47.5'70 52.4'70

1977

74.7%

57 . 2%

1978

74.2%

58.6%

1979

74.R%

60.6%

56 .4% 55.4%

19HO

78.6%

1981

511.2% 57.1%

52.7%

1982

71.1% 77.6%

60.1%

54.6%

19R3

75.7%

59.8%

58.2%

1984

78.5% 8 1 .5%

65.9%

1985

54.1%


10 •

mzsswn Pacific Lut heran University welcomes appl icat ions fTom stu­ dents who have demonstrated capa cit i es for success at the baccalaureate level. A pphca n ts who present academic records and personal q ua l iti es which Our ex pe ri ence ind icates will enable them to succeed at the university and benefit from the environ­ ment will be offered admission. Applicants for admission are evaluated without regard to sex, race, creed, color, age, national origin, or handicapped condition. Selection criteria include grade point average, class rank, transcript pattern, test scores, and recommendations. I n evaluating a p pl i ca t io n s the dean of admissions interprets grade pOint a v e ra ge s and class rank in relation to t he qua li t y of the curriculum which the applicant has pursued in high school and in the l ig h t of recommendations p u b l i sh ed b y the national Commis­ sion on Excellence in Education. For example, a standard high school program in preparation for college would t y pical l y include the following: English: 4 years Mathematics: 3 years (algebra, 2 years, and geometry, I year) Foreign Lang u age: 2 years Social Studies : 2 years Laboratory Sciences: 2 years Electives: 3 years (selected from the areas listed above, as well as courses in computer science, speech, debate, t yping, and music). Additional s t u dy of both mathematics and foreign language is advisable iOr certain areas in the arts and sciences and in some professional programs. Those who foll ow the above preparatory program will find most cur ricu la r offerings of the u n i versity open to them and may also q u al i fy for adva nced pl" cement in some areas. Effective with the fall semester of 1 988, entering s tud e nts will be required to have comp leted two high school years of on e forei gn language (or the equivalent) and t wo years of co llege preparatory mathematics (or the eq u i v al en t ), excluding courses in computer science. Students are admitted to either the (all or spring semester. Acceptance t o the fa l l term carries permission to attend the previous summer sessions. Spring acceptance approves enroll­ ment in the January interim. The following application deadlines are suggested: Fall Semester-June 1; SprillX Semester-January 1 .

ENTERING FRESHMEN APPLICATION PROCEDURE

Students planning to enter as freshmen may submit ap p li cat ion mater ials a n y t im e after completion of the jun ior year of h ig h school. Admission decisions are made beg in ni ng December I un less a request for Ea rl y Decision is rece iv e d . Candidates are notified of their status as soon as their comp le ted application has been received and evaluated. Credentials required a re: I . Formal Application: Submi t the Unifonn UnderxradllOtc Application for Admission to FOllr-Year Col/exes and Un iversities in the State of Washington. Available from high school counselors or the PLU Office of Admissions. 2. $25.00 A,Jplication/Records Fee: A $25 fee must accompany your application or be mailed separately. This non-refundable ser­ vice fee does not apply to your account. Make checks or money orders payable to Pacific Lutheran University and mail to the PLU Office of Admissions. 3. Transcript: The transcript you submit must include all credits completed t h roug h your j u n ior year of high school. If ad m is sio n is offered, an ac cept abl e final transcript which ind ica tes satis­ factory comp le t ion of the senior year and attainment of a di plo m a must be pres e n ted . 4. Recommendations: T wo recommendations must be prepared by principals, counselors, pastors, or other qualified persons. The PLU Office of Admissions will sup p l y the forms. �. Test Rell II iremcnt: All entering freshmen m us t submit scores from either the College Board, Scholastic Apt it ud e Test (SAT), or the American College Test Assessment (ACT) or, for Washington State residents, the Was hi ng t on P re- Co llege Test (WPCT). Regi s t rat ion procedures and forms are avai l a bl e at high sc hool counsel i ng o ffic es.

EARLY DECISION

High Sc hoo l students who have decided upon PLU as their first choice may be offered admission as early as October I of their senior year. Early Decision applications must be made by Navember 15 of the senior year. SAT, ACf, Or WPCT scores from the previous May or July are acceptable. Early Decision students are given preferential trea t ment in campus housing and financial aid. An Early Decision form is available from the Office of Admissions. If an Early Decision is u n favorable, a student may still be considered for regular admission.

EARLY ADMISSION

Qualified students i nt e rested i n accelerat i ng their formal educa­ tion may begin work toward a degree a ft er compl eti on of the junior year or first semester of t he senior year of high school. Ex ce p ti ona l students who wish to enro ll before com p let i ng all req ui red u n i ts i n h igh school must have a letter submitted by a recogn ized school official which approves early college admission and g i v es assurance that a high school diploma will be issued after completion of specified college work. O n l y students highly recommended for Ea r l y Admission will be considered. Generally these students rank among the top students in their class and present high aptitude tes t scores .

ADVANCED PLACEMENT OPPORTUNITIES 1.

College Board £tamillatiolls: Students interested in seeking ad­

vanced placement or credit toward graduation t h rough the examination program of the College Board should direct i nq u i ri es for specific i n formation to the department or school which offers the academic suject of their choice. General i nq ui des about the College Board program may be add ressed to the Office of Admissions. 2. Oeparlmflltal Examinations: A numberof depart me n t s and schools offer p l aceme n t examinations in order that s t uden t s may be advised as to the level at which they may most advan t ageou sly pursue a given subject. Credit toward g rad u a t io n may be giv en in certain cases, depending on the examination score and whether the s ub j ec t matter was /lot part of the course work by which the h i g h school d ip lom a was earned. Aga in, inq uiries for specific information should be directed to the dep a rt me nt or school offering the particular s u bject .

TRANS FER STUDENTS APPLICATION PROCEDURES

Students who began their higher education at other accredited co ll eges or universities are encouraged to apply for admission with advanced s tan d i ng. Candidates must have good academic and personal s ta nd i ng a t t h e institution last at tend ed full-time. Although it does not guarantee ad mission, a grade point average of 2.25 in all college work attempted is required for regular admission. Test scores may be req u i red for a pp l ic ant s who have limited co l l ege ex p erie nce. C rede nt ia ls req uired are: 1 . Fonnal Application: Submit a Uniform Undergraduate Applica­ t ion with $25.00 non-refundable appl icat i o n / reco rd s fee . 2. Transcripts: Of fi ci al t ran scri pts from all p revi o us collegiate institutions attended must be sent b y t h os e i ns ti t u t io ns d i rec tly to the PLU Offic e of Admissions. Official high school transcr ipt s of credits are necessary if t hey are not listed on college transcripts. 3. Clearance FornI: The office of the dean o f students at your most recently a ttended (full-time) institution must complet e a clear­ ance form (provided by the PLU Office of Admissions). 4. Recommendations: Two recommendations must be prepared by instructors, counselors, pastors, o r ot her q ualified persons. The PLU Office of Admissions provides the forms.

EVALUATION OF CREDITS 1. The registrar evaluates all transfer records an d creates an ad vi S in g booklet (Gold Book) in dica ti ng com pl et ion oJ any core req ui re me n t s and total hours accepted. Individual schools and departments determine which courses s a t isfy major require­ me nts . 2. Gen era lly, college-level courses carrying the grade of "C" or above apply toward g ra du a t io n . "D" graded courses will be withheld until a student has successfully completed one semester's work at the u ni versi ty .


11 3. A com m u n i t y college student may transfer a maximum of 64 semester (96 quarter) hours of credit from the two-year institution. 4. To qualify as a degree candida te, a student must take t h e final 32 semester hours in residence.

UNACCREDITED EDUCATIONAL EXPERIENCES l. Credits earned in unaccredited schools are not transferable at the time of admission. Evaluation and decision on such courses will be made after the st udent has been in attendance at t he university one semester.

2. The un iversity allows up to 20 semester hours of USAFIIDante credit and up to 20 semester hours for military credit, providing the total of the two does not exceed 30 semester hours.

3. The university does not grant credit for college level GED tests.

4. For information on the College level Examination Program (ClEP), refer to t h e section o n Credit by Examination under Academic Procedures.

ACCELERATED UNDERGRADUATE REENTRY FOR ADULTS (AURA)

FORMER STUDENTS APPLICATION PROCEDURE Full-time students who have not been in attendance for one semester Or mOre may seek readmission by obtaining an applica­ tion for re-entrance from the Office of Admissions unless they have been approved, at the time of last enrollment, for a leave of absence. Students who have been dropped for academic or disciplinary reasons must identify a faculty member willing to act ,l S a sponsor and adviser if re-admitted. Re-entering students who

have attended another college in the meantime must request that

a

transcript be sent from t h e institution directly to t h e dean of

admissions.

FOREIGN STUDENTS APPLICATION PROCEDURE Foreign students who are qualified academically, financially, and in English proficiency are encouraged t o join the university community. Information and application procedu res may be obtained from the dean of admissions.

FINALIZING AN O F FER OF ADMISSION l. Medical Req u irement: Before actual enrollment each new student must submit a Health History Form complete with an accurate immunization record. This information m u s t be acceptable to

Qualified adults, 30 years of age or older, who have not been

the PlU Health Services Office.

enrolled in a baccalaureate degree program within the last five years, may seek advanced placement at up to t h e j un ior level

2. Advance Payment: A $ 1 00.00 advance payment is necessary

through t h e AURA Program. Those accepted into AURA are

following a n offer of admission. This payment is the student's

granted one year's provisional admission, during which time they

acknowledgement of acceptance and both guarantees a place

must complete 1 2 credits at PlU (including Psyc hology 40 1 ) with

i n the student body and reserves housing on campus i f

a grade point average of 2.5 or higher. Credit awards for prior

requested. It i s credited t o the student's account and i s applied

learning are based upon systematic assessment by a faculty panel

toward expenses on the first semester. Fall aJilllicants offered

of the adequacy and appropriateness of knowledge and skills

admission before May

demonstrated in a portfolio prepared by the student with staff

circumstances necessitate cancellation o f enrollment a n d t h e

assistance. Credit awards may not exceed 48 semester credits less

dean of admissions is notified in writing before M a y I , t h e SI 00.00 w i l l be refunded. T h e refund d a t e for interim i s December I S , and for spring semest er, January IS. New Student Information Fom!: This form includes the application for housing and must be completed by all students and returned with the advance payment.

acceptable college transfer credits. For details of the AURA Program, contact the director, AURA Program, 535-75 18.

3.

1

must submit tlte payment by May

1.U

Financial Aid Recognizing that many students who want to a t tend Pacific lutheran University would be unable to meet all expenses of enrollment from personal or family sources, t h e university attempts to provide financial assistance to all eligible students. Any student approved for enrollment or c u rren t l y enrolled may request financial aid. Approximately 70% of the university's stu­

CONTINUING STUDENTS 1. PRIORITY DATE: All materials must be in the Financial Aid

2. 3.

Office by April

1.

Mail a Financial Aid Form (FAF) to the College Scholarship Service (CSS) b y March

I.

Submit a PlU Financial Aid Application.

dents receive help in t h e form of gift ,lssistance (that is, scholar­

An application for financial aid can be completed at any time,

ships, talent awards, or grants), low interest deferred loans, or

but failure t o meet the priority date may result in a denial of aid

employment. In

even though need is demonstrated. The Financial Aid Office will

many cases a financial aid award will be a

combination of these forms of assistance. The quantity and composition of an award is based upon

consider all applicants for any award for which they might be eligible. Aid llWards are for one year and most are renewable, provided

demonstrated financial need, academic achievement, test scores,

reapplication is completed on time, financial neeti continues, and satisfactory

and other personal talents and interests. Need is determined from

academic progress is maintained. Aid is not automatically renl!Wed each year.

analysis of t h e Financial Aid Form ( FAF), which is a statement of financial condition provided by the College Scholarship Service (CS5). Analysis of the Financial Aid Form determines an expected contribution for college expenses from the student and paren t(s) or guardian(s). "Financial Need" is defined as the difference between total student expenses for a n academic year and the expected student/family contribution and is a primary factor in determining eligibility for most available aid. Financial assistance is available to all qualified students regard­ less of their sex, race, creed, color, age, national origin, or handicapped condition.

APPLICATION PROCEDURE: FRESHMEN AND TRANSFERS

1 . PRIORITY DATE: All materials must be in the Financial Aid Office by March 1. 2. Mail a Financial Aid Form (FAF) to t h e College Scholarship

3.

Service (CSS) by February 1. Be offered admission by March 1 .

4. Submit a P l U Financial Aid Application (available upon

5.

request). Submit a Financial Aid Transcript from all prior institutions attended (transfers only).

NOTIFICATION OF AWARD DECISIONS

1. Award decisions for freshmen and transfer students who meet t h e March I completion date will be made in March, and actual notification will be mailed April

I.

2 . Financial aid decisions for continuing PlU students are made in April and notifications are sent out begin ning in May.

VALIDATING THE AID OFFER Aid offers m u s t b e validated by returning t h e signed Financial Aid Award Notice and submitting t he

$100

advance payment

required by the university. This should be done as soon as possible but must be completed b y May 1 . Applicants not returning their acceptance of an award by t h e reply date specified will have their awards cancelled.

U an

applicant later decides t o

reapply, t h e application will be reviewed w i t h t h e group currently being processed. Aid, with the exception of College Work-Study and Washington

State Need Grants, is credited t o the student's account when all paperwork has been completed. One-half of the award is dis­ bursed ea.ch semester. Parents and students are responsible for the charges in excess of t h e award. In some cases aid is awarded in excess of direct university charges to help with living expenses. This money will remain on the student's account unless requested by the student through the Business Office after classes have begun.


12 Under federal regulations, adjustments t o a n award package must be made i f a student receives additional awards of aid from sources external to the university. In every case, however, the Financial Aid Office will attempt to allow the student to keep as much of the award package as possible. By treating aid received from external sources in t h is wav, additional awards from the university's resources can be m"ade to other qualified needy .

����.

RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES The basic responsibility for financing an education at PLU rests with students and their families. In addition to expected contri­ butions from parents or guardians, students are expected to assist by contributing form their savings and summer earnings. Financial assistance from the university is t herefore supplementary to the etforts of a student's family. It is provided for students who demonstrate need. Additional rights and responsibilities of financial aid recipients include: 1. Signing and returning each financial aid notice received. 2. Declining a t any time any portion of an award. 3. Notifying the Financial Aid Office in case of a change in credit hours attempted; a change in marital status; a change in residence (off-campus or at home); or receipt of additional outside scholarships. 4. Providing a copy of their parents' income tax return (Form 1040) and/or a copy of their own individual income tax return.

ACADEMIC REQUIREMENTS/SATISFACTORY PROGRE SS The policy of the Financial Aid Office is to allow students to continue receiving financial assistance as long as they are i n good standing at the university. To do otherwise could cause a severe hardship on students who must devote their efforts to achieving satisfactory grades. However, no institutional grants will be awarded to students with cumulative grade point averages below 2.00. To be given priority for most types of financial aid, an applicant must be enrolled as a full-time student. For federal financial aid programs, a full-time student is defined as any person enrolled for a minimum of twelve credit hours or more per semester. Adjust­ ments in all award may be made during the year ifall aid recipient has lIot enrolled for a sufficiellt n u mber of credit hours. However, each financial aid recipiellt must mailltain satisfactory academic progress ill the course of study he or she is pursuing ill order to contillue to receive financial assistallce awarded by the PLU Financial Aid Office. The following mill i"",m requirements are expected of each financial aid recil,ient: To

make satisfactory progress toward a degree, an undergraduate sudent must complete a minimum of 24 semester hours of credit each academic year. An academic year is defined as the fall semester, the interim term, and the spring semester. As part of their undergraduate program, students are required to complete two interim terms (8 hours from courses numbered 300-320); j u nior and senior transfer students need to complete only one interim term (4 hours from courses numbered 300-320). Graduate students are required to complete 16 semester hours of credit each academic year. For full-time undergraduate students receiving financial aid, the maximum number of credit hours that may be attempted is 175 and the maximum t ime-frame for completing a baccalaureate degree is five years. Even if a student changes his or her major or academic program, only 175 credit hours may be taken qualifying for financial aid, and the maximum time-frame of five years for receiving a degree is enforced. Some financial aid programs (e.g., Washington State Need Grants) allow aid to be awarded a maximum of four academic years. The maximum number of full­ time graduate credit hours that may be attempted is 48, and the maximum time-frame t o complete a graduate degree is three years. Provisions to accommodate non-traditional, part-time students have also been established. Undergraduate students who qualify for these provisions must complete a minimum of 12 credit hours each academic year and achieve a degree within a maximum time-frame of len years (the maximum number of credits allowable is 350). Graduate students who qualify for these provisions must complete a minimum of 8 credit hours each academic year and achieve a degree within a maximum time-frame of seven years (the maximum number of credits allowable is 56). The Registrar's Office evaluates the transcripts of credits submitted by transfer students and determines which credits are acceptable toward a degree at f'acific Lutheran University. Notifi­ cation of the number of credits yet to be earned and of the time­ frame in which financial aid may be awarded is communicated to students during their first term of enrollment. The same procedure applies to all continuing students who have never previously received financial assistance. The following grades do not indicate successful completion of academic credit applicable toward a degree: E grades, I (Incom­ plete), W (Withdrawal), EW ( Unofficial Withdrawal, recorded by the registrar), F (Failure). Any courses in which such grades are received are, however, included in the maximum number of

credits that may be attempted ( 1 75) and are considered to be within the maximum time-frame allowable for achieving a degree ( five years). All credits earned by examillatioll, which are accepted as applicable toward a degree, will be included in the limitation on credits which can be attempted while eligible for financial aid. Courses that are repealed are also counted in the limitation on credits which can be attempted. Once a course has been completed successfullv, the credit hours earned are counted toward the minimum �umber of hours which can be taken under financial aid eligibility. If a course is successfully completed more than once, it is counted only once toward a student's degree requirements and toward the minimum number of hours which can be taken under financial aid eligibility. The universitv's curriculum includes verv few non-credit courses or cour;es whose credi t hours are n�t applicable to a degree, b u t if any such courses are taken by financial aid recipients, the hours will be included in the limitation on credits which may be attempted and will be considered with the time­ frame allowable for achieving a degree. In the event that a student fails to meet the criteria for satisfactory progress during a particular semester, he or she will be placed on academic and financial aid probation. Failure to regain sat isfactory academic status will result in the cancellation of financial aid. Once "unsatisfactory progress" has been determined, students receive official notification. Terminated students may apply for reinstatement by submitting a letter of petition to the Registrar's Office and securing a faculty sponsor. The petition and sponsor­ ship letters are submitted to the Faculty Committee on Admission and Retention of Students for action. Students who are placed on financial aid probation may petition for reinstatement of their financial aid in one of two ways: ( I ) They may complete one semester of full-time enrollment using their own financial resources, or (2) they may submit an appeal to the Faculty Committee on Admission and Retention of Students documenting the unusual circumstances which have made it i m possible to make sat isfactory progress during the semester in question. Summer sessions may also be used as terms during which a student on financial aid probation may regain satisfactory academic status; however, students enrolling in summer sessions for this purpose must use their own financial resources and are ineligible for financial aid.

TYPES OF AID UNIVERSITY GIFT ASSISTANCE

UNIVERSITY SCHOLARSHIPS are granted on the basis of academic achievement and financial need. To be considered, a freshman applicant must have a 3.30 secondary school grade point average. Scholastic ability must also be retlected in test SCOreS from the Scholastic Aptitude Test (SAT), or the American allege Test (ACT), or the Washington Pre-College Test ( Wpen Transfer and continuing students must have a 3.0 cumulative grade point average to be quali.fied for first-time or renewal awards. PLU is a sponsor of' National Merit Scholarships. Students who earn semi­ finalist standing are encouraged to contact the Financial Aid Office for information concerning a PLU Merit Scholarship. PRESIDENT'S SCHOLARSHIPS ranging from $1,000 to $ 1,500 annually are awarded to entering freshmen in recognition of oulslanding academic achievement in high school and in anticipa­ tion of superior performance at PLU. To be a cand.idate, a student must have a n exceptional high school grade average, usually 3.75 or higher, present high test scores, and receive an offer of admission by April 1. Use of a grade prediction equation to determine a predicted end of freshman year grade average is also a qualifying factor. Fillancial need is 110t a determining factor and no application is required. Usually forty (40) students are selected as President's Scholars without consideration of financial need. Renewal for a total of eight semesters is automatic provided that a 3.3 grade point average is maintained. ALUMNI MERIT AWARDS of $1,000 to $1,200 are given to exceptional students who are sons and daughters of PLU alumni/ae. To be considered, entering freshmen must have a cumulative high school grade point average of 3.5 or higher. Non­ freshmen and renewal candidates must have a minimum collegiate grade point average of 3.3 to be eligible. Financial need is nol a detennining faclM and completion of a special application is recom­ mended. Prospective freshmen must also be offered admission by April 1 to be considered. FACULTY M E RIT AWARDS of $1,000 annually are granted to twenty-four (24) students who have completed 45 semester hours or more a t PLU and are not receiving any other merit award. No separate application is required. Faculty will recommend students to a selection committee who will select recipients on the basis of scholastic achievement, special talents, and unusual service to the university.


13 PROVOST'S MERIT AWARDS ranging from $1,000 to $1,200 are granted to twenty (20) outstanding transfer students each year. To be considered a student must have a 3.6 grade point average in at least 45 semester hours of college level courses and receive an offer of admission by April 1 . Preference will be given to students who will complete an associate degree at an accredited community college (or a comparable academic experience at an accredited four-year institution) before enrolling a t PLU. A 3.30 grade point average earned at PLU is required for renewal. N o application is necessary. AIR FORCE A N D ARMY ROTC SCHOLARSHIP recipients (4-year, 3-ye.r, or 2-ycar) may attend Pacific Lutheran University. AFROTC classes are held a t the AerospaceStudies Department on the University of Puget Sound campus, about 20 minutes driving time from the PLU campus. Army ROTC classes are held on the PLU campus. TALENT AWARDS are granted to students with financial need who have exceptional ability in the fields of forensics, drama, art, music, or a t hletics. The candidate must make arrangements with the SChOlll o r department concerned for an audition andlor a perso nal in terview. In some cases a tapeor film will be satisfactory. A recommendation from a faculty member should be on file before the application priority date (see application procedure) for a student to be consi dered for a Talent Award. UNIVE RSITY GRANTS are awarded in combination with loans and employment to students with financial need who do not qualify for scholarship assistance. Forrigll Stlldent Grallts are re­ stricted tu thuse fureign students who have provided their uwn resources fur at least one year uf attendance. Grants usually amount to less than une-third uf the cost of attendance. MINISTER'S DEPENDENT GRANTS are available to un­ married. dependent children of a regli larly ordained, active minister ur missiunary of a Christian church. The minister's principal empluyment and primary source of income must be a result of church work. The a n n ual grant is 5500, and financial need is nut a determining factor. If a FAF is submitted nu special MDG appl ication is required. June I is the deadline for req uesting this grant. Requests received t hereafter will be honored unly as budgeted funds permit. ALUMNI DEPENDENT GRANTS uf S200 are given to full-time students whuse parent(s) at tended PLU (PLC) fur two semesters o r more. To be eligible the alumni dependent must be a full-time student (12 credit hours per semester) and cumplet e an applicatiun in the Financial Aid Office. December 1 i s the dealine fur requesting this grant. Requests received thereafter will be hunured unly as budgeted funds permit. RESTRICTED FUNDS: I n addition to its own scholarship funds, the u n iversity has at its disposal the folluwing restricted funds, generally awarded to those students who complete the regular application and who have finished their freshman year: Aid A5soclJl i()n for Lut h(,TJnS 5c'hol.u�h;ps

AU,'nmort' Fo u n da t ion S(h�)IJrShlp Alp<lc !Pepsi-Cula 7 Up) Alumm Schol.lr5hi p Fund ,\merie;)n Lulltt.'f.an Churt'h·Nnrth I'dcilic Ol:-Iricl Sc.hol,lT; ;-hlp I\mcrican Lutheran Church -xhol,lTship and Gr3nl Prol�r,Jm for Mmority S t udent-. Flnn'nn' 5pinnl'T ,.\ndcr.stm :Vfl'monal S<-huIM:->hip Ruth An(!J't:>On SCh(lla�hip 1\bry !,mc AT,1 m Schol.:J�hip Fund A::.:,ociJtN Groc('rS" Sch olar:-th ip Aw.1rlj of �)(o:'II{'ncl' (Pacific C()(�,,-Cula B()t t li n� Co.l M.Ht!.Ul'rlh' <lnd Wilmer [Jill'r ScholarShip ();'" F. Bayl'f \1i'morial S<h(JIMship H,E.ftC. Minority 5<holarsh ip lIind('r Memorial Schol.uship

Jorunn Brt'il':lI1d Sc hol.d..f5h ip l:und Or. ..tnd MrS". \V.B. Burns Fund Bur/lalf �I:.'m(lri<ll Scho larshi p Hl'nr!clto1 Button t-.:un:;ing Sc ho l.U5hi p Fund Carl O.llk I-.h'm\lnoll Sch(JIJrshlp I'und Chene\' Found.1lion Educali(lOal S<: hol a�h ips Chevron :-"h�rit

A\"'Md�

CllITIl'rC() - hobrshi p

Irt.'n\:' O.

Cr -0 Merit Award Id a A D,i\'i-, f:und Dotllittll' �k!TIori,ll Scholarship I..df Eriksun Scholarship

F.J<:utt.\' \1{.'mori<l1 Scholarship Fund

<lIth Lu t ht.'.r.J1l

Church of Portland Schol..tn;.hip Fund

Fir"l inle-r.>late Rank ScholJr�hir

H('nry Fo�<; 5<hularship /for Nllr....��ian lii t ud('T1t:-,) Lc.. h.ls� Memorial Scholarship �Ul:hs Foundation Scholarsh i p Gilb ..-rlson-Fran�t!n C h ari t able Trust I I..tils Fl.)undalion Obf Halvorsen Scholarship \."V.I-I. '- I,"I rd t kl' Seminary Stu.dent Scholanohip Fund \\'alll:."r A. 1 1\'J l h Ch,.uitabk Tru,S1 I,-VJltl:'r A. Heulh Chilfitable Trusl ( N ursin�) Sl.Iz41n(' Ingram Memorial Sc.hol.1fship Fun.d T\'rry In... in S<hol .lrship Oll� M. Jellnc.':>tad Meml)ri,11 Scbolarsh i p Juhnsonll.ars(JIl S.:hobr.>hlp Philip G_ and A\jCt' L KayS<'r Sch ol ar.oh ip Fund Rt.'v. Karl Kilian Memorial Funt! Willi,lm Kilworth Found" tion S<holarship Funt! \1d... in Klc ....."'no Memorial ScholarShip Jimmy K n ud se n Memo ri al Scholar;hip EbbJ La�1l NUT5ing Scholarship Ludvig and Golra ur:oon Scholarsbip

Loui� and Guy Le-e-sman Memorial Scholarship Mr. and Mrs. W. Hi ld in g Lindberg Endowed Schoiar5hip lutheran Brolh(-rh()(hl leg.ll Reserve Lift.> In:-.uran(l' Co. &hul.:lrship

luther.:lll Orolhl�rhoud Scholar.-hlp Joe Marchinek Memorial Schola.rship Fund M.llhcmalics Sch olarsh ip Lila Moe- Scholarship Lillian C. Morris Memorial 5<holarship MUfTily- Danlc!son Management Award Richar d P. Ne.ils Memorial Fund Mr and Mrs. Gus. H. Nieman Me-moria l Scholarship Marg.:lrel Nistad Memorial Scholarship Ro�er Pae!!:'1 Me-morial Schola�hip Bla.nche Pflaum Scholarsh i p PlU Women's Club Scholarship Nora J. r'onder Schol arsh ip Fund l'orllanJ Art:'.J Alumm Schol.uship ru,�el Sound NJl iunal Hank Sch ola rship Rainil!r Rank Min( )rl t y Schol<lf"Ship Recrt:'.Jlional Equlp ml>nl, Inc. IREI)

Kath ry n Rl'l'se Memorial Sc hola rs h Ip Or. Wal!\'r a n d Jilan Rt'll m.1n xh windt Scholarship

Si.qudan d Y(luth Scholarship (North PacifIC Oistrict luther L('a�ue) Skin"",r Foun d.tt lon Schnlarship Jamc� R. Slah"r Endowed ScholarShip Sm il h End uwml.'n t Scho l .u�hlp Fu n d Dora St.tnp;Iand �'Il'm()riaJ Scho!,:m. hip Edvin an d IdJ Tin!?,cbtad :-.1('m o riJI Sc-hol.lrshlp Evelyn S . To rwnt SchtJlar�hip Elhm Valle Memon") Scholar$hip H op per Ml'mori .J 1 Robt:rl E. Olson Me mo rial H�dv\� Arthur MemOrial Otm alJ A Orunner :'v1eml)rial Mark Salzman �emorial 1.1'. Carlstrom Scholarship I.uui� and L�(ma Llmp ScholJr�hip Cordon 1\'ar5On Me mo ria l Wad(,/Hmderlie Sc holars.h i p Fund Ina H. W a ke Me>m(lfial SchulJrshlp Washingilln SLate AUlomubile Ot'a)ers A�od.:lIion Scholarsh ip Wa!Ohingtun Conr,r�� of PMl:'nts, Tt"acht.'rs, a nd Studt.'nl� C(.'!l."stt'n(' Yoder Memori.11 Schol.u.ship

GOVERNMENTAL GRANTS

THE PELL GRANT PROGRAM is a Federal program designed to provide the "foundation" for a financial aid package. It is intended for stu dents with high financial need. When completing the Financial Aid Form ( I'AF) applicants should indicate that t h e information is to b e used for determining their eligibility f o r t h e Pel! Grant b y checking t h e appropriate b o x . I f the Student Aid Report (SAR) yuu receive indicates eligibility, al! three copies should be sent to the Financial Aid Office. SUPPLEMENTAL EDUCA T10NAL OPPORTUNITY GRANTS (SEOC) are available to students who have exceptional financial

need. Grants range from 5200 to $2,000 per year. The SEOG must be matched with at least an equivalent amount of other k i nds of aid (grant, loan, ur employment). Eligibility is determined by federal guidelines. WASHINGTON STATE NEED GRANTS are available tu eligible residents of the State of Washington who attend PLU. These grants are intended for students with high need. On the basis u f guidelines established by the Higher Education Coordi­ nating Board, students with specified need as computed from the Financial Aid Form are submitted tu the State for consideration. Present procedure docs does not req uire a separate application. ARMY ROTC SCHOLARSHIPS are available (three-year or two-year) forstudents in all disciplines and are not based on need. Scholarships pay for full tuition, books, fecs, and supplies, and include a $ l ooll11onth stipend (up to $1.000 per schuol year). Week l y classes are held on campus. STUDENT EMPLOYMENT

There are employment oppurt unities on campus and in the community that can help students meet cullege expen�es. l'riority for placement is given to those students who have demunstrated fi nancial need and have been awarded a work-study eligibility. Over 900 students work on campus each year. The university's annual student payroll exceeds 51,000,000. The average on­ campus job approximates ten hours per week, and produces around $1,050 during an academic year.

All studellt placements faron-campus al/d off-camplls jobs are handled 1'Y

Scn)ices Office. Actual hring of stud"nts is done at the beginning of the school year and at other times as vacancies uccur. The Federal College Work-Study Program off"rs only on­ campus employment. To participate, students must be eligible for work -st ud y . T h e S t a t e Work -Study Program offers o n l y off-campus work opportunities with profit -making and non-profit employers. Posi­ tions must be related to students' academic interests. To partici­ pate, students must be eligible for work -study. the Career

LOANS

Many students invest in their future by borrowing educational funds. Low interest, deferred loans make it pussible to pay someuf the cust of education at a later time. Loans are often included with gift assistanc.e and work to form a financial aid package. The(e are three major sources of loans at PLU:


14 PERKINS LOAN (formerly NATIONAL DIRECT STUDENT LOAN-NDSL)-Eligibility is determined by the PLU Financial Aid Office from t he Financial Aid Form and is based on need. Most loans average 51 ,000 annually, but cannot exceed $3,000 for the first two years of school, nor an aggregate of 56,000 for an undergraduate degree. No interest accrues and no payments on principal are necessary until six months after a recipient Ceases to be a half-til.l1e student enrolled in an eligible institution. Simple interest is 5% during the repayment period. Up to 100% cancella­ tion is available for teaching the handicapped or in certain low income areas. Repayment may be deferred because of further full-time study or service in the armed forces, VISTA, or the Peace Corps. Exit in terviews are required by the Business Office upon leaving PLU or t ranscripts, grades, and diploma are withheld. NURSING STUDENT LOAN (NSL)-A federal loan program limited to students with need who are accepted for enrollment or are enrolled in the School of Nursing (usually not before the sophomore year). The NSL has provisions similar to the NDSL Up to 52,500 is available, dependent on federal funding. Loans average $500. Repayment begins one year after graduation. Partial or full cancellation is possible under certain conditions. GUARANTEED STUDENT LOAN (GSl)-Under this pro­ gram, students may borrow from banks, credit unions, and savings and loan associations. A separate application procedure is required and forms are available from the PLU Financial Aid Office. The maximums which a student may borrow are: Undergraduate $2,625-$4,000 Graduate $7,500 Repayment of principal is deferred until six months after a recipient ceases to be a half-time student enrolled in an eligible institution. The i n terest rate is 8%; interest is paid by the federal government while the recipient is attending schooL PLUS LOAN -This is a non-need based loan for paren ts of dependent undergraduate students. Payments are not deferred but begin within 60 days after t he loan is disbursed. Not all states offer this loan. Out of state students or parents should check w i t h their nearest college o r s t a t e higher education authorities to determine i f it is operational. If i t is. an application must be obtained within the parent's state of residence. PLU's Financial Aid Office has avaUa ble only the Washington St,1te version. The interest rate is variable but cannot exceed 12%, and th e amount of t he loan cannot exceed t he student's cost of attendance minus other financial assistance (including a Guaranteed Student Loan). If the state or lending institution of t he student or parent does not participate in the PLUS program, it is possible to borrow through United Student Aid Funds (USAF). The maximum annual amount which a parent may borrow is 54,000.

SUPPLEMENTAL LOANS FOR STUDENTS (SLS)-This non­ need based loan program is designed for an independent under­ graduate or graduate student. Students borrowing underSLS who are enrolled full-time defer principal payments but begin interest payments sixty (60) da-ys after disbursement of t he loan. At the lender's option, full-time s!udents may make no interest payments while t hey are in school and have the oustanding interest added to the loan principal when they leave school. Loans have a variable interest rate. The variable rate cannot exceed 12%. The maximum amount of money that may be borrowed is $4,000 annually with a cumulative limit of $20,000. PREP LOAN-The Private Resource Education Program has no pre-established loan limits. The amount of money that may be borrowed is determined by individual needs, credit capacity, and the cost of the school attended. Cit izens, nationals, and permanent legal residents of the United States may take out a PREP loan to cover the costs of their own education or that of a n immediate family member. Loans have a variable interest rate. Flexible terms are offered. While t he student is in school, no principal payments are required; however, during this period, the borrower makes quarterly or semi-annual interest payments of 2% per year of t he loan balance. The borrower begins repaying the loan principal and accrued interest nine months after the student leaves school. Short term loans are available from various restricted FLU loan funds which include: Alumni Association twn Fund AmericJ.n LuthE:r.m Church \\'llmE:n

Anton Ander�on

John S.

lOolll Fund

Luan

Fund

Baker lo,'n Fund

J.P. CarlStrom �emor;al LOiJn Fund

Delta Kappa Gamma

lilv C

StuJen t lo.m Fund

Ekern Fund

Maril' H u l h lo.ln Fund.

Gl'rnOird Kirkeoo �kmori,lI Loan Fund h.'anNle Olson-Dian.:. Paul-�1.i,iam

510<1 �(('morial Slud('nt Lo,)" fun d

].['. l'ffut"t;er Student I.oan Fund

O.J. Sluen Alumni loan Fund O.A Tin�J('s t" d Loan fund Women's

Club uf fa.om')' Revolving loan

V('rne Graham Loon Fund

Fund

VETERANS A FFAIRS AND VOCATIONAL REHABILIT ATION Pacific Lutheran University has been approved by the State Approving Agency as one of the qualified institutions which veterans may attend and receive benefits. Veterans, widows, and children of deceased veterans who wish to inquire about their eligibility for benefits should contact t he Regional Office of the Veterans Administration, Federal Build ing, 915 Second Avenue, Seattle, Washington 98174. Students should gain admission to the university before making application for benefits. Students are encouraged to register at the university ' S Veterans Affairs Office before each term to insure continuous receipt of benefits.

Costs TUITION Pacific Lutheran University bases its tuition on a Cost Contain­ ment Plan (CCI') which provides for a maximum of 35 credit hours for the 1987-88 academic year at a cost of $7760. This can be broken down by terms as follows: Full-time students ( t hose taking 12 or more h,; urs in a regul'" semester (fall or spring) w i l l be charged 536 10 for 1 2 - 1 6 hours plus 5220 for each hour in excess of 1 6 . Interim full-time students ( those taking 4-5 hours) will b e charged 51 050 plus 5220 for each hour in excess of 5. These charges (for those who stay within the blanket range of 1 2 - 1 6 hours forfall and spring and 4-5 hours for interim) if totalled by semester equal 58270. To reduce this total to the CCP maximum rate of $7760 for u p to 35 hours, an adjustment will be applied to the student's accou nt. This adjustment is called CCP Spring Discount. CCP Spring Discount is an adjustment which allows for any combination of regular hours during the academic year up to 35 hours, for a maximum charge of $7760. This adjustment (if applicable) will show on the account at the spring semester pre­ billing in late November. Students participating in a Study Abroad Program during the academic year are not eligible for the CCP Spring Discount.

Example #1 Credit Hours Tuition Excess Hours Spring Discount

Fall 13 $3610 - 0- 0-

Total:

$3610

$1050

$3100

Fall 17 $3610 $220 - 0-

Interim

Spring

-0- 0- 0-0-

3610 $440 ($120)

$3830

$ - 0-

$3930

Fall 16 -15 $3610 - 0-0-

Interim

Spring

4- 5 $1050 - 0- 0-

10-15 3610 -0 ($510)

$3610

$1050

53100

57760

Example #2 Credit Hours Tuition Excess Hours Spring Discount Total:

57760

Example #3 Credit Hours Tuition Excess Hours Spring Discount ifotal:

$7760

----

----

Interim 5 $1050 - 0- 0-

-----

----

Spring 17 3610 $220 ($730)

lB

Graduate Students will be charged at t he rate of$251 per credit hour and are not eligible ior the Cost Containment Plan or the CCP Spring Discount adjustments.


15 Pari-lime Siudenis ( ] - l l credil hours per semesler) will be charged a l lhe rate of $251 per credit hour and are nol eligible for the Cosl Conlainmenl Pl a n or the CCP Spring Discount adjusl­ ments.

Special Course Fees: A few specialized courses, e.g., Physical Education, Art, and Private Music Lessons, require the payment of a special course fee.

ROOM AND BOARD

The u n iversity requires that all single full-time ( ] 2 or more semester hours) stude,nts room and board on campus unless the student is living at home with parents or legal guardians, is 21 years of age or older during the current semester, or has senior status (90 semester hours). All exceptions to this policy must be requested from the Residential Life Office. Food Service is offering three board plans for ian 1987 and spring 1 988.

Plan n is full board-20 meals per week ( b reakfast, lunch and

dinner 6 days and brunch and dinner on Sunday) a t a cost of $775 per semester. Plan n2 is lunch and dinner 7 days a week a t a cost of 5720 per semester. Plan n3 is breakfast, lunch and din ner, Monday through Friday at a cost of $665 per semester.

During inlerim 1988 (in January), only Plan nl will be ofiered at a cost of $ 1 1 0. Those not on campus during interim should deduct the $ 1 1 0 board cost from the examples below.

ROOM AND BOARD COST PLAN #1 Fall Room Fall Board Interim Board Spring Room Spring Board Total:

$885 5775 SI lO S785 $775 53330

PLAN n2 Fall Room Fall Board Interim Board Spring Room Spring Board Total:

$885 $720 5110

5785 5720 $3220

PLAl'l n3 Fall Room Fall Board Interim Board Spring Spring Board Total:

5885 5665 $ 1 10 5785 5665

$3 1 1 0

Meals are not provided during Thanksgiving, Christ mas, and Easter vacations. The interim board cost will be ch arged only if a student is on campus during January. Commuter students are encouraged to eat meals on campus and may select one of the above plans (nl, n2, or n3) or may select lunches only at a cost of $255. Single, rooms are limited and cost an additional 5 1 1 5 or $75 per semeste.r. Students moving on campus for spring only pay the rail room rate. A limited amount of family student housing is available. The two- and three-bedroom units cost approximately $160 per month. A damage deposit of $ 1 00 must accompany a reservation for family student housing. Applications may be obtained from the PLU Residential Life Office.

OTHER SPECIAL FEES

Student Parking- Permit Required Student Health and Accident Insurance ( p remium varies by coverage and is optional) Credit by Examination (Department Exam) Educational Placement Fee (School of Education graduates) Computer Usage Fees (See Computer Center for complete fee schedule) Health Center Library, Lost Book and Parking Viola­ tion fines

No Charge Approx. 5 1 40 (full year) $62.75 per credit hour $25 First 55.00 free per billing cycle (Charges depend upon service)

RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Upon registration, the student and his or her parent(s) or legal guardian, as the case may be, "gree t o accept the responsibility and legal obligation to pay all tuition costs, room and board fees, and other special fees incurred or to be incurred for the student's education. The university, in turn, agrees to make available to the student certain educational programs and the use of certain un iversity facilit ies, as applicable and as described in this catalog. A failure to pay all university bills shall release the university of any obligation to continue to provide the applicable educational benefits and services, to include statements of honorable dismissal grade reports, transcript of records, diplomas, or pre-registrations. The student shall also be denied admittance to classes and the use of university facilities. Under certain circumstances student paychecks may be applied to unpaid balances. All accounts 60 days delinquent are routinely reported to d credit bureau.

FINANCIAL AID

Scholarships, grants, talent awards, and loans awarded by the PLU Financial Aid Office and outside aid ( from fraternal organiza­ tions, high schools, churches, etc.) sent directly to PLU, are credited to the student's account in the following manner: Half of a l l awards large.r t h a n 5 1 00 are credited to each semester. (Example: A $700 scholarship will result in 5350 being credited toward fall and 5350 for spring semester.) Awards of $100 or less will be applied to one semesteronly. Students are required to sign for their National Direct Student Loans and Nursing Student Loans in the Business Office at the beginning of each semester. Gua.ranteed student loans obtained through banks and other lending institutions will be applied in total when received after the proper endorsement of the check by the student at the Business Office. Checks not endorse,d within 30 days of arrival will be returned to the lending institution as defined by federal regula­ tions. Students who secure part-t.ime employment as part of their financial aid receive monthly paychecks. These paychecks may be applied to unpaid balances. ReCipients of financial aid must report all outside awards to the Financial Aid Office. If actual costs are less than estimated on the financial aid application or award notice, the aid package may be reduced.

PAYMENTS

Mail payments with remittance (statement copy or coupon) to PLU, Box 1356, Tacoma, WA 98401, or deliver payments to the PLU Business Office in the Hauge Administration Building, Room 100. Checks should be made payable to Pacific Lutheran University. The student's name and account number should be included on the check. VISA and MasterCard bank cards are accepted. Indicate card t ype, account n u m ber, and exp iration date if transaction is done bv mail. Please do not mail cash. A discount rate, which is periodi ally adjusted, will be charged against Canadian funds.

PAYMENT OPTIONS

I. Payment Before Term Begins 2. PLU Budget Plan 3. Semester Installment Plan

---

1.

PAYMENT B E FORE TERM BEGINS

Early registra n ts will be sent a pre-billing of charges and credits. Early payments are encouraged, and those who pay early may qualify for LUTE BUCKS (coupons redeemable at the PLU Bookstore). Forstudents who select Ihisopt ion, payment in full is due before t h e beginning of the term ( fall-September 8; interim-January 4; spring-February 3). Financial clearance ( paid in full) is necessary for 10 card validation. Registration is not finalized until tuition and fees are paid. Unpaid balances are subject to late charges if not paid by published deadlines. Contact the Business Office for current charges if a complete statement has not been received.

NOTE: Payment options 2 and 3 a re subject to approval of credit. 2. PLU BUDGET PLAN

This plan allows for paying selected educalional expenses on a monthlv installment basis withoul interest. Selected educational expens s are estimated for the e.ntire academic year and paid in equal installments as follows: a. Full Year Budget Plan-May 10 through April 10 b. Half Year Budget Plan-May to t h rough October 10 (summer and fall); November t o through April 1 0 (interim and spring) A Budget Plan Agreement can be obtained from the PLU Business Office and is not valid until signed and a pproved. The total amount of financial aid awarded (excluding expected earnings from Work Study and Washington State Need Grant) can be deducted in arriving at the monthly installments. If a student is a financial aid recipient, the amount of t u ition estimated on the Budget Plan Agreement must correspond with the amount of tuition estimated by the Financial Aid Office. Actual class registra­ tion which results in lower tuition may require a reduction in financial aid offered. Those applying for the monthly payment option after May will be charged a 2% per month late charge and must pay the back payments. If during the academic year actual costs vary from the original estimate, monthly payments will be revised upon notifi­ cation of the Busi ness Office. Monthly payments received after the five-day grace period will be assessed a 2% per month late charge. If a payment becomes delinquent for thirty (30) days, a student may be denied admission to classes, or the university may withh old grade reports, transcript of records, or diplomas.

3. SEMESTER INSTALLMENT PLAN (SIP)

The Semester Installment Plan requires a 25% minimum down payment. The balance remaining (plus finance chargen) is divided into three (3) monthly installments, due by the 1 5th of the month (Fall-October 1 5, November 15, December 1 5; or Spring-March 15, April 1 5, May 1 5). I f the interim is to be included with spring semester, payments are due February 1 5, March 1 5, and April 1 5. lf payment is received after the 20th of the month, a $ 1 0.00 late payment charge will be assessed in addition to the regular finance charge.

-


16 'In order to qualify for the Semester Installment Plan, all prior balances must be paid in full. Applications for the plan must be made by the tenth day of the semester, and the 25% minimum down payment must accompany the ,'pp.lication. A larger down payment can be made and would reduce the finance charges ,1nd monthly payments. Upon receipt of the Semester Installment Plan application with tht" down payment, a promissory note and payment coupons will bt' mailed to the ,1ddrcss indicated on the application. The signed promissory note must be returned to the PLU Business Office. "The fillallcc chargc is dclmll i/lcri at fi,e dale tl,e /laic is /legotiatcd and is sci

al 4 '1,. a/"",e Ihe average yield of the 20-week than 1 2% pcr amWnI.

U.S. Treasury

Bill.

bul 1101

less

ADVANCE PAYMENTS

;>.jew students pay a SIOO.OO advance payment in order to confirm their offer uf admissiun. For fall acceptance this is not rdundable after Mav 1 ( December IS for interim; .(anuarv 1 5 for . spring semester). All returning students who wish to reserve a room the folluwing year or students who an� receiving financial aid must make a 5 1 00.00 advance payment. This advance payment is applied to the seme5ters costs, when appropriatt', and is refundable until July 1 . Students will not be permitted to finalize registration a s long as any bill remains unpaid.

RE FUNDS If a student drops a single class or rompletelv withdraws from the term during the first two weeks of the f,,11 or spring semester, a full tuition refund \\' i l l be given. The Advance Paymt'nt is not

refunded. A 10% per day charge will be assessed for complete withdrawals during the third and fourth week. No refunds are ,wailable after the fourth week for complete withdrawals Or after the second week of the term for dropping individual courses. I n the event of a withdrawal from interim during the first week, a full t uition refund will be given. No refund is ,wailabl� after the first week. Residence hall and board refunds will adhere to the terms of the Re�identi<J1 Life Contract. Students who completely withdraw from the university will be refunded the semester room charge as follows: First two weeks of semester 80% refund 70% refund Third week of s.emester 607" refund Fourth week of semester 50% refund Fifth week of semester Sixth week of semest",r NO REFUND A pro-rata board refund will be made for necessary withdrawal from the university. Board refunds may be considered for meals missed due to working, but will not be made for any university trips, such as choir, band, orchestra, athletics, and so forth. Student requests for withdrawals for medical reasons are considered on an individual basis by the Vice President for Finance and Operations. Such reques t s require documentation from a physician or the director of the Health Service. �oticeof withdrawal must be made in writin g to the registrar of Pacific Lut heran University, and receivt'd before the deadlint's given above. Oral requests are not c1cceptable.

Student Li The quality of life cultivated and fostered within the univerSity is an essential component of the academic community. The environment produced is conducive to a life of vigorous and creative scholarship. I t also recognizes that liberal education is for the total person and that a complementary relationship exists between students' intellectual development and the satisfaction of their other individual needs. Int eraction with persons of differing life styles, application of classroom knowledge to per­ sonal goals and aspirat ions, and co-curricular experiences are all valuable and vital components of education a t PLU. In a time when there is a need for meaningful community, the campus facilitates genuine relationships among members of the university from diverse religious, racial. and cultura l backgrounds. All of the services and facilities provid.ed are intended to complement the academic program. The services provided reflect ch" ngingstudent needs, and the opportunities for student participation include Virtually a l l aspects of the univerSity. Individual attention is given to students' concerns, including a variety of specific services outlined below.

CAMPUS MINISTRY Pacific Lu theran University by its very nature is a place for the interaction between studies and the Christian faith. Opportunities for the m u t u a l celebration of that faith on campus are rich and diverse. Chapel worship is held Monday, Wednesday, and Friday mornings during each semester for all who wish to participate. The University Congregation meets in regular worship and celebrates the Lord's Supper each Sunday. Pastoral services of the university pastors are available to all students who desire them. Several denominations and religious groups have organizations on campus, and there are numerous student -initiated Bible study and fellowship groups. The Campus Ministry Council, an elected student and faculty committee, coordinates these activities in a spirit of openness and mut ual respect.

RESPONSIBILITIES OF COMMUNITY LIFE Within any community certain regultions are necessary. Pacific Lutheran UniverSity adopts only those standards believed to be reasonably necessary and admits students with the expectation that they will comply with those standards. All members of the university community are expected to respect the rights and integrity of others. Conduct which is detrimental to students, faculty, sta ff, or the university, or which violates local, state, or federal laws, may be grounds for sanctions or for dismissal. The

un iversity prohibits the possession ar consumption ofalcoholic beverages on

campus and limits the hours when students may havevisilors of Ihc Dl'posile 50 in Iheir res idence hall rooms. The Student Handbook contains the Code of Conduct for all students.

ORIENTATION Students are introduced to university life during a three-day orientation before the beginning of the fall semester. In addition, shorter orientation sessions are held before the interim term in January and before the spring semester. New students are invited to participate in an optional pre-college workshop during the summer.

ACCESSIBILITY

The university complies with Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act and provides r,,"sonable accommodations to students with handicaps andlor disabilities. Coordination of services is handted b y the associate dean for student life. The Student Needs Advo­ cacy Panel provides an avenue for student concerns.

RESIDENTIAL LIFE Residential living i s a n integral part o f the educational process a t P L U . The university requires that a l l single full-time ( 1 2 o r more semester hours) students room and board on campus unless the student is living at home with parentIs) Or legal guardian(s), is 21 years of age or older during the current semester, or has senior status (90 semester hours), All exceptions to this policy must be requested from the Residential life Office_ As a residential campus, Pacific Lut heran University offers

students a valuable experience in community living. The univer­ sity recognizes the importance of non-classroom activities in providing an education. The aim uf residential living is to help students grow personally, socially, culturally, ,1 nd religiously. Campus residence halls are small. They are orgamzed into communities in which each individual counts as a person. New knowledge shared with friends in the residence halls takes on a very personal meaning. Men and women of many backgrounds and cult ures live on campus; therefore, students in residence have a unique opportunity to broaden their cultura l horizons. The university cares about the quality of life on campus. The attractive and comfortable residence halls enrich the quality of life and enhance the learning process. The university offers students high-quality housing opportunities including student leadership experiences, formal and informal programs, and peer associations. The student governing bod ies are strong and actively participate in campus life.


17 A selection of modern, attractive halls, each with its own

referral. Services available include outpatient health care, alcohol!

traditions and unique advantages, offer students the opportunity

drug counseling and referral, laboratory tests, contraceptioni

to establish a comfortable living pattern. All halls include informal

pregnancy counseling, and health education. All students may

lounges, study rooms, recreation areas, and common kitchen and

use the Health Service.

laundry facilities. Most of the halls are co-educational. Although they are housed in separate wings, men and women in co-ed halls share lounge and recreation facilities and common residence government, and participate jOintly in all hall activities. One all-men's hall and one all-women's hall are available for t h ose who desire this type of living experience. Furthe.r information regarding residence halls can be obtained from the Residential Life Office. In addition to housing for single st udents, the university maintains a limited number of apartments on campus for fa mily student housing. Two and three-bedroom units are available. Application for these apartments can be made through the Office of Residential Life.

ACTIVITIES PLU annually registers over

50

academic and non-academic

organizat ions, c1u bs, societies, and interest grou ps, which testifies to the diversity of campus co-curricular life. Social action, religious, and political organizations; interest and sporting clubs; and service, professional, and academic societies are among the options from which to choose. A complete listing of recognized clubs and their officers is maintained in the University Center. Student government is an integral part of student activities a t P L U . By v [ r t u e of enrollment at P L U students a r e part of the associated students. Senators from each residence hall and from off campus are elected to govern ASPLU in conjunction with elected executive officers. They oversee an extensive committee program that involves hundreds of students in planning programs and representing student opinion on various university boards

Health and Accident Insurance is available to students on a Accident and Sickness Medical Expense

voluntary basis. The Group

Plan provides coverage 24 hours a day,

12

months a year,

anywhere in the world. This plan is available at fall, i n terim, or spring registration only. A brochure outlining the program is available from the Business Office of t h e General Services Office. In ternational st udents are required to have t h i s insurance coverage.

The Counseling and Testing Center assists students to cope with developmental issues. Trained and experienced psycholo­

gists and cou nselors and a consulting psychiatrist offergroup and

individual counseling. A variety of interest inventories and psychological tests are available to assist students with career planning, educational adjustment, and personal problems. Food Service, owned and operated by Pacific Lutheran Univer­ sity, is available to all students, faculty, staff, and their guests. Students living on campus are required to take their meals in one of two cafeterias. No deductions are made for students eating fewer meals than previously contracted unless a conflict exists due to work. In case of a conflict, a student must contact the Food Service Office in the University Center to obtain approval for a deduction. Residential students are offered 3 meal options:

(1)

Breakfast,

Lunch, and Dinner 7 days a week; (2) Breakfast, Lunch, and Dinner, Monday through Friday; (3) Lunch and Dinner 7 days a week. Students living off-campus are encouraged to select one of the meal plans offered. Students may sign u p for either plan at the Food Service Office. S t u d e n t s w i t h special d i e t a ry req u ire m e n t s, specifica l l y

and committees.

approved i n writing by a physician, c a n in most cases be

ADULT STUDENT SERVICES

accommodated by contacting the Food Service Registered Dieti­ cians. This service is provided at no extra cost. The Food Service operates two coffee shops. One is located On

The Adult Resource Center provides assistance to students over 25. Information for accessibility to student support services such as personal and career counseling, orientation, special facilities, and health care programs can be obtained from the office. The Adult Student Resource Center is located on the lowerlevel of t h e University Center.

MINORITY STUDENT PROGRAMS Minority Student Programs coordinates services that seek to provide for the academic and social needs of minority students. Su pportive services include academic and personal counseling, admissions assistance, scholarship and financial aid assistance,

lower campus in Columbia Center, and the other is located in the University Center. A discounted meal card is available at the Business Office and the University Center Coffee Shop, and is designed to be used in either coffee shop. Only the coffee shop in Columbia Center is open during vacation periods. Visitors may eat in any of the facilities. Scheduling Services for meeting rooms are maintained in the ' University Center. All university activities must be scheduled through this office. Scheduling student activities is a joint responsi­ bility of the requesting grou p, scheduling coordinat or, and director

book fund, convocation programs, and pre-college progra ms.

of the University Center.

INTERNATIONAL STUDENT PROGRAMS

University for the benefit of students, faculty, and staff. The

PlU Book s t ore

is owned and operated by Pacific Lut heran

of foreign students. Support services include orientation to the

books tore sells textbooks and sup plies that are required Or suggested by faculty members for their courses. Additional

US. and PLU, the Host Family Program, a liaison with immigration

reading matter, supplies, gift items, gree ting cards, cloth ing, film

International Student Programs provides for the various needs

offices, counseling, and advising the International Student Organi­

processing, toilet ries, and other convenience

zation.

available.

PROGRAM FOR COMMUTING STUDENTS Over one-half of all PLU students commute to the campus. Every effort is made to aSSUre they enjoy the same university �xp('rie.nces as those in residence. First-year students ma k e a special effort to partiCipate in the orientation program. The student government (ASPLU) sponsors a committee to assist

items are also

Career Services provides a program of career development and life planning. Students are assisted in making choices among their life and work options, during their education and after graduation, through conferences with professional staff, works hops, seminars, classroom and residence hall presentations, and mat erials avail­ able in the Career Services Office, located in Ramstad Hall.

STUDENT EMPLOYMENT

those who do not reside On campus and welcomes students desiring to participate. Special facilities include mailboxes located in the University Center for all full-time commuters and a day

(including College Work-Study and off-campus Work-Study

lounge operation in the Cave for study and a place to bring or buy

jobs), and lists part-time and full-time employment opportunities,

lunch. Off-campus students are encou raged to participate in the

both on and off campus. The office also lists summer jobs, local and nation-wide. The office staff assists students and alumni in

varied and frequent activit ies available to all students.

ENVIRONS The university's geographical setting affords students a wide variety of both recreational and cultural entertainment options. Recreationally, the grandeur of the Pacific Northwest enCOur­ ages participation in hiking, camping, clim bing, sk iing, boating, and swimming.

Career Services coordinates all student part-time employment

developing job search techniques (also faculty and staff by special arrangement). The office coordinates an off-campus interviewing schedule of recruit ers from industry, business, government, and graduate schools.

GRIEVANCE PROC EDURES Policies and procedures at the univerSity are intended to

The most conspicuous natural monument in the area is M t .

maintain an orderly educational environment conducive to stu­

Rainier. In addition to Rainier, the distinctive realms o f t h e Cascade and Olympic mountain ranges and forests of Douglas F i r complete one of the most naturally tranquil environments i n the

dent learning and development. In order to fulfill institutional

United Sta tes. Students can also enjoy the aesthetic offerings of nearby Seattle

and Tacoma. These city centers host a variety of performing and

record ing arts and provide dozens of gaLleries and museums as well unique shopping and dining experiences.

STUDENT SERVICES

Health Services retains the fuU-time services of a physician's assistant, a registered nurse, a n urse practitioner, and a part-time health educator. A physician is available for consultation and

responsibility and at the same time follow procedures t h a t are fair, consistent, and protective of each person's rights, appropriate grievance procedures have been established. If a student has reason to believe that an academic or ildministrative action is unjust, capricious, or discriminatory, t h ese proced ures are avail­ able for the student to seek redress. In situations involving alleged grievances against faculty or academic administrators, the procedures of the "Academic Griev­ ance Procedure" shall be followed. The grievance officer to con tact is the director of the academic advising and assistance center or the associate dean for special academic programs.


18 In situations involving alleged grievances against administrative staff Or other non-faculty university employE'es, the procedures of

followed_ The grievance officer to contact is the associate dean for student life. Copies of each grievance procedure are available for review at

the "Student Administrative Grievance Procedure" shall be

the office of the respective grievance officers.

The university expects that ail students, at one time or another,

Since their academic needs and interests may shift or change

will need assistance in planning academic programs consistent

during four years of college, students are allowed to change

with their needs and goals. To help students make their initial

advisers as may be appropriate or necessary, using a simple

adjustment to the academic load at PLU and to provide occasional

adviser change form. Students and advisers are expected to meet

counsel throughout their academic careers, the university has

regularly, though the actual number of meetings will vary

established a network of faculty advisers and an Academic

according to individual needs. Minimally, three meetings are

Advising and Assistance Center.

required during the freshman year and one each year thereafter,

FACULTY ADVISERS

often as seems necessary or useful.

though all students are encouraged to meet with their advisers as

All students in degree programs have faculty advisers whose overall responsibility is to guide academic progress. In their work with individual students, advisers have the assistance of personnel in a number of student services offices: the Academic Advising and Assistance Center, the Career Services Office, Counseling and Health Services, the Minority Student Programs Office, the Campus Ministry, the international stude n t adviser, and residence hall directors and resident assistants.

General Advisers: At the time of entry, each student is assigned a general adviser on the basis of matching student and adviser interests. Students who wish to explore the general curriculum before deciding on an interest area are assigned to interest advisers.

During the first semest er, an advising file for each student is sent to the adviser, and a Gold

Boo t the student ' s official record of

academic progress, is issued to the student.

Major Advisers: Upon formal declaration of a major, students are assigned major advisers to replace their general advisers. Major advisers guide students' progress toward their chosen degree goals.

ACADEMIC ADVISING AND ASSISTANCE CENTER The Academic Advising and Assistance Center provides a number of academic resources for students: 1.

tutoring by trained upper-division skills counselors is available

2.

study skills are taught either on a one-to-one basis or in non­

3.

credit mini·courses; group help sessions in several subject areas are scheduled on a

for most lower-division courses;

daily or weekly basis each semester;

4. academic counseling by AAAC administrators and skill counselors assures responsive and personal assistance with academic problems. Students may also find up-to-date information on PLU policies, procedures, and programs in the AAAC. The office is open Monday through Thursday from 9:00 a.m. until

Structure COLLEGE OF ARTS

Division of Social Sciences

AND SCIENC E S

Anthropology

Division o f Humanities English Languages Philosophy Religion

Division of Natural Sciences Biology

Economics History Political Science Psychology Social Work and Marriage and Family Therapy Sociology

SCHOOL OF THE ARTS Art Communication Arts Music

Chemistry Earth Sciences Mathematics and Computer Science PhYSics and Engineering

10:00 p.m., Friday

from 9:00 a.m. until 5:00 p.m., and Sunday from 2:00 until 10:00 p.m.

SCHOOL OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION


19 SCHOOL OF EDUCATION SCHOOL OF NURSING SCHOOL OF PHY SICAL EDUCATION DIVISION OF GRADUATE STUDIE S DEGRE E S O F FERE D

BACH ELOR OF ARTS IN EDUCATION ( B.A.E . ) Concentrations in: Art Biology Business Education Chemistry Communication Arts Earth Sciences Economics English French General Science

Sociology German Spanish History Language Arts Special Education Mathematics Music Norwegian Physical Education PhYsics Political Science Social Sciences

Bachelor's Degrees

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS

Bachelor of Arts Bachelor of Science Bachelor of Business Administration Bachelor of Arts in Education Bachelor of Fine Arts Bachelor of Music Bachelor of Science in Nursing

A DMINISTRATION ( B.B.A. )

Master's Degrees Master o f Arts in Computer Applications Master of Arts in Education Master of Arts in Social Sciences Master of Business Administration Mastcr of Music Master o f Public Administration Master o f Science in Computer Science

MAJORS AVAILABLE BACHE LOR OF ARTS (B.A.) Anthropology Art Biology Chemistry Cla�sics Commuication Arts ( Broadcasting. Interpersonal Communication, Journalism, Theater) Computer Science Earth Sciences Economics English French German History Honors Legal Studies Mathematics Music Norwegian Philosophy Physical Education/Recreation (Administration, Programming, and Therapeutic Concentrations) PhYSics Political Science Psychology Religion Scandinavian Area Studies Social Work Sociology Spanish

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE (B.S.) Biology Chemistry Computer Engineering Computer Science Earth Sciences (Geology SpeCialty) Engineering Physics Engineering Science (3-2) Mathematics Physical Education (Exercise Science and Pre-Therapy Concentrations) Physics

Concentrations in: Accounting Finance Human Resource Ma nagement International Business Management Information Systems Marketing Operations Management

BACHELOR OF FINE ARTS ( B . F.A. ) Art Communication Arts ( Broadcasting, Theater)

BACHE LOR OF MUSIC ( B.M.) Piano Performance Organ Performance Vocal Performance Instrumental Performance Theory and Composition C h u rch Music

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN NURSING (B.S.N.) Nursing

COMPLEMENTARY MAJOR Global Studies

MINORS AVAILABLE Anthropology Art Biology Business Administration Chemistry Communication Arts Interpersonal Communication Theater Dance Computer Science Earth Sciences Economics Education Reading Learning Resource Specialist Special Education Electrical Engineering English Literature Publishing and Printing Arts Writing French German Global Studies Greek

History Information Science Latin Legal Studies Mathematics Norwegian Philosophy Physical Education Aquatics Coaching Dance Exercise Science Health PhYSics Political Science Psychology Public Affairs Religion Sociology Spanish Statistics


20

Academic Procedures REGISTRATION

The normal ('ourse load for full-time students is 13 to 17 hours per semester, including physical edu('ation. A normal student load during the interim is four hours with a maximum o f five hours. The minimum semester load for a full-time student is twelve hours. Only a student with a "B" (3.00) average or higher may register for more than 17 hours per semester without the consent of the provost. A student engaged in much outside work for self-support may be restricted to a reduced academic load. l � th e spring semester, students who plan to return i n the fall are encouraged to pre-register. Students must register for each new semester on the designated days and are not officia lly enrolled until t heir registration has been cleared by the Business Offi('e and their Place of Residence form has been processed.

COURSE NUMBE RINGS

100-200 Lower Division Courses: Open to freshmen and soph­ omores· un less ot henvise restrictl'd. 300-320 Interim Courses 321 -499 Upper Division Courses: Generally open to juniors and seniors unless otherwise specified. Also open to graduate students, and may be ('(lnsidered part of a graduate program provided they Me not specific requirements in preparation for graduate study. 500-599 Graduate Courses: Normally open to graduate stu­ dents only. Upper division students may be permitted to enroll with th., permission of the chair or dean of the academic unit offering the course if all prerequisites have been met and the student has an above-average academic record. 'Upon approval oi their adviser and course instructors, lower division students may be assigned to upper division courses if prerequisites have been met.

COURSE OF FERINGS

Most listed courses are offered every year. A system of alter­ nating upper divbion courses is practiced in some departments, t hereby ,l:-isuring it broader curriculum. The university reserves the right to modify specific course requirements, to discontinue classes in which the registration is regarded as insufficient, and to withdrJw courses.

EXPLANATION OF SYMBOLS

Most courses have the value of 4 semester hours. Parent hetical numbers immediately after the course descriptions indicate the semester hour cred it given. Other symbols are explained as iollows: -Course offered first semester I II -·-Course offered second semester I,ll -Course offered first and second semester in sequence I Ii -Course offered either semester S - Course offered in the summer •1 1 v -Course offered in alternate years a :� -Course offered in alternate s ummers C -Course may be used in graduate programs

EARL Y REGISTRATION PROGRAM FOR FRESHMEN Well in advance of arrival on campus for the first semester, all accepted freshmen are sent registration materials. Most students have the opportunity to work personally with an adviser as they plan their schedules. A limited nu mber of students register by mail. and their course selections are verified bv a counselor. ' Early registration for new freshmen oceu ; s during june or january, depl'nding on whether students begin in the fall or spring seme,tcr. Early registration is coordinat0d by the Office of Admis�ions.

COURSE SELECTIONS FOR FRESHMEN

Students should be thoroughly acquainted with all registration materials, induding the current catalog and special informa tion sent by the Admissions Office. It is important also to study the requirements o f all academic programs in which one may eventu­ ally declare a major. First semester freshmen are advised to plan a class schedule that does not exceed 16 credit hours. A normal first semester schedule will include t hree courses o f 4 credit hours each, plus one or two of the following: phy:; ical education activity course ( l credit hour), music ensemble (I credit hou r), or a choice from among several 2 credit hour courses. ( N OTE: UnleS' otherwise stated in the catalog or class schedu le, most courses are valued at 4 credit hours.) In order to insure appropriate academic progress, freshmen should plan to take an interim course in january and t o complete a total of 32-35 semester hours during their first year. The following will illustrate several first-yeor credit hour loads: (l) (2) (3) (4)

Fall

II/Ierim

Spri"x

13 14 15 15

4

15

TOTAL 32

5

14

33

4 5

15 15

J4 35

The number of credit hours taken may vary from year to year, usually within d range of 30 t0 34. However, in order to complete the 1 2R hours required for graduation within four years, an average of 32 credit hours a year is necessary. \ . PLU does 1/01

II ave parlieular cou rses �)hich arc req uired of all freshmell.

General university requirements, including a core curriculum (Core I or Core I l ), must be completed before graduation. The English writing requirement must be fulfilled before the senior year. 2. Siudellis arc respol/sible for scleclil/Ii Iheir courses. Counselors and faculty advisers are always available to assist with planning and to make suggestions. 3. S llIlimls who are sure of Iheir major shollld be carefll l to il/c/ude those

Some departments or schools have prereq uisite courses which must be taken before entering upon the major program itself.

cou rses which insure complctioTl of that mnjorwiti1in fOllr ytars.

4. S tudellis who nre IIndecided at"ul their major COIll'Se of study should take Ihe opporillnity to explore opliolls. A good way to begin is to take SOme cour:-;es that meet general university or core requirements while selecting severai llthers for exp loration of ;pecial interests.

CHANGES IN REGISTRATION

Students may add or drop " class with full refund during the first two weeks after a class has begun. Necessary forms dfe available at the Registrar's Office. Students may officially withdraw from a class after the first two weeks by obtaining the instructor's signature on the change form . The grade of W will appear on a student's grade report and transcript. Students may also completely withdraw for medical reasons, Written evidence from a physician must support a medical wit hdrawal. The grade of WM will appear on a student's grade report and transcript. An unofficial withdrawal from a course will be recorded as EW. No student may withdraw during final examination week. In courses that are completed before the normal ending datl' of a term, no student may withdraw .likr the fin., 1 examination has been administered.

CREDIT RESTRICTIONS

Credit is not allowed for a mathematics or a foreign language course listed as a prerequisite when taken after the higher-level course. For example, a student who has completed Spanish 201 cannot I.,ter receive credit for Spanish 102.


21 WITHDRA W AL FROM THE TERM

4. To exercise the pass-fail option, students must file their

Stud�nts wishing to withdraw from the term must obtain a

intention with the Registrar's Office no later than the last day of

withdrawal form from t h e Office of t h e Registrar. IT IS ALWAYS

the eighth week. I n courses that meet less than the full length of

LY. Students withdrawing for a specified period of time (for

the semest er, the pass-fail agreement must be filed by the mid-point of the course.

TO THE STUDENT'S ADVANTAGE TO WITHDRAW OFFICIAL­

example, one semester to one year) may obtain a leave of absence form. Students are entitled to honorable dismissal from the · uni versity if their record of conduct is satisfact ory and if all financial obligations have been satisfied.

THE GRADING SYSTEM Students are graded according to t h e following designations:

A+ · 4.00 grade A · 4.00 grade A- - 3.67 grade B+ - 3.33 grade B · 3.00 grade B- · 2.67 grade C+ · 2.33 grade C - 2_00 grade

C-

D+

-

D

-

0-

-

E

-

EXCLUSIVE PASS-FAIL COURSES

Departments or schools may offer courses in which only pass­

fail grades are given. These courses should pursue goals primarily

points per hour, credit given

concerned

points per hour, credit given

achievements, or the like. Decisions to offer exclusive pass-fail

points per hour, credit given

courses are reported to the provost and this fact is made known to

points per hour, credit given

with

appreciations,

value commitmt'nts, crea tive

students before they register for these courses.

points per hour, credit given

Exclusive pass-fail courses may not be used to meet major or

points per hour, credit given

university req u i rements u nless they have been approved as such

points per hour, credit given

by the facu lty. Taking exclusive pass-fail courses in no way affects the student's personal pass-fail option.

points per hour, credit given

1.67 grade points per hour, credit given

1 .33 grade points per hour, credit given per hour, credit given 0.67 grade point per hour, cred it given 0.00 grade' points per hour, no credit given

1 .00 grade point

The grades listed below are not used in calculating grade point averages. No grade points are earned under th('se designations.

CLASS ATTENDANCE The univerSity assumes that all registered students have freel y accepted personal responsibility for regular class attendance. Course grades renect the quality of students' academic per­ formance as a whole, which normally includes regular participa­ tion i n the total class ex perience and is evaluated accordingly. Absences may lead t o a reduction o f a student's final grade. I n the

H

-credit given (honors); used only for courses unique to

event of unavoidable absence, students are encouraged as a

P

interim -credit given (Passing)

the instructor. Assignment of make-up work, if any, is at the

F

-no credit given (Failure)'

discretion of the instructor.

I

- n o cred it given ( Incomplete)

IP

-no credit given (In Progress; applicable only to certain

AU

courses whose work extends beyond a regular term) . -no credit given (Audit)

W

-no credit given (Withdrawal)

WM --no cred it given (Withdrawal/Medical)

5. I n the pass-fail option, only grades of A+ t h rough C- will be regarded as "pass"; grades of 0+ through E will be regarded as "fail." Pass-fail grades do not affect t he grade point a verage.

A failure in a 300-320 interim course is not recorded on t h e transcript n o r i s the registration recorded. Incomplete ( I ) grades indicate that students have been unable

to complete their work because of circumsta nces beyond their

matter of courtesy, as well as in their own best in terest, to inform

ACADEMIC HONESTY Both the v a l ue and the success of any academic activity, as well as of the entire academic enterprise, have depended for centuries on the fundamental principle of absolute honesty. The u n iversity, therefore, expects all its faculty and students to honor this principle scrupulously . Since academic dishonesty is a serious breach of the universally recognized code of academic et hics, it is every faculty member's obligation to impose appropriate sanctions for any demonstrable

control. To receive credit an Incomplete must be converted to a

instance of such misconduct on the part of a student.

passing grade WITI-UN THE FIRST SIX WEEKS OF THE FOLLOW­

ACADEMIC PROBA nON

INC SEMESTER. Incomplete grades which are not converted by removal are changed t o the grade indicated by the instructor when the Incomplete is submitted. Medical Withdrawal (WM) is given when a course is not completed due to medical cause. The WM does not affect the grade point average. In Progress (lP) signifies progress in a course which normally runs more than one semester to completion. I n Progress carries no credit until replaced by a permanent grade. Any course may be repeated by an u ndergrad uate student. The higher of the two grades earned is used i n computing the cumulative grade point average, but credit toward graduation is allowed only once. Registrar' 5 notations: N G - No grade submitted by instructor EW - Unofficial withdrawal. recorded by the registrar (equiva­ lent to an E in calculation of the grade point average)

INTERIM GRADING SYSTEM The instructor of a 300-320 interim course will indicate in the catalog description which of two grading systems will be used: 1. Honors ( H ) - for exceptional work; Pass (P); Fail. no credit-the registration will not be recorded. (H and P do not affect t h e grade p o i n t average.)

2.

The regular letter grades: A.B,C,D,E. (Such grades contribute to the grade point a v erage.) Students in a "regular lett er-grade" course may use one of their two pass-fail options.

PASS- FAIL OPTION FOR UNDERGRADUATE STUDENTS The pass-fail option permits students to explore su bject areas outside their k nown abilities and to add a broader range of courses without being f\lrced to compete with majors who are specializing in those areas of study_ 1 . The pass-faj[ option is limited to 8 credit hours. 2. Not more than one course (4 credit hours) may be taken pass­ fail in fulfillment of general university or core requirements, or of the foreign language requirement of t h e College of Arts and Sciences. 3. The pass-fail ophon may not be applied to a course taken in fulfillment of a student's major or minor program, except for a first course in t he major or minor field that is taken before the student's declaration of a major or minor program.

Most students make normal academic progress; however, some may from time to time be notified that they must improve their grades. The following terms are used at PLU to describe such students. Advisers make regular contact with academically mar­ ginal students, and monitor their progress closely. Admission with Probatioll. Each year PLU admits a few students on

probation. These students, who do not meet all or part of admission requiremen ts, are screened carefully and notified of their special status. These students must limit first semester loads to 14 credit hou rs, including study skills, and are assigned to probationary advisers. Mid-tenn Warnings. Warning grade reports are sent to any

students who are doing

"0"

or "E" work at mid-semester.

Advisers are sent copies of the grade reports and contact adv isees who receive them. No transcript notation is made of this action. Academic Warning Students whose last semester grade point

av erage is below 2.0, but whose cumulative grade point average is above 2.0, are sent notice of academic warning. No transcript notation is made. Academic Probation. Students, including first-term freshman s t u ­

dents, a r e placed on academic probation with transcript notation if their cumulative grade point average falls below

2.0 or

if they

receive two successive semester grade point a verages below 2.0. Such students are required to meet with the director of advising in the first ten days of their probationary semester to draw u p an agreement specifying actions they will take to improve their academic performance. Compliance with that agreement is moni­ tored by the student's assigned adviser or a n appointed proba­ tionary adv iser. Failure to draw up the agreement Or to comply with its terms may resu l t i n denial of continued probation or dismissal from the uni versity. I n the case of first -term freshman students with no previous college-level credits, the probation notation will be removed from the transcript if the subsequent semester's cumulative grade point average is above 2.0. Continued Probation. Probationary students whose probationary

semester grade point a verage is above 2.0, but whose cumulative grade point average remains below

2.0,

may be granted an

additional semester of probation at the discretion of t h e Com­ mittee on Admission and Retention of Students. Academic Dismissal. The enrollment of a probationary student

who fails to earn a cumulative grade point average of2.0 at the end


22 of a probationary semeste.r is terminated. A terminat ed studi!nt may apply for reinst�tement by securing a faculty sponsor and s u bmitting a letter o f petition to the registrar. The petition and' letter of sponsorship are acted upon by the F" culty Committee on Admission and Ret ntion of Students. A student who petition for reinstatement has been d e ni ed mtly apply for readmission after one sem�ster has elapsed unless informed otherwise. Second Academic Dismissal. The enrollment of a student who fails to earn a cumulative grade point average 0£ 2.0 aft e r reinstatement with a faculty sponsor is terminated. A student dismissed for t he second time may not be reinstated for at least one semester, and only if new evidence is presented that the student will probably succeed.

ELIGmlLlTY FOR STUDENT ACTIVITIES Any regularly enroiled, full-time st udent (twelve hours) is eligible for participation in university activities. Limitations on a student's activities based upon academic performance may be set by individual schools, departments, or organiz ations. A student on acad.ernie probation is n t el igible for interschol<1stic competi­ tion and may Iso b" ad vised to curtail part icipat ion in extra ­ curricular activities.

CLASSIFICATION OF STUDENTS Freshmen: students who have met entrance requirements. Sophomores: students who have satisfactorily completed 30 hours. Juniors: regular students who have fulfilled lower division requirements nd have satisfactorily completed 60 hours. Seniors: regular students who have satisfactorily completed 90 hours. Graduates: students who have met entrance requirements and have been accepted into the Division of Graduate St ud ies. on- Degree Undergraduates: undergraduate st udents who are attending part-time but are not officia l ly admitted to a degree program. Non-Degree Graduates: graduate student who are attending part-time but are not officially admitted to a degree program.

HONORS Honors at entrance: These honors are conferred a t Opening Convocation on the most highly qualified entering freshmen. Certificates are mailed i n early May to h igh schools for presenta­ tion to recipients. The granting of Honors at Entrance recognizes outstanding high school schievement and anticipates superior performance a t the universit y level. These awards have no monetary value. Cmduation Honors: De grees with honors of ('1/111 lal<de, magna cum laude, and s u mm a (fWI laude are granted. A student must earn an average o f :l.40 for cum laude, 3.70 for magn" cum laude, and 3.90 for s u mma cLlm laude. Phvsical education activiti s are not included in the determining of h onors. HOllor Societies: Election to the Arete Society is a special recogni­ tion o f a student's commitment to the liberal arts together with a record of high achievement in relevant course work. This aeJdemic honors society was organized in 1 969 b y Phi Beta Kappa members of the faculty. The soc. iety's fundamental purpose is to encourage and recognize excellent scholarship in the liberal arts. Elections for the society take place each spring. Both juniors and seniors are eligible (or election, although the quali.ncations for election as a junior are more stringent. The faculty fellows of the society conduct the election after careful review of academic transcripts accord ing to the following criteria. Students must: • attain a high grade point average ( for seniors, normally above 3.70; for jun iors, normally above 3.90); • complete 1 1 0 c red it hours in liberal s tudies; • demon s t rate the equivalent of two year5 of college work in foreign language; and • complete one year of college mathematics (including statistics or computer science) or have taken an equivalent amount of high school math and college science. To be eligible for election, students must have completed a minimum of three semesters in residence at the university. The university has chapters of a number o f national honor societies on campus, includi ng the following: Alpha Psi Omega ( Drama) Beta Gamma Sigma (Business Administration) Mu Phi Epsilon (Music) Pi Kappa Delta (Forensics ) Omicron Delta Epsilon (Economics) Undergraduafe Fellowships: A limited number o f Undergraduate Fellowships are awarded annually to outstanding senior students with a view to encouraging recipien ts to consider college teaching as a career. An undergraduate fellow is given a variety of opport unities to sample the professional life and work of a faculty member in his or her major d iscipline. A tuition credit accompanies the a ppointmen t. Individlwlized M.ajo r for Special Honors: Supervised by a faculty committee, this program offers junior and senior students (with a grade point average of 3.30 or above) the opportunity to develop and complete a personally-designed, interdiSCiplinary, liberal arts

major. Approval of a faculty sponsor and the Faculty Honors Council are requi red . The plan of study must include a clear topical rationale, an integrating final project, and significant work b ey o nd regular courses, e.g., comprehensive examinations, inde­ pendent study projects, interdisc i plina ry senior t hesis. Successful completion of an approved study plan warrants the B.A. degree with Special Honors.

CREDIT BY E XAMINATION Students are permitted, within limits, t o obtain credit by examination in lieu o f regular enrollment and class attendance. No more than 30 semester hours may be counted toward graduation, whether from the College Level Examination Program or any other examination. Exceptions to this rule for certain groups of students or programs may be made, subject to recommendation by the Educational Policies Co m m ittee and approval by the faculty. Credit by examination is open to formally admitted, regular status students only and does not count toward the residency requirement for graduation. Arrangement for departmental credit examinations must be made by students with respective depa rtmental chairs or deans. Evidence of approval and of payment of the fee should be presented by a student to the instructor who administers t he exa minat ion . CLEP general examinations are given elective credit only. The various sch ools, divisio ns, and depart ments determine the sp ecific CLEP subject examinations which may fulfill requirements for majors, programs, or general university requirements in their respective academic areas. These examinations are subject to recommendations by the Educational Policies Committee and approval by the faculty. The minimum passing level for CLEP examinations taken at Pacific Lutheran University is the fiftieth percentile. CLEP credits granted b y other universities, colleges, and community colleges, which are earned before entrance, are honored by Pacific Lutheran University. The application of those credits toward majors, programs, and general university require­ ments is consistent with schooL divisional. and department policies and standards. The university does not grant credit for college level GED tests.

IN FORMAL STUDY To encourage liberal learning of all k inds, over and beyond enrollment in courses leading toward formal degrees, the univer­ sity offers a variety of opportunities for i nformal study: Cuesf of University Status: Teachers and officials of other institu­ tions, visiting scholars and artists, and other professional persons who wish to use university facilities for independent study may apply to the provost for cards designat i ng them as Guests of the University. Such persons, in their use of fac il ities, will defer to the needs o f students and faculty members. Auditing Courses: To audit a course is to enroll, with the permission of the instructor, on a non · cred it basis. An aud itor is encouraged to participate fully in class activities but is not held accountable for examinations or other written work and does not receive a grade. I f the instructor a pproves, the course may be entered upon the trans c ript as "Aud it ." With the approval o f the instructor or the depart ment, the student may gain credit for an audited cou rse by passing an examination set by the instructor or t he department. Visitillg Classes: Members of the academic co m munit y are encouraged to visit c lasses which interest them. No fee is charged for the privilege. Because regularly enrolled students must be given first consideration, persons desiring to visit classes are required to ask permission of the instructor. Visitors are guests of the classes and must conduct themselves accordingly.

JUNIOR REVIEW

All students who have accumulated 70 semester hours toward graduation must complete a j un ior review before they may register for a subsequent term. The re v iew includes progress reports on generai llniversity, major, and minor requirements, and a plan for the completion of any remai ni ng requirements. Forms are available at school or departmen t offices.

GRADUATION

Students expecting t o fulfill degree requirem e nts WITHIN THE ACADEMIC YEAR ( includ ing August) are required to file applica­ tion for graduation with the Office of the Registrar by October 1 . There are four degree · completion dates (end o f fall semester, i n terim, spring semester, and second summer session). Degrees are formally conferred at December, May, and August commence­ ments. Students with interim deg ree dates are expected to take part i n the December commencement. The actual date of gradua ­ tion will be recorded on the permanent records. Students who plan to transfer back to Pacific Lutheran Univer­ s i ty for a degree (math, ph Y S i CS, engineering programs) must apply for graduation before or d uri ng the nrst semester o f their junior year so that deficiencies may be met before they leave campus.


23

J Attendance at commencement exercises is expected unless the candidate is excused by the provost.

SECOND BACCALAUREATE DEGREE

A student may be awarded two differellt bachelor's degrees simult aneously, provided that at least 28 additiollal hours are earned for the second degree, A total of 156 acceptable hours are required for two simultaneous baccalaureate degrees.

GENERAL UNIVERSITY REQUIREMENTS

LIMITATIONS-ALL BACCALAUREATE DEGREES 1 . Not more than 40 hours earned in one department may be applied to the BA o r B.s. degree. Interim courses are excepted, 2. Non-music majors may count toward graduation requirements not more than 8 semester hours in music ensembles. 3. A maximum of 24 hours in accredited correspondence or extension studies may be credited toward degree requirements, contingent on approval by the registrar. 4, A maximum of 64 hours will be accepted by transfer from an accredited community college, 5. No more than eight I -hour physical education activity courses may be counted toward gradua tion.

FOREIGN LANGUAGE REQUIREMENT

The university is committed, in principle as well as historically, to providing a strong liberal arts base for a l l its baccalaureate degree programs. Accordingly, in addition to fulfilling certain specified requirements, all undergradute students must satis足 factorily complete a core curriculum,

All candidates for BA or B.s, degrees must complete one of three options involving a foreign language or specified alternative. See under College of Arts and Sciences,

SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS 1 . WRITING (4 hours): English 101 or an equivalent prose writing course. Students should fulfill this requi.rement early, preferably in their first or second semester. 2. PHYSICAL EDUCATION (4 hours): Four I -hour activity courses, including PE 100. One hour of credit may be earned t h rough approved sports participation. All activities are graded on the basis of A, Pass, or Fail. 3. INTERIM ( 8 hours): Only courses numbered 300-320 satisfy this requirement. Junior and senior transfer students need to complete only 4 hours from 300-320 interim courses. 4. The completion of a minimum of 128 semester hours with a grade point average of 2.00 (2.50 in the Schools of Business Administration and Education), 5. The completion of a minimum of 40 semester hours from' courses num bered 321 or above. At least 20 of the minimum 40 semester hours of upper d ivision work must be taken at PLU. 6. The final 32 semester hours of a student's program must be completed in residence at PLU, (Special programs such as 3-1, 3-2, and interim exchange study are excluded from this limitation.) 7. The completion of a major as detailed by each school or department. At least 8 semester hours must be taken in residence. R. The completion of all Courses counted toward a major or a minor with grades of C- or higher and with a cumulative grade point average of 2.0 or higher in those COurses. Departments, divisions, or schools may set higher grade requirements.

Pacific Lutheran University is a community of scholars, a community of readers and writers. Reading informs the intellect and liberates the imagination. Writing pervades our academic lives as teachers and students, both as a way of communicating what we learn and as a means of shaping thought and ideas, Ouremphasis on literacy begins with COurSes designed to fulfill the university writing requirement, courses in which students learn to use various kinds of academic and personal writing. to read different kinds of texts more effectively, and to organize the powers of clear thought and expressio.n. The university' 5 commitment to excellent writing is reflected in The Writing Center, where trained student consultants from a variety of disciplines help students of varying abilities by reading and responding to papers still in draft, All faculty members share the responsibility for improving the literacy of their students, Faculty in every department and school make writing an essen tial part of their COurses and show students how to ask questions appropriate to the kinds of reading done in their fields. Students write both formal papers and reports and informal notes and essays in order to master the content and methods of the various disciplines. They are encouraged to prepare important papers in multiple d rafts. Because errors are a distraction and a symptom of carelessness in all disciplines, students in all courses are expected to observe the conventions of formal English in their finished work. But literacy is more than correctness. At Pacific Lutheran University reading and writing are part of the process of liberal education.

INTERDISCIPLINARY READING AND WRITING AT PLU


24 CORE CURRICULUM: ALTERNATIVES CORE I ( DI STRIBUTIVE CORE) ARTS/LITERATURE (8 hoursl-4 hours from each li n e: I. A rl, M usic, o r C o mm un ic a l ion Arts- A n y combination of four semesler hours from Arl, Music, or Communicalion Arts, with the fo ll o wi n g exceptions: il . O nl y theater/drama credils may be used from Ihe Depa rl­ menl of Communication Arts: 1 5 1 , 160, 162, 241, 250, 358, 359, 363, 364, 45R. b. Teaching methods courses may nOI be used. 2. Lilerature-Any lileralure course from English or Languages. ( E ng l i sh courses in wriling, language, and pub l is h i n g do nOI fulfill this requiremenl . )

CORE II ( INTEGRATED STUDIES PROGRAM) A coherenl program of interdisciplinary courses Ihat exp lores a central theme-THE DYNAMICS OF CHANGE. I. SEQUENCE 1-TH E IDEA OF P ROG R E SS (2 co urs es, 8 hours; normally taken in Ihe freshmen y ear) . IS I I I Nature and S u pern a l u re IS 1 1 2 From Finite to Infinite 2. TWO OP THREE 2oo-LEVEL SEQUENCES ( 2 c o urses each, 4 tot a l; 16 hours) SEQUENCE U - HUMAN RESPONSI B I LITY (Courses in t h e

NATURA L SCIENCES/MATHEMATICS (8 h o urs ) - 4 hours from each of Iwo lines: I . Chemislry, Physics, Engineering, and Nat u ra l Sc ienc es. 2. Biology, Earl h Sciences, and Nalural Sciences . 3. Malhemalics ( ex ce pl 91 and 99) and Co m p u t e r Sc ience. PHILOSOPHY (4 hours)-Any Philosophy course excepl 1 00, 1 2 1 , an d 23) (However, 226, 323, 325, 326, a n d 328 count loward fulfillmenl of Ihis requirement only when paired with 225; 34 1 , 342, and .143 count onl,' when laken in addilion to 225 Or 233.) RELIGIOUS STUDIES ( R hours}-4 hours from eilch of Iwo lines: I. Biblical Studies-Any of Ihe following: I l l , 2 1 1 , 2 1 2, 330, 331, .1 32. 333. 2. C h r is t i a n Thought, Hislory, and E x pe rience - Any of Ihe fol­ lowing: 1 2 1 , 221, 222, 223, 224, 225, 226, 360, 36 1 , 362, 363, 364, 365, 366. 367. 3. I n t eg ra l iv e a n d Compa ra liv e Religious S i ud ie s - An y of Ihe following: 1 31, 231, 390, 391, 392, .193. ( Ad d i t io nal courses Ihat relale re ligio n 10 olher 10pics or disc ipl i n es and are a ppro v ed to meel Ihis req u i rem en t will be listed in t he lim", schedule.) Ju n ior and senior Iransfer studenls n eed to complele only 4 hours (one course from lines 1 or 2). SOCIAL SCIENCES (R h o u rs ) - 4 hours from each line: l. A n lh ro po l og y , Hislory, and Political Sc ie nc e . 2. E co n omi cs , P sy c h olo gy (except 1 1 0 ond I l l ), Social Work, ilnd Sociology. TOTAL: 36 hours,

9 COurses.

3.

220s) IS 221 The Experi en c e of War IS 222 Prospects for War and Peace IS 223 The Emergence of Mind a n d Mo ralit y IS 224 The Brain, Consciousness, and Transcendence SEQUENCE III -WORD AND WORLD (Courses in the 230s1 IS 233 I m agi n g Ihe Self IS 234 I ma gi n g Ihe World SEQUENCE IV-TECHN OLOGY AND THE E NVIRO NM ENT (Courses in the 240s) IS 241 Ene rg y, Resources, and Pollu l io n IS 242 Population, Hunger, and Poverly I S 243 Tec h nol og y .l nd Computers IS 244 Computers and Models I S 245 The Developmenl of T h i rd World Underdevelopmenl IS 246 Cases in Third World Development CONCLUDING SEMINAR IS 351 ( J course, 4 hours)

TOTAL: 2R hours, 7 courses For course descriptions and further delails, see the I n t egra ted Si udies Progr,lm seclion of this calalog. A b roc hure is available from the Office of Admissions, the Office of the Regislrar, or the program coo rd i na t o r in the Spec ia l Academic P rogra ms Office. Core I requirements may be met by certain Core II cou rses: Arls/Literature 1. IS 233-234 10g.. l h cr 2. IS 1 1 2, 233-234 logether Natural Sciences/Mathematics 1. or 3. [S 233-234 t oge lh e r 1 . IS 241 -242 togelher 2. 15 223 3. lS 243-244 togelher Philosophy IS 1 1 1, 223, 224, 221 -222 togelher Religious S tud i es 2 or 3. 15 1 1 1, 221 -222 together, 241 -242 together 3. IS 233-234 logelher Social Sciences 1. IS 1 1 2, 22 1 -222 t ogether, 241 -242 together, 243-244 together 2. I S 224, 241 -242 logether See course d esc ri pt i on s for i n form a t i on about which Core I requirements a gi v en Core II course may fulfill.

Anthropology A nthropology as a discipline tries to bring all of the world's people into human focus. Though anthropology does look at "stones and bones," it also examines the polit.ics, medicine, k inship, arts, and religion of peoples and cultures in various places and times. This makes the study of anthro­ pology a complex task, for it requires an under­ standing of many disciplines, from geology and biology to art and psychology. Regardless of the specific area that is studied, the essence of anthropology is the observation of different peoples and c ultures-studying them as they really are instead of how people think they

are or should be. It is through this detailed study of all people that we gain the full picture of what it really means to be human.

A nthropology is composed of four fields. Cultural or social anthropology studies living human cultures in order to create a cross-cultural u nderstanding of human behavior. Archaeology has the same goal, but uses data from the physi­ cal remains of the past cultures to reach it. Linguistic anthropology studies h uman language to discover what it can tell about the human past and behaviors in the present. Physical anthro­ pology studies the emergence and subsequent biological adaptations of humanity as a species.


25 FACULTY Klein, Chair;

Guldin, Rasson_

BACHELOR OF ARTS MAJOR: 34 semester hours, including 1 01, 1 02, 1 03, 480, 490, and one COurse from those numbered 330 to 345, one course from those nu mbered 350 to 395, and 8 additional hours. MINOR: 18 semester hou rs, including 1 02, 101 or 103, 490, one course from those nu mbered 330 to 345, and one course from those n u mbered 350 to 480.

CO URSE OFFERINGS 101

EXPLORING ANTHROPOLOGY: MONKEYS, APES, AND HUMANS

Introduction to physical anthropology with a special focus on human evolu tion, the fossil evidence for human development, the role of cult ure in human evolution, and a comparison with the development and social life of the non-human primates. (4)

102

EXPLORING ANTHROPOLOGY: CULTURE AND SOCIETY

Introduction to social-cultural anthropology and cult ural linguis­ tics, concentrating on the exploration of the infinite variety of human endeavor in all aspects of culture and all types of societies; from tool-m,'king to language, religion, polit ics, law, warfare, fam ily kinship and art; from hunters and gatherers to industrialists. (4)

103

EXPLORING ANTHROPOLOGY: ARCHAEOLOGY AND PREHlSTORY

Introd uction to the ideas and practice of archaeology, used to examine the sweep of human prehistory from the earliest stone tools to the development of agriculture and metallurgy and to enrich Our understanding of extinct societies. Local archaeological sites will be examined. (4)

210

GLOBAL PERSPECTIVES: THE WORLD IN CHANGE

A survey of global issues affecting the human condition in a rapid ly changing and increasingly in terdependent world: modern­ ization and development; economic change and international trade; diminishing resources; war and revolution; peace and justice; and cultural diverSity. These issues are examined in a multidisiplinary light using case studies drawn from non-Western and Western nations. Emphasis on the development of a global perspective which recognizes human commonalities as well as diversity in perceptions, values, and priorities. (Cross-referenced with HIST 210 and POLS 210) (4)

220

PEOPLE OF THE WORLD

An exploration of the world's cultures through anthropological films, novels, and eye-witness accounts. Case studies chosen from Africa, Native America, Asia, the Pacific, and Euro-Americ.a provide an insider's view of ways of life d ifferent from our own. (2)

230

PEOPLES OF THE NORTHWEST COAST

A survey of the ways of life of the native peoples of coastal Washington, British Colu mbia, and Southeastern Alaska trom European contact to contemporary times. Of special interest are the traditional methods of fishing, arts, potlatc hes, status systems, and wealth and their impact on the modern life of the region_ (2)

240

PEOPLES OF EUROPE

A su rvey of contemporary social l i fe and customs in Eu rope, from City-dwellers to peasants, examining the broad historical, political, ethnic, economic, and religious patterns that tie European cult mes together. (2)

270

JEWISH CULTURES

A survey of Jewish cultures of the past and present in a variety of settings including Poland, Morocco, and China, as well as Tacoma and New York. Jewish ethnicity and indentity related to questions of assimilation, Jew/Gentile relations, and nationalism with a focus on the Jewish com m u n ities of Eastern Europe, the U .s.A., and Israel. Emphasis on religion, history, literature, music, dnd humor as reflec t ions of basic Jewish cultural themes. Films and guest speakers complement class lectures and discussion. (2)

330

CULTURES AND PEOPLES OF NATIVE NORTH AMERICA

A comparative study of Native North American cult ures from their arrival on the continent through today. Stress on traditional societies, their history under colonization and their emergence as vital contemporary societies. Examination of U.s. and Canadian

laws, policies, and conflicts, including land and fishing claims, issues of sovereignty, and religious rights. (4)

332

PREHISTORY OF NORTH AMERICA

An archaeological reconstruction of economic, social, political, and religious life in North America from the time the first settlers entered the continent during the Ice Ages to the Mound Builders of later times and ultimately to the first contact with E u ropean settlers. (4)

334

THE ANTHROPOLOGY OF CONTEMPORARY AMERICA

An investigation of American social patterns and problems designed to give insights trom a cross-cultural perspec tive; exploration of American solutions of common human problems; education, religion, politics, family and concepts of justice; a determination of what is unique about the "American Way." (4)

340

CULTURES AND PEOPLES OF ASIA

Survey of South, Southeast and East Asia with an emphasis on the cultural patterns (social, religious, kinship, political, and economic) of the region; concentration on the civilization centers ofIndia and China and their effect on su rrounding peoples; the role of Asian peoples in a contemporary setting. (4)

345

CHINESE CULTURE AND SOCIETY

An i mmersion into the Chinese world-view, culture and society­ geared to exposing the student to the w a y o f life for one-quarter of humanity; Chinese culture, both traditional and contemporary, including folk religion, family life, human relations, politics, social structure; Confucianism and Communism; the People's Republic, Hong Kong, Taiwan, and the Overseas Chinese. (4)

350

WOMEN AND M E N IN WORLD CULTURES

An overview of the variation of sex roles and behaviors throughout the world; evolution of sex roles; theoriesof mat riarchy, patriarchy, mother goddesses, innate inequalities; impact of European pat­ terns in the world; marriage patterns from polygyny to polyandry; egalitarianism to feminism. (4)

355

TECHNOLOGY IN CULTURE

A study of the use and meaning of technology, crafts, and artifacts in the world's cultures. Investigation of technology in the context of culture, including the symbolic and artistic world of traditional technologies. Exploration of how cult ures create the worlds they inhabit and change their social and natural worlds through time. Students will be encouraged to work with a specific technique or technological aspect of a culture. (4)

360

ETHNIC GROUPS

An examination of the nature of ethnic groups in America and abroad; the varying bases of ethnicity (culture, religion, tribe, "race," etc.); problems of group identity and boundary main � tenance; ethnic symbols; ethnic politics; ethnic neighborhoods; and ethnic humor. (4-)

365

ARTIFACTS AND ARCHAEOLOGY

Laboratory interpretation of archaeological materials. Techniques used in interpreting past human technology and ecology. Replica­ tion of the steps of manufacture, use, and discard of tools; analytical procedu res for ceramic, bone, stone, and melal artifacts; analysis of debris from food processing activit ies; the use of computers to analyze cultural data. (4)

370

THE FIRST CIVILIZATIONS

The origins of agriculture, writing, cities, and the state in many parts of the world, comparing and contrasting the great civiliza­ t ions of antiquity, including Mesopotamia, Egypt, India, Asia, Mesoamerica, and South America. (4)

375

LAW, POLITICS, AND REVOLUTION

A study of politics and law through the political structures and processes of traditional and contemporary societies; concepts of leadership, factionalism and feuds, power, a u thority, revolution, and other reactions to colonization; law and conflict resolut ion; conflicts of national and local level legal systems. Examples from around the world; Burma, Pakistan, the Pacific, Africa, Latin America, and Native America. (4)

380

SICKNESS, MADNESS, AND HE ALTH

A cross-cultural examination of systems of curing practices and cultural views of physical and mental illness and health; preven­ t ion and healing; the role of religious views; nature and skills of cu rers; definitions of dis ease; variation in diseases between classes and ethnic groups; impact of modern medical and psychological practitioners. (4)


26 392

GODS, MAGIC, AND MORALS

The a n t h ropology o f religion; a survey o f humanity's concepts of

and relationships to the supernatural; examination of the varying

personal and group functions that religions fulfill; exploration of rituals,

tive"

belief.;,

and systems o f morality in religions both "primi­

and historical; origins of religion; science "versus" religion;

the nature of reality. (Cross-referenced with REL 3'12) (4)

465

ARCHAEOLOGY: THE FIELD EXPERIENCE

archaeological site, with emphasis on basic excavation skills and

[('cord keeping, field mapping. drafting, and photography. The laboratory covers art iiact processing and preliminary analysis.

480

or consent of instructor.

(4)

ANTHROPOLOGICAL INQUIRY

An hist oric and thermatic study o f the theoretical foundations of

sociocultural

anthropology; research met hods; how theory and

methods are used

to

establish anthropological k nowledge_ Re­

quired oi majors in their junior or senior year. a/y (4)

490

INDEPENDENT STUDY: UNDERGRADU ATE REAOINGS

Reading in specific areas or issues of anthropology under super­

vision of a faculty member. Prerequisite: departmental consent.

( 1 -4)

492

INDEPENDENT STUDY: UNDE RGRADUATE FIELDWORK

Study of specific areas or issues in ant hropology through in- field

A field class involving the excavation of a historic or prehistoric

f'rcrcquisitt,: !Ol, 102, o r 103,

491

SEMINAR IN ANTHROPOLOGY

Selected topic in contemporary anthropology to be investigated

t h rough student research and consultation. Requ ired of majors

and minors i n their junior or senior year. Prerequisite for other students: departmental consent. a/y (2)

methods of analysis and research supported by appropriate

reading under supervision of a faculty member. PrerequiSite: and departmental consent. ( 1 -4)

501

4'10

GRADUATE WORKSHOPS

Graduate workshops in special fields or areas for varying periods

of time, 0 -4)

590

GRADUATE SEMINAR

Selected topics as announced_ Prerequisite: consent of the instruc­

tor,

( 1 -4)

591

DIRECTED STUDY (1-4)

595

GRADUATE READINGS

598

RESEARCH PROJECT (4)

599

THESIS (4)

Independent study card required. (4)

Art In this time of rapidly changing concepts and an almost daily emergence of new media, emphasis must be placed on a variety of experiences and creative flexibility for the artist and the designer. Students with professional concerns must be prepared to meet the modern world with both technical skills and t he capacity for innovation , The department's program therefore stresses individualized development in the dexterous use of mind and hand, A highly professional faculty, well-equipped studios, and a comprehensive curriculum offer variegated opportunities for study in the visual arts, S tudents may choose among a generalized pro­ gram leading to a Bachelor of Arts degree; a more specialized program for the Bachelor of Fine Arts, in which each candidate develops some area of competence; or a degree program in art education for teaching on several levels, Recent graduates may be found in a variety of fields, Several have become established as painters, printmakers, or sculptors; some are successful studio potters; others have gone into commercial photography or film animation-even the production of feature films, The television industry employs still others. A number are working in the design field as graphic designers, illustrators, package designers, or art directors in firms around the country, in New York, Chicago, Los Angeles, and Seattle, Alumni have been involved in museum work and in serving on the faculties of various educational institutions, from elementary through high schools as well as community colleges and universities, S ome students go directly from the university into their field of interest. Others find it desirable and appropriate to attend a graduate school and

have been accepted into prestigious graduate programs, both in this country and abroad, T he various fields of art are competitive and demanding in terms of commitment and effort. Nonetheless, there is always a place for those who are extremely skillful or highly imaginative or, ideally, both, The department's program stresses both, attempting to help eac h student reach that ideaL Instructional resources, when coupled with dedicated and energetic students, have resulted in an unusually high percentage of graduates being able to satisfy their vocational objectives,

FACULTY R.1. Brown, Chair; Cox, Geller, Gold, Keyes, Kittle­ son, 1. Peterson, Roskos, Schwidder, Tomsic. Artists­ in-Residence: Frehse, Torrens. The department has sought to minimize prerequisites,

enabling students to elect courses relating to their interests as

early as possible, but majors are urged to follow course closely.

It is recommended that students interested in majoring in art

declare their major early to insure proper advising, Transfer

students' status shall be determined at their time of entrance, The department reserves the right to retain, exhibit, and

reproduce student work submitted for credit in any of its

courses or programs. A use or materials fee is required in certain courses.

BACHELOR OF ARTS MAJOR: Minimum of 32 semester

hours, including 160, 250, 230 or 350, 365, 370, and the art history

sequence (l80, 280, 380). A maximum o f 40 hours may be applied toward the degree, Candidates are registered in the College of

Arts and Sciences and must satisfy general university require­ ments, including a core curriculum (Core I or Core

foreign language/alternative requirement.

11),

and the


27 BACHELOR OF FINE ARTS MAJOR: A minimum of 56 semester hours, including 160, 150 or 250; th.e art h istory sequence ( I SO, 2S0, 380); 8 hours in pictorial media, 8 hour in materials media, and 4 hours in art history or theory (381, 386, 388, or as approved by the department faculty); requirements and e.lectives in area of emp hasis; and 499 (B.F.A candidacy exhi足 bition). 1 1 0, 1 1 6, or courses in teaching methods may not be included. Candida tes are registered in the School of the Arts and must satisfy general u n iversity req uirements, including a core curriculum (Core I or Core II). B.f.A.

in Piclorla\ Media

Areas of emphasis: a minimum of three courses required in one are" Dr(t wing/ Painting: 160 Drawing 360 Life Drawing ( R ) 365 Painting 1 465 Painting n ( R ) Printmak ing: 370 Printmaking I 470 Printmaking n ( R ) Film Arts: 226 Bi,lCk and White Photography 326 Color Photography 328 Film Making 426 Projects in Photography lndependent Study (may be applied to cl ny area): 492 Studio Projects [R) (R)-rnay be repeated for credit B.F.A.

in Materials Media

Areas of emphasis: a minimum of t hree courses requ ired in one ared Ceramics: 230 Ceramics [ 330 erami s II 430 eramics 111 ( R ) culpture: 250 Sculpture 1 350 Sculpture I I Crafts: 238 Stained Glass [ 338 tamed Glass II (R) 335 Fiber, ( R) Independent Study (may be applied to any area): 492 Studio Projects (R) (R)-may be repeated for credit B.F.A. in Design Requir d basic sequence: 196 Design [: Fundamen tals 296 Design [I: Concepts 3111 Twentieth Century Design and Architecture 396 Design: Graphics 1 491 Design: Workshnp Elechve courses: 395 Design: En vironments 398 Drawing: Illustration 4% Design: Graphics II Supporting courses in art m<1 y be chosen in accord with ind.i足 vidual interests. Supporting courses from other departments and schools may also be elected (for examp le, Business Adminis足 tration 370 or 472 and Communication Arts 374 or 380). Applicable courses will be recommended by advisers. BACHELOR OF ARTS I EDU ATIO. : See School of Education. The Publishing and Printing Arts minor is cross-referenced with the Department of English. See the description of that minor under English. MINOR IN STUDIO ART: 20 semester hours, inducting 1 1 0, 4 hours in materials media, 4 hours in pictorial media, and 8 hours of electives. MINOR IN ART HISTORY: 20 semester hours, including 1 10,

l2 hours in art history elect ives, and 4 hours in studio art.

CO URSE OFFERINGS STUDIO 1 50 1 60 1 96 226 230 238 250 255 296 326 328 330 335 3 8 341 350 355 360 365 370 395 396 398 426 430 465 470 491 492 496 499

THREE-DIMENSIONAL DESIGN DRAWTNG DESIGN I: FUNDAMENTALS BLACK AND WIDTE PHOTOGRAPHY CERAMICS I STAINED GLASS 1 SCUlPTURE I J EWElRY I DESIGN II: CONCEPTS COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY FILM MAKING CERAMICS II FIBERS STAINE D GLASS II ELEMENTARY ART EDUCATION SCULPTURE II J EWELRY II U FE DRAWING PAINTING I PRINTMAKING I DESIGN: ENVIRONMENTS DESIGN: GRAPHICS I ORA WING: D..LUSTRA TION PROJ ECTS IN PHOTOGRAPHY CE RAMICS m PAINTING II PRINTMAKING II DESIGN: WORKSHOP STUDIO PROJ ECTS DESIGN: GRAPHICS n B.F.A. CANDIDACY EXHIBITION

HISTORY AND THEORY 1 10 INTRODUCTION TO ART 1 1 6 DESIGN IN THE CONTEMPORARY WORLD 1 80 HISTORY OF WESTERN ART I 280 HISTORY OF WESTERN ART II 380 CONTEMPORARY ART 81 TWENTIETH CENTURY DESIGN AND ARCHITECTURE 386 IMAGERY AND SYMBOLISM 388 STUDIES IN ART HISTORY 440 SEMINAR IN ART EDUCATION 490 SEMINAR 497 RESEARCH IN ART HISTORY -THEORY 110

INTRODUCTION TO ART

Art in the modern world seen in relation to history; a search for meaning in an age of science, industrial ization, and nationalism. Not intended for majors. (4)

116

DESIGN IN THE CONTEMPORARY WORLD

An examination of contemporary design with a focus on trends in adverti,i ng. fashion, automotive, product and interior design. Includes a section on color t heory and perception and the basic elements of design. Requires no artistic/design background and is not in tended for art majors. (4)

1 50

THREE-DIMENSIONAL DESIGN

Various techniques and materials as used in the development of three-dimensional torm. (4)

160

DRAWING

1 80

IflSTORY OF WESTE RN ART I

A course dealing with the basic techniq ues and media of drawing. (4) A s urvey traCing the development of Western art and architecture from prehistory to the end of the Middle Ages.'(4)

1 96

DESIGN I: FUNDAMENTALS

An introduction to de ign through the study of basic techn iques, color t heory, and composition. (4)


28 226

BLACK AND WHITE PHOTOGRAPHY

A studio class in photography as an art form.Primary concentration in basic camera and dark room techniques. Students produce a portfolio of prints with an emphasis on creative expression and experimentation. (4)

230

CERAMICS I

Ceramic materials and techniques includinl' hand-built and wheel-thrown methods, clay and glaze formation. Includes a survey of ceramic art. (4)

238, 338

ST AINED GLASS I, II

A survey of glassworking techniques and materials.ln tegrates historical sty les, their origins and evolution, with contemporary types and new techno logy. 238 must be taken before 338. 33R may be taken twice. (4,4)

250, 350

SCULPTURE I, II

Concentration un a particular medium of sculpture including metals, wood, or synthetics; special ::;ection� emphasizing work from the human form a::; well as uppurt unity for mold making and casting. 250 m[lst be taken before 350; 350 may be taken t w ice. (4,4)

255, 355

JEWELRY I, II

A study of form and technique in the design and execution of jewelry objects. Includes stone setting, fabrication, and casting. 255 must be taken before 355; 355 may be taken twice. (4,4)

280

HISTORY OF WESTERN ART II

A survey of Western art and "rchitecture from the Renaissance to the mid-20th century. (4)

296

DESIGN II: CONC E PTS

An investigation of the process of creative problem solving in a methodic�1 and organ ized manner. Incl udes projects in a variety of design areas. Prerequisite: 196 or consent of instructor. (4)

326

COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY

Exploration of the issues of both paint�rs and photographers. Students learn to make color prints and process color negatives. Includes a histurical survey of color photugraphy as well as p�rspec tives of cont emporary artists. (4)

328

FILM MAKING

A studio ourse in film m�lking as ,1 n art form. A study o f the malPriais and techniques of film making and the production of student R mm. and 16 mm. films. Classic and ex pt'ri mental films will be surveyed. (4)

330, 430

C ERAMICS II, III

Techniques in ceramic construction and experiments in glaze forma tion. 330 must be taken before 430; 430 may be taken twice. Prerequisite: 230. (4, 4)

335

FIBERS

Exploration Jnd develupment of fiber structures and soft art forms with non -loom and loom techn iques. May be repeated for credit.

(4)

338

STAINED GLASS II

(See 238)

341

ELEMENTARY ART E DUCATION

A study of creative growth and development; art as studio project; history and therapy in the classroom. (2)

350

381

TWENTIETH CENTURY DESIGN AND ARCHITECTURE

A study of twentieth century developments in architect ure and rdated fields as well as certain design areas. (4)

386

IMAGERY AND SYMBOLISM

A survey of symboliC, pictorial, and plastic expressions in Western tradition from the perspective of their philosophic" l and theologI­ cal implicat ions, with particular emphasis on the development of the Christian cultus. (4)

388

STUDIES IN ART HISTORY

A selected area of inqu iry, �uch as a history of American art. Asian art, the work of Picasso, or similar topics. (4)

395

DESIGN: ENVIRONMENTS

An investigation into various types of environme.nts with particu­ lar emphasis on residential. Incl uded will be. a brief history of iurniture and design sty les; appro,lches to planning and pro­ cedures; and a n introduction tu technical drawing and model building. Prerequisite: 196 or consent of instructor. (4)

396, 496

DESIGN: GRAPHICS I, II

Design and execution of printed materia ls; emphasis on technical procedures and problems in mass communication. 496 explores advanced techniques with multiple color, ty pography, and other complex problems. 396 must be taken before 496. Prerequisite: 160 and 296 or consent of instructor. (4, 4)

398

DRAWING: ILLUSTRATION

Advanced projects in drawing/iUustration. Exposure to new con­ cepts and techniques adaptable to fine art and commercial applications. Prerequisites: 1 60 and 196. May be repeated once. (4)

426

PROJECTS IN PHOTOGRAPHY

A studio/seminar course designed for students who want tl) continue working in black and white or color.Among the topics are basic view camera techniques, non-silver processes, zone systems and Cibachrome printing. Prerequisite: 226 or 326 or c;)1lsent of instructor. (4)

430

CERAMICS III (See 330)

440

SEMINAR IN ART EDUCATION

A study of instruction in the secondary school including appro­ priate media and curriculum development. a/y (2)

465

PAINTING II (See 365)

470

PruNTMAKING II (See 370)

490

SEMINAR

Selected topics considerinl' some aspects of the visual arts. May be repeated for cred. it. Prerequisite: consent of instructor. ( 1 -4)

491

DESIGN: WORKSHOP

A tutorial course which may deal with any of several aspects of the design field with particular emphasis on practical experience and building a portfoliO. (2)

492

JEWELRY II

A tutorial course with individua.l investigation of a particular medium, for major students only. May be repeated for credit. Prereq uisi tes: senior status, consent oi inst ructor, and program approval by department facuLty. I (] (4)

(See 255)

360

CONTEMPORARY ART

The development of art from 1945 to the present, with a brief look at European and American antecedents as they apply to con­ temporary directions. Includes a substantial section on aesthet ics and art theory. (4)

SCULPTURE II

(Sec 250)

355

380

LIFE DRAWING

An exploration of human form in drawing media. May be repeated for cred i t . Prerequisite: 160 or consent of instructor. (4)

365, 465

PAINTING I, II

Media and techniques of painting in o i l or acrylics. 365 m u s t be taken before 465; 465 may be tehn twice. Prerequisite: 160. (4, 4)

�Q VO

PruNTMAKING L II

Methods and media of fine art. printmak ing; both hand and photo processes involving lit hographic, intaglio and screen printing. 370 must be taken be.iore 470; 470 may be taken t wice. Prereq uisite: 1 60 or consent of instructor. (4, 4)

STUDIO PROJECTS

496

DESIGN: GRAPHICS II (See 3%)

497

RESEARCH IN ART HISTORY -THEORY

A tutorial course for major students with research into a particular aspect of art history or theory. May be repeated fur credit. Prereq uisites: senior stat us, consent of inst ructor, and program approv<ll by depmtment facu.lty. (2 or 4 )

499

B.F.A. CANDIDACY E XHIBITION

Exhibition of undergraduate work by B.FA candidates. Students are responsible for all arrangements in consultation with their major advisers. (no credi t )


29

School of

The Arts

T he School of the Arts of Pacific Lutheran Uni­ versity is a community of artists dedicated: to provide energies and facilities for t he focused refinement of creative activity; to operate in the vanguard of artistic understand­ ing and to assume an additive r<;!ther t han imita­ tive position relative to that understanding; to pursue study of both the historical a nd t heoretical aspects of our creative legacy; to recog nize change in artistic criteria without devaluating the traditional concepts of d iscipline, craftsmanship, a nd academic professional ism; to foster act ivity free from the caprice of the marketplace but, by virtue of its substance, not aloof from nor incompatible with practical concerns; to a nimate and "human ize" t he academic climate of Pacific Lutheran U niversity via t he crea tive presence by sponsoring a rich a nd varied pro­ gram of events in the arts;

a nd to provide the students of Pacific Lutheran University an opportunity to experience first hand the unique "chemistry" of t he crea tive process.

FACULTY Moe, Dean: faculty members o f the Departments of Art, Communication Arts, and MusicDegrees offered by the School of the Arts includ� the B.F.A. (Bachelor of Fine Arts) in art, communication arts, and music, the B.M. ( Bachelor of Music), and the M.M. (Master of Music). Students may also earn the BA ( Bachelor of Arts), but this degree is awarded through the College of Arts and Sciences. Candidates for the B.F.A. and B.M. as well as the B A in art, communication arts, or music must meet general university requirements and the specific requirements of the Departments of Art, Communicatiun Arts, or Music. For details about the B.A.E. ( Bachelor of Arts in Education) in art, communication arts, or music, see the School

at Education.

For course offerings, degree requirements, and programs in t h e School of the Arts, see: ART COMMUNICATION ARTS MUSIC

Biology T he Department of Biology is dedicated to a teach­ i ng process, not just a delivery of facts. Facts form the foundation of science but approach infinity i n number. Therefore, the biology faculty stresses the gathering, processing, retrieving, and i.nter­ preting of these facts. The biology faculty believes in t he notion that one of the most profound requirements in science is learning to ask the right questions and to recog­ nize t he answers. The department is t herefore dedicated to permitting students to learn science in t he only way that is can be effectively made a part of t heir think ing: to independently question it, probe it, t ry it out, experiment with it, experience it. I n addition to diverse faculty and balanced curriculum, the department provides numerous facilities for its students, including: herbarium, invertebrate and vertebrate m useu ms, greenhouse, vivarium and surgery room, climate control rooms, growth chambers, vertebrate ph ysiology and cell p hysiology laboratories, a field station located on State of Washington Parks land, and a boat equipped for studies of Puget Sound. Quali­ fied students are invited to use t hese facilities in independent study or participation in ongoing facu lt y research.

C areer avenue for graduates are numerous. The biology faculty are committed to helping students invest igate a nd obtain the career which most clearly matches t heir interests and abihties.

FACULTY Carlson, Chair; Alexander, Crayton, Gee, Hansen, J . Jensen, Kerk, Knudsen, Lerum, Main, D.J. Martin, Matthias, McGinnis. BACHElOR OF ARTS or BACHE LOR OF SCIENCE MAJOR: The major in biology is designed to be flexible in meeting the needs and special interests of students. Several options for major programs are available. In each plan for the major listed below, minimal requirements are described, and students should consult thei.r major advisers on the selection of electives which will help them adequately meet their pre­ profe"ional and educational goals. A department adviser must be consulted before completion of Biology 323, the final course

in the initial three semest�r core courses required of aU biology majors. I nterim courses (300-320) cannot be counted toward the major. Plan

I-Bachelor of Arts: 32

semester hou rs, including 1 6 1 , 162,

and 323, plus 1 9 additional hours. 4 hours are permitted in courses numbered bdow ISO (if completed before taking 1 6 1 )

8 hours are permitted i n courses numbered between 201 and 206. Requ ired supporting courses: Chemistry 105 or 1 1 5 and Math 133 or equivalent. Recommended supporting COurses: Physics 125-126.

a n d up to

/�.


30 Plan I/-Bad!"lo r of Arts-Comprehensive: 36 semester

hours,

in luding 1 6 1 , 162, and 323, pills 23 additional hour in courses nu mbered OYer 200. U p to 8 hOllrs are permitted in cuurse, numbered between 201 and 206. Requi red supporting courses:

l I S, 1 1 6 Jnd Math 1 33 or equivalent. Recommended supporting COUf es: one semes. ter of organic chemistry and Chemistry

Physics 125- 1 26.

Plan ffi -Bachelor o( Arts-Chemistry Em phasis: 2A semester hours, including 1 6 1 , 162, and 323, pi \.!!; I� additional hours in

courses numbered over 323. Requi.red supporting

COllrses: of the

hemist r\, 1 1 5, 1 16, 3 3 1 , 332 with laboratories, plus one

following-Chemistry 321 or 403 and Math 133 or equivalent.

Recommended supporting courses: Physics 125-1 26. Plan

including 161, 323, plus 28 addition I hours i n courses nu mbered over

Plan V-Bachelor of Scienct-- Researd!

Emphasis: 40 semester hours, including 1 6 1 , 1 62, and 323, and 495, plus 25 additional hours in courses nu mbered over 323. Required supporting courses: Chemistry 1 1 5, 1 1 6, 3 3 1 , 332 with laborato ries; Math 1 5 1 ; Physics 125-126 or 1 53- 154. BACHELOR OF ARTS IN EDUCAnON: See Sc.hool of Education.

majors. Fundamental concepts chosen from all areas of modern

biology including the envlronment, population, human anatomy

and physiology, genetics, evolution and biological controls. Lec­ tures, laboratories, and discussion. I II (4)

NATURAL HfSTORY O F VERTEBRATES

brates with the exception of birds. Field trips 'and laboratory.

326

ANIMAL BEHAVIOR

Description,

the behavior

lassification, cause, function, and development

of

principles of biology with an

plants; food pLants; propagation of house plants; home care of plants; plant identification. Includes laboratory. II (4).

of

behavior focusing on comparisons

tionary aspects of behavi.or. Laboratory is not rigidly scheduled

and will consist of a behavioral investigation of the students'

choosing. PrerequiSite: 323 or consent of instructor. I I (4)

327

ORNITHOLOGY

of birds with emphasis with hobby interests as

The studv

students

'

on local species; designed for

well as for advanced biology

students. Field trip . Includes laboratory. Prerequisite: 323 or consent

328

of instructor.

II (2)

MlCROBIOLOGY

The st ructure, physiology, gen et ics, metabolism, and ecology of

331

GENETICS

Basi concepts including consideration of molecular basis of gene

expression, recombination, genetic variability, and consideration

of cytogenetics and population genetics. Includes laboratory. Prerequisite: 323 1I (4)

340

PLANT DIVERSITY AND DISTRIBUTION

A systematic introduction to plant diversity. Interaction between

plants, theories of vegetiltional distribution. Emphasis on higher

CELLULAR PHYSIOLOGY

Deals with how cells are functionally organized; enzyme kinetics

and regulatory mechanisms, biochemistry of macromolecu les,

energy

metabolism, membrane structure and function, ultra­

st ructure, cancer cells

as model systems. Prereq uiSites: 323 and

one semester of organic chemistry o r consent of instructor. II (4).

CELLULAR PHYSIOLOGY LABORATORY

laboratory experience in techniques and types of instrumenta­

tion often e.ncountered in biochemical and cellular resea rch

including animal cell culture, cell fractionation, use of radiotracers,

biochemical assays, membrane phenomena, spectrophotometry, respiro metry. May b e elected only by students with a serious interest

for

this type of training; not required with 346. Corequi­

site/prerequisite: 346 or CHEM 403 and consent of instructor. n ( 1 ).

PRINC IPLES OF BIOLOGY I : CELL BIOLOGY

359

Cellular and molecular levels of biological organization; cell ultra­ structure and physiology, Mendelian and molecular genet ics,

energy transduction. Required of all biology majors. Includes

PLANT ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY

Higher plant structure and function from germination to senes­

cense, including basic anatomy, seed germination, water relations,

respiration, mineral nutrition, photosynthesis, growth regulators,

and reproduction. I ncludes laboratory. PrerequiSites: 323 and one

laboratory and a One hour faculty seminar on current topics in

semester of organic chemistry. I (4)

(5).

361

biology. Co-registration in chemistry ( 1 04 or 1 1 5) recommended. I

PRINCIPLES OF BIOLOGY II: ORGANISMAL BIOLOGY

vertebrates as model systems, plus a n introduction to animal and

201

(4).

INTRODUCTORY M ICROBIOLOGY

The growth, control, ph YSiology, isolation, and identification of microorganisms, especially those

which

affect human beings.

Includes laboratory. Prerequisite: CHEM 1 05 or consent of instruc­

tor. I (4).

205, 206

COMPARATIVE ANATOMY OF THE VERTEBRATES

An integrated study of the principles

introduction to animal and plant tissues, anatomy, and phy siology, with special emp hasis on flowering plants and plant development. Includes laboratory. Prereq·uisite: 1 6 1 . II

of

animals. Lectures e.mphasize an ethological

among species, as well as physiological, ecological, and evolu­

A

are: basic plant structure and function; poisonous plants; medicinal

An

on

Prerequisite: 32.'3. a/y 1 989-90 I (4 )

347

HUMANISTIC BOTANY

emphasis on plants and their impact on people. Topics included

162

of life I (4).

Classification, natural history, and economic importance of verte­

346

An introduction to biology, designed primarily for non-biology

161

chair.

plant taxonomy. Includes laboratory and field trips. Prerequisite: 323. 11 (4)

BJOLOGY AND THE MODERN WORLD

the basic

324

of department

of instructor; one semester organic chemistry recommended. I I (4)

COURSE OFFERINGS

An introduction t o

Evolution, ecology, behavior, and a systematic survey

earth. Prerequisi te: 162 or consent

microQrganisms. Includes laboratory. Prerequisite: 323 or tonsent

MINOR: At least 20 semester hours selected from any biology courses except those n u mbered 300-320 ( i n teriml, in which a grade of C Or higher i5 earned. Pass-fail courses may not be counted. Prerequisites must be met unless a written waiver is obtained in advance from both the instructor and the depart­ ment chair. Applicability of non-PLU biology credits will be determined by the department chair. At least eight credit hours must be earned in residence a t PLU. Consult the chair for assignment of a minor adviser.

112

PRINCIPLES OF BIOLOGY m: ECOLOGY, EVOLUTION AND DIVERS ITY

approach to the study

IV -Bad!e1or of S.:ience: 40 semester hours,

162, and 200. Up to 8 hour> are penn i tted in courses numbered bet ween 201 and 206. Required supporting courses: Chemistry I I , 1 16, 331 with laboratones; Math 1 5 1; PhySiCS 125- 1 26 or 1 53 - 1 54.

111

323

of

vertebrate structure.

Considers how and why living vertebrates attained their present

structure by emphasizing phylogenetic, developmental, and physi­ ological topics. Prerequisite: 323. II (4)

385

IMMUNOLOGY

Im munology is the study of the biological properties which enable an organism to respond to changes within itself when the changes

represent the presence of foreign substances, either from the external environment or self-induced. Consideration o f the biology

and chemistry of immune response: the specificity of the organ­ ism's immune reactions, the types and roles o f lymphatic cells,

HUMAN ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY

First semester: matter, cells and tissues; nervous, endocrine, skeletal, and muscular systems. Laboratory includes cat dissection

and experiments in muscle physiology and reflexes. Second

semester: circulatory, respiratory, digestive, excretory, and repro­ ductive systems; metabolism, temperature regulation, and stress.

Labora tory includes cat dissection, physiology experiments, and

study of developing organisms. 205 ( I ) prerequisite to 206 (U). (4, 4)

chemical and functional characteristics of immunoglobulins and

c.omplement, genetic control of the immune response, hyper­

sensitivity reactions, and immu nodeficiency diseases. Practical ramifications include methods of immunochemical analysis and

clinical applications. Prerequ.is.ites: 328, 346, or CHEM 403.

[ (2)


-�------�-

403

DEVELOPMENT AL BIOLOGY

441

The development of multicellular organisms, emph asizing the molecular bases for development. Major topics include interaction of egg and sperm to initiate the developmenta[ program, the origin 0.1 all differences in early development, genetic control of develop­ ment, cellular differen tiation, morphogenetic processes, and how rules for cell behavior govern the formation of specific patterns in developing organisms. Laboratory includes cellular and molecular experimental problems. Prerequisite: 323. I (4)

407

An

475

MOLECULAR BIOLOGY

490

HISTOLOGY

491, 492

ECOLOGY

BIOLOGICAL OCEANOGRAPHY

The ocean as environment for plant and animal life; an introduc­ tion to the struct ure, dy namics, and history of marine ecosystems. Lab, field trips, .) nd term project in addition to [ecture. Prereq uisite: 323. II (4)

426

INDEPENDENT STUDY

I n vestigations or research i n areas of special interest not covered by regular courses; open to qualified j u n ior and senior majors; students should not elect independent study unless they know i n advance the specific area they wish t o investigate and can demonstr.)te a serious i n terest in pursuing it. It is suggested that the student spend one semester researching the [iterature and writing a proposal (for 1 sem. hr. of cred i t ) and the next semester actually carrying out the project (for another I sem. hr. of credit). Students will not be permitted to use 491 -492 for filling in a deficiency in their program. Prereq uisite: written proposal for the project approved by a faculty sponsor and the department chair.

Organisms i n relation to their environment, including organisma[ adaptat ions, population growth and i n teractions, and ecosystem structure and funct ion. Prerequisite: 323. 1(4)

425

SEMINAR

Selected topiCS i n biology based on literature andlor original rese.lfch. Open to junior and senior biology majors. ( J )

Microscopic study of normal celis, tissues, and organs of verte­ brates. This study is both structurally and physiologically oriented. Prerequisite: 323. 'I (4)

424

EVOLUTION

Evo[ution as a process: sources of variation; forces overcoming genetic inertia in populat ions; speciation. Evo[ution of genetic systems and of life in relation to ecological theory and earth history. Lecture and discussion. Term paper and m i ni-seminar required. PrerequiSite: 323. I a/y 1 988-89 (4)

introduction to molecular biology, emphaSizing the molecular biology of eukaryotic cells. Topics include reco mbinant DNA procedures, genetic engi neering, gene fine struct ure, gene expres­ sion, sequencing of nucleic acids, naturally occuring rearrange­ ments of the genome, chemical synthesis of oligonucleotides, and the molecular composition and architecture of some cellular components. Prereq uisite: 323. [ (4)

411

MAMMALIAN PHYSIOLOGY

Functions of principal mammalian organ systems emphaSizing control mechanisms and homeostatic relationships. H u man-ori­ ented laboratory includes work in circulation, cardiography, psychophysiology, temperature regulation, and other areas. Stu­ dents are required to design and execute .) major experiment of their own. Prereq uisites: 323 and CHEM 331 . Anatomy and biochemistry recommended. [ (4)

0 ·4) 495

FIELD METHODS I N ECOLOGY

DIRECT,ED STUDY

Original experimental or theoretical research open to upper division students intending to graduate with a Bachelor of Science-Research Emphasis. Requires a written proposal approved by a {acuity sponsor and the department chair. (2)

Sampling techniq ues and analysis of natural ecosystems. Inde­ pendent project required. Prerequisites: 323 and 424 or consent of instructor. I I (2)

Business mznzstratzon School

Of

In concert with general university requirements, the business curriculum prepares graduates for responsible positions in business, education, and government.

Optional concentrations are offered in the fields of accounting, finance, h u man resource manage­ ment, international business, management information systems, marketing, and operations management.

FACULTY King, Dean; Polcyn,Assistant Dean; Bancroft, Barndt, Bamowe, Bemiker, B. Burke,Carvey, Freeman, Heg­ stad, H. T. Johnson, Kamath, Lauer, MacDonald, Matthaei, McNabb, Myers, RamagJia, Raymond, Savarino, Schafer, Sepic, Thrasher, Van Wyhe, Yager. ADMISSION The professional Bachelor o{ Business Administration degree program is composed of an upper division business curriculum with a strong base in liberal arts.

Undergraduate students are admitted to the School of Business Administration upon the successful completion of at [east 24 semester hours witb a cumulative grade point average of 2.5 or above, and the declaration of business administration as the major field of study. Transfer students are also required to have mainta ined the grade point average of 2.5. The student's interest to acquire a professional competence is desired and the assignment of a business facu lty adviser is required. Students considering graduate-Ieve[ study should seek early planning advice from the faculty concerning appropriate undergraduate course selection. Graduate students are admitted to the School of Business Administration when they meet the requirements specified in the M.B.A. catalog.

AFFIUAHONS The School of Business Administration of Pacific Lut heran UniverSity is a member of the American Assemb[y of Collegiate Schools of Business. The B.B.A., M . B.A., and accounting pro· grams are nationally accredited by the Accreditation Council of the AACSB. Pacific Lutheran University is accredited regionally by the Northwest Association of Schools and Colleges. The School is privileged to have a student cbapter of Beta Gamma Sigma, the national business honorary society recognized by the AACSB.

31


32 DEGREE REQUIREMENTS The Bach�lor of Business Administration degree program consists of 128 semester hours to be taken over a four-year period, and to be completed with an over-all grade point average of 2.5 or above as well as a 2.5 grade poi n t average separately in business courses. C- is the minimal acceptable grade for business admin istration cOllrs�s. . Sixt y-four semester ho urs or one-half of the minimum total degree requirements are taken in fields outside the School of Business Administration. At I<'ast 40 semester hours are taken in required and elective busi ness subjects.

BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 230, 281, 282, :l50, 154, 364, 370, 455, and 8 semester hours of upper division business electives. Required supporting courses: Economics 1 50, Math 128 (or l S I and 230) (or 1 5 1 , 1 52, and 331 ) Computer Science 220 (or equivalent), Statistics 231 o r Math 141, and one upper division economics course. NO MORE THAN 50 PERCENT OF THE TOTAL HOURS MAY BE BUSINESS COURSES. The elective courses are chosen to support students' professional career objectives or graduate study plans. They may reflect business administration concentrations or selections from entirely diff�rent fields. The latter may include work in other professional schools or prOgrams.

CONCENTRATlONS A concentration is a specialization within the School of Busi­ ness Administration. The concentration, which is noted on the student's transcript, must be completed with at least a 3.0 grade point average. C- is the minimal acceptable grade for concentra­ tion courses.

Operations Managment BA 3SO Management BA 385 Cost Accounting BA 450 Production and Operations Management BA 473 Industrial Marketing and Purchasing

MTNOR I N BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION: Economics 1 50; Math 128 (or 1 5 1 and 230) (or 1 5 1 , 1 52, and 331); Computer Science 220 (or equivalent); Statistics 231 or Math 341; Business Administration 281, 350, 364, 370. A grade point average of 2.5 in these business courses is required for the minor. MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION:See Graduate Catalog.

BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION COURSES Courses nu mbered 1 00-299 are available to all students. Courses numbered 321 -499 are open to students with junior standing and the required prerequisites. Courses numbered 500-599 are reserved for students in the M.B.A. program and students in other PLU graduate programs who have an approved field in business. The middle digit of the course number indicates the field of concentration: 2- management information systems 3-law 4-general service 5-human resource management 6-finance 7-marketing 8-accounting 9-specialized and predominantly independent studies

Accoun ting BA 381 In termediate Financial Accounting BA 382 Advanced Financial Accounting BA 385 Cost Accounting BA 483 Income Taxation BA 484 Auditing BA 487 Accounting Information Systems

Fi na nce BA 364 Ma nagerial Finance BA 462 1nvestme.nts BA 461 Portfolio Analysis and Management BA 464 Financial Planning and Control BA 381 In termt'd iate Accounting OR 465 I n krnational Financial Management ECON 352 Intermediate Micro Economic Analvsis , OR ECON 361 Money and Banking ( Either course will fulfill th" business requirement for an upper div ision economics course.)

Human Resource Management BA 354 Human Resou rce Management BA 454 Organizational Change and Development BA 457 Productivity and the QuaUty of Work Life BA 458 Advanced Human Resource Administration ECON 321 Labor Economics, Labor Relations, and Human Resources (This will fulfill the requirement for an upper division �conomics course,)

International Business BA 340 International Business BA 465 International Finance BA 474 International Marketing ECON 331 International Economics and two years' study of a foreign language

Management Infor ma t io n Sy s tems (Completion of this concentration also fulfills the req uirements for a n Information Science minor within the Departme.nt of Mathematics and Computer Science.) C5CI 1 44 Pascal CSC! 270 Data Structures CSC! 467 Data Base Management BA 325 Iniormation Systems in Organizations BA 421 Systems Design and Analysis BA 428 Seminar in Management Information Systems BA 487 Accounting Information Systems Student in the MIS concentration may substitute the CSCI 1 44, 270, 467 series for the pre-bUSiness CSCI 220 requirement. Marketi n g BA 370 Marketing Systems I3A 471 Marketing Research and Consumer Behavior BA 475 Marketing Management Two of the following: SA 472 Advertising and Sales Management BA 473 Industrial Marketing and Purchasing BA 474 In ternational Marketing

CO URSE OFFERINGS 230

LAW AND SOCIETY

A study of the legal system in the United States and the regulation of relationships between individual citizens, groups, and the governmental agencies and branches. Review of the rights and obligations of individual citizens and corporations, administrative law, and the procedures and practices of the courts in a modern society. In troduction t o legal instruments for international trans­ actions. Prerequisite: sophomore standing. I II (4)

281

FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING

An in.troduction to accounting concepts and principles. Valuation theories in the U.s. compared to those in other nations. Prepara­ tion ( manual and computer) and analysis of financial reports. Prerequisite: CSCI 220 (may be concurrent). Sophomore standing. I I I (4)

282

MANAGEMENT ACCOUNl'ING

I n troduction to the use of accounting data in planning, control, and decision making. Topics include cost-volu me-profit relation­ ships, cost accounting methods, management accounting systems, and budgeting; international applications of performance evalua­ tion systems. Prerequisite: 281 and CSCl 220. Sophomorestanding. I II (4)

325

INFORMATION SYSTEMS IN ORGANIZATIONS

Introduction to the fundamental concepts of systems and infor­ mation as they apply to organizations. Focus on the integration of information systems into the structure and deCision-making process of management. A variety of strategies for the design and implementation of management information systems in organi­ z.ations will be developed. Prereq uisites: CSCl I44 or 220. Junior standing. I (4)

340

INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS

In tegrated study of international business funct ions, and related concepts, practices, and polic.ies, using project and case analyses. This is the principal business administration course for students in the Global Stud ies Internat ional Trade minor. Prerequisites: 281 and ECON 331. I (4)

350

MANAGEMENT

A critical examination of the prin c iples and processes of adminis­ tration in an increasingly in t ern ational context. Management techniques and the functions of planning, organizing, leading and directing, and c ontrolling are discussed from the classical, be­ havioral, and more recent integrative points of view. Included is the study of concepts and charac teris t ic s related specifically to the opera tions function. Introduction to case analysis and problem solving techniqu.es. Prerequisites: ECON ISO, STAT 231 (may be concurrent), and BA 281. Junior standing. I II (4)


33 354

HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

Detailed examination of the behavior of individuals and groups in business organizations, with emphasis on policies and practices for solving problems. Fundamentals of personnel/human resource procedures in the U.s. and other countries. International aspects of human resource management will provide insight into t h e problems of managing foreign operations. Prerequisite: 3SO. ( 4 )

364

MANAGERIAL FINANCE

Introduction to the principal problems, theories and procedures of financial management: valuation, financial planning, financial statement analy sis, capital asset acquisition, cost of capital, financing strategies (including capital structure theory and divi­ dend policy), management of work ing capital accounts, and financial dimensions of international trade (including forejgn exchange risk, country risk, translation gains and losses). Pre­ requisites: esC! 220 (or equivalent), ECON I SO, MATH 128 (or equivalent), STAT 213, and BA 28 \ . Junior standing. I II (4)

370

MARKETING SYSTEMS

The flows of goods and servies in the U.s. and global economies; economic and behavioral approaches to the analysis of domestic and international demand; the role of marketing functions in business and not-for-profit organizations. Determination of a marketing mix: product policy, pricing, channels and physical distribution, and marketing commun ications. Prerequisites: ECON 1 50, MATH 128 (or equivalent), STAT 231, and BA 281 . Junior standing. 1 II (4)

381

INTERMEDIATE FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING

Concentrated study of the conceptual framework of accounting, valuation t h eories in the U.s. and abroad, asset and income measurement, financial statement disclosures, and foreign cur­ rency translation for multinationals. Prerequisite: 281 . I II (4)

382

ADVANCED FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING

Concentrated stud y of equjty measurement includjng the accou nt­ ing aspects of partnerships, corporations, and consolidations. Also includ.es accounting for multinational corporations and not-for­ profit organizations. Prerequisites: 281, 381 . I II ( 4 )

385

COST ACCOUNTING

Development and analysis o f cost information for management use i n decision making, income determination, and performance evaluation, using a variety of computer and quantitative teeh­ niques. International implications arising from the use of tradi­ tional inventory models. Prerequisites: 282, CSC! 220, MATH 1 28, STAT 231, or equivalents. I I I (4)

392

INTERNSHIP

A program of full-time experience closely related to the student's specific career and academic interests. The student is expected to develop the internship opportunity with a firm or organization, and the School will provide an internship agreement. This agreement identifies the problems to be researched, ex perience to be gained, and related readings to be accomplished. Monthly progress reports and other measu res of achievement will be used to determine the grade. Not more than 2 hours of credit will be granted for a fuU month o f internship, and not more than 8 hours of accumulated credit will be granted for the internships taken. The internship must be taken for a grade if used to meet one of the required upper division business elective courses, and it must be completed i n advance of the last semester before graduation. Prereq uisites: 281, 282, 350; ECON I SO; STAT 231; one additional course in the student's area of concentration. (2 or 4)

393

INTERNSHIP ABROAD

Credi t is offered for PLU-sponsored academic Or experiential study in other countries. Students may spend a summer, semester, interim term, or full academic year abroad.

421

SYSTEMS DESIGN AND ANALYSIS

Integration of the a reas of computer technology, systems analysis, systems design, and implementation. Empha.sis on the formali­ zation of the i n formation systems analysiS and development process. Excercises and case studies deal with information analysis and the logical specification of the project. Prerequisites: 28 1 , 282, 325 (may be concurrent). CSC! 144 (or 220). II (4)

428

SEMINAR IN MANAGMENT IN FORMATION SYSTEMS

A course involving a sign ificant hands-on project, software review and selection, and management applications by organizationa.l functions. Prerequisites: 28 1 , 282, 421, 487, CSC! 144 (or 220). I I (4)

435

BUSINESS LAW

Procedures, contracts, agencies, negotiable instruments, business organizat ions, property, trusts and wills, transportation, insurance and employment. II (4)

450

PRODUCTION AND OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT

Critical study of key concepts, quantitative techniques, and practices applied by American and foreign management to the production of goods or services. Includes examination of facility design; work design and measurements; and production planning, control, and scheduling considerations. Prerequisites: 350, MATH 1 2R (or equivalent), CSC! 220 (or equivalent). I (4)

454

ORGANIZATIONAL CHANGE AND DEVELOPMENT

Examination of the need for change in organizations, using a diagnostic approach and employing appropriate strategies to develop human resou rces vital to every oq�anization's economic viability. Emphasis on developing the skills of an internal change agent with k nowledge of evaluation methods and interventions that facilitiate planned chan>;e. Prereq uisites: 350, 354. I II (4)

455

BUSINESS POLICY

STudy of or>;anizational administration from top management perspective. Formulation and execution of strategies and policies to integrate a U manage.ment and business functions in support of orga nizat ional objectives. Implications of resource availability, technology, and the economy; education, religion, eth ics, and personal values; social responsibility; public policy; and inter­ national relations for top management decisions. Includes compre­ hensive case analyses. Required for business administrat ion majors. Prerell uisites: senior stand ing, 282, 350, 364, 370; 354 recommended. I II (4)

456

HONORS SEMINAR

457

PRODUCTIVITY AND THE QUALITY OF WORK LIFE

Examination of t he sociotechnical determinants o f organizational and individual productivi ty, with subsequent exploration of issues that affect quality of work life in service and manufacturing industries. Comparison of U.s. and foreign firms and cultures will provide reasons for d i fferences in prod uctivity and QWL. !'re­ requisites: 354, 454. II ( 4 )

458

ADVANCED HUMAN RESOURCE ADMINI STRATION

Detailed coverage of modern human resource procedures: job analysis, employee selection, training and career development, compensation, safety and health, labor relations. Review of the U.s. legal eontext of employment practices in other countries. Prereq uisite: 354. II (4)

462

INVE STMENTS

Emphasis on concepts, principles, and issues relating to individual securities: risk, return, and va l u a t ion of bonds, preferred stock, common stock, options, warrants, convertibles, and future,,; determination and term structureof market interest rates; market transactions struc.ture; capital market efficiency. Prereq uisites: 281, 364, CSCI 220 (or equivalent), ECON 1 50, MATH 1 28 (or equivalent), STAT nl. I I I (4).

463

PORTFOLIO ANALYSIS AND MANAGEMENT

The implications of modern investment theory for bond portfolio management. Emphasis on management of interest rate risk and clientele effects in the bond markets a nd on modern portfolio theory and its implication for individual investment decisions. Methods for evaluating portfoljo performance. Description of existing equilibrium asset pricing models in finance. Prerequisite: 462. I I I (4).


34 464

FINANCIAL PLANNING AND CONTROL

I n tensive analysis of major financial decisions; financial planning and control; capital budgeting; growth strategies; valuation; bond refunding; new equity issues; recent developments in capital structure theory; international aspects (includes international capital investment, and financing international operat ions). Emphasis on decision making. Prerequisites: 281, 364, CSC! 220 (or equivalent), ECON 1 50, MATH 128 (or equivalent), STAT 23 1 . I II (4)

465

INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Analysis o f d i rect and indirect international investments; inter­ national regulatory environment; international money flows and capital markets; international risk. Prerequisites:364, ECON 331 . 11 (4)

471

. �

MARKETING RESEARCH AND CONSUMER BEHAVIOR

Techniques and uses of marketing research in the business deCision -making process. Emphasis on research design, various survey met hods, research instrumen ts, and sampling plans as they relate to marketing consumer products and services in domestic and international environments. Contemporary behav­ ioral science concepts to be examined and incorporated in selected marketing projects. Prerequisites: 370, CSC! 220 (or equivalent). I II (4)

472

ADVE RTISING AND SALES MANAGEMENT

The role of promotion activities (advertising, personal selling, sales promotion and publicity) in the domestic and international marketing of goods and services; analysis of target markets; developing market potent ials; media selection; designing the promotional message; evaluation and control of the promotional mix. Prereq uisite: 370. I II (4)

473

INDUSTRIAL MARKETING AND PURCHASING

Analysis of the industrial buying and selling process in domestic and international business exchanges; purchasing policies and procedures; selection of sources of supply, induding internationJI sourcing; marketing problems of manufacturers and suppliers of industrial goods and services; developing and implementing domestic and global industrial marketing strategies. Prerequisites: 370, ECON 331 . I II (4)

474

INTERNATIONAL MARKETING

Introduction to marketing problems and opportunities facing U.s. firms in a n international marketing context. Covered are the changes necessary in ma.rketing programs whenever business transactions cross international boundaries; the economic and cultural forces that make these changes necessary. Prerequisites: 370, ECON 33 1 . II ( 4 )

475

MARKETING MANAGEMENT

487

ACCOUNTING IN FORMATION SYSTEMS

Application of i n formation systems concepts to the basic account­ ing information systems and the expansion of traditional account­ ing models to include the computerized information systems -a pproach. Topics include manual accounting systems, reporting objectives, procedures for systems analysis and design of account­ ing systems, behavioral aspects of systems design, audit require­ ments, and computer processing technology. Prerequisites: 281, 2H2, CSC! 220 (or equivalent). I LI (4)

490

SEMINAR

Seminar on specifically selected topics in business. Offered on demand. Prerequisite: consent of instructor. (4)

491

DIRECTED STUDY

Individual studies; readings on selected topics approved and supervised by t he instructor. Prereq uisite: consent o f instructor.

( ] -4)

501

FUNDAMENTALS OF ACCOUNTING AND FINANCE

Fundamental assumptions, principles, and procedures underlying accounting; transaction analysis and the fundamental accounting model; matching of expenses with revenue; measurement and reporting of income statement and balance sheet accounts; consolidated statements; and acco unting implications of basic international transactions. Theoretical framework for financial decisions; decision theory relative to working capital manage­ ment, short and intermediate-term financing, capital investments and valuation, capital structure and dividend policy, long-term financing, and multinational financing and investing. I I I (4)

502

FUNDAMENTALS OF MANAGEMENT AND MARKETING

Principles and processes of administration. Techniques and func­ tions of plann ing, organizing, directing, and controlling. The flows of goods and services in the economy; economic and behavioral approaches to the analysis of demand; the marketing functions in business firms. Determination of the marketing mix. An examina­ tion of the cultural. and economic implications of international business transactions on the management and marketing limc­ tions of U.s. firms. I II (4)

505

MANAGEMENT USE OF COMPUTERS

520

PROGRAMMING FOR MANAGERS

An in troduction to computer systems and their uses by managers in industry. Topics include hardware components of micro and mainframe systems; current issues surrounding computer usage; use of application software to aid in managerial decision-making ( wordprocessing, spreadsheets, data base packages, statistical packages); and elementary programming techniques. I II (4)

Computer programming including branching, looping, subscripts, input/output, character manipulation, subroutines, file manipula­ tions, data storage and retrieval. Advanced work with software packages. Prerequisite: 505. (4)

Analytical approaches to the solution of domestic, international, and multinational marketing problems. Developing strategies, planning, and administering comprehensive marketing programs; use of computer models; evaluation and control of marketing operations. Prerequisite: 370, one 400 level marketing course, CSC! 220 (or equivalent). I II (4)

System development processes. Information analysis and logical specification of the system. Emphasis on the iterative nature of the analysis and design process. Prerequisites: 501 , 505, 582. (4)

521

IN FORMATION SYSTEMS DESIGN

481

528

SEMINAR IN MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS

CONTEMPORARY ISSUES IN ACCOUNTING

Exploration of current issues and trends in the conceptual framework of accounting, the national and international environ­ ments in which accounting operates and the problems of com­ municating fina ncial information useful to decision-makers. Pre­ requisites: 281, 38 1, 382, or consent of instructor. (4)

In-depth study of selected topics related to management informa­ tion systems (MlS). Projects will entail application to the limctional areas of business. Prerequisites: 501, 520, 521 (or 587), 582. (4)

483

INCOME TAXATION

484

AUDITING

Federal and state laws, rules, and regulations that directly influence the manager's decision-making. Legal implications for individual managers and theirorgani7-ations.Areas covered include employee relations, consumer protection, security and exchange regulations, rights of corporate share-holders and creditors, anti­ trust laws, and environmental protection. (4)

Comprehensive study of income tax concepts. regulations, and tax planning principles. Emphasis on individual and business income taxation. Prerequisite: 281. I I I (4) Comprehensive study of auditing concepts and procedures; analysis of risk through the study and evaluation of internal controls, both administrative and accounting controls, and t h rough the study and evaluation of account balances; reporting of risk; review of the development and meaning of professional responsibility and ethics; review of operational auditing. Prerequi­ sites: 281, 282, 381, 382. I II (4)

535

550

LEGAL ASPECTS OF THE MANAGEMENT PROCESS

ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOR AND ENVIRONMENT

The stud y of open sociotechnical systems within which a manager must operate. Three major perspectives are encompassed: the external organization environment, including legal, ethical, social, economic, political, and international influences; the organization itself as an entity; and the internal organization environment. Comparisons with administrative practices in other countries and cultures. Prerequisite: 502. I II (4)


35 551

OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT AND SYSTEMS SEMINAR

Intensive study of key concepts, practices, and techniques applic· able to the management of the prod uction of goods and services including work and system design, planning, scheduli ng, quality control and modern techniques developed in other countries. Organizational impacts of production and information systems. Case analyses are used to address complex situations. Prerequi· sites: 505, 550; ECON 500, 543. I II (4)

553

CONTEMPORARY ISSUES IN MANAGEMENT

Investigation of the roles of managers in modern society. The exploration may include, but is not limited to, the topics of corporate responsibility, ethical issues in management, the impact of technological change on organizations and society, and the challenges posed by int ernational competition and management innovations in othe.r countries. The workshop approach to these topics combines the use of cases, readings, discussions, and simulations. Prerequisites: 550, ECON 504. (4)

554

BUSINESS STRATEGY AND POLICY

FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT SEMINAR

Analysis of optimal financial policies. Intensive investigation of the valuation process and its resulting impact on firm investment, financing, and dividend policies. Discussion of the implications of international financing and investing activities. Extensive use of the case method. Prerequisites: 501, 505, ECON 504, 543. I I I (4)

570

MARKETING MANAGEMENT SEMINAR

In troduction t o marketing strategy decisions in both domestic and international cont exts; marketing resource allocation deci· sions in a competitiveseliing environment; marketing alternatives for both consumer and industTial goods and services. Prerequ i . sites: 502, 505; ECON 504, 543. I II ( 4 )

581

SEMINAR IN FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING THEORY

Advanced accounting concepts and standards; current problems and trends reflected in accounting literature; designed for profes· sional accountants. (4)

582

PLANNED ORGANIZATIONAL CHANGE

Detailed examination of techniques for diagnosing administrative problems requiring change, and for planning, implementing, and evaluating changes undertaken through systematic programs of individual, group, and organization development. Emphasis on the problem assessment skills of internal change agents and on interventions aimed a t structural changes, management training, and career development. Comparative organization development practic.es in other countries. Prerequisite: 550. II (4)

555

564

ACCOUNTING IN FORMATION AND CONTROL

Applications of accounting information, services, and systems to management problems. Impact on decision making by inter­ national accounting practices. Prerequisites: 50 1 , 505. I II (4)

587

FINANCIAL INFORMATION SYSTEMS

Expansion of traditional accounting information flow models to include comput erized systems. Emphasis on the financial infor· mation needs of management and the resulting systems require· ments. Prerequisites: 501, 520, 582.

An integrated management approach based on decision.making

590

analysis in complex cases and comprehensive field situations. Advanced re.adings and li brary research integrate concepts of management and business functions including consideration of legal, social, and international aspects of the business environ­ ment. Prerequisites: 551, 564, and 570, any one of which may be taken concurrently with 555. I II (4)

Selected advanced topics; offered on demand. (4)

Individual reading and studies on selected topics; minimum supervision after initial planning of student's work. Prereq uisite: consent of instructor. ( 1 -4)

561

593

INVESTMENT ANALYSIS AND MANAGEMENT

Introduction t o the nature, problems, and processes of evaluating particular securities (foreign, as well as domestic); portfolio construction and administration. Special attention to the risk and rate-of·return aspects of particular securities, security portfolios, and total wealth. Prerequisites: 501, ECON 543. I (4)

591

SPECIAL SEMINAR INDEPENDENT STUDY

THESIS

Research study to meet Thesis Option requirement for elective in the M.BA degree program. (4)

Chemistry T he history of civilization is inseparable from the history of chemistry. Everything that occurs in nature-from mental processes and behav ior, to the furniture we live around, to the tools we use for work or play, to the problems of pollution-is chemically based. Chemistry seeks to understand the fundamental nature of matter, the changes in its composition, and the energy changes accompany­ ing these changes. Use of this k nowledge influences our lives in many profound ways. Whether inter­ ested in the chemical profession itself, i ncluding biochemistry, polymer chemistry, radiation chem­ istry, and other specialties, or in chemistry in conjunction with other fields such as business, the social sciences, and the humanities, students will have suitable programs available to meet their interests at PLU. Diversity in career plan­ ning is a key concept i n the chemistry depart­ ment. Programs are available which are broadly applicable to the health, biological, physical, environmental, behavioral, and fundamental chemical sciences.

T he chemistry department's courses, curriculum, faculty, and facilities are approved by the American Chemical Society. The staff of eight persons with doctorates has composite expertise in virtually every field of pure and applied chemistry. The faculty are very active in basic and a pplied research, and most are also Significantly involved in the community, applying their expertise to enhance the quality of life of the citizens. T he department uses numerous scientific instru­ ments in the laboratories. Such major research and teaching equipment includes: nuclear magnetic resonance, infra red, ultra-violet, visible, atomic absorp­ tion, flame photometry, emission, and electron spin resonance spectrometers; X-ray crystallographic diffrac­ tometer; gas and liquid chromatographs; precision refrac­ tometer; dipolometer; scin tillation coun ter; zone refiner; a complex m icroprocessor system; and a fluorometer.


36 Faculty research projects involving student par­ ticipation are in progress in many importan t fields of chemistry. Some of the general areas are: polymer strllcture and properties, sy/lthesis of heterocyclic com­ pou nds, fUllgal and chem ical cleavage of lign in, structural and magnetic studies of illorganic cOlllplexes, o rganic kinetics, photochemical reactions, the role of nutrition in health, and the biochemistry of drug actiO/IS.

Junior Chem. 34 1 , 343 Chern. 3 2 1 Core coursers) Electives

Chem. 342, 344 Core coursers) Electives

Senior Chern. 460 Chem. 490 Electives

Chem. 435 Electives

( 1 ) Refer to the Division of Natura l Sciences section of this

catalog for other beginning curricu lum options.

FACULTY

(2) The department stresses the importance of taking physics

Giddings, Chair; C. Anderson, Fryhle, Huestis, Nesset, Swank, Tobiason, Tonn_

Degrees in chemistry �re the Bachelor of Arts and the Bachelor of Science for students wishi'ng to structure their undergraduate education around a full chemistry major. The B.A program is the minimum preparation suitable for further professional studies and is often combined with extensive study or a second major in an allied field. The B.5. pro�ram involves additional chemistry courses and serves both students going directly into emplo y ment on graduation and t host' going into graduate progroms. It is offered with emphasis i n chemistry, biochemistry, or chemical physics. The first option is an American Chemical Society certi fied program. ThL' latter two options are offered in cooperation with t h e biology and physics departnwnts for students wishing to work at the interfaces between chemistry and biology or physics. Students contemplating a major in chemistry Jre i n v i t ed to discuss their interests and plans with members of the chemistry faculty a t the earliest possible time. Opport u n ities for honors work in chemistry are described below. Students deciding to major in chemistry should officiaJly declare their inten t after having completed Chemistry 3.11 and after consultilt10n with a faculty adviser in the chemistry depart­ ment. Transfer students desiring to m<ljor in chemistry should consult a departmental adviser no later than the beginning of the junior year. The forei);n languaf;e requirement o f the College of Arts and Sciences should preferably be met i n German or Russian. The chemistrv department considers computer usage to be an increasingly im p ortant tool in professional and personal activi­ ties. Further, laboratury work in the department pl'lCes consider­ able emphasis on com p uter use. Therefore, the department strongly recommends that a student planning to major in chem i,s try tJke at least one two-credit hour course i n computer sciencE'. BACHELOR OF ARTS MAJOR: Chemistry 1 1 5, 1 1 6, 32 1. 331, J,D, 334, .141. 342, 343, 460. Required supporting courses: Physics 1 47, 148, 1 53, 1 54; Math 1 51 , 1 52.

.132,

BACHElOR OF SCIENCE MAJOR ( t hree alternatives):

1. Ccneral-lrads 10 Americnn Chem ical Society ccrtiflcalion;

Chemistry 1 / 5, 1 1 6, 3 2 1 , 33 1, 332, 333, 334, 341. 342, 343, 344,

during either the freshman year or the sophomore year. This permits a better understanding of chemistry and enables a student to complete degree req uirements w i t h no schedul­ ing difficulties in the j u nior and senior years. (3) Students desirin� to fulfill the College o f Arts and Sciences fmeign language requirement under Option I, or who desire t o attain or maintain a language proficiency, should take a language COUr.->t> as p;trt of their optional course selections.

DEPARTMENTAL HONORS: In recognition of oustanding work, the designation wilh OCl'nrtm('/Jlai HO l lo rs may be granted by vote o f the faculty o f the chemistry department, based on the student's performzmce in these lucas: ( 1 ) COllrs<, uwk: The gr" de point average in chemistry courses must be at least 3.50. (2) Wrillol work. From the time a student declares a major in chemistry, copies of outstanding work (e.g., laboratory, semi­ nar, and rese,lrch reports) will be kept for later summary eV�11uation. (3) Oral COllllllllllicn/ioli. Students must evidence abiUty to com­ municate effectively a s ind icated by the sum of their partici­ pation i n class discussions, st'm inars, help session leader­ ship, and teaching assistantship work. (4j Illd('I�'l/dtll l chem istry-rclnlcd activilies. Positive considerations include the extent and quality of extracurricular work done in background reading, independent study, and research; assisting in laboratory preparation, teaching, or advising; any other chemistry -related employment, on campus or elsewhere; and participation in campus and professional chemistrv -rel" ted organizations. The departmental honors designation will appear on a grclduating chemistry major's trcln�cript. BACHELOR OF ARTS I N EDUCATION: S t udents interested in this degree develop their chemistry program through the departnll'nt in conjunction with the School of Education. See Sch()()l of Educ.ltion section. CHEMICAL ENGINEERING: Students intereste.d in pursu­ ing studies in chemical engineering should see the course out­ line in the Engineerin" section of this catalog. The department chair should be consulted for assignment of a program adv iser. MINOR: 22 semester hours, including US, 1 1 6, 3 2 1 , 331, 332,

333, and 334, completed with grades of C or higher.

405 or 450 or 456, 435, 460, 490; Physics 147, 148, 1 53, 154;

Math 1 5 1 . 1 52. For American Chemical Society certification,

450 and either 405, 456, or Cooperative Education 476 are

required.

2. RioCiIemislTy emphnsis: Chemistry 1 / 5, 1 1 6, 3 2 1 , 331, 332, 333, 334, 34 1 . 343. 403, 405, 4.15, 460, 4\10; Biolog

, 1 6 1 . i62, 323; four h�)urs sclt'cted from Biology 326, 328, 3 3 1 , 346, 359, 385.407, 44 1 or Ch<'mistry 342; Physics 147, 148, 1 53, 1 54; Math 1 5 1.

1 52.

3. Ci",micai-physi.(s "m"hasis: Chemistry 1 1 5, 1 1 6, 3 3 1 . 332, 333,

334, 34 1 . 342, 343, 344, 460; Physics 1 47, 148, 1 53, 1 54, 33 1 , 332,

336, 356; Math 1 5 1 , 152, 253.

Generalized Chem istry Curriculum for the B.S. Degree FALL

SPRING

Freshman ( l ) Chem. l i S Math 1 5 1 Phvsics 1 53 or Biology 1 6 1 ( 2 ) Optional fourth course PE l ao O r activity

(3)

Sophomore Chem. 3 3 1 . 333 Physics 1 53 or Biology 1 6 1 ( 2 ) Two additional courses

Chem. 1 1 6

Math 1 52 Ph ysics 154 or Biology 1 62 (2) (or core course) PE

l OO or activity

Chem. 332, 334 Physics 1 54 Or Biology 162 (2) Two additional courses

CO URSE OFFERINGS 104

ENVIRONMENTAL CHEMISTRY

105

CHEMISTRY OF LIFE

Basic principles of chemicaI structure and reactions, with applica­ t ions t o human activities and the natural environment. No prerequisitt,; students without high school chemistry are encour­ aged to take 104 before taking 1 05 or 1 1 5. Physical t h erapy and military n u rsing programs requiring a year of chemistry should include lO4 and 1 05 . Also suitable for environmental studies, general science teachers, BA. in earth sciences, and general university core requirements Or College of Arts and SCiences option 111. I (4) General. organic, and biochemistry pertinent to chemical pro­ cesses in the human organism; suitable for liberal arts students, nursin� students, and prospective teachers. Students who have not completed high school chemistry are encouraged t o take 104 before takin" 105. Ll (4)


37 1 1 5, 1 1 6

GENERAL CHEMISTRY

First semester topics include the structure of matter, atomic and molecular theory, states of matter and quantitative relationships. Second semester topics include k inetics, chemical equilibrium, thermochemistry, study of the elements grouped according to t h e periodic tab le, r"dio-chemistry, and inorganic qualit" tive analysis. Designed primarily for students who want to major i n biology, chemistry, engineering, geology, or physics. Includes all pre­ medical, predenta!, pharmacy, medical technology students, and students planning to transfer to some university dental hygiene programs. High school chemistry or permission of instructor required. Students with no high school chemistry or weak mathematical background should take 104 before this cours('. Coreq uisite: MATH 1 33. Prerequ isite: 1 1 5 or 1 1 6; I for 1 1 5, II for 1 1 6. (4, 4)

210

NUTRITION, DRUGS, AND THE INDIVIDUAL

An introduction t o basic metabolic interactions, general endocrin­ ology, mind and body in teractions, and roles of drugs in modifying biological and behavioral functions. Nutrition topics include food prep"ration, "the balanced meal philosophy," nutritional myths, the effects of stress, e. nv ironmental and societal in nuences on diet. Prerequisites: one year of high school chemistry or equivalent suggested. Meets general university core req uirements. I (4)

321

ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY

Chemical methods of quantit ative ., naly sis, including volumetric, gravimetric, and selected instrumental methods. Prereq uisites: 1 1 6 and MATH 1 33. I (4)

331, 332

ORGANIC CHEMISTRY

An interpretation of properties and reactions of aliphatic and aromatic compounds on the basis of current chemical theory. Prerequisite: 1 1 6. Coreq uisites: 333, 334. I I! (4, 4)

333, 334 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY LABORATORY Reactions and conventional and modern techniques of synthesis, separation, and analysis of orga nic compounds. Must accompany 331 , 332. I I! ( I , I )

336

ORGANIC SPECIAL PROJECTS LABORATORY

Individual projects emphasizing curre.nt professional-level meth­ ods of synthe,is and property determination (If organic com­ pounds. This course is an alternative to 334 and typically requires somewhat more time commitment. Students who wish to prepare for careers in chemistry or related areas should JPply for depart­ mental approval of their admission to this course.

341

PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY

A study of t he relationship between the energy content of systems, work, and the physical and chemical properties of matter. Topics include classical and statistical thermodynamics, thermochemistry, solution properties, and phase equilibria. Pre­ requisites: CHEM 1 1 5, MATH 1 52, PHYS 154. I (4)

342

PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY

A study of the physical properties of atoms, molecules and ions, and their correlation with structure. Topics include classical an d modern quantum mechanics, bonding t heory, atomic and molecu­ lar structure, spectroscopy, and chemical kinetics. Prereq uisites: CHEM 1 1 5, MATH 1 52, PHYS 1 54. I I (4)

343, 344

PHYSICAL CHEM ISTRY LABORATORY

Experiments in th ermodynamics, solution behavior, and molecu­ lar structure designed to acquaint stude.nts with instrumentation, data handling, correlations with theory, and data reliability. Computer usage is encouraged. Corequisite or prerequisite: 341, 342. 1 ] [ ( I , 1 )

360

INORGANIC CHEMISTRY: A NON­ CALCULUS APPROACH

Offered simulatneously with 450. Includes separate problems and some separate lectures. a/y II (3)

403

BIOCHEMISTRY

An overview, including biochemical structure, mechanisms of reactions, metabolism, genetics, basic pharmacology relevant to mechanisms of reactions, and the biochemistry of the cell. Majors are encouraged to take both 403 and 405 for a more complete understanding of biochemistry. Also for B.A. majors and non­ majors i nterested in biochemistry as a supporting field of knowl­ edge. Laboratory designed to stimulate creativity and problem­ solving abilit ies through the use of modern biochemical tech­ niques. Prerequisites: 332, 334. 1 (4)

405

BIOCHEMISTRY

A study of chemical reactions and structures in living cells. Topics include enzyme k inetics and mechanisms of catalysiS, metabolism, and biochemical genetics. Concepts introduced in Physical Chem­ istry and Biochemistry will be applied in this course. Designed for students interested in graduate school or research. Prereq uisites: 332, 334, 341 andlor 342 or permission, 403. I I (2)

435

INSTRUMENTAL ANALYSIS

450

INORGANIC CHEMISTRY

Theory and practice of instrumental methods along with basic e.lectronics. Special emphasis placed on radiochemical, mass spectrometric, and eletrometric methods. Prerequisites: 321 , 341 andlor 342, 343. II (4) Tec hniques of structural determination ( l R, UV, VIS, N M R, X-ray, EPR), bonding princip les, non-metal compounds, coord ination chemistry, organometall ics, donorlacceptor concepts, reaction pathways and biochemical applications arc covered. Laboratory will indude synthesis and a n in-depth exploration of the physical properties of non-metal, coord ination and orga nometallic com­ pounds. Prereq uisites: 331, 332, 341; corequisite 342. aly II ( 3 )

456

POLYMERS AND BlOPOL YMERS

460

SEMINAR

A course presenting the fundamentals of polymer synt hesis, solution thermodynamic properties, molecular characterization, molecular weight di stributions, ilnd solution kin etics. Free radical, condensation, ionic, and biopolymer systems are covered, with illustrated applications taken from the medical, engineering, and chemical fields. The one-credit laboratory examining polymer synthesis through experiments is optional. Prereq uisite: 341; coreqll isite, 342. all' 1 1 (3)

Presen tation by students of knowledge gained by personal library or laboratory research, supplemented with seminars by practicing scientists. Participation of all senior chemistry majors is required and all other chemistry-oriented students are encouraged to participate. Seminar program will be held during t h e entire year but credit will be a warded in the spring semester. I II ( [ )

490

INTRODUCTION T O RESEARCH

A course designed to introduce the student to laboratory research tec.hniq ues, use of the chemical literature, research proposal and report writing. Emphasis on the student developing and m,'king progress on an independent chemical research problem chosen in consultation with a member of t h e chemistry faculty. Prereq uisite: 342. I (2)

491

INDEPENDENT STUDY

Library andlor la boratory stud y of topics not included in regularly offered courses. Proposed proj ect must be approved by depart­ ment chair and supervisory responsibility accepted by an instruc­ tor. May be tak� more than once. I II ( I , 2, or 4)

497

RESEARCH

Experimental or theoretical investigation open to upper division studenls with consent of department chair. May be taken more than once. CeneraJly consists of an expanded study of the research project developed in 490. I II ( I , 2 or 4)

597, 598

GRADUATE RESEARCH

Open to master's degree candidates only. Prereljuisite: consent of department chair. I I I (2-4)


38

College 0 Arts and Sciences Division of Human ities

FOREIGN LANGUAGE/ ALTERNATIVE REQUIREMENTS

English Languages Philosophy Religion Division of Natural Sciences

Biology Chemistry Earth Sciences Mathematics and Computer Science Physics and Engineering Division of Social Sciences

Anthropology Economics History Political Science Psychology Social Work and Marriage and Family Therapy Sociology Degrees Offered

Bachelor of Arts Bachelor of Science MAJOR REQUIREMENT

A major is a ,equence oi courses in one area, usually in one department. A major should be selected by the end of the sophomore year. The c hoice must be approved by the department chair (or in case' of special acade'mic programs, the' program .:oord inator). Major requirements are specified in t h is catalog. The quality of work must be 2.00 or better. D grades may be counted toward graduation but not toward a major. Recogniz.ed majors are: Anthropology Art Biology Chemistry Classics Communication Arts Computer Engineering Computer Science Earth Sciences Economics Engineering English French Ge'rman History

Legal Studies Mathematics Music Norwegian Philosophy Physical Education Physics Political Science Psychology Religion Scandinavian Area Studies Social Work Sociology Spanish

Not more than 40 semester hours earned in one department may be applied toward the bachelor's degree in the CoUge.

In addition to meeting general university requirements, candi足 dates in the College must meet the requirements of Option J, II, or Ill: I. 16 semester hours in one foreign language' II. 8 semester hours in one foreign language' 4 semester hours in history, literature, or language (must be a diiferent language or intermediate level of the language used in line 1 ) 4 semester hours in logic, math/computer science (except MATH 91 and 99), or statistics Ill. 4 semester hours in history, literat ure, O r language 4 semester hours in social science, which may include geography 4 semester hours in natural science, excluding math, com足 puter science, and geography 4 semester hours in logic, math/computer science (except MATH 91 and 99) or statistics 'Option 1 may be satisfied by four years of high school study in one foreign language. If students have less than four years, placement and credit should be dete'rmined by examination. Freshmen planning to continue in a foreign language begun in high school should take the College Board Placement Test offered during orientation. (This test is require'd of t h ose freshmen who plan to study German, French, or Spanish.) Continuation of a foreign language should not be deferred. Students with 2-3 years of high school language who wish t o continue should register for t h e second year course. Students may receive credit for any language course in which they are placed without regard to high school credit. Final decision of placement is made by the Depa rtment of Languages. Students may not receive credit if they voluntarily select a course level lower than that in which the department places them. The foreign language requirement in Option II may be met by satisfactory scores on a proficiency examination or by more than two years of high school work in a single language. Two years are suificient if the grade point average for the total units in that language is 3.00. Candidates for the BA in English, or for the B.A. in Education with concentration in English, must meet Option I. No course will be allowed to meet both general university requirements and College of Arts and Sciences requirements. Where possible, courses taken to fulfill such requirements shall be in different areas.


39

Communication Arts I n order to explore fully their poten tial as human beings, people must first expand their abilities to communicate. Communica tion is the process by which feelings and ideas are shared and is the fou ndation on which learning rests. Providing a field for both humanistic and scient ific research, the communication arts focus on how and why people communicate th rough lang uage (both spoken and written) and through nonverbal means. The effects of all forms of human com­ mun ication are also studied. Within the Department of Commu nication Arts, four distinct, yet interrelated areas of human commu nication may be explored: broadcasting, journalism, interpersonal communication, and theater. St udents majoring in any of these areas articulate and test their ideas, develop their individual abilities, and gain competence in various strategies for improving effective communication. They acquire k nowledge and sk ills that apply to nearly every aspect of their private and pu blic lives. C areer prospects for students trained in com­ mun ication are excellent. A person's career may ultima tely turn out to be qu ite different from what was originally anticipated, of cou rse, but in a ra pidly changing world, certain fu ndamental sk ills and resources are necessary for adaptation and success. As the work environment in the coming decades becomes increasingly oriented toward communications, it will be critically important for students to have the ability to commu nicate ciearlyand effectively, both orally and i n writing. Those who major or minor in one of the communication arts will be fa r ahead of their contemporaries who neglect to prepare for the world of tomorrow.

FACULTY Spicer, Chair; Bartanen, Becvar, Doughty, Inch, Nordholm, O'Donnell, Parker, Rowe, Watson, Wilson. CORE REQUIREMENT: Only the following COurses hom

Communication Arts may be used to meet the COre requirement in the arts: 1 51 , 1 60, 162, 241, 250, 359, 363, 364, 458. BACHELOR OF ARTS MAJOR:

40 semester hours in any of

the areas of concentration: I . Broadcasting·Req uired Cou rses: 1 23, 1 7 1, 233, 283, 373, 374, 378, 381, plus 8 hours hom communication arts courses selected in consultation with adviser. Required supporting areas: 4 hours each in economics, history, and political science plus 8 additional hours in one of those areas. Stu· dents must earn a grade of B in 283 or have the instructor's permissio n in order to advance in the sequence.

2. I nterper s ona l Communication.Required Cuurses: 1 23, 233, 283, 326, 32�, 435, 436, plus 1 2 hours hom communication arts (uu r:,t.!s se le c ted in con!'uit ation \\lith adviser. 3. Juurnalism -Required Cou rses : 1 23, 1 7 1 , 2.13, 283, 380, 38 1 . 384, 480, plus 8 hours from communication c1rts CourSI.?S �L'iected in consultation with cl dviser. Required supporting ,l rea5: 4 hours Qach in ec o nOini c s, histury. and political scic.nce plus 8 addition�l t hours in on� of those arl:'a�. Students must earn a grade of Il in 283 or have the instructor's permis s i un in order t(J advance in the sequence. 4. Public Relations-Required Cours es : 1 23, 1 7 l , 233, 283, 285, 326, 328, 330, 4.15, 436. 5. Theater-Required Cuurses: 1 5 1 , 160, 225, 241, 250, 356, 357, 363, 364, 425, plus 6 hours from cl)mmunication arts courses selected in con su l t u tion with adviser. Pending finnl faculty approval, the d e partment anticipates offering theater emphases in both acting/directing and desi�n/technical.

I n a d d ition to requirements listed abuve, c andi d a t es for the B.A. degree must me"t the foreign language requirement in the College of Arts and Sciences. BACHELOR OF FINE ARTS MAJOR: At least 52 seme.ter hours plus 2 practicums in any of the t wo areas of concentratiun: Broadcasting-Required Course s : 123, 1 7 1 , 233, 283, 373, 374, 378, and 38 1 , plus 20 hours selected in cO'bultation with adviser. Theater-Required Courses: 1 23 or 1 60, 1 5 1 , 241 , 250, 356, 357, 363, 364, and 454, plu, 16 hours selected in consultation with adviser. Pending final faculty approval, the department antici­ pates offering th eate r emphases in both acting/directing and design/technical. BACHElOR OF ARTS IN EDUCATION: See School of

Education. MINORS

I nterpersonal Communication: 20 semester hours, including 123, 233, 326 or 328, 330, and 435 or 436. Public Relations: 20 semester hours, including. 1 23, 1 7 1 , 283, 2R5, and 435 or 436. Theater: 20 semester hours, includin g 1 5 1 , 160, 241, 250, plus 4 hours hom commun ication arts courses selected in consultntio.n with adviser. The Dance Minor is cross-referenced with the School llf Physical Education. See the description of that m inor under P hysica l Educ a tion . The Publishing and Printing Arts Min or is cross-referenced with the Department of English. See the description of that minor under English.

CO URSE OFFERINGS 1 23

FUNDAMENTALS O F HUMAN COMMUNICAnON

Foundations course that introduces the student to a variety of communication contexts. Emphasizes three areas: communication concepts, interpersonal communiccltion, and public speaking. I II (4)

1 51

STAGE TECHNOLOGY

Basic t heory and procedure of technical aspects in set building. costume construct ion, basic drafting. scenery, the assembling. handling. management of the stage, and extensive shop work. I (4)

1 60

INTRODUCTION TO THEATER

Study of both practical and theoret ical aspects of th"ater. Exposure to thea ter and its numerous offshoots (e.g., film, television, rOck concerts) through audience pdrticipation and personal contact. Developmen t of heightened awareness and appreciation of what makes fo r good theater. (4)


40 162

HISTORY OF AMERICAN FILM

Concentr,"es on the development and growth of the motion picturt' in the U n i t ed States from 1895 to the present. Emphasis on the film director, whose implt'mentation of film technique and theory serves as the formative artistic force in the cinema. Societal influences such as economic factors, public a t t it udes and mores, and political positions reflected in the United States throughout t he past 75 years, which provide the film media with shape and thematic focus, will provide parallel points of reference. (4)

171

MASS MEDIA

Survey of the mass media. History, organization, and mechanics of print and broadcast media. Role of mass commu nication in developing the political, social, and economic fabrics of a demo­ cratic society. Analysis of the journalist's audience, journalistic vocat ions, and social and legal responsibilities o f the media. ( 4 )

225, 425

COMMUNICATION ARTS PRACTICUM

325

TOPICS IN COMMUNICATION

326

GROUP COMMUNICATION

Various content, dependent on faculty assessment of student needs and interests. Topics announced during the fall semester preceding the course offering. Prerequisite: 1 23 or consent of instructor. ( 2 )

Survey and analysis of smal i group communication theory and research. I I (4)

328

330

356

233

357

An introduct ion to the theoretical concepts and research tools of interpersonal and mass communication research. Prerequisite: 1 23 or consent of instructor. (4)

234

INTRODUCTION TO RESEARCH IN COMMUNICATION

The study of methods of gathering, interpreting, and evaluating data in the study of human communication. Both quantitative and qllalitative research methods. (2)

236

INTERPERSONAL COMMUNICATION

The study of theories and variables relating to the nature of and probil'ms involved in the communication of individuals on a on.e­ to-om' basis. (2)

PUBLIC SPEAKING

Focus on a variety of speaking situations and presentational methods. Topics vary according to the skill level of course participants. Potential topics include audience analYSis, technical reporting, using visual aids, and persuasion. Open to both majors and non -majors. (4)

One semester hour credit may be earned each semester, but only 4 semeste.r hours may be u�ed to meet u n iversity requirements. Students put classroom theory to practical application by indi­ viduallv completing a project relating to an aspect of communica­ tion. An instructor in the area o f interest must approve the project and agree to provide guidance_ I II.

FOUNDATIONS OF COMMUNICATION THEORY

ARGUMENT AT10N

The study of reason-giving in social decision-making. AnalYSis of the genres, forms, and techniques of arguers. Particular emphasis is given t o studying academic, legal, and public policy debates. (4)

STAGE LIGHTING

Stage lighting from th" basic development of electricity and lighting instruments to the complete design of lighting a show. \I (4)

INTERMEDLATE ACTING, THE ACTOR AT WORK

Study of the actor on today's stage. Work on the analysis and performance of t he modern realistic play. Practical experience in the art of the actor t h rough pE'rformance of scenes from plays of the modern theater, emphaSis on the importance of play analysis by the actor, and examination of current acting theory. Prereq ui­ site: 250. (4)

358

ADV ANCED ACTING

Study of the work of an actor; character analysis and embodiment, using scenes from plays; includes styles of acting as defined by historical period. Prerequisite: 357. I I (4)

359

ACTING FOR THE NON-ACTOR

The art of communicating the essence of a piece of literature to an alldience; int('rpreting it experientially, logically, and emotionally. Individ u.11 and group performance. I II (4)

Study of the actor's craft and the implementation of theory. Specifically designed for those who have nourished a curiosity to explore the art of acting but have been int imidated by a lack of knowledge or prior expe.rience. Introduction o f acting theory to those who have never partiCipated in any theatrical endeavor. Emphasis on individual awareness and interest. Not open to theater majors or minors. (4)

250

363

241

ORAL INTERPRETATION OF LITERATURE

FUNDAMENT ALS OF ACTING

An eXclmil1ation of the work of actor� and act resses, their natural and Iparned skilb; exercises in memory, imagination, and observa­ tion; improvisations and scenes from modern plavs. (4)

283

NEWS WRITING

Basic news and feature writing for print and broadcast media with special attention to clarity, accuracy, and deadlines. Most writing done in class under deadline. Techniques of interviewing and fact-gat hering. News staff organization and procedures. 1,11 (4)

285

INTRODUCTION TO PUBLIC RELATIONS

Introduction to the theory, research, and practical aspects of public relations. Problem-solving toward creating shared under­ standings between profit and non-profit organizations and their various constituencies. Strong emphasis on writing. (4)

322

MEN, WOMEN, AND COMMU NICATION

Introduction to the means by which appropriate gender roles are commu nicated by the mass media and the ways in which cultural gender role definitions influence how people communicate with each other. Prerequisite: [ 23 or consent of instructor. (2)

323

WORDS, PEOPLE, AND SOCIETY

Examination of how language affects one's interpretation of the world. Focus on the use of symbols, particularly in relation to the mass media. Prereq uisite: 1 23 or consent of instructor. ( 2 )

324

NONVERBAL COMMUNICATION

Focus on the nonverbal aspects of com.munication within the framl'work o f interpersonal interaction. Prereq uisite: 1 23 or con­ s('nt of instructor. (2)

HISTORY OF THE THEATER: AESCHYLUS THROUGH TURGENIEV

Theater as it evo[ved from its primitive origin through representa­ tive societies; Ancient Greece, Rome, Renaissance, modern Euro­ pean and American. Emphasis on religious, philosophical, and political thought as reflected in the drama of each period. [ (4)

364

HISTORY OF THE THEATER: IBSEN THROUGH TO THE PRESENT

(See description for 363.) I I (4)

373

AUDIO PRODUCTION

Elements of audio production; analysis of program design, script­ ing, and production tools and techniques. Lecture and laboratory. Prereq uisite: 283 or consent of instructor. (4)

374

VIDEO PRODUCTION

Analysis and application of program design, writing and produc­ tion tools and techniques. Lecture and laboratory. PrerequiSite: 373. (4)

378

BROADCAST JOURNALISM

Techniques of broadcast journalism. Applications of news gather­ ing, writing, and reporting in a broadcast context. News and feature assignments using broadcast equipme.nt in the field and studio. Prerequisite: 374. (4)

380

NEWSPAPER EDITING, LAYOUT, AND DESIGN

Selection and editing of news copy and headline writing. Selection, sizing, and cropping of photos. Functions of layout. Principles o f newspaper design a n d their practical applications. Prerequisite: 283. (4)

381

MEDIA LAW AND PRINCIPLES

The theory and application of law i n news gathering, pUblishing, and broadcasting. (4)


41 384

ADVANCED NEWS REPORTING

Reporting of politics and police, courts and other governmental

functions. Investigative reporting and writing. Blend of field trips and writing exercises. Prerequisite: 283. (2)

388

EDITORIAL WRITING

Research and writing of editorials and commentaries for news­

papers and broadcast. Function of the editorial and editorial pages in the news media. Prerequisite: 283. (2)

389

NEWS MEDIA ETHICS

Ethical pract ices at the corporate, sta ff, and individual levels

within news organizations. (2)

435

ORGANIZATIONAL COMMUNICATION

Communication systems and studies within formal organiz.ations.

Focus on theory and research of informational and directive

communication as related t o c hclnnels, structures, stat us, involve­

ments, morale, and leadership. Prerequisite: 233. (4)

436

PERSUASION

Analysis and evaluation o f the dimensions of persuasion in communication emphasizing contemporary theoretical models

and research . Investigation of how research and models may be applied in contemporary settings. Prerequisite: 233. (4)

446

WORKSHOP IN E F FECTIVE LISTENING

Examination of listening as a critical communication skill, which

can be enhanced through training. Exploration of the art of listening through a week-long series of readings, lect ures, dicus­

sions, exercises, and practical applications. (2)

450

WORKSHOP IN E FFECTIVE PUBLIC SPEAKING

art of the play director. Study of many different directing philosophies. Each student is required to direct scenes from plays

representative of all periods of theater history. A final proje.ct,

consisting of a contemporary scene, will c u lminate the course. Prereq uisites: 1 51, 250, and junior status. II (4)

458

CREATIVE DRAMATICS

Designed to acquaint the student with materials, techniques, and

theories of creative dramatics. Students participate in creative

dramatics. Intended for elementary and junior high school teach­

ers or prospective teachers, theater majors, religious leaders, youth and camp cou nselors, day care workers, social and psycho­

logical work ers, and community theater leaders interested in working with c h ildren. S (4)

475

ADVANCED MEDIA PRODUCTION

Producing. scripting. directing. performing and evaluating sophis­

ticated audio and video programming. Prereq uisite: 378. (4)

480

IN-DEPTH AND INVESTIGATIVE REPORTING

Group reporting i n depth on a single issue. Students select the subject, organize the sta ff, research and interview, provide illus­

trations, edit copy, and lay out the completed work. Submission of

students' work t o the

Mast for possible publication.

Prerequisites:

380, 384 (4)

485

INTRADISCIPLINARY PERSPECTIVES IN COMMUNICATION

A seminar t o acquaint senior level communication arts majors

with the relationship of communication theory, mass communica­ tion, and theater a s parI> of the discipline of human communica­

tion. Limited to

16 students who have completed t h e bulk of their

Audience analysis, topic selection, organiz.a t ion of ideas for

major requirements. Discussion of research and philosophical

delivery. Designed for both novices and those who have had some

paper covering some a p plication of the intradisciplinary nature o f

various aud iences, t y pes of speeches, use of visual aids, and

experience as speakers. A week-long series of lectures, discossions,

readings, exercises, and practical applications to help participants

become more comfortable and effective as speakers. (2)

452

SCENIC DESIGN

Artistic and

technical development of abilities in designing

issues common to the three areas. Students complete a research

communication. ( 4 )

491, 492, 493

SPECIAL STUDIES IN COMMUNICA TION ARTS

Investigations or research in area of special in terest not covered by

regular courses; open to qualified junior or senior students. A

scenery, costomes, and make-up for plays of all periods; v<)rious

student should not begin registration for independent study until

working drawings, and scenic painting. Prereqoisite: 2 5 1 . I I (4)

departmental sponsor. ( 1 -4)

454

596-598

styles and periods as well as preparation of models, renderings,

PLA Y DIRECTION

The role of the director, historically and critically; an intensive

study that is both practical and theoretical in its approach to the

the specific area for investigation has been approved by a

RESEARCH IN COMMUNICATION ARTS

For graduate students o n l y . 0 -4)

Computer Science C omputer science deals with manipulating stored information, both textual and numerical. By using the ideas of computer science along with a computer system people can actually amplify their thought processes. Already many new ideas in mathematics, physics, engineering, chemistry, economics, and other fields were either suggested, verified, or expanded by the use of compu ter science. The exploration of the solar system using space probes would have been impossible without computer science. The list of significant adv ances in knowledge aided by computer science seems endless. C omputer science students study the theory, design, and application of computing systems. The program covers various programming langu ages, the development and analysis of algorith ms, hardware and software design and

special topics in such areas as graphics, pattern recognition, data base management, and fault­ tolerant computing.

FACUL TY: Mathematics and Computer Science Brink, Chair; Bandy, Batker, Beaulieu, Benkhalti, W. Chang, Cook, Dollinger, B. Dorner, C Dorner, Edison, Engelhardt, Hauser, J- Herzog, M. Herzog, N. C Meyer, C L. Nelson, G_ Peterson, Rosenfeld, Ruble, Scott, Spillman, Yiu_


42 BEGINNING CLASSES

{"here are two beginning level classes in c o m put er science: Computer Science 1 1 0 is programming in BASIC and Computer Science 1 44 is programming in Pascal. Students i n te ndi n g to major in computer science or ma t h em d t i cs or who intend to take mor(-' computer science classes ,1re ad v i s ed to take Co m p u ­ ter Science 144 first. Computer Science 1 1 0 is for those who want only an i n t roduction to programming. In place of Com pu ­ tt'r Science 1 1 0 a student may take C o m put e r Science 220.

COMPUTER SCIENCE MAJOR

The progra m is designed to pr o vid e sufficient backgrounds for advanced study at the g rad uate level or for e n te ri ng a pro­ fessional ca ree r . All co m p u ter science majors take a core cu r­ riculum consisting of an introduction to prog ra mm ing in PASCAL, data structures, digital logic. and a ss e m bl y language and com­ puter organ iz at ion ( C om pute r Science 144, 270, 280, and 380). The core courses form a foundation for upper division work, which may include the study of m i croproc essors, computer architecture, automata, modeling and simulation, and co m p ilers as well as other t opic s . The program is supported by PLU's VAX 1 1 /7110 and 1 1 1750 computing systems, along with approximately 40 IBM-PC microcomputers, which are available for ge neral student use. In addition, the department operates an artificial intelligence lab which contains three SUN microcomputer workstations. The department also has available several different microprocessor systems for s tu de nt s t udy as well as a Tektronix 4054 graphics system.

A typical computer science major program is as follows: C o m put er Science 1 44, 270

Freshman year:

S o ph omo re year:

J u nior & Senior y ea rs:

Math 1 5 1 . 152 Computer Science 280, 380 8 hours la b o rator y sc ie n c e S econd c o m put er la n g uage Math 230 or 331 C o m put er science electives ( C o m put er Science 490 may be taken several times with different topics) Math 335, 345

Careers in computer sc ien ce in clu de d esi gn i ng computers and computer systems and applying computers to areas such as business a dmini s t rat ion, economics, and the sciences, as well as teaching and res ea rch. Students interested in business admin­ istration should take courses in the School of Business Adm i n­ istration ( i n c l u d ing 2111, 282, a n d 487) as well as CO BO L. Students in terested in the design of co m p uters should take Engi­ neering 271. 272. and 352 (along with Physics 1 53 and 1 54). For students interested in th e more theoretical aspects of computer sc i en c e, courses in lo gi c are reco m m en ded ( P hi loso p h y 233, 341, 342, and 343).

BACHELOR OF ARTS MAJOR: 24 semester hours inc lu d i n g C omput er Science 144, 270, 280, 380, 2 hours of a second com­ puter language (240 or 242 are s ugges ted ) and 6 hours of com­ puter science numbered above 320, ex c lu ding 449. Up to 4 hours may be substituted from Math 341, 345, and 346. Required supporting: Math 1 5 1 , 1 52, 230 or 331, 335.

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE MAJOR: 36 semester hours includ­ ing the computer science core and one of three paths. The com­ puter science core ( 18 hours) consists of Computer Science 1 44, 270, 280, 380, and 2 hours of a second programming language (240 or 242 are suggested), excluding 449. Up to 4 hours may be substituted from Math 341, 345, and 346. The paths are as follows:

Artific ia l In tel ligen ce Path requirements CSCI 430 (4 hrs.) CSCI 436 (4 hrs,) CSCI 438 (4 hrs.)

Electives (6 hrs.)

General Path Requirements

Software Path Requirements

Any three o f: CSCl 344 (4 h rs . ) CSCI 355 (2 hrs.) CSCI 375 (4 h rs .) CSCl 430 (4 h rs .) CSc] 480 (4 hrs.) Electives (6-8 hrs.) (Total · 18 hrs.)

CSCI 344 (4 hrs.) CSCI 355 ( 2 h rs .) CSCI 375 (4 hrs.)

Electives (8 hrs.)

The electives include any upper division computer science class ( n um bered above 320), Math 341 or Math 346. Req ui red supporting: Math 1 5 1 , 1 52, 230 or 331, 335, 345, plus a one-year sequence of a laboratory science (Physics 1 5 3 - 1 54, Chemistry 1 1 5-1 16, Biology 1 55 - 1 56), or 8 hours of ea rth scie nc es. Students are u rg ed to co m p lete a minor in an area where co m p u t ers h av e wi d e a p p lica b i l i t y such as the natural sciences, SOcilll sciences, or business.

MINOR IN COMPUTER SCIENCE: Com put er Science 1 44, 270, 280, and 380 pl u s 2 hours of a second com pu t e r la n g ua ge . Req u i red suporting: Ma t h 1 5 1 or 1 28. MINOR IN IN FORMATION SCIENCE: C o mputer Science 144, 270, 467, Business A dmi n i st ra t i o n 2111, 325, p l us 4 hOu rs from Business Administration 282, 364, 421. 487. S t ro n g l y recommended: C om pu ter Science 242. MASTER OF ARTS IN COMPUTER APPLICATIONS: See G rad ua te Catalog. MASTER O F SCIENCE IN COMPUTER SCfENCE: S ee Graduate Catalog.

CO URSE OFFERINGS A grade of C or higher is strongly recommended in all prerequisite courses. 110

BASIC

I ntroduction to in tera ct ive co m p uting, branching. loo p ing. sub­ scripts, functions, input/output, subroutines and s im ple file tech­ niques in the context of the BASIC language. 1 1 0 and 220 may not both be taken for credit. Not normally taken by computer science majors. Prerequisite: high school algebra. I II (2)

115

INTRODUCTION T O THE WORLD OF MATHEMATICS AND COMPUTERS (MATH 115)

A s t u d y of mathematics and computers in the modern world with a w id e variety of applications and a historical perspec t iv e. This class is des ig ned for s t uden ts without extensive k. nowledge of ma them a t i c s, but w h o want to acquire a basic understanding of the nat ure of m a t h em a t i c s and computers. Not intended for majors in science or math ema t ics or computer science. Some BASIC programming is incl uded . Pre req uisi t e : one year of high school algebra. I II (4)

1 44

INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER SCIENCE

An introduction to computer science including algorithm d eS ig n, st ructured programming, numerical! non-numerical a pp l ica t i o ns and use of data files. The PASCAL progra m ming la n g uag e will be used. Prerequisites: MATH 133 or MATH 128 or eq u i va le n t . I II ( 4 )

1 99

DIRECTED READING

Supervised s t ud y of topics selected to meet the individual's needs or i n terest s; primarily for s t udent s awarded adva nced place m en t in computer science. Admission only by d epart m e n t invitation. ( 1 -2)

210

COMPUTERIZED INFORMATION SYSTEMS

C omp uter systems and their use, word p rocess i ng. s p rea dsh ee t s, and file management u.sing existing software packages on IBM PCs. 2 1 0 and 220 cannot both be taken for credit. Prereq u isi t e: 1 10. Prerequisite or co- req uisit e:MATH 128. I " (2)

220

COMPUTERIZED IN FORMATlON SYSTEMS WITH BASIC

I n t roduction to computers and computer systems and their use. Programming in the BASIC language using branching, s ublooping. subscripts, input/output, character manipulation, subroutines, word processing. spreadsheets, and file management using exist­ ing software packages on IBM PC s. Students cannot take both 220 and either 1 1 0 or 2 1 0 fo r credit. Prerequisites: MATH 128, MATH 1 33, or equivalent. I " (4)

240

FORTRAN

accelerated introduction to the FORTRAN programming lang u ag e. Study of the rules of statement formation. To pic s include input/output, computation, b ra n c hing. looping. data types, and subprograms. Numeric and non-numeric problems will b e solved. Some previous experience with progra m min g is recom­ mended. I II (2)

An

242

COBOL

243

ADVANCED PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES

Presentation and application of the COBOL p rogra m m in g lan­ guage to business pro blem s . P re requis i t e: 144 or 1 1 0-2 1 0 or consent of instructor, " (2)

A study of advanced programming l an g ua ges such as ADA, C. et c ., and the operating s y ste m U N I X . P rereq u isi te: 270. I (2)


43 270

DATA STRUCTURES

470

Continuation of Pascal programming techniques and a study of basic data struchlres including linked lists, trees, queues, stacks and graphs. Applications of these forms to sorting, searching, and data storage will be made. Prereq uisite: a grade of C - or higher in

144. 1 11 (4)

280

principles of combinational and sequential logic design are reviewed. Simulators, computer hardware description lang uages, site: 280. II (2)

DIGITAL LOGIC

circuits, digital arithmet ic, data con version, and other components of a computer. Prereq uisite: 1 44. I I I (4)

OPERA TING SYSTEMS

An introduction to computer operation including batch process ing

systems, interacting systems, multi- programming systems, stor­ age management techniques and resource contro!. l n addition, the courSe includes an analysis of the deadlock problem and basic file systems. Prerequisite: 270. I (4)

348

An introduction to use of CAD systems for digital design. Basic

and other computer-aided design tools are developed. Prerequi­

Boolean algebra and combinatorial logic applied to basic logic

344

COMPUTER-AIDED DESIGN OF DIGITAL SYSTEMS

MODELING AND SIMULATION

An applications structured progra mming course solving various

480

MICROPROCESSORS

Study of microprocessors and their use in microcomputer systems. Data representat ion, instruction formats, programming, inter­ rupts,

110 interfacing,

sessions. Prerequisites: 280, 380. II (4)

488

VLSI DESIGN

An introduction to the design of very large scale integrated systems using computer aided design methods. Topics include MOS devices, fabrication procedures, chip architecture, chip topology, and system timing. Prerequisites: 270, 280. I (2)

problems. Statist ics, data structures, mathematical modeling, simulation, documentation, and team programming techniques

490

will be applied. Prereq uisites: MATH 151, esC! 270 and either

a. AUTOMATA

MATH 230 or MATH 331. aly 1 987-R8 11 ( 4 )

355

An introduction to the organiZation, specification, and analysis of programming languages. Topics including parsing, data repre­ sentation, object code, run-time machine structures and optimiza­ tion. Prerequisite: 270. II (2)

DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF ALGORITHMS

Basic data structures reviewed and applied to the analysis of problems associated with searching, sorting, strings, and minimal paths. Study of the complexity and storage requirements of the algorithms. Use of top-down and structured programming. Pre­ requisite: 270, MATH 1 5 1 . lJ (4)

380

ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE AND COMPUTER ORGANIZATION

Computer assembly language applied to various problems. TopiCS include data forms, instruction

formats, addressing, lin k i ng,

macro definition, and c.omputer architecture. Prerequisite: 270. l l l

(4)

385

COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE

An introduction to the structure and opera ting of la rge computer systems. Topics include data representation, memory structure,

110

processi ng, multi- processing systems such as parallel, pipe­

line, and stack machi nes. Exam ples of the architecture of several large systems are analyzed including IBM 320, TI ASC, and CDC STAR. Prerequisite: 380. (2)

386

DISTRIBUTED SYSTEMS

An introduction to computer networks and computer communi­ cation. Topics include system topology, message and packet switching, bus structures and data-link transmission. PrerequiSite: 280. aly 1 988-89 (2)

430

INTRODUCTION TO ARTI FICIAL INTELLIGENCE

An introduction to concepts of artificial intelligence, including <,x pert syst ems, natural language processing, image understand· ing, and problem solving t<,chniques. The AI programming

Study of the theory of computation. Turning mach ines, formal and the halting problem may be considered. Prerequisites: 375, MATH 335. b. FAULT TOLERANT COMPUTING An introduction to the methods of fault detection and location in digital systems and to techniques for the reliable design of computing systems. Topics include: the D-Algorithm, Boolean Differences, Path Testing, Triple Modular Redundancy Design and the design of self-ch<,cking checkers. Prereq uisite: 280. c. SOFlWARE ENGINEERING An engineering approach to the development of large software packages. Topics include software requirements definition, structured programming, software design, specifications, dnd software testing. Prereq uisite: 270. d. SWITCHING THEORY Advanced applications of Boolean algebra to digital system design. Topics include decoding networks, harmonic analysis, ULM's, and cellular logic circuits. Prerequisite: 280. e. COMPARATIVE PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES The study of different modem high level languages from a t heoretical and practical viewpoint, their features and imple­ mentation techniques. Prerequisit<': 270.

II FORMATION THEORY AND CODING The study of information storage and representation. Topics include basic coding techniques, measurement of information content, and information transmission. Prerequisites: 270, MATH 1 52. g. MICROPROCESSOR INTERFACE Techniques for connecting computers to peripherals and communications devices are cov<'red. Topics include: bus structures, real time control, software structures and parallel interfacing. Prereq uisite: 480. h. COMPUTER SECURITY The study of the protection of data and program access to computer systems. Topics includedata encryption, code break­ ing techniques, access controls and inference controls. Pre­ requisite: 270. i. COMPUTER GRAPHICS Exploration of techniques used to generate and in terpret computer graphics. Transformation, restoration, enhancement

language LISP will b<, taught and used in several projects. Prereq uisite: 270. I ( 4 )

436

PATTERN RECOGNITION

The use of the computer to recognize patterns in data. Topics include art ificial intelligence, duster analysis algorithms, learning algorithms, and pattern processing. Pr<'requisites: 270, MATH 152. all' (4)

438

E XPERT SYSTEMS

The development of Al systems which operate at the lev<,1 of a h u m a n expert. Students will explore the structure of expert systems and use an expert system development tool such as OPS

5.

Prerequisite: 270. a/y II (4)

449

COMPUTER SCIENCE IN THE SECONDARY SCHOOL

Methods and materials in secondary school computer science teaching. LOGO, PI LOT, etc., may be considered. Does not count toward a major i n computer science. Prerequisite: 144. I I (2)

467

DATA BASE MANAGEMENT

Data structures and storage methods are reviewed. The hier­ archical, network, and relational modes are studied. Prerequisite:

270. I (4)

SEMINAR IN COMPUTER SCIENCE

Selected topiCS from t h e list below. II (2-4)

lang uages, recursive theory, complexity. NP-completeness,

COMPILERS

375

data communica tions, available software,

and program development studied in lecture and laboratory

softwa re, and other topics, depending upon available equip­ ment and instructor. Prerequisite: 270, MATH 1 5 1 and 230 or

33 1 .

491, 492

INDEPENDENT STUDY

Prereq uisite: consent of department chair. ( 1-4)

495

COMPUTER SCIENCE RESEARCH

The student becomes involved in an ongoing research project in computer science under the supervision of a faculty member. Prerequisite: consent of instructor. ( 1 -4)

520

ADVANCED DIGITAL DESIGN

Continuation of topics i n 280. Th<, design of digital control systems; asynchronous circuits; digital signal processors; digital filters; timing considerations; use of computer-aided design tools.

(4)

538

EXPERT SYSTEMS

Same as 43R. Requires students to generate an expert system. Prerequisite: 430. a/y II 1988-89 (4)


44 544

ADVANCED OPERATING SYSTEMS

Continuation of topics in 344 and 3R5 leading to the development of an operating system. Emphasis on the interaction between the hardware structure and the operating system; operating data struct ures; and operating system security. all' II 1 987·88 (2)

555

COMPILER IMPLEME NTATION

Continuation of 355; the structure of programming languages; data and control abstractions; compiler implementation; run time management; an i n t roduction to code optimization. Prereq uisites; 335, 380. all' 11 1 988·89 (4)

570

MATHEMATICS OF COMPUTER SCIENCE

Survey of t h e basic mathematical tools required in computer science, including graph theory, network !low a na l y sis, queueing t heory and its applications, stochastic models, and transform theory. Prerequisite; MATH 335. (4)

580

MICROPROCESSOR DEVELOPMENT SYSTEMS

Development of software on 8 and 1 6 bit microprocessors; microprocessor applications; interfacing; microprocessor organi­ zation; interrupt structures. (2)

588

PERFORMANCE EVALUATION

A survey of techniques of modeling concurrent processes and the resources they share. Includes levels and t y pes of system simula· tion, performance prediction, benc.hmarking and synthetic load· ing, hardware and software monitors. ( 2 )

590

GRADUATE SEMINAR

Topics vary by semester, including: a)Automata; b)Fault ·Tolerant Comput ing; c) Software Engineering; d) Switching Theory; e) Comparative Programming Languages; f) Information Theory and Coding; g) Microprocessor Interfact'; and h) Computer Security. (4)

593

THESIS

Research study to meet thesis option requirement for M.A. or M.5. degree. ( I ·6)

Coop erative Education C ooperative education assumes that experiential learning can be an appropriate component of any quality educational program. Though it shares this assumption with other experiential learning strate­ gies such as internships, fieldwork placemen ts, and practica, ,it differs in several respects. Cooperative education introduces students to an educational work experience early in their academic careers and weaves opportunities for work and learning throughout their undergraduate programs, rather than concentrating on practical course work at the end. As the name suggests, cooperative edu­ cation represents a systematic cooperation between the university and a variety of employ­ ers in the community. A lthough the program's career-related advan­ tages are obvious, its main benefits are educa­ tional. Students gain an appreciation of the rela­ tionship between theory and application, and may learn, both early and first-hand, about new developments in a particular field. Cooperative education provides timely and extended oppor­ tunities for developing communication skills orally and in writing. A cooperative educa tion program can enable stu-­ dents to become aware of opportunities to con­ tribute creatively to the changing dimensions of work in present-day society. The university and employers benefit as well. The university develops stronger and more crea­ tive connections with its community. Employers derive a more efficient devic.e for training and

recruiting. More im portantly, the partnership provides a unique opportunity for employers to participate in an important educational service to the community. TWO MODELS The Cooperative Education Program accommodates both part·time ,1Od full-time work modes. Part-time work, which allows students the opportunity t o take on·campus courses concurrently, is labeled the "Parallel Model." A full·time work

experience fits under the "Alternating ModeL" In most cases students will follow ont' or the other, but some departments or schools may develop sequences that combine both parallel and alternating work modes. Full·time summer work, for example, would be classified as an alterna ting cooperative education experience, and many summer jobs provide for learning that relates to students ' aca· demic objectives.

THE PROCESS FOR STUDENTS In order to be eligible for admission into t h e Cooperative Education Program a student must have completed 30 semester hours and be in good standing. Students who wish to participate apply to either the Co·op Office in Ramstad Hall or to a Co·op faculty coordinator or sponsor serving this function in specific departments, divisions, or schools. Both written application and personal interview are required in order to determine eligib ili t y, terms for placement, areas of i.nterest, academic req!Jirements, and kinds of pOSitions available. Students are responSible for their learning activities during their cooperative education position. Each student must seek out and arrange for academic supervision from a faculty coordj· nator or sponsor. Faculty are responsible for insuring that the work experience provides appropriate learning opportunities, for helping to establish t h e learning agreement. and for deter· mining a grade. Learning is facilitated through: ( 1 ) use of a "Learning Agree· ment"; ( 2 ) completing an academic project; (3) periodic contact with the facu l t y sponsor; (4) attendance at one workshop d u ro ing t he work experiencl'; and (5) an on·site supervisor who accepts t he responsibility to function in a resource role.


45 The learning agreement, developed by each student with the assistance of a faculty sponsor, lists learning objectives with measurable indicators of learning, and also incorporates sup­ plemt·ntary resources such as reading materials and participa­ tion in work- related training sessions. The learning agreement is signed by the student, the faculty sponsor, the program direc· tor, and the work supervisor, each of whom receives a copy. Contact between the faculty sponsor and the student must be sufficient to allow the sponsor to serve as a resource and provide academic supervision. Typically this can be accomplished during one or two site visits. Students in a "parallel" coopera­ tive education program may arrange to meet with the sponsor on campus. Those involved in "alternating" programs some dis­ tance from campus may maintain contact through periodic phone conferences, when site visitS are im practical. Employers are responsible to: ( I ) provide opportunities for students to achieve their learning objectives within the limits of their work settings; (2) help students develop skills related to the contextual aspects of t he work world (such as relationships with co-work ers); and (3) facilitate students' integration into their work setting so that their employment proves valuable and productive.

Students are required to register for at least one credit hour after accepting a Co-op position. Throughout an undergraduate academic career a student may receive a maximum of 16 semes­ ter hours of credit in cooperative education.

Martinson, Director.

COURSE OFFERINGS 376

WORK E XPERIENCE I

476

WORK EXPERIENCE II

A supervised educational experience in a work setting. Requires the completion of a Cooperative Education Learning Agreement in consultation with a faculty sponsor. ( 1 - 8) A su pervised educational experie.nce in a work setting providing

for an advanced level of responsibility. Requires the completion of a Cooperative Education Learning Agreement i n consultation with a faculty sponsor. (1 -8)

Earth Sciences E arth Sciences explore the components of the physical universe from humanity's existing habi­ tat to the foundations of the earth, and beyond to the planets and the stars. A program of studies in these fields acquaints students with their physical world and provides perspective on human develop­ ment in time and space. Environmental problems also are approached through t he earth scienc es, which impart a realistic appreciation of society's dependence on earth's physical resources. I n providing such a perspective, t he department fulfills the needs of a variety of students seeking to broaden their liberal arts education, and also provides more specialized k nowledge in support of several fields, particularly for minor or major studies leading to careers in resources and environ­ mental management or scientific research. S ituated between the Olympic Mountains and the Cascade Range, the department is ideaUy located to examine geologic and marine environments, which are unsurpassed for teaching and learning purposes. Graduates in eart h sciences hold positions in the National Park Service, the US. Geological Survey, oil and mining groups, and geotechnical engineer­ ing, as well as education. The demand for quali­ fied graduates in pollution management and geotechnical applica tions continues. Most fields require post-grad uate degrees, and to this end, a number of PLU graduates have pursued master's and doctoral programs at major univer­ sities.

FACULTY

Benham, Chair; Foley, Lowes; assisted by Huestis.

The department's programs remain flexible, allowing fairly easy scheduling of courses. However, students should notice that upper division courses are offered on a two-year cycle. Early declaration of majors or minors in earth sciences will facilitate development of individual programs and avoid scheduling conflicts. BACHELOR O F SCIENCE (GEOLOGY) MAJOR: 40 semester hours; courses include: 1 31 , 132, 323, 324, 325, 326, 327, 328, and 425, plus one from 330, 333/334, 341, or 360; remaining hours to be applied to departmental seminars ( m inimum of t hree). Necessary supporting courseS include: Chemistry l I S, 1 1 6; Physics 1 25, 1 26 ( 1 47 and 148 labs)(or Physics 1 53, 1 54 and labs); Mathematics l SI, 1 52 or Computer Science 220. Biology 323 and additional courses are recommended when paleontology is a major interest. BACHELOR O F ARTS MAJOR: 32 semester hours; courses include 1 3 1 plus at least three lower divisiOn and five upper division courses. Attendance at departmental seminars is required during junior and senior years. A field course such as 330, 360, or 425 is recommended. Required supporting courses include: Chemistry 1 04, 105, or 1 1 5, 1 1 6; Physics 1 25, 1 26 ( 1 47, 148 labs); Mathematics 1 5 1 . Recommended are: Computer Science 220; Biology 323; Mathematics 1 52. Options reflect a student's interests and are discussed with an adviser. BACHELOR O F ARTS I N EDUCATION: See School of

Education. MINOR: 20 semester hours of earth science courses, exclud­ ing interim courses, completed with grade oj C or higher.

CO URSE OFFERINGS 131

PHYSICAL GEOLOGY

1 32

HISTORICAL GEOLOGY

An introductory course dealing with the hu man geologic habitat, both at present and as it has developed through time; materials of earth (and lunar) crusts, their derivation through major earth processes and formation of surface features-with emphasis On their significance t o cultur"1 development and civilization; labora­ tory study o f rock s, minerals, and geologic mapping; field trips are arranged. I II (4) A sequel to 1 3 1 which concentrates On earth history, particularly the formation of the North American continent: sedimentar)' rocks, fossils, and stratigraphic record are related to tectonic upheaval and growth; field trips are arranged. II (4)


46 202

GENERAL OCEANOGRAPHY

Oceanography and its relationship to other iields; physical, chemical, biological, climat ic, and geological aspects of the sea; field trips. II (4)

222

CONSERVATION OF NATURAL RESOURCES

Principles and problems Qf public a n d private stewardship o f our resources with special reierence to the Pacific Northwest. I II (4)

323

MINERALOGY

Crystallography and mineralogy, both ore and rock-forming m inerals. Prerequisites: 131 and high school chemistry or consent oi instructor I nterim 1 990 (4)

324

PETROLOGY

The occu rrence and classification of common rock types; processes by which they were formed with reference to t heoretical princi­ piI'S. Prerequisite: 131 o r consent of i ns tru ct or II a /y 1 987-88 (3)

325

STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY

The form and spatial relatio nships of vilrious rock masses and an introduction to rock deformation; consideration of basic processes to understand mountain building and continental formation; laboratory emphasizes practical t ech ni q ues which enable students to analyze regional s t ructural patterns. PrerequiSite: 131 or consent of instructor. I I a/y 1 988-89 (3)

326

OPTICAL MINERALOGY

Theory and practice oi mineral studies using the petrogra phiC microscope, including immersion oil techniques, production of t h i n sections, and determination of minerals by means of t heir optical properties. This provides a n introducHon to t h e broader subject of petrography. I al l' 1 987-88 (3)

327

STRATIGRAPHY AND SEDIMENTATION

Formational principles of surface-accumulated rocks, and their incorporation in the stratigraphic record. This subject is basic to field mapping and structural interpretation. I all' 1 987-88 (3)

328

PALEONTOLOGY

A svstematic study of the fossil record, combining principles of evolutionary development, paleohabitats and preservation, with practical experience of specimen identification. These studies are fundamental to the understanding of stratigraphy and the geologic time scale. 1 all' 1 988-89 (3)

330

SURVEY AND MAPPING PRINCIPLES

'I n t roduction to techniques and instrumentation of basic survey­ ing and cartography. Includes leveling and transit traverses, baseline measurements, and triangulat ion; also, applications of aerial photos and their interpretation for geologic mapping. Techniques for compiling geologic data and construction of geologic maps are among the essential skills covered_ I I (3)

333

GEOLOGIC HAZARDS

Study of geologic features and processes that cr�ate hazards when encroached upon by humans, including earthquakes, floods, landslides, avalanches, volcanic eruptions, su bsidence, soils, and coasts _ Emphas is on understanding geology of events and solu­ tions to problems created by the hazards. 1 1 987-88 (2)

. � II

334

GROUNDWATER

The origin of groundwater, flow in aquifers, groundwater resource evaluation and development, wells, water quality, including pollution, and geothermal resources. Emphasis on problems with groundwater in the Puget Sound area, with additional examples from diverse geologic environments. I I 1 987-88 (2)

341

ENERGY AND MINERAL RESOURCES FOR THE FUTURE

A survey of t he world's energy and mineral resources comprising the raw materials of industrialized societies. Studies include geological occu rrence, global distribution, and quantities of such reserves; also, their fundamental technologies and economics, as well a s the political framework in which they are developed. I all' 1 988-89 (3)

360

GEOLOGY OF WESTERN WASHINGTON

The minerals, rocks, and geological history of the region extending from the Columbia Plateau to the Pacific Ocean. ,Includes field trips. Prerequisite: previous earth science or consent of instructor. S (4)

425

GEOLOG1C FIELD MAPPING

Combining a survey of regional field geology wit h a series of local mapping projects, this course i ntroduces field techniques of geologic map-making. Inc1uded are traversing and data assem b l y, map construction, section measurements, struL(ural analysis, and chronological sy n thes is_ Graphics techniques are also covered. Prere qui s it es: previous geology courses and consent of instructor. S (5)

490

SEMINAR 0 -2)

491, 492 493

INDEPENDENT STUDY 0 -4)

SEMINAR IN TECTONICS

Reviews of books and journal articles dealing with various aspects of large-scale movements of the earth's crust. 1 988-89 0 -2)

494

SEMINAR IN GEOCHEMISTRY

Reviews of literature on the chemical aspects of magmatism, metamorphism, lit hification, hydrothermal systems_ 1 1 987-88 ( 1 -2)

495

SEMINAR IN GEOPHYSICS

Reviews of literature concerning t h e physics of t he earth: gravity and isostasy; seismicity; magnetism and polarity; radioactive and geothermal processes; also application to exploration techniques_ 1 988-89 ( 1 -2)

496

SEMINAR IN ECONOMIC MINERAL DEPOSITS

Selected readings on t h e nature, origin, occurrence of, and exploration for concentrations of metallic and industrial minerals in crusta� rocks.Class discussions will be held twice weekly. 11 1 987 -88 ( 1 -2)

597

GRADUATE RESEARCH 0 -8)

Economics Want is a growing giant whom the coat of Have was never large enough to caver. " -Ralph Waldo Emerson Economics is the study of how people establish social arrangements for producing and distributing goods and services to sustain a nd enhance human Iife_ Its main objective is to determine a wise use of limited economic resources so that people receive the maximum possible benefit at the lowest cost. The economics discipline embraces a body of tech­ niques and conceptual tools that are useful for

understanding and analyzing our complex eco­ nomic system. Career avenues for graduates are n umerous, since their understanding of the econ­ omy and their problem-solving and thinking abili­ ties are applicable to a wide range of activities in business and/or government.

FACULTY Ankrim, Chair; Brue, R . Jensen, Medlin, Miller, N . Peterson, Vinje, Wentworth.


47 BACHELOR OF ARTS MAJOR: (A) Minimum of 36 semester hours, including 1 50, 351, 352, 486, 1 2 hours of electives in eco­ nomics, and 8 hours selected from the following: Economics 343, 344 (if not used as economics electives), Statistics 231, Math 334, ,1 41, Business Administration 281, or up to 4 hours in computer science. (B) A grade point average of 2.5 in all classes included in the 36 semester hours toward the majoL For students planning graduate work in economics or busi­ ness, additional math preparation will be necessary. For specific (OUT5(,5, consult your major adviser. HONORS MAJOR: Outstanding students may choose to pur­ sue graduating in economic> with honors, I n addition to meet­ ing all other major requirements, i n order to be granted depart­ mental honors a student must: (A) have an overall university grade point average of 3.5 or better; (B) take four hours beyond the standard major in 495, Honors Thesis, (Students apply for admission to this course in the second semester o f their junior yeaL The department grants admission to 495, Honors Tlresis, based on the student's prior work in economics and the quality of the general research proposal.); (C) present the results of the work completed i n 495,Hollors Tltesis, a t a meeting of Omicron Delta Epsilon (the economics honorary), MINOR: 20 semester hours, induding 1 50, 351 or 352, and 12 additional hours of electives, 4 of which may be in statis tics, ECONOMICS HONORARY: The department offers member­ ship in Omicron Delta Epsilon, the International Economics Honorary, to qualified majors. For specific criteria, see any departmental faculty member. BACHELOR O F ARTS IN E D UCATION: See School of

Education.

345

An introduction to basic app lications of mathematical tools used in economic analysis, Topics include simple linear models of supply and demand, single and m u l tivariable maximization models, and linear difference and differential equation models of economic growth, Prerequisites: 150 and MATH 128 or 1 5 1 or equivalent. (4)

351

1 50

PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICS

Introduction to the scope of economics, incl uding macro and ' micro economics; analysis of u.s. economic system; emphasis on current economic policy. (4)

290

CONTEMPORARY ECONOMIC PROBLEMS

Current economic issues; unemployment, inflation, poverty, and pollution; interests of the class determine s .p ecific topics. Prerequisite: 150 or consent of instructor. (4)

321

LABOR ECONOMICS, LABOR RELATIONS, AND HUMAN RESOURCES

The nature and treatment of human resource problems in the United States; wage determination, unionism, collective bargain­ ing. unemployment, poverty and discrimin a t ion, and investment i n buman capital. Prereq uisite: I SO or consent of instru ctor- (4)

33 1

I I I

INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS

Regional and international specialization, comparative costs, international payments and exchange rates; national policies which promote or restrict trade. Prerequisite: 150. (4)

341

ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT: COMPARATIVE THIRD WORLD STRATEGIES

Analysis of the theoretical framework for development with applications to alternative economic development strategies used i n t h e newly emerging developing countries, Emphasis on com­ parisons between countries in East and Southeast Asia and countries in Latin America and Africa, Assess ments of the relative i mportance oi cultural values, historical experience, and govern­ mental policies in the development process, Prerequisite: 150 or consent of instructoL (4)

343

OPERATIONS RESEARCH

Quantitative methods for decision problems. Emphasis on linear programming and other deterministic models, Prerequisite: STAT 231 or equivalent. (2)

344

APPLIED REGRESSION ANALYSIS

Simple and mult iple regression analysis as investigative tools, Course stresses construction oi elementary linear models and interpret ation of regression results, Prereq uisite: STAT 231 or equivalent. (2)

INTERMEDIATE MACRO ECONOMIC ANALYSIS

National income determination including policy i m p lications within the institutional framework of the U.s. economy. Pre­ requisite: 150. (4)

352

INTERMEDIATE MICRO ECONOMIC ANALYSIS

Theory of consumer behavior; product and factor prices under conditions of monopoly, competition, and intermediate markeb; welfare economics, Prerequisite: 1 50. ( 4 )

361

MONEY AND BANKING

The nature and role of money; the commerical banking system; the Federal Reserve System; theory of credit and money supply control; Keynesian and Monetarist theories of monetary impact on inflation, interest rates, and national income. Prerequisite: 150. (4)

362

PUBLIC FINANCE

Public taxation and expenditure at all governmental levels; the incidence of taxes, the public debt and the provision of public goods such as national defense, education, p u re .liT, and water. Prerequisite: 1 50. (4)

371

CO URSE OFFERINGS

MATHEMATICAL TOPICS IN ECONOMICS

INDUSTRIAL ORGANIZATION AND PUBLIC POLICY

An analysis of the struc t u re, conduct, and performance of Ameri­ can industry and public policies that foster and alter industrial s t ructure and behavior- Topics include the economics of firm s ize, motivations of the firm, concentration, mergers. patents, antitrll�t, public utility regulation, public enterprise, and subsidization. Prerequisite: 150 or consent of instructor- (4)

38 1

COMPARATIV.E ECONOMIC SYSTEMS

An analysis and comparison of major contemporary economic systems, Includes an exam i nation of capitalism, market socialism, centrally planned economies, and systems used in selected countries, Prerequisite: 150 or consent of instructoL (4)

399

INTERNSHIP

A research and writing project in connection with a student's

approved off-campus activity, The primary goal is to gain insight into applications of the ideas and methodologies of economics. Prerequisite: sophomore standing plus one cou rse in economics, and consent of the department. ( 1 -4)

432

URBAN AND REGIONAL E CONOMICS

Economic growth process i n developing regions of the U.S.; the interrelationship of political, economic, c u ltural, and institutional factors i n the growth process. Prerequisite: 1 50. (4)

486

EVOLUTION OF ECONOMIC THOUGHT

Economic thought from ancient to modern times; emphaSis on the period from Adam Smith to I.M, Keynes; the classical economists, the socialists, the marginalists, the neoclassical economists, and the Keynesians. ( 4 )

490

SEMINAR

Seminar in economic problems and policies with emphasis on encouraging t h e student to integrate problem-solvinr; method­ ology w i t h tools of economic analysis. Topic(s) selected by class participants and instructor. Prerequisite: consent of instructor. ( 1 -4)

491, 492, 493

INDEPENDENT STUDY

Prerequisite: consent of t he department and completion of two courses in economics. ( 1 -4)

495

\

I

HONORS THESIS

Independent research supervised by one or more fac ulty members, Research proposal and topic developed by the student in the j u nior year,Application to enroll is made in t h e second semester of the j u nior year-Prerequisite: economics major and consent of the depaItment. (4)

SOD APPLIED STATISTICAL ANALYSIS An intensive introduction to statistical methods for graduate students who have not previously taken introductory statistics. Emphasis on the application of inferential statistics to concrete situations. Topics include measures of location and variation, probability, estimation, h ypothesis tests, and regression. (4)

.

-- ..


48 501

GRADUATE WORKSHOPS

590

GRADUATE SEMINAR

504

ECONOMIC ANALYSIS AND POLICY DECISIONS

591

DIRECTED STUDY ( 1 -4 )

595

GRADUATE READINGS

Graduate workshops in special fields or areas for varying periods oHime. ( 1 ·4)

Basic economic concepts applied to policy formation and operating decisions. (4)

543

QUANTITATIVE METHODS

The concepts of probability, sampling, statistical decision t heory, linear progra mming, and other deterministic models applied to managerial problems. Prerequisite: STAT 231 Or 34 1 . (4)

Selected topics as a n nounced. Prerequisite: consent of instructor. ( 1 ·4)

Independent study card required. (4)

598

RESEARCH PROJECT ( 4 )

599

THESIS ( 4 )

Education

School o/

T he School o f Education offers programs o f study leading to certification for elementary and secon­ darv teachers, counselors, nurses, administrators, and personnel in special education. The curricu­ lum is designed to prov ide graduates with a blend­ ing of the liberal arts and a variety of practical exposures to guided field experiences beginning early in the educational sequence. The faculty is committed to the development of educational per­ sonnel sensitive to the varied individual needs of learners.

FACULTY

Mulder, Deall; Baughman, Brochtrup, Churney, DeBower, Fletcher, Gerlach, M. Hanson, Johnston, MalIon, Mathers, Minetti, Moe, Nokleberg, F. Olson, Pederson, Reisberg, Rickabaugh, Sydnor, Turnpaugh, Wentworth, Williams, Williamson.

Th� School of Education is accredited by the National Council for Accreditation of Teacher Education (NCATE), the Northwest Association of Schools and Colleges, and the Washington State Board of Education for the preparation of elementary and secon· dary teachers, principals, program administrators, special educa· tion teachers, and guidance counselors, with the Master of Arts in Education the highest degree approved. The accreditation gives PLU graduates reciprocity with many other states. Programs for the preparation of school librarians, school nurses, school counselors, administrators, and supervisory per­ sonnel arC' available. The School offers courSe work toward the conversion, renewal, or reinstatement of teaching certificates. The School of Education offers graduate degrees in Classroom Teaching, Reading, Educational Administ ration, Counseling and Guidance, 'Educational Psychology, and Speci" l Education. Information regarding these programs is available from the director of graduate programs in the School of Education (535·71 12). Progra ms in all academic areas have been revised to conform with requirements in effect in the State of Washington in 1 987. ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS

To registe.r for Education 251 or 253 in the School of Educa· tion, the following requirements must be met: I. The student must present evidence of verbal and quantita· tive ability as illustrated by the following test scores: 9OO-Scholastic Aptitude Test (SAT) (Verbal above 425) IOO-Washington Pre·College Test (WPCT) (Verbal above 48) 2 1 -Anlt'rican College Test Assessment (ACT) (Verbal above 20) 2. The student must h,lVe sophomore standing. 3. The student must have a cumulative grade point average (CPA) of 2.50. 4. The student must have completed Psychology 1 0 1 with a �rade of C· Or better.

5. The student must have completed English 101 with a grade of C- or better. Students who do not meet the above requirements or whose scores fall below 900 SAT, 100 WPCT, Or 21 ACT, but above the 700 SAT, 80 WPCT, or 1 6 ACT required by the State of Washing­ ton, may exercise the appeal process for adm ission to Education 251 or 253. Students will make formal application to the School of Educa· tion during the semester in which they are enrolled in Educa· tion 251 or 253. Education 253 may not be taken concurrently with General Elementary Methods. Special Education 190· 191 m,ly be taken before Education 251 or 253. Special Education 290 may be taken concurren tly. No course numbered above Educa· tion 321 may be taken without admission to the School of Education. ' Transfer students who may have bad education courses in other institutions should meet with an education adviser for evaluation of work completed and must arrange for application to the School of Education, supply nt,, <'ssary SAT, ACT or WPCT test scores, and schedule a screening conference for admission into the School of Education. These test scores may be available from the student's high school. Students who have earned a bachelor's degree at PLU or elsewhere, and who contemplate meeting certification require· ments, are expected to meet the same requirements for admis· sion and certification that apply to degree students. The certifi· cation sequence will normally require three semesters. BAE andlor CERTIFICA nON REQUIREMENTS

Students become candidates for certification when they have completed the following: grade point average of I. All course work with a cumuldt'ive . 2.50 or above. 2. Professional Education Sequence for elementary or secondary teaching. 3. An approved teaching major(s) or concen tration(s) (see requirement:; as listed under Academic Preparation). 4. Minimum Generic Standards (Chapter 1 80·79· 1 30 and 135 WAC). 5. All courses in education and in major and minor fields with grades of C· or higher. 6 . Achievement of proficiency in writing and m a t h skills. 7. Anthropology 2 1 O/History 2 1 0 for secondary teaching and Anthropology 102 for elem"ntary teaching. TEACHER CERTIFICATION Initial Teaching Certificate. The School of Education in the fall

o f 1 982 entered into a new program of certification mandated by the State Board of Education under the 1 978 Standards for Certi· fication. The four.year curriculum usually leads to a Bachelor of Arts in Education and the initial level teaching certificate (see previous catalogs for information concerning the provisional teaching certificate granted under 1962 Standards). The initial teaching certificate is valid for four years and may be renewed once for three years by meeting renewal requirements. PLU endorses the cert ificate on the basis of preparation. Secondary teachers holding initial level certificates shall be assigned by local districts to endorsed areas and levels only. Teachers hold· ing initial level elementary endorsements shall be aSSigned to elementary or middle grades only.


49 ELEM ENTARY PREPARATION General requirements. In addition to the general un iversity and core requirements in all curricula, certain specific req uire­ ments in general education must be met. I. Anthropology 102, Exploring Ant hropology: Culture and Society (recommended) o r Anth ropology 2 1 O/History 2 1 0, Global Perspectives, must be taken. 2. Biology 1 1 1 or another life science course must be taken. 3. Natural Science 106 or another physical science course must be taken. 4. Mathematics 323 or equivalent mu�t be taken. A year course i n one laboratory science may be substituted by those who have adequate background from high school in the other science area. Professional Education Sequence, Elementary Program. SPED 1 90 Exceptional Children a n d Adults, 3 hours (no prerequisite) EDUC 253 Child Development and Schools, 4 hours (2.50 GPA " nd sophomore statu5 required; prerequisites: ENGL 101 and PSY 1 0 1 ) General Met hods, Primary, 4 hours EDUC 322 OR EDUC 32.1 Gener,,1 Methods, Upper Elementary, 4 hours OR General Methods, Element.1rY, 4 hours EDUC 324 (For all General Method,; courses a GPA of 250 and junio r standing are required. Prerequisites: EDUC 253 or 321; application, screening, and acceptance into the School of Education; sat isfac­ tory writing and math skills.) Teachers and the Law, I hour. (Prereq uisite: EDUC EDUC 421 253) ( For physical education majurs, P E 32R fulfills t he School Law requirement.) EDUC 430 Student Teaching, Primary, 10 hours (single) OR Student Teaching, Upper Elementary, 1 0 hours EDUC 432 (single) S t udent Teachi ng, Elemen tary, R hours (dual) EDUC 434 ( For Student Teach ing a GPA of 2.50 and senior standing are required along with positive field evaluations from EDUC 253 and EDUC 322-4. Pre­ req uiSites: EDUC 253, 322-4, 324, 325, 408, 4 1 0, and 4 1 2; all conditions to full admission met; sat isfac· tory writ in)\, spelling, and math �kills.)

EDUC 435

Professional Seminar, 2 hours (must be taken con­ currently with EDUC 430 or 432) Students in elementary education who do not complete all necessary procedures before April 15 for fall student teaching or November 15 for spring student teaching may expect a delay of one semes­ ter i n being placed for student teaching. A valid first aid card must be o n file i n the School o f Edu· cation before student teaching placement can be finalized.

Professionalized Subject Matter Minor 114 hours required of all elementary candidates)

Req l/ircd- 1 2 semester hOl/rs

EDUC 325 EDUC 326 EDU 408 EDUC 4 1 0 EDUC 4 1 2

Reading in the Elementary School (4) Mathematics in t h e Elementary School (2) Language Arts in t he Elementary School (2) ScienCE> in t h e Elementary School (2) Social S t udies in t h e Elementary School ( 2 )

ART 341 MUS 34 1 PE 322 HED 295

Elementary Art Education (2) Music in the Elementary School (2) Physical Education in the Elementary School (2-4) School Health (2)

Elec:five- 2 semester hours

SECONDARY PREPARATION Professional Sequence (minimum of 30 hours) SPED 1 90 Exceptional Children and Adults (3) Learner and Society (GPA 2.50 required; sopho­ EDUC 251 mOre level course; prerequisites: ENGL 1 0 1 , PSY 1 0 1 ) (4) EPSY 368 Educational Psychology (GPA 2.50 required; pre­ requisite: EDUC 251 ) (4) Teachers and the Law (CPA 2.50 required) ( I ) ( For EDUC 421 physical education majors, PE 328 fulfills the School Law requirement.) General Secondary Methods (GPA 2.50 required; EDUC 425 prerequisites: EDUC 25 1 , EPSY 368 or permission; strongly recommended: SPED 1 90, ANTH 210/HIST 210) (4) SPECIAL METHODS See education adviser (2)

Student Teaching ( G PA 2.50 and senior status required; prerequisites: EDUC 251, EPSY 368, EDUC 425, first aid card, all conditions of screening met) ( 1 0) EDUC Elective (GPA 2.50 required); specified courses may be used with approval by an education adviser before regislTation. (2) EDUC 465

The elementary education subject area endorsement program is being revised to conform with the new req uirements in t h e S t a t e of Washington (WAC 180-79·348). These essential areas o f s t u d y are: I . Child growth and development. 2. Classroom organization and management. 3. Instructional methods in reading. 4. I n ,; tructional methods in mathemaics. 5. Instructional methods in language arts. 6. Instructional methods in science. 7 . Instructional methods in social st udies. 8 . Instruction,,1 methods in art. 9. Instructional methods in music. 10. Instructional methods in physical education. 1 1 . Inst ruction,,1 method s in health education. Students who enter programs after August 3 1 , 1987, must complete programs (revised, if necessary) that are flll l y in com­ pliance with the new standards.5t udents who began programs before August 3 1 , 1 987, but will be completin!; them after that date must meet the new standards. OPTIONAL ENDORSEMENT PROGRAMS The fo llowing specialized minors in education are available to all students pursuing teacher certific" tion. Students desiring tu work toward a specialized minor should consult an " d viser in the School of Education for assistance i n planning their program. READING-14 semester hours Prereq uisites ( for COurses with an EDUC prefix only): EDUC 252/53 Learner and Soc.iety/Child Development and Schools, and EDUC 325 Reading in the Elementary School Required EDUC 408 language Arts in the Elementary School (2) EDUC 4R3 Primary Reading (2) Special Techniques in Reading (4) EDUC 479 Electives- minimum of 6 semester hours chosen in consultation with an adviser before registration. SPECIAL EDUCA T10N This 32 semester hour teaching major must be taken in con­ junction with another academic teaching major and minor. S t u ­ d e n t s should m a k e application for admission to the special edu­ cation program while enrolled in Special Education 1 90. Students completing this major along with the required profes­ sional education sequence for elementary or secondary teachers will be eligi b l e to teach in �pecial education programs in the State of Washington and most other states. Students not major­ ins in education may be excused from the requirements of tak­ ing Education 25 1 or 253. Major-32 semester hours total. Minimum of 27 hours required: Special Education 1 90, 290, 390, 393, 398, 399, 407, 438 or 439; 2 hours of 399 practica; 5 hours o f elec t i ves from Special Educat ion, 1 9 1 , 296, 395, 399, 403, 408, 475, 490, 491, 494. Minor- IS semester hours total. Minimum of 14 hours required: Special Education 190, 290, 398, 399, 407. 4 hours of electives from 296, 390, 393, 395, 399, 403, 408, 475, 490, 494. EARLY CHILDHOOD-SPECIAL EDUCATION An experimental endorsement program ( P-3) for graduate students with a minimum of 12 semester hours in special educa­ tion. 18 hours required for an endorsement in early child hood­ special education, including Special Education 490, 49 1 , 533, 536, 537, 540, 541, 595. For those already teaching in the area, Special Education 534 and 535 will be substituted for the internShip. LEARNING RESOURCE SPECIALIST ( Preparation o f School librarians) 1 6 semester hours Students in terested in preparing for the responsibility of administering a school library may meet suggested standards through the following program: Select a minimum of one COurse from each of the following divisions:

Book alld Media Seleetioll

EDUC 456 Storytelling (4) EDUC 454 Selection of Learning Resource Materials (2) ENGL 363 Children's Literature ( 4 ) Arlm in iMratiofl

EDUC 451 Administration of the School Library (2)

Catalogi,,!!


50 EDUC 453 Processing School Library Materials (2)

Refert'nce

EDUC 452 Basic Reference Materials (2)

Medm Utilizatioll aud Prorillctioll

EDUC 457 Prepa ra t ion and Utilization of Media (3-4)

Cllrricu/llm

EDUC 580 Curriculum Development (2)

ACADEMIC PREPARATION A major from those listed must be completed. Completion of a teaching major/minor in a second academic a.rea is strongly recommended. (Students do not major in education.) Teaching majors are offered in the following Meas: art, biology, business education, chemistry, communication arts, earth and g en e ra l sciences, economics, English, French, German, history, language arts, mathematics, music, Norwegian, physical education, phys­ ics, political science, social sciences, sociology, and Spanish.

PREPARATION FOR ELEMENTARY TEACHING: A student preparing for elementary school teaching must complete a 24 semester hour elementary tea ch ing major and two minors. One of the minors must be the Professional Subject Matter minor o f 1 4 hours. T h e second m u s t b e a 1 2 h o u r teaching minor which i s different from the major. See below for all teaching majors and minors. PREPARATION FOR SENIOR HIGH SCHOOL TEACHING: Students preparing for senior high teaching must complete approximately 32-48 semester hours in the academic area in which they plan to teach. A minor in a second teaching area is recommended. Students may also find it advantageous to their career goals to 1) develop skills in one or more coaching areas in response to Title IX legislation, and 2) develop competencies in special education in response to federal special education legis­ lation. In all cases, students must discuss their program with an adviser from the School o f Education.

PREPARATION FOR K-12 TEACHING: Students preparing for K - 1 2 teaching in art, music, or physical education must have student teaching experience and course work in methodology on both the elementary and secondary levels. Detailed informa­ tion regarding K - 1 2 certifi.cation is available in the School of Education office.

ART

K-12 Art Spec i alist: 46 semester hours' required: Art 1 60, 180, 230, 250, 280, 326, 341, 365, 370, 380, 440, plus electives. E l emen t ary Teaching Major: 24 semester hours required: Art 1 10, 1 60, 250, 341, and 8 semester hours of 230, 365, or 370. Teaching Minor: 12 semester hours as determined by the School of Education. ' U p to three supporting courses may be recommended. BIOLOGY Senior High Teaching Major: 41 semester hours requ ire d : Biology 161, 162, 205, 206, 323, 331, 340, 425; a choice of 8 addi­ tional semester hours of upper division courses in biology. Required supporting courses: Chemistry 104, ! l 5, 1 1 6, Earth Sciences 1 31 , and a course in computer science. Education 447 to meet professional education requirement. Senior High Teaching Minor: 29 semester hours required: Biology 161, 162, 323, 340, 425; a choice of 8 additional upper divi­ sion semester hours in biology. Required supporting courses: Chemistry 104, 1 15, and a course in computer science. Education 447 to meet professional education requirement. Elementary Tea c hing Major: 21 semester hours required: Biology 161, 162, 323; a choice of 8 ad d ition a l semester hours from 205 a nd above. Required supporting course: Chemistry 104.

BUSINESS EDUCATION Senior High Teaching Major: 41 semester hours required: Economics 150, Computer Science 1 10; Business Administration 281, 350, 435; advanced typing; business machines; business communications (taken at a community college); Education 341, 342, 343, 344, 345. Each student is required to select at least one area of concentration from accounting or secretarial. Account­ ing: Business Administration 381, 483. Secretarial: advanced shorthand, records management, machine transcription (avail­ able at a community college). Secondary Education Teaching Minor: 16 semester hours required; courses selected in consultation with advisers in busi­ ness education and education. Professional methods courses req u i red: Education 341, 342, 343, 344, 345.

CHEMISTRY Senior High Teaching Major: 31 semester ho urs req u ired: Chemistry 1 1 5, 1 1 6, 321, 331, 332, 333, 334, 341, 342, and 343; Ph ys iCS 1 47, 148, 1 53, and 1 54; Math 15 1, 152. Professional methods: Education 447.

Secondary Teaching Minor: 18 semester hours required: Chemistry 1 1 5, 1 1 6, 321, 331, 333, 334, and Education 447. Elementary Teaching Major: 24 semester hours required: 16 hours of approved chemistry and 8 hours as determined by the School of Education. Teaching Minor: 1 2 hours as determined by the School of Education. COMMUNICATION ARTS Elementary Teaching Major: 24 semester hours required: Communication Arts 123, plus 1 2 semester hours in communica­ tion arts and 8 semester hours in English. Teaching Minor: 1 2 semester hours t o b e determined in consultation with the School of Education.

COMMUNICAnON ARTS-SPEECH Senior High Speech Teaching Major: 44 semester hours required: Communication Arts 123, 1 7 1 , 233, 283, 326, 330, and 435. 18-24 semester hours chosen in consultation with major adviser from 234, 236, 241, 328, 373, 374. Education 444 to meet p rofessio na l education requirement. Secondary Education Speech Teaching Minor: 1 6 semester hours required: 12 hours from Communciation Arts 1 23, 171, 233; and 4 semester hours of electives from 234, 236, 241, 283, 326, 328, 330, 373, 374, 435. Edu­ cation 444 to meet professional education requirement.

COMMUNICATION ARTS-DRAMA Secondary Education Drama Teaching Minor: 20 sem est er hours required: Communication Arts 1 60, 241, 250, 357, and 358. Education 444 to meet professional education requirement.

COMPUTER SCIENCE Secondary Education Teaching Minor: 22 semester hours. Computer Science 1 1 0 or 210 or 220; 144, 270, 380, 4 semester hours of computer science electives, Math 1 5 1 or 128, Computer Science 449 to meet professional education requirement.

EARTH SCIENCES Senior High Teaching Major: 44 semester hours required, including Earth Sciences 1 31 , 1 32, 202, 222, 332/333; two four­ hour courses from electives: 324, 325, 327, 328, 330, or 341. Required supporting: Math 1 33; Chemistry 104 or 1 1 5; Physics 125 and 147; Computer Science 1 1 .'), 144, or 220; B iology 132, 202, 222, 327, and 328; Physics 325, 330, 332, and 333. Professional methods course: Education 447.

Secondary Education T eaching Minor: 1 7 semester hours required: Earth Sciences 131, 132; four semester hours from Earth Sciences 202, 222, or 332/333; Math 133; Chemistry 104 Or 1 1 5; Computer Science 1 1 5 or 144 or 220. Professional methods: Education 447. Elementary Teaching Major: 24 semester hours required: Earth Sciences 131, 1 32, and 202; Chemistry 104 or 1 1 5 and one upper division course in earth sciences. Teaching Minor: 1 2 semester hours in earth sciences. ECONOMICS Senior High Teaching Major: 44 semester hours req uired : Economics 1 50, 351. 352, 486; 12 semester hours from the follow­ ing: Economics 321, 331, 361, 371; History 460 plus 12 semester hours distributed over a reas of sociology, pol itica l science, or anthropology. Education 448 t o meet professional education requirement. Secondary Education Teaching Minor: 28 semester hours required: Economics 150, 371, 486, History 460, and 12 semester hours selected from Economics 321, 331, 351, 352, 361 in consul­ tation with adv isers in economics and education. Professional methods course required: Education 448. Elementary Teaching Major: 24 semester hours required: Eco­ nomics 1 50, 371, 486; 4 semester hours from Economics 321, 331, 351, 352, 361, 362,432; History 460; 4 semester hours tram the a rea s of sociology or political science. Teaching Minor: 1 2 semester hours req uired : Economics 150 and 8 hours o f upper d i vis ion economics. Education 412 to meet profess iona l educa­ tion requirement.

ENGLISH Senior High Teaching Major: A minimum of 32 semester hours, 1 6 of which are to be upper division, is required beyond 101 including 241, 251, 252, 328, and 403. Select another 12 hours of upper division coursework in consultation with an adviser. (Where possible one course should be in a historical period, one in a major author, and one an elective.) All majors must pTesent two years of one foreign language at the college level or show equivalent profiCiency. Education 444 is required to meet the professional education requirement. Elementary Teaching Concentration: 24 semester hours, in cl ud in g 4 hou.rs in Briti s h literature before 1 700; 4 hours after 1 700; 4 hours American literature, and 12 ad d i t ion al hours in English as determined b y the School of Education. Recom­ me nded: English 363. Elementary Teaching Minor: 12 h ou rs required, as deter­ mined by the School of Education.


51 FRENCH Senior High Teaching Major: 44 semester hours required,

including 32 semester hours of French and 1 2 semester hours of supporting courses: French 201, 202 (or equivalent), 321, 351, 352, and 1 2 additional semester hours . Supporting courses t o be selected with the approval of the department and must include L .angua)5e 445, which will also meet part of the professional edu­ cation elective requirement. Secondary Education Teaching Minor: 16 semester hours above the 200 level required; courses selected in consultation with advisers in education and languages. Professional methods course required: L.anguage 445. E le men tary Teaching Major: 24 semester hours required, including 20 hours in French and 4 additional hours selected in consultation with the department and the School of Education. Teaching Minor: 1 2 hours required, as determined by the department and the School of Education. GENERAL SCIENCE Senior High Teaching Major: 42 semester hours required:

Chemistry 1 04, 1 1 5, 1 1 6; Earth Sciences 1 3 1, 202, 222; Physics 1 25, 1 26, 1 47, 1 48; 2-4 semester hours in computer science; a choice of 8 additional semester hours of upper division credit in chemistry, earth sciences, and physics. Education 447 to meet professional education requirement. E lementary Teaching Major: 24 semester hours required: biology-4; earth sciences-4; chemistry or physics-4; 12 addi­ tional hours from biology, earth sciences, chemistry, or physics. Elementary Teaching Minor: 12 semester hours required: physical science -4; life science-4; 4 hours from either. GERMAN Senior High Teaching Major: 44 semester hours required,

including 32 semester hours of German and 1 2 semester hours of supporting courses: German 201, 202 (or equivalent), 321, 322, 351, 352, and 1 2 additional semester hours. Supporting courses to be selected with the approval of the department and must include L.anguage 445, which will also meet part of the profes­ sional education elective requirement. Secondary Education Teaching Minor: 1 6 semester hours above the 200 level required; courses selected in consultation with advisers in education and languages. Professional methods course required: L.anguage 445.

Secondary Education Teaching Minor: 20 semester hours. Required: M o t h 1 51, 1 52, 230 or .131, 4 hours of math electives (321 or above 324), Computer Science 1 1 0 or 220 or 1 44. Math 446 to meet professional education requirement. Elementary Teaching Major: 24 semester hours. Required: Math 133 or equivalent; 1 5 1 , 1 52, 230, 323 or equivalent. Compu­ ter Science 1 10 or 1 44 is strongly recommended. Elementary Teaching Minor: 12 semester hours. Required: Math 323 or equivalent; Computer Science 1 1 0 is strongly recommended. MUSIC K-12 Choral Teaching Major: 58 semester hours required:

Music 123, 124, 125, 1 26, 132, 223, 225, 226, 227, 231, 240, 248, 340, 342, 345, 348, 442, 443, 445, 453; seven hours from 360-363; four hours of class piano ( m inimum level 6)'; six hours of private instruction in voice/degree recital (half recital); see Music Department listings regard ing (ourses which are prerequisite for student teaching. K-12 Instrumental (Band Emphasis) Teaching Major: 58 semester hours required: Music 1 23, 124, 1 25, 1 26, 1 32, 223, 225, 226, 227, 231, 240, 326, 340, 345, 348, 444, 445; five hours from 241 /242, 243/244, 245/246; seven hours from 370/380; one hour from 3751376; two hours of class piano (minimum level 4)'; six hours of private instruction on principal instrument/degree reci­ tal (half recital). See Music Department listings regarding courses which are prerequisite for student teaching. K-12 Instrumental (Orchestra Emphasis) Teaching Major: 58 semester hours required: Music 123, 124, 125, 1 26, 132, 223, 225, 226, 227, 231, 240, 326, 340, 345, 348, 445; five hours from 241 /242, 243/244, 245/246; seven hours from 370/380; one hour of 381 ; two hours of class piano (minimum level 4)'; six hours of private imtruction on principal instrument/degree recital (half recital). See Music Department listings regarding courses which are pre­ requisite for student teaching. 'Consult Depa rtment of Music concerning descriptions of class piano levels. MUSIC ( NON-SPECIALIST) Elementary Teaching Major: 24 semester hours required:

E l e menta ry Teaching Major: 24 semester hours required, including 20 hours in German and 4 additional hours selected in consultation w i t h the department and the School of Education. Teaching Minor: 12 hours required, as determined by the department and the School of Education.

Music 1. 23, 1 25, 231, 34 1 , 345, 442; two semester hours of class piano; two semester hours from 360-380; two semester hours of private instruction; and EITHER a ) Music 248, 348 and 353; b) Music 326 and two semester hours from 241 -246; OR c) Music 248, 340, and 348. Elementary Teaching Minor: 12 semester hours required along with Music 240 or 341, to be selected in consultation with the Department of Music.

HISTORY Senior High Teaching Major: 44 semester hours required: His­

NORWEGIAN Secondary Education Teaching Minor: 16 semester hours

tory 107 or 108; 1 09, 2 1 0 or 2 1 1; 8 hours of 251, 252, 253; 460 and 1 2 additional upper division hours in history including a senior seminar. Supporting courses: 1 2 additional semester hours selected from economics, geography, political science, psychol­ ogy, and sociology. Education 448 to meet professional educa­ tion requirement. Secondary Education Teaching Minor: 16 semester hours required: 4 hours from History 251, 252, or 253; 460; and 8 hours selected in consultation with advisers in education and history. Professional methods course required: Education 448. lANGUAGE ARTS Senior High Teaching Major: A minimum of 32 semester

hours requ i red: English 241, 251, 403; 4 hours of upper division literature (in add.ition to course taken to meet the general uni­ versity core requirement); Communication Arts 24 1 ; 1 2 hours in journalism and communication arts; Education 444 to meet the professional education requirement. This major must be accom­ panied with a 16 hour minor selected from English, communica­ tion arts, journalism, foreign language, or social science�. Elementary Teaching Major: A minimum of 24 semester hours required: English 323, 328, 403; Communication Arts 406 and one of Communication Arts 24 1, 326, or 436; one course selected from one of the following areas: English, communication arts, o r foreign language above t h e 200 level. Elementary Teaching Minor: A minimum of 12 semester hours required as determined by the School of Education, including English 328. MATHEMATICS Senior High Teaching M ajo r: 40 semester hours. Required: Math 1 51, 1 52, 253, 321, 331, 446, a two-course sequence of at

least 8 semester hours in a natural science other than mathe­ matics or computer science, Computer Science 1 1 0 or 144, plus a minimum of 8 additional hours in mathematics courses above 325. (four of these 8 hours may be from computer science courses numbered 240 or above.)

above the 200 level required; courses selected in consultation with advisers in education and languages. L.anguage 445 to meet professional education requirement. Elementary Teaching Major: 24 semester hours required, including hours in Norwegian and 4 additional hours selected in consultation with the department and t h e School of Education. Elementary Teaching Minor: 12 semester hours required, as determined b y the department and the School o f Education. PHYSICAL. EDUCATION K-12 Specialist Teaching Major: 44 hours required: Physical

Ed ucation 277, 283, 285, 286, 287, 328, 329, 478, 480, 481, 482, 484, and 485; Biology 205 and 206; Health Education 28 1 . K - 1 2 certifi­ cation students must also meet requirements set forth by the School o f Education. K-12 Teaching Minor: 1 6 hours required: Health Education 281, Physical Education 285 or 286, 322, 328, 329, and 334. Secondary Health Education Teaching Minor: 16 hours required: Health Ed ucation 260, 270, 292, 295, 321, 323, 325, and 327; Physical Education 329. PHYSICS Senior High Teaching Major: 34 semester hours required:

Physics 1 47, 1 48, 153, 154, 223; Math 1 5 1 , 1 52; Engineering 231, 271; Chemistry 1 1 5, plus an additional 4 hours in chemistry; Education 447. Secondary Education Teaching Minor: 18 semester hours required: Physics 1 25: 126: (or 1 53, 1 54), 147, 1 48; Natural Science 1 06; Math 1 33 or l S I ; Education 447. 'Physics 153 and 1 54 may be taken instead of 1 25 and 126, with concurrent or prior registration in Math lSI or 152. POLITICAL SCIENCE Senior High Teaching Major: 44 semester hours required: Pol­

itical Science 101, l S I , 231, plus 16 hours of political science elec­ tives; History 460; 12 hours from the following supporting areas: economics, geography, history, sociology, anthropology, or psy­ chology. Education 448 to meet professional education requirement.


52 Seco ndary E duc a ti o n Te ach ing Minor: 20 semester hours required: Political Science t01, 1 5 1, 231, Hist ory 460, and 1 2 hours selected i n consultation with advisers i n education and political science. Professional methods course required: Educa­

tion 448.

PSYCHOLOGY Secondary Education Teaching Minor: 16 semester hours requ ired: Psychology 1 0 1, 243, and R additional hours from

upper division courses. Professional methods cou rse required: Education 448. SCIENCE (GENERAl)

See above. SOCIAL SCIENCES Senior High Teaching Major: 44 semester hours required: 4 hours from History 2 5 1 , 252, 253; History 460; 4 hours from each o f the fol l owi ng areas: a n thro po l ogy, economics, political science, psycholo�y, sociology, or 4 hours from Earth Sciences 1 3 1 . 35 1, 360; 1 2 upper d i v i s ion hours from two of the following a reas: economics, political science, and so ci o logy. Education 448 to nwet p ro fess i onal education requirement. S eco nd ary Education Teaching Minor: 1 6 semester hours req u ired : 4 hours from History 25 1. 252, or 253; History 460; and 8 hOllrs selected from economics and po l i t ic a l science (at l eas t 4 hours from each depart ment). Pr o fession a l methods course required: Education 4411. El em entary Teaching Major: 24 semester hours required: 4 hours from H is t nr v 251 , 252, 253; Historv 460; and 16 hours from the fo l low i ng : an t h ro p o logy, economics political science, psy­ c ho log v. and so ci o logy . Teaching Minor: 1 2 seml'ster hours required, as d e t er m i ned by the SchollI of Education.

:

SOCIOLOGY Senior High Teaching Major: 44 semester hours required: Sociology 1 0 1 ; 24 hours of soc iol og y History 460; 1 2 semester

;

hours distributed over t hree areas of other social sciences. Edu­ cation 44R to meet pr ofess ion .,1 educat ion requirement. NOTE: Students may elect one of the specialired (lreas in SOCiology. S econdary E duc ati on Te ac h i ng Minor: 1 6 semester hours required, inc l u d i ng Sociology 1 0 1 . Add i t io nal upper division courses s\.l lected in consultation with il d v i ser s in education dnd sociology. Professional methods COll fSt) required: Education 448. SPANISH Senior High TN chin g M ajo r: 44 semester hours fl>qu ired' i nc l u d in g 32 semester hours of Spanish and 12 semester hours of su p por t in g courses. Spanish 201 . 202 (or equivalent), 321, 351 , 352, a n d 1 2 additional semester hours. Supp o rt ing courses t o be selected with the approval of the department and m u st include l .angu_1se 445, wh ic h will also meet part of the professional edu­ cation elective requ ir emen t . S eco nd ary Education Teaching Minor: 16 semester hours above t he 200 l e w l req uired; courses selected in consultation with adv isers i n education and l an g ua ges . Professional methods COllfse req u i red Language 445. Elementary Tea c hing Major: 24 semester hours required. including 20 hours in Spanish and 4 additional hours selected in c o n s u i t d l ion with the department and the School of Education.

:

FIFTH-YEAR AND STANDARD C E RTIFICATION Program for all candidates holding a valid provisio na l teaching certificate and work in g toward standard ce rtification _ The fifth-year of teacher education is to follow a period of one year of initial teaching experience. Students must complete a

minimum of eight semester hours applicable toward the fifth year. before the beginning of the fourth year of teaching. Thirty semester hours in an approved program must be completed before the beginning of the seventh year of teaching. Students may choose the institu tion in which they wish to take advanced work as follows: I . If they choose to work at PLU or any other of the teacher educ at i on instit utions in the State of Washington, that insti­ tution shall be responsible for recommending them for the Standard Certificate upon completion of the fifth-year program. 2 . If PLU graduates wish t o w1dertake the fifth year in an out­

of-state institution, PLU will be responsible for recommend­ ing them for the Standard Certificate. Students must secure general approval of their plan from the university in advance. There are four provisions governing the fifth-year pattern of work, according to the State Board of Regulations. I. The fifth year must include a minimum of 30 semester hours of which at least fifty percent must be upper division andlor graduate courses. 2 . No more than three semester hour5 of correspondence study may be approved as a part of the 30 semester hours i n the student's fifth-year program.

3. PLU graduates must take 1 5 semester hours of the fifth year in residence at PLU. A non-PLU student who wishes to be recommended by PLU must take a minimum of 20 semester hours in residence at PLU. 4. Students may take 15 of the req uired 30 semester hours before or during the first year of teaching experience with prior permission of the School of Education. Following are requirements and procedu res for the approval of fift h-year programs of work at PLU: I. Specific course requirements are: Elementary a. Required course: EDUC 467, Evaluation ( 2 hours) b. One required from the following (4 hours): EPSY 535, Foundations of Guida nce; EPSY 578, Behavioral Problems; EPSY 575, Mental Health. c. 2 h.ours from the following suggested courses: EDUC 473, Parent-Teacher Relationships; EDUC 50 \ , Sex Role Stereo- typing in Educat ion; EPSY 537, Reality Discussion Techniques; EPSY 536, Affective Classroom Techniques; 501 Workshops, for example, Disc ipline in the Classroom, Encouraging Pro cess. Secondarv ' a. Requi red COurses (4 hours): EDUC 420, Problems of Read­ ing in the Secondary School; EDUC 467, Evaluation. b. Electives (4 hours): Group A-2 hours-courses in a theoreti­ cal or interpersonal framework-EDUC 473, Parent­ Teacher Relationships; EDUC SOl, Sex Role Stereotyping in Education; EPSY 537, Reality Discussion Techniques; or appropriate substitut ions; Group B-2 hours-cour�es in a methodological or instructional framework-Simulation, Film, Interaction Analyis, Progra m Ideas in th e Junior High School, Plants of the Pacitk Northwest, etc. 2. Any courses recommended for the individual student before the granting of the bachelor's degree must be completed. These may be recommended by either the undergraduate adviser or the School of Education. 3. Any course work required b y the undergraduate institution andlor the employing school district must be completed. 4. Courses taken should strengthen areas of concentration and build stronger general education background as well as fill needs in the professional field. This program of studies is to be selected by students with t he guidance of those who have worked with them during their period of initial teaching and the advisers at the reco mmending institutions. 5. Students seCure approval of the recommending institution for work taken elsewhere before the work is begun. Some of the work taken during the fifth year may also apply toward a master's degree. Graduate students may undertake a program coordinating requirements for stand.1fd certification and the master's degree upon the approval of their committee chair and the coordinator of fifth-year programs. RENEWAL O F INITIAL TEACHING CERTI FICATE St u d en t s seeking to renew their ini tial teaching certificate must do the fo llo wing: I . Enroll formaUy in a plan ned program for the continuing

teacher certificate.

2. Negotiate and es t ab l is h

a "plan of study" with their adviser. 3. Complete IO semester hours of course work applicable to the

continuing c e rti fi cate program which are taken subsequent to issuance of the i n i t ial certificate. 4. Insure that official transcripts of applicable course work are on file in the School of Education at PLU. 5. Complete an application for teaching certificate with a notar­ ized affidavit n o older than six months at the time of recom­

mendation for renewal. 6. Pay the state certificate fee. CONTINUING TEACHER CERTIFICATE

The candidate for a continuing teacher certificate must com­ plete at least 30 semester hours of upper d ivision or graduate work subsequent to the baccalaureate degree, of which 1 4 semester hours must b e taken a fter the first year o f teaching. Candidates must have completed a t least three years of service in an educational setting, including at least two years as a class­ room teacher in grades K - 1 2. Additional specific req uirements include: I. Completion of the "plan of study" and school district recommendations for study. 2. Completion of Education SIS, 5 1 6, and 544. 3. Verification of the completion of continuing level minimum generic standards. 4. Completion of 8 semester hours in the supporting area. 5. Completion of 15 semester hours in residence for PLU grad­ uates or 20 semester hours for those who received their initial certificate elsewhere. 6. Completion of work to have at least two endorsements (required of all continuing certificate candidates as of July 1 , 1 988, and thereafter). 7. Completion of 20 semester hours after one year of teaching experience.


r

53 8. Meeting the recency requirement, if applicable.

Completion of an application for a teaching certificate with a notarized affidavit no older than six months at the time of recommendation for the certificate. 10. Insuring that official transcripts as applicable are on file in the School of Education. I I . Payment of the State certificate fee. With previous approval and adequate planning, most of the work taken for the continuing certificate may also apply toward a master's degree. Craduate students may undertake a program coordinating requirements for the continuing teaching certifi­ cate and the master's degree upon the approval of the facu lty adviser or graduate cha irperson.

326

9.

PRINCIPAL'S AND PROGRAM ADMINISTRATOR'S CERTIFICATE

Preparation programs leading to certification at the initial and continuing levels for school and district-wide program adminis­ trators are available through the School of Education. Specific requirements for the certificates are identified in handbooks available upon request. Master's degrees in educational admin­ istration are described in the Crad uate Catalog, which can be obtained from the Craduate Studies Office. CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS FOR SCHOOL COUNSELORS A N D SCHOOL NURSES ( Subject to new certification requirements as of April, 1983)

Educational Staff Associate certification for school counselors or for school nurses is individually designed through a consor­ tium consisting of a school district, related professional associa­ tions, and Pacific Lutheran University. For information regard­ ing counselor certification, contact the School of Education. For information regarding school nurse certification, contact the School of Nursing (535-7674).

Basic mathematical skills and abilities needed by the elementary school teacher; recent developments and materials. Prerequisites: 253, MATH 323 or equivalent. 2.50 CPA. (2)

341

251

LEARNER AND SOCIETY: GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT ( SECONDARY)

Orientation to contemporary schools; human development in relation to individuals and groups in an educational setting. Public school observation required weekly with students responsible for their own transportation. Prerequisites: PSY 101 or SOC 1 0 1 , ENCL 1 0 1 , sophomore standing, 2.50 CPA. ( 4 )

253

CHILD DEVELOPMENT AND SCHOOLS

Introduction to the nature of schools and teaching in contempor­ ary society; overview of human development with special empha­ sis on intellectual, social, emotional, and physical development of elementary age children in a school setting. Weekly public school observations required with students responsible for their own transportation. PrerequiSites: ENCL 101, PSY 1 0 1 , sophomore standing, 2.50 CPA, writing and math skills assessment. Also available as independent study (253 15) for 1 -4 credits, if approved by faculty, for students with extensive background or experience in schools and development. (4)

321

HUMAN DEVELOPMENT

Emotional, social, intellectual, and physiological development from infancy t h rough adolescence. A weekly four-hour observa­ tion in the public school is required. (Individually assigned.) Students rcsponsible for their own transportation. Prerequisites: PSY 101, ENCL l Ot junior standing. 2.50 CPA. (2-4)

322

GENERAL METHODS-PRIMARY

Competencies will be developed for teaching in grades K-3, with observation and participation in public schools. Prerequisites: 253 or 321. 2.50 CPA (4)

323

GENERAL METHODS-UPPER ELEMENTARY

Competencies will be developed for teaching in grades 4-6, with observation and participation in public schools. Prerequisites: 253 or 321. 2.50 CPA. (4)

324

GENERAL METHODS-ELEMENTARY

Competencies will be developed for teaching in grades K-6. Extended experience and participation in public school classrooms will be provided. Prerequisites: 253 or 321 , MATH 323, and concurrent enrollment in courses 325, 326, 408, 4 1 0, 412. 2.50 CPA.

(4)

325

READING IN THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL

Teaching reading in elementary grades, including modern approaches, materials, methods, techniques, procedures, and some diagnosis of reading difficulties. Prerequisites: 322-324 or concurrently with 322-324. 2.50 CPA. (4)

PHILOSOPHY OF VOCATIONAL EDUCATION

Objectives of high school busi ness education programs, the business curriculum, layout and facilities planning, the evaluation of business teachers and competence for business occupations. Examination of information resources and current thought in business education, cooperative education, and distributive edu­ cation. Prerequisite: EDUC 425 is recommended. (2)

342

METHODS O F TEACHING TYPING

343

METHODS OF TEACHING BOOKKEEPING

Application of research findings and psychological principles to the teaching of typing. Prerequisites: advanced typing and EDUC 425 (may be concurrent). (2)

Application of research findings and psychological principles to the teaching of bookkeeping. PrerequiSites: EDUC 425 (may be concurrent) and BA 281. ( 1 )

344

METHODS OF TEACHING GENERAL BUSINESS SUBJECTS

Application of research findings and psychological principles to the teaching of general business, consumer economics, economics, business law, business mathematics, and business communica­ tions subjects. Prerequisites: EDUC 425 (may be concurrent), ECON 1 50, and BA 2R l . ( I )

345

COURSE OFFERINGS

MATHEMATICS IN THE ELEMENT ARY SCHOOL

METHODS O F TEACHING SECRET ARIAL SUBJECTS

Application of research findings and psychological principles to the teaching of shorthand, office practice, simulation, word processing, and related subjects. Prerequisites:EDUC 425 (may be concurrent), advanced ty ping, and advanced shorthand. ( 1 )

401

WORKSHOPS

408

LANGUAGE ARTS IN THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL

Workshops in special fields for varying periods of time. ( 1 -6 )

The functional teaching of communication sk ills, grades K-6; areas include oral and written expression, listening, reading, literature, dramatization, spelling. grammar, handwrit ing, children's lan­ guage study, vocabulary development, and lexicography. Pre­ requisite: 253. 2.50 CPA and 322-324 or concurrently with 322-324. (2)

410

SCIENCE IN THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL

A humanistic approach with emphasis on those kinds of materials and "hands on" activit ies needed to achieve the objectives of science. Prerequisite: 322-324 or concurrently with 322-324. 2.50 CPA. (2)

412

SOCIAL STUDIES IN THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL

Objectives, materials, and methods of teaching the social studies; recommended to student teachers and experi<>nced teachers. Prerequisite: 253. 2.50 CPA. (2)

420

PROBLEMS OF READING IN THE SECONDARY SCHOOL

Teaching secondary reading in content areas; attention to develop­ mental reading problems; materials, met hods, techniqucs, pro­ cedu res, and some observation and diagnosis of reading diffi­ culties. Prerequisite: 25 1; taken concurrently with 425 and 434. (2)

421

TEACHERS AND THE LAW

425

GENERAL METHODS-SECONDARY

430

STUDENT TEACHING-PRIMARY ( SINGLE)

A brief study of students', parents', and teachers' rights and respsonsibilities with some emphaSiS on the question of liability. (I) Curriculum, materials, and methods of secondary teaching; obser­ vation and discussion. Prerequisites: 251, EPSY 368. 2.50 CPA (4)

Teaching in classrooms of local publiC schools under the direct supervision of the School of Education faculty and classroom teachers. Prerequisites: 2.53 or 321, 322 or 324, 325, 326, 408, 410, 4 1 2. 2.50 CPA. concurrent enrollment in 435. ( 1 0)


54 432

STUDENT TEACHING-UPPER ELEMENTARY (SINGLE)

454

SELECTION OF LEARNING RESOURCE MATERIALS

Teaching in classrooms of local public schools under the direct supervision of Sc hool of Ed UCa t ion faculty a nd class room teachers. Prerequisites: 25 1 or 321, 323 or 324, 325, 326, 408, 4 1 0, 4 1 2. 2.50 GPA. Concurrent enrollment in 425. ( 10)

Criteria, professional literature, and techniques of evluation o f library materials (print and non-print); t h e librarian's responsibility to faculty, students, and the general public. G (2)

434

Audio and visual materials and aids, their use, organization, and administration. G (2)

STUDENT TEACHING-ELEMENTARY ( DUAL)

Designed for persons who do dual student teaching. Ten weeks of teaching i n classrooms of local public schools under the direct supervision o f School of Education faculty and classroom teachers. Prerequ,isites: EDUC 253 or 321 ; 322, 323, or 324; and 325, 326, 408, 41 0, and 4 1 2. 2.50 GPA. Concurrent enrollment in 435. (8)

435

PRO FESSIONAL SEMINAR

An opportunity for students to share experiences with an exchange of ideas on pupil behavior, curriculum practices, and ways of improving teaching performance. ( Must be taken concurrently with 430 or 432.) (2)

436

ALTERNATE LEVEL STUDENT TEACHING- ELEMENTARY

455

INSTRUCTIONAL MATERIALS

456

STORYTELLING

457

PREPARATION AND UTILIZATION O F MEDIA

A combination of discovery and practicum in the art of storytelling. I nvestigates the values and background of storytelling, the various types and forms of stories, techniques of choosing and of telling stories. Some off-campus practice. Demonstrations and joint storytelling by and with instructor. (4)

Production of a variety of instructional materials including slide/tape, black and white photography, basic darkroom tech­ niques, video and computer graphics. G (3 Or 4)

465

STUDENT TEACHING-SECONDARY (SINGLE)

A course designed to give some knowledge, understand ing, and study of children, subject matter fields, and materials in t h e student's alternate teaching level plus student teaching on t h a t level. Students who h a v e completed secondary preferred level student teaching should enroll in this course. (6)

Teaching in the public schools ander t h e d.irection and supervision of classroom and university teachers. Prerequisites: 251, 425, and EPSY 368. 2.50 CPA. May be taken concurrently with 467. ( l O)

437

466

ALTERNATE LEVEL STUDENT TEACHING-SECONDARY

A COurse designed to give some knowledge, understanding; and study of children, subject matter fields, and materials in the student's alternate teaching level plus student teaching on that level. Students w h o have completed elementary preferred level stud.ent teaching should enroll in this course. Independent study card required. (6)

440-448

SPECIAL METHODS IN TEACHING SECONDARY SCHOOLS SUBJECTS

Curriculum, methods, and materials of instruction in a variety of subjects; may be taken for graduate credit.

440

SEMINAR IN SECONDARY ART EDUCATION (2)

443

CHEMISTRY IN THE SECON DARY SCHOOL (2)

444

ENGLISH IN THE SECONDARY SCHOOL

445

METHODS IN TEACHING FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Theory and techniques of English instruction; curriculum, met h ­ ods, resources; classroom management. ( 2 )

Theory and techniques of foreign language teaching; special problems in the student's major language, emphasis on audio­ lingual techniques. G (2)

446 447

MATHEMATICS IN THE SECONDARY SCHOOL (2) SCIENCE IN THE SECONDARY SCHOOL (2)

448

SOCIAL STUDIES IN THE SECONDARY SCHOOL (2)

449

COMPUTER SCIENCE IN THE SECONDARY SCHOOL ( 2)

451

ADMINISTRATION OF THE SCHOOL LIBRARY

Library organization and administration in the elementary and secondary schools. G (2)

452

BASIC REFERENCE MATERIALS

453

PROCESSING SCHOOL LIBRARY MATERIALS

Those services of a school librarian related to the preservation of all materials which form the SOurces of reference. G (2)

Classification, catloging, and technical processing of materials. G (2)

STUDENT TEACHING-SECONDARY (DUAL)

Designed for persons who do dual student teaching. Ten weeks of teaching in the public schools under the direction and supervision of classroom and univerSity teachers. Prerequisites: 251 , 4.25, and EPSY 368. 2.50 GPA. May be taken concurrently with 467. (8)

467

EVALUATION

473

PARENT-TEACHER RELATIONSHIPS

479

SPECIAL TECHNIQUES IN READING

483

PRIMARY READING

485

THE GIFTED CHILD

488

READING CENTER WORKSHOP

489

DIRECTED TEACHING IN READING CENTERS

Evaluation of school experiences; problems in connection with development, organi.zation, and administration of tests (standard­ ized and teacher-madel. Required of fift h-year students. Prerequi­ site: student teaching or teaching experience; 251, 253, EPSY 368, May be taken concurrently with student teaching. G (2) Issues and skills important in conferencing and parent-teacher relationships. Emphasis on effective communication skills. Special education majors and teachers examine relevant placement pro­ cesses and parent needs. ( 2 ) Individual diagnostic assessment of reading problems using both formal and informal testing techniques. Special instructional methods for remed iation for children with reading difficulties. Practicum required. Prerequisite: 325 or equivalent. (4) Materials and methods of the primary reading program and its relation t o other activities. Prereq uisite: teaching experience or concurrently with student teaching. G (2) A study of the gifted child, characteristics and problems, and school procedures designed to further development. G (2)

Clinical study of reading problems and suggested corrective measures; to be taken concurrently with 489. Prerequisite: teaching experience. S G (2)

Directed observation and teaching in summer remedial classes in public schools; to be taken concurrently with 488, Prerequjsite: teaching experience. S G (4)

496

LABORA TORY WORKSHOP

497

SPECIAL PROJECT

501

WORKSHOPS

Practical course using elementary-age children in a classroom situation working out specific p roblems; provision will be made for some active participation of the university students. Prerequi­ site: conference with the instructor Or the dean of the School of Education. G Individual study and research on education problems or additional laboratory experience in public school classrooms. PrerequiSite: consent of the dean. G ( 1 -4 ) Graduate workshops in special fields for varying lengths of time. ( 1 -4 )


55 515

PROFESSIONAL SEMINAR; CONTINUING LEVEL, TEACHERS

571

HISTORY AND PHILOSOPHY OF HIGHER EDUCATION

The preparation and sharing of selected topics related to the minimum generic standards needs of the individual participants. Required for the continuing level certification of teachers. (2)

Historical perspective and current stat us; development of func­ tions and structures; issues in curriculum; philosophy of adminis­ tration; case stud ies. (4)

516

573

TEACHER SUPERVISION

Identification and development of supervisory skills for teachers who work with other adults in the classroom. ( 1 )

525

CURRENT PRACTICES AND ISSUES IN READING

STUDENT PERSONNEL WORK IN HIGHER EDUCATION

Student personnel services in higher education; use of personnel data; co-curricular activities; student welfare; contemporary trends in counseling problems related to student Life. (4)

579

DIAGNOSIS AND REMEDIATION IN READING

To examine current practices and issues in the field of reading as described through educational research. Research findings applied to classroom practices. Students encouraged to pursue specific areas of int e.rest within the broad a.rea of reading instruction, Prerequisite: 325 or equivalent and teaching experience. (2-4)

Causative factors relating to reading difficulties; some opportunity to apply remediation techniques; open to those with teaching experience. ( 2 )

527

580

PSYCHOLOGY OF READING

Principles of reading, perception, word recognition, concept development, and meaning in reading. The psychological and physiological aspects of the reading act examined in relationship to successful reading achievement. Prerequisite: 325 0requivalent and teaching experience. (2)

544

RESEARCH AND PROGRAM EVALUATION

Knowledge of student and class evaluation techniques; the ability to select and interpret tests; knowledge of research design; the ability to interpret educational research; tb.e ability to identify, locate, and acquire topical research and related literature; and the ability to use the results of research o r evaluation t o propose program changes. (2)

545

METHODS AND TECHNIQUES O F RESEARCH

Seminar in research methods and techniques in educa tion with emphasiS on designing a research project in the student's area of interest. Required for M.A. PrerequiSite: consultation with s t u ­ dent's adviser a n d admission to the graduate program. ( 2 )

550

SCHOOL FINANCE

Local, state, and fed eral contributors to school finance, its philo­ sophy and development; the development and administration of a school budget. ( 2 )

551

EDUCATIONAL LAW

552

EDUCATIONAL ADMINISTRATION

Study of contemporary federal, state, and local statutes, regula­ tions, and case law and their application to public and private schools (K-I2l. (2) Administration and supervision of school personnel. facilities, and programs; with emphasis on the human relationships in that setting. PTerequisite: teach ing experience or consent of the dean. (3)

554

SEMINAR IN EDUCATIONAL ADMINISTRATION

The preparation and sharing of selected presentations related to needs of individual participants. Required for continuing certifica­ tion of principals and program administrators. Registration must take place in the fall semester and participation will be continuous for the academic year. ( 2 )

555

ADMINISTRATION AND SUPERVISION WORKSHOP

Projects determined by the class; t y pical projects include curricu­ lum planning and adjust ment, public relations programs, per­ sonnel employment and in-service training; financing building and educational programs. Prerequisite: one course in administra­ tion and supervision. (2)

556

SECONDARY AND MIDDLE SCHOOL CURRICULUM

A variety of facets of secondary and middle school programs: finance, c u rriculum, discipline, evaluation, classroom manage­ ment, the basic education bill, legislative changes, and special education. Development of secondary and middle schools from their beginn.ings to the present. Critical issues in the education scene today. (3)

558

INTERNSHIP IN EDUCATIONAL ADMINISTRA TION

Internship in educational administration planned with the School of Education in cooperation with selected educational adminis­ trators. Prerequisite: course work in educational administration and admission t o the graduate program. (2-4)

CURRICULUM DEVELOPMENT

Types of curriculum organizat ions, programs and techniques of curriculum development. (2)

585

COMPARATIVE EDUCATION

Comparison and investigation of certain materials and cultural systems of education t h roughout the world. (2)

586

SOCIOLOGY O F EDUCATION

The nature and functioning of the educational system examined from a sociological perspective. Topics include: education, stratifi­ cation, and social change; the school as a complex organizat ion; the school as a social insti t u t ion; and the sociology of learning. (4)

587

HISTORY O F EDUCATION

Great educators, educational t heories, and educational systems from antiquity to the present (2)

589

PHILOSOPHY OF EDUCATION

Philosophical and theoretical foundations of education. (3)

590

GRADUATE SEMINAR

597

INDEPENDENT STUDY

A workshop for all Master of Arts candidates Education which provides a forum for exchange and problems; candidates should register for assistance in fulfilling requirement. No credit tuition assessed. (0)

in the School of of research ideas this seminar for is given, nor is

Projects of varying length related to educational issues or concerns of the individual participant and approved by an appropriate faculty member and t he dean. ( ] -4 )

598

STUDIES IN EDUCATION

599

THESIS

A research paper or project on an educational issue selected jointly by the student and the graduate adviser. lt will be reviewed by the student's graduate commit tee. (2) For Master of Arts candidates who elect to write a thesis. The thesis problem will be chosen from the candidate's major field of concentration and must be approved by the candidate's graduate adv iser. (3-4)

ED UCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 368

EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY

Principles and research in human learning and their implications for curriculum and instruction. Prerequisite: EDUC 251, 253. (4)

501

WORKSHOPS

Graduate workshops in special fields for varying lengths of time. ( 1 -4)

512

GROUP PROCESS AND THE INDIVIDUAL

A human i n teraction laboratory to facilitate the exploration of the self concept through the mechanisms of interpersonal interactions and feed back. Emphasis placed on the acquisition of skill in self­ exploration, role identification, and climate-making. G (2)

535

FOUNDATIONS OF GUIDANCE

The focus is on developing an understanding of the services and processes available to assist individuals in making plans and decisions according to their own life pattern. G (4)


56 536

AFFECTIVE CLASSROOM TECHNIQUES

Explorat i on of various techn iques designed to facilitate under­ standing of self and ot hers; methods for working with st udents , Pr e re q uis i t e: st ud e n t t eac h i ng or graduate s t a t us, La bo ratory experi ence as arranged, G (2)

537

REALITY DISCUSSION TECHNIQUES

The use of re .)l i t y thera p y in a helping rela t ionship-schools, �ociat agencies, mental health cJincis, Or university re�idenct's. L ab oratory experience as arranged. Prerequisite: 553. G (2)

551

RE FLECTIVE SKILLS PRACTICUM

A min i - pract i c u m in the techniques of counseling; enrollment limited t o students beginning the master's degree program in Counseling ,l nd Guid(lnce, and is a prerequisite to admission on regular status t o the Counseling and Guidance master's program, The pra ct i c um makes use of counseling sessions with clients using verbal and non-verbal a ttending behavior. ( I )

552

SOCIAL LEARNING-MODELING PRACTICUM

A mini-practicum in the theory and techniques of social learning and role mo d eling. Prereq ui sit e : 55 1 . ( I )

553

REALITY THERAPY PRACTICUM

A m in i - p ract i cum in c ounseling using th .. theory and techniques of re., lity t h era py . Prerequ i s i t e s: 552 and 56 1 . ( 1 )

554

GESTALT THERAPY PRACTICUM

A m i n i - p ract iclim in Cllu nsE'l i ng using the theory <l nd techniques of Gestalt t hera p y , Prereq uisites: �5:1 an d �6 1 . ( I )

561

BASIC RELATIONSHIPS IN COUNSELING

A study of the theory, process, tec h ni q u es , and characteristics of the counseling relationship. A ba s ic course for M.A. s t udents in the COll n sel i ng- .md Gliidance program, (4)

563

PRACTICUM IN GROUP PROCESS AND LEADERSHIP

A human interaction laboratory which explores interpersonal operations in groups and f.leilit"tes the development o f self­ insight; "mp h ,lsis on leadership and devdopment of skill in di llgnosing individual. group, and organizational behavior pat­ terns and in fluences. Students will co-facilitate a la b o rat o ry group. Prereq uisite: 5 1 2, ( 2 )

565

ADVANCED HUMAN DEVELOPMENT

A compa ra t iv e st udy of human developmen t will be made a t various levels of de v elopmen t t hroug h observational assessments using non-standardized instruments: e.g., sociometric scales, autobiographies, interviews, interaction anal y s i s and other appro­ p ri a te measurements, A pract i cum (a m i n i m u m of one hour each week) is requ i red i n a school or appropriate .'genc)" Prerequisite: Fifth year or grad uate status, (4)

569

CAREER GUIDANCE

A study of careers, theories of choice, and guidance t !' chniques,

570

(4)

FIELDWORK IN COUNSELING AND GUIDANCE

A culminating practicum of field experience in schools or agencies using theory, sills, and techniques previously learned, A variety of work experiences with both individuals and groups, Students incorporate consult,ltion experience following the Adle rian model.

(4)

575

MENT AL HEALTH

Basic mental health p ri nc i ples as re l a ted to int erpersona l realtion­ ships, Foclls on self-understanding, Laboratory exper i ences as " , ranged, (4)

578

BEHAVIORAL PROBLEMS

Adlerian concepts provide t he basis for o b s e rv at i o n, motivat ion, modification, and life style assessment. Skills for as s i s t i ng people in developing responsibility fo r their own behavior, Laboratory experience as arr a ng ed. (4)

583

CURRENT ISSUES IN E XCEPTIONALITY

The characteristics of except i ona l students nnd the counselor's roil' i n deali n g with a variety of problems t hey mily have. Learning disabilities, emotional problems, physical pro b lems, and the gifted student. Given every othe.r interim. G (2-4)

597

INDEPENDENT STUDY

Projects o f varying length related to educational issues ur concerns of the individual participant and approved by an appropria te faculty member and t he dean. ( 1 -4)

598

STUDIES IN E DUCATION

A research pape r o r p roject on an educational issue selected j oin tl y b y the student and the graduate adviser, I t will b e reviewed by the st uden t 's g raduat e committee, ( 2 )

599

THE SIS

The thesis problem will be chosen from the candidate's m ajo r field of concentration and must be approved by the candidate's graduate committee, Candidates a re expected t o defend thejr thesis in a final oral examination conducted by their committee. (3-4)

SPECIAL ED UCATION 1 90

EXCEPTIONAL CHILDREN AND ADULTS

Introduction to the needs and characteristics of exceptional children and adults, Federal and state legislat ion, current issues, and practices of d el iv e ring services to handicapped individuals, Designed as an overview of t he field ior u ndergraduate students in s pec i al ed u cat i on, gener a l ed uca tion, nu rsi ng, co unseling, and other related fi elds . (3)

191

OBSERVATION IN SPECIAL EDUCATION

Observation in special education settings in t h e local ared, May be taken concurrently with SPED 190. No pr e requ i s i t e, ( 1 )

290

INTRODUCTION TO LEARNING DISABILITIES

Overview of the field of LeNning disabilit ies, i n clud i ng concepts, assessment, and instructional pract i ce s , Prereq u i site : EDUC 25 1 or EDUC 253 or conse n t of i ns t m c t or. ( 3 )

296

INTRODUCTION TO HEALTH AND PHYSICAL IMPAIRMENTS

Study of anatomical, physiological, social, and educational prob­ lems of those with orthopedic disabilities o r health problems, (2) NOTE: PREREQUISITES FOR 300/400 LEVEL SPECIA L EDUCA­ TION: EDUC 251 or 253 or consent of instructor. Students not majori ng in educat ion may be excused from this re q uirement .

390

INTRODUCTION TO DEVE LOPME NTAL DISABILITIES

A study of the emot i onal, soc ia l, ph y sical, and mental character­ istics of the developmentally dis" bled. Methods of class i fying, d i agno sing, and teach i ng mentally retarded c h ildren and ad u l ts fro m m edica l, ps y cholog i c a l, social, and educational poin ts of vie w. (:1 )

393

INTRODUCTION TO BEHAVIOR DISORDERS

C u rrent pro blems and issues as they a pply to the education of children with b eha v io r disorders. Includes use of behavior modifi­ cation and classroom management techniques, (3)

395

INTRODUCTION TO LANGUAGE DEVELOPMENT AND DISORDERS

Introduction to langudge disorders, assessment, and intervention. rocus on theories of language de v elopment and normal language ac q uisit i o n, (2)

398

ASSE SSMENT IN SPECIAL AND REMEDIAL E DUCATION

Study o f " var i e t y of informal and forma l assessment tests and procedures, Curriculum based assessments, systematic classroom observation, norm-referenced tests, task an a lys i s, and criterion­ referenced tests and proc ed ure s Me ex a m i n ed , Includes the role of assessment in eligibility and program pla n. nin g , (3)

399

PRACTICUM IN SPECIAL E DUCATION

Experience with spec i al education children or adults in a super­ vised s e t t ing, 1 hour credit given after successful completion of 35 clock hours. P rereq u i s it e: SPED 290 or consent of instructor. ( 1 -4)

403

PARENT/PROFESSIONAL PARTNERSHIP IN SPECIAL E DUCAnON

Discussion of the techniques for communicating eifectively with parents o f children with special needs . (2)

407

CURRICULUM AND INSTRUCTION FOR E XCEPTIONAL STUDENTS

Focus on teaching academic, social, and adapti v e skills to mild and moderately ha ndicap ped st uden ts, I ncl udes wr i ting individual education plans, ddta based instruction, ta s k anal y sis, and learn i n g sequences, Prerequisites: General Methods, SPED 290, o r consent of i n s t ru ctor, (4)


57 408

CAREER AND VOCATIONAL EDUCA TION FOR E XCEPTIONAL STUDENTS

Focus on care .. r education curricula, life adjustment, and voca­ tional instruction for mild and mOderately handicapped adoles­ cents and adults. Includes emphasis On community transition programs, superv ised work and living arrangements, and assess­ ment o f occupational sk ills. (2)

438

STUDENT TEACHING IN SECONDARY SPECIAL EDUCATION

Teaching i n special education classrooms of public schools under the direction and supervision of classroom and university teachers. 8 weeks. Prerequisite: consent of instructor. (6)

475

SUPERVISING PARA-PRO FESSIONALS AND VOLUNTEERS

Emphasis on the effective management of para-professionals and volunteers i n the classroom. ( J )

479

SPECIAL TECHNIQUES I N READING

Individual diagnostic assessment of reading proble.ms llsing both formal and informal testing techniques. Special instructional methods for remediation. Practicum required. Prerequisie: EDUC 325 or equival .. nt. (4)

485

THE GI FTED CHILD

A study of the gifted child, characteristics and problems, and school procedures designed to further development. (2)

490

E ARLY LEARNING EXPERIENCES FOR THE HANDICAPPED CHILD

Diagnostic and remedial techniques used i n early child hood education with hand icapped children. Review of normal and atypical c h i ld development and their i m plications for the learning process. (2)

491

PROGRAMMING EARLY CHILDHOOD EDUCATION FOR THE HANDICAPPED

In -depth study in the a d m i n istration of early childhood progra ms with emphasis On remediation techniques and interdisciplinary approaches. Prereq uisite: SPED 490. (2)

494

COMPUTER APPLICATION FOR THE HANDICAPPE D

An introduction into the application of computer technology with handicapped students. Focus On current issues and uses of computer technology including computer assisted instruction, software evaluation, pupil and data management, and computer aids for the handicapped. (2)

499

SEMINAR IN SPECIAL E DUCATION

Current topics on the te" ching of hand icapped children and adults. ( 2 )

501

WORKSHOPS IN SPE CIAL EDUCATION

Graduate workshops in special education for varying lengths of time. ( 1 -4)

520

TEACHING HANDICAPPED CHILDREN IN THE REGULAR C LASSROOM

An examination of teaching strategies appropriate for exceptional children i n regular classrooms. Emphasis on the needs of excep­ tional children, program modification, and classroom manage­ ment. Designed for regular educators. (2)

521

TEACHING HANDICAPPED ADOLE SCENTS IN THE REGULAR CLASSROOM

An examination of teaching strategies appropriate for exceptional adolescents in regular classrooms. Emphasis on the needs of exceptional adolescen ts, program modification, and classroom management. Designed for regu lar educators. (2)

530

CURRENT lSSUES IN ASSESSM E NT

Current issues in the use of assessment information for making educational decisions. l'rerequisite: SPED 398 or consent of instructor. ( 2 )

SEVERELY AND PROFOUNDLY HANDICAPPED IN SCHOOL AND SOCIETY

Introduction to the physical, social, and educational environments of the severely and profoundly handicapped and the consequent implicat ions for the education and training process. Interdisci­ plinary conce pts, termi nology, and instructional models. (2)

532

STUDENT TEACHING IN ELEMENTARY SPECIAL E DUCATION

Teaching in special education classrooms of public schools under the direction and supervision of classroom and univ(;'rsity teachers. 8 we.. k.s. Prerequisite: consent of instructor. ( 6 )

439

531

E DUCATION AND TRAINlNG OF THE SEVEREL Y AND PROFOUNDLY HANDICAPPED

I n -depth study of educational prescription and programming for the sever ..ly and profoundly handicapped. Emphasis on teaching strategies and curriculum modification as they apply to this population. ( 2 )

533

CURRENT ISSUES IN DEVE LOPMENTAL DISABILITIES

Current issues related to the education of children and adults with developmen tal dis,lbilities. Prerequisite: SPED 3<)() or consent of instructor. (2)

534

CURRENT ISSUES IN BEHA VIOR DISORDERS

Curre.nt issues related to the education of chi ldren and youth with behavio r disorders. l'rerequisite: SPED3930r consent of instructor. (2)

535

CURRENT ISSUES IN LEARNING DISA BILITIE S

Current issues related to the education of children and adults with learning disabilities. Prerequisite: SPED 290 or consent of instruc­ tor. (2)

537

CURRENT ISSUES IN LANGUAGE DISORDERS

Current issues and ap proaches in assessin� and remed iating ch ildren with language disorders. Prerequisite: SPED 395 or consent of instruct or. (2)

538

CURRENT ISSUES IN EARLY CHILDHOOD HANDICAPPED

Current issues related to the education of pre-school hand icapped children. Prerequisite: SPED 490 or consent of instructor. ( 2 )

570

APPLIED BEHA VIOR ANALYSIS FOR TEACHERS

A survey of t h e principles and techniques of applied behavior analysis. Includes behavior modification, self-control techniq ues, cognitive behavior modification, and research design. (2)

575

INTRODUCTION TO THE CONSULTANT TE ACHER IN SPECIAL EDUCATION

Introduction to the principles ,l nd practices of a consultin� teacher model in special education. Focus On instructional delivery appropriate far providing direct and indir..ct services to handi­ capped children in m a i n s t ream c1,lSsraoms. I n d udes a one hour pract icum. (3)

576

COMMUNICATION SKILLS FOR THE CONSULTING TEACHER

Emphasis on the i nterpersonal skills necessary for the consulting teacher i n special education. Exploration of variables involved i n developing cooperation between consultants and regular class· room teachers. Indudes a One hour practicum. (3)

588

ADMINISTRATION OF SPECIAL EDUCATION PROGRAMS

Investigation of existing special education administrative units, pupil placem .. n t procedures, student staffings, program reim· bursement procedures, ,l nd federal funding models. (3)

590

RESEARCH IN EARLY CHILDHOOLIHANDICAPPED

A combination of organized coursework and independent study in early childhood/handicapped. Special ized study in a selected topic. Prerequisite: SPED 536 or consent of instructor. ( I )

591

RESEARCH I N SPECIAL EDUCATION

Review of current research on selected topics in special education.

(l)

592

RESEARCH I N LEARNING DISABILITIES

A combination of organized coursewark and independent study in learning disabilit ies. Specialized study in a selected topic. Prerequisite: SPED 535 or pemlission of instructor. ( ] )


58 593

RESE ARCH IN BEHAVIOR DISORDERS

A combination of organized coursework and i ndep en d ent st ud y in behavior disorders. Specialized study in a selected to pic . Prerequisite: SPED 534 o r permission of instructor. ( I )

594

RESEARCH IN DEVELOPMENT At DISABILITIES

A combination of organized coursework a n d i n d e pen den t study in de ve lo pmental disabilities. Specialized study in a.selected topic. P re requ is it e: SPED 533 or permission of instructor. ( I )

595

SPECIAL E DUCATION: INTERNSHIP

I n te rn s hi p in special education set t ing s under the direction and s u per vis ion of classroom and university facul t y . Prerequisite: Teac h i ng credential and consent of instructor. (4)

597

INDEPENDENT STUDY

Projects of varying l eng th related to educational issues or co n cern s of the individual participant and approved by a n appropriate faculty member and the dean. ( 1 -4)

598

STUDIES IN E DUCATION

599

THE SIS

A research paper or proj ec t on an educational issue selected join tly by the student and the graduate adviser. I t will be reviewed by the student's graduate committee. (2)

The thesis problem will be chosen from t h e candidate's major field of concentration and must be approved by the candidate's graduate committee. Candidates are expected to defend their thesis in a final oral examination conducted by their committee.

(3-4)

Eng ineering E ngineers are often called the modern tool b uild­ ers_ The 'tools' built by today's engineers are not the simple lever or ax, but appear in the shape of an airplane ( transportation 'tool'), a television (com­ m unication 'tool'), or a computer program (infor­ mation handling 'toon. Engineers investigate all aspects of life in today's society and attempt to create tools that, in some respect, improve the quality of life. While scientists explain what is, engineers create what neuer was.

PLu offers a combination of programs in engineer­ ing. The programs provide an education of suffi­ ciently fundamental nature to permit rapid adap­ tation to new technical programs and opportunities and sufficiently board liberal scope to provide awareness of the social responsibilities implicit in engineering_ Degrees are offered in computer engineering and engineering physics. A dual degree 3-2 engineering program is also maintained with t he School of Engi­ neering and Applied Science of Columbia Univer­ sity; concentrations in electrical and mechanical engineering are available. In addition, an electrical engineering m inor is offered, primarily intended for majors in physics or computer science. The computer engineering program is admin­ istered jointly by the Department of Physics and Engineering and the Department of Mathematics and Computer Science through the Computer Engineering Committee. Engineering physics and 3-2 program s are administered by the Depart­ ment of Physics and Engineering_

FACULTY From the Department of Physics and Engineering: Greenwood, Chair; Adams, Bowers, W. Chang, Clarke, Gutmann, Nornes, R. Parker, Tang, Taylor, Wrigley. A committee of faculty administers the computer engineering program: Spillman, Cha ir; Bandy ( ad­ visory), Edison, Gutmann, J. Herzog ( advisory). For additional fac ulty refer to the Department of Mathe­ matics and Computer Science.

Students i n ten din g to major in a technical areas such as en gi ­ neering are advised ear ly to examine the i nte rrela tionsh i ps be­ tween the career fields of en gi neeri n g, computer science, and phYSics. Scientists have as thei r prime o bj ect i v e increased knowl­ ed ge of nature. Both the engineer and the scientist are thoroughly educated in the mathematical, phYSical, a n d com p u t a t io nal sci­ ences, but the scientist primarily uses this k nowledge to acquire new knowledge, whereas the enginee r a pplies t he k no wl edge to design and deve lo p usable devin's, structures, and processes. Engineers are c a ll ed upon for all aspects of a project: conce ptuali­ zation, design, s tu dy, construct ion, a n d maintenance. Not o n l y do engineers participate as the technical reference for these activities, they ad d i t ionally assume responsibilities fo r proj ec t economics and management and for educating and communi­ cating with others rega rd i ng the project. For these reasons PLU is uniquely situated to educate engineers: it combines strong and growing selections of technical courses with the li b era l PLU core curriculum,

COMPUTER ENGINEERING Computer engineering combines courses from computer sci­ ence and from traditional engineering (particularly electrical

engineering). I t is a relatively new branch of eng i nee ring, but it is growing rapidly. I n terms of the numberof gradua tes produced, i t is a l ready the fifth l a rges t engineering degree program nationally. Students will receive a solid background i n computer science, while dev elo ping an intimate knowledge of how software inter­ acts with computer hardware. A detailed understanding of the hardware involved is also included in the course of i nst ruct ion.

B.S. MAJOR IN COMPUTER ENGINEERING: 1 6 semester hours: Mathematics 1 51, 1 52, 253, and either 331 or 335; 10 semester hours: Physics 147, 148, 1 53, 1 54; 17 s emes t e r hours from Engineer in g 161, 1 62, 271, 341, 347, 352, and 362 ( or Com­ puter Science 280); 1 2 semester hours from Co mp uter Science 144, 270, 380; 13 semester hours: technical. electives from Engi­ nee ring 354, 491, Mathematics 345, 346, Physics 331, 332, Compu­ ter Science 344, 348, 355, 375, 385, 386, 467, 470, 480, 488, 491, 495. Technical e lect i ves must include four hours from Engineering 354 or Mathematics 345 a nd 346. A typical computer engineering program is as follows: Physics 1 47, 1 48, 153, 1 54 Freshman Engin ee rin g 161, 162 Math 151, 152 Computer Science 144 Sophomore Engineering 271, 352, 354 Mathematics 253 Computer Science 270, 280 Engineering 341, 347 Junior Computer Science 380 Tec hnical Elective I Mathematics 335 Technical Electives II, I I I Senior


59 The following computer science courses are applicable toward this degree: CSCI 1 44 CSCI 270 CSCI 280 CSCI 344 CSC! 348 CSC! 355 CSC! 375 CSC! 380 CSCI 385 CSCI 386 CSCI 430 CSCI 467 CSCI 470 CSCI 480 CSCI 488 CSC! 490 CSC! 491 CSCI 495

Introduction to Computer Science Data Structures Digital Logic Operating Systems Modeling and Simulation Compilers Design and Analysis of Algorithms Assembly Language and Computer Organization Computer Architecture Distributed Systems Artificial lnteUigence Data Base Management Computer Aided Design of DigitaJ Systems Microprocessors VLSI Design Seminar in Computer Science Independent Study Computer Science Research

3-2 ENGINEERING A smaller university like PLU is uniquely suited to foster a stu­ dent's personal development while making a firm but not premature commitment to professional and career goals. Such a setting also helps a student to cla rify the social context in which engineers function. A major school of engineering (like Columbia) emphasizes advanced stud ies, research, and interaction with industry. Thus, PLU's 3-2 program gives students the best of two settings-breadth at I'LU and depth in a n engineering specialty at Columbia or elsewhere. Students have also been involved in 3-2 programs at state universities in the Pacjfic Northwest such as the Un iversity of WaShington, Washington State University, and Oregon State U niversity. During the first t h ree years o f this program students must complete I) all general university core requirements, 2) two interims, 3 ) all basic science and mathematics requirements, and 4) seven courses in engineering. Once a clear sense of direction within an engineering speciality is gained, a recommendtion to Columbia may b e granted. Admission to Columbia is automatic upon recommendation. Details of transfer admission are made available in the fall of the th ird year. Normally two additional years are necessary to finish engineering specially courses. If the student's specially is other than chemical engineering, both Engineering 231 Statics and 271 Electrical Circuits should be taken. These should be followed by 232 Mechanics of Solids for students in the mechanical engineering concen tration or 34 1 a n d 347 IntrodLlction to Electronics (and laboratory) for those with interest in electrical engineering. The natural sciences core requirement is automatically satisfied by engineering students as is the second part of option II o f the f{)feign language require­ ment in the Colleges of Arts and Sciences. Unless they auto­ matically qualify for fulfilling option I o f the foreign language requirement on the basis of their high school work, students are encouraged t o satisfy this requirement by means o f option II. Hours freed by satisfaction of the foreign language requirement on the basis o f high school work may profitably be used for taking another core requirement (e.g., arts!literature or social sciences), for taking mathematics beyond calculus, or for taking additional courses i n computer science. Particular attention should be given to the In tegrated Studies Program, known as Core II, and to its applica bility for engineers in our technological society. Students with strong preparation (A's and B's) in high school mathematics at least t h rough trigonometry as well as in science through physics and with SAT math scores n o lower than 550 should schedule their classes as indicated below. Courses for stu­ dents interested in chemical engineering in the 3-2 program are listed separately below. Those with less adequate preparation in mathematics and sciences, particuJarly mathematics, should con­ sider strengthening their background with community coUege work in the summer before enrollment at PLU and should post­ pone the physics sequence un til their second year. An appropri­ ate first year sche.dule then includes: Fall-EGR 161 Introd flclion 10 Engineering I, MATH 1 5 1 Calculus, CHEM 1 1 5 Ch,�m istry, a general university core requirement, and PE 1 00 or a PE activity course; Spring-EGR 162 Introduction to Engineering /I, MATH 1 52 Calculus, CSC! 1 1 0 BASIC a core requirement, and a physical education activity course (or PE 100).

3-2 DUAL DEGREE: Dual B.s. degrees from PLU and Colum­ bia, or another ABET accredited Engineering Sc hool: th ree full­ time years at PLU plus 2 additional full-time years at the other institution. PLU B.5. in Engineering Science is granted after the first year at Columbia; a BS. in Engineering Specialty (E.E., M.E., etc.) is granted by Columbia a t the end of the fifth year.

REQUIRED COURSES (NON-CHEMICAL ENGINEERING SPECIALTV): Physics 147, 1 48, 1 53, 1 54, 223; Engineering 1 6 1 , 162, 354;, 382 plus t h ree courses of en gineering specia lty from Electrical-271, 341 /347, 352, 362 and Mechanica l - 23 1 , 232, 3 5 1 . 442. Required supporting courses: Math 1 5 1, 152, 253; Computer Science 144 o r 240; Chemistry 1 1 5 . Chemistry 1 1 6 is recom­ mended, especially for those students intending to attend Columbia. A typical 3-2 engineering science program i s as follows: Engineering 1 6 1 , 162 Freshman Physics 147, 1 48, 1 53, 1 54 Math 1 5 1, 1 52 Engineering 231, 232, or Sophomore Engineering 271. 341, 347 Engineering 354 Physics 223 Math 2.';3 Computer Science 1 44 or 240 Engineering 271 or Engineering 231 junior Engineering 382 Chemistry 1 1 5, 1 1 6

REQUIRED COURSES FOR CHEMICAL ENGINEERING SPECIALTV: The foll.owing program is intended for those stu­ dents wishing to specialize in chemical engineering. Freshman

Sophomore junior

Engineering 1 6 1 , 162 PhYsics 1 47, 148, 1 53, 1 54 Ch�mistry 1 1 5, 1 1 6 Math 1 5 1 , 1 5 2 Engineering 2 3 1 , 382 Math 253 Chemistry 331, 332, 333 Engineering 354 Chemistry 341, 343, 456

Students are encouraged to take economics for one of the core courses, and if other open hours are available, Analytical Chemistry 321 should be considered. Engineering 351, Thermo­ dynam ics, can be taken in place of Physical Chemistry 341 . Ii the student should decide to continue o n a t PLU for the fourth year, then a B.s. in Chemistry may be obtained with American Chemical Society certification.

E LECTRICAL ENGINEERING MINOR: 20 semester hours: Engineering 1 6 1 , 162, 271, 341, 347, 352, 354, and 362. Required supporting courses: Introductory sequence in Physics (2 semes­ ters) and Calculus (3 semesters) and Computer Science 144 and 280.

ENGINEERING PHYSICS The Department of Physics and Engineering offers a four-year engineering degree for students interested in an engineering related program that includes a substantial amount of basic science. I t is more applied than a physics degree while at the same time more theoretical than the usual engineering degree. The B.s. degree in engineering physics prepares students for employment in many diverse industries Or d j reclly for graduate study in nearly all fields of engineering. Strength may be built in electrical or mechanical engineering sciences by careful selection of upper division courses. Students are urged to develop a minor in either mat hematics or computer science, particularly appropriate for working in industry immediately after graduation. For maximum flexibility in upper division courses, students aspiring to the engineering ph ysics degree should schedule their first two years identically to those for dual degree 3-2 engineering. junior and senior year schedules are determined by upper division requirements and by students' objectives.

B.S_ DEGREE IN ENGINEERING PHYSICS: 47-48 semester hours: Physics 1 47, 148, 1 53, 1 54, 223, 331, 356, 421, 422; Engi­ neering 1 6 1 , 162, 354, 382 plus four courses of engineering speciality, one of which must be an upper division course, from E lec t rical- 271, 341, 347, 352, 362 and Mechanical-231, 232, 351, 442. Physics 336 may be substituted for Engineering 232. Chemis­ try 341 may be substituted for Engineering 35 1 . Required support­ ing courses: Math 1 5 1, 1 52, 253; Chemistry 1 1 5; Computer Science 240.


60 A typical engineering physics program is as follows: Physics 147, 1 48, 1 53, 1 54 Freshman Engineering 1 6 1 , 1 62 Math 1 S t , 1 52 Engineering 231, 232 or Engineering Sophomore 271 , 34 1 , 347 Engineeri ng 354 Physics 223 Math 253 Engineering 351, 271 or Engineering 352, 23 1 Junior Engineering 382 Physics 356 Co'm puter Science 240 Senior Physics 33 1 , 4 2 1 , 422 Ch�mistry 1 1 5

COURSE OFFERINGS­ ENGINEERING 1 6 1 , 162

INTRODUCTION TO ENGINEERING

An introduction to the en�ineering profession and development of basic s k i l l s important to the profession, includin� problem solving, en!\ineering design, and graphics. 1 6 1 offered I; 1 62 offered 11 (2,2)

231

STATICS

f-:undamental engineering statics using vector algebra; conditions for equilibrium, resultant force systems, centroid and center of !\ravity, methods of virtual work, friction. Prerequisite: PHYS 1 53. 1 (2)

232

MECHANICS OF SOLIDS

Mechanics of deformable solid bodies; deformation, st ress, consti­ tutive equations for elastic materials.. thermoelasticity, tension, flexure, torsion, stability of equilibrium. Prerequisite: EGI< 23 1 . II (4 )

271

INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS

Introduction to the fundamental concepts of DC circuits includin!\ Ohm's and Kirchoff's Laws and the function of inductive and capacitive elements. Prerequisite: PHYS 1 54. I (2)

341

INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRONICS

A n introduction to the use and properties o f semicond uctors as related to electronic devices; diodes, transistors, F 's, operational a mplifiers. Concurrent re!\istration i n 347 i s required. Prereq uisite: 27 1 . II (2)

347

INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRONICS LABORATORY

351

THERMODYNAMICS

352

CIRC UITS I

354

ENGINEERING ANALYSIS

362

DIGITAL ELECTRONICS

382

INTRODUCTION TO MATERIALS SCIENCE

Concepts and equations of classical, macroscopic thermody­ n a mics; thermodynamic cycles, flow and n o n - flow systems, properties and mathematical relations of pure substances, mix ­ tures and solutions, phase transition and chemical reactions; a n elemen tary treatment o f statistical thermodynamics. Prerequisite: PHYS 1 54. 1 ( 4 )

Theory of AC circuits, amplifiers. and oscillators. Time domain transient response and sinusoidal frequency response. Prerequi­ site: 272. I (4)

I ntroduction to vector and tensor calculus. functions of a complex variable. Laplace and Fourier transforms, and undetermined multipliers. Comprehensive and illustrative examples from the fields of electromagnetism, waves, tr;]nsport, vibrations, a n d mechanics. May be t a k e n a s a package with P H Y S 356. Prerequi­ site: MATH 253. " (4) An.1lysis of digital design techniques, including a review of combinational logic, flip flops, registers, counters, and timing circuits. " (4)

r u ndamentals of engineering materials including metals, poly­ mers. ceramics, and semiconductors. The course focuses on how the useful properties of these materials can be altered by changing their microstructure. Prerequisites: PHYS 1 54, CHEM 1 1 5. I I ( 4 )

442

TRANSPORT: MOMENTUM, ENERGY, AND MASS

Unifying concepts o f the transport o f momentum, energy, and mass in pl.mar, cylindrical and spherical geomet ries; mathematical aspects of fluid mechanics; boundary layers; transport coefficien ts­ viscosity, thermal conductivity, mass diffusivity; a n elementary treatment of turbulent flow. Prerequisite: 35 1 or consent of instructor. " (4)

491

INDEPENDENT STUDY: E LECTRICAL ENGINEERING SCIENCE

Selected topics of mutual interest to student and instructor. Enrollment i s limited and open only to students who have discussed a proposed topic or course o f study in considerable depth with instructor. Prerequisite: mutual interest ( 1 -4 )

492

INDEPEN DENT STUDY: MECHANICAL ENGINEERING SCIENCE

See 49 1 .

Basic and intermediate laboratory exercises performed in conjunc­ tion with In troduction t o EIC'ctronics. Concurrent registration in 34 1 is req uired (I ( l l

English E nglish studies offer excellent preparation for any future requiring analytical thinking, skill in writing, discernment in reading, an appreciation of human experience and aesthetic values, and the processes of critical and creative expression. Business (espec ially management), law, educa­ tion, and publishing are four areas where our graduates frequently make their careers.

O ur progrilm offers concentrations in literature, writing, and publish.ing. The English Department also supports the London Program and often offers an interim stud y tour to the British Isles.

FACULTY

P . Benton, Chair; M_ Benton, Bergman, Cady, Campbell, Eyler, JansenJaech, Jenseth, G, Johnson, L. Johnson, Jones, Klopsch, D. M. Martin, G. Martin, Rahn, Reigstad, D. Seal. Assisted by Lansverk, Leigh, Raffel, Wagner, Distinguished Writers in Residence: Spring 1985-Richard Murphy, Spring 1986-Lesley Hazleton, Spring 1987-Stephen Becker, Spring 1988-Noelle de Chambrun. BACHELOR O F ARTS MAJOR: Total Credits required: At least 32 but no more than 40 (of 1. 28) hours in English beyond 1 01, with an elective emphasis in literature, writing. or publishing and printing arts.


'" •

� � ' --; � -----------------------------� ------------------

Required English courses: Surveys 241, 251, 252; at least one course in a historical period (342, 343, 31l1, 384, 3R9, 390, 391, 392); at least one course in a major author (382, 383, 440, 451, 452); and 12 hours of electives, excluding interim Courses and internships. Foreign language: At least two years of a foreign language at the university level. or the equivalent (See College of Arts and Sciences Foreign Language Requirement, Option 1.) Junior Review: During the junior year each major initiates a meeting with a committee of departmental facuity, chosen by student and adviser, to discuss progress, interests, goals, and plans for the remaining semesters in that student's program. CERTIFICATE IN WRITING: Majors are encouraged to in­ clude courses in writing in their program. Those majors who take three writing courses beyond 101 and prepare a portfolio o� their work will be awarded a "certificate in writing."

MINOR ( E MPHASIS ON LITERATURE): 20 semester hours, beyond 1 0 1 , excluding cou rses for interim credit, of which at least R hours should be upper division. These courses should include 4 hours in American literature, 4 hours in British litera­ ture before 1700, 4 hours in British literature after 1 700, and at least 4 additional hours in literature. MINOR (EMPHASIS ON WRITING): 20 semester h ours, beyond 101, excluding courses for interim credit, of which at least 8 hours should be upper division. These courses should include 4 hours in British literature before 1700, 4 hours in American or British literature after 1 700, and 12 hours in writing courses drawn from 201, 225, 227, 327, 328, 341, 403, 421, or other approved courses in writing.

MINOR (EMPHASIS ON PUBLISHING AND PRINTING ARTS): 20 semester hours as follows: 1 . An 8-hour core of t h ree required courses (321, 322, 331 ). 2. Th ree elective courses ( 1 2 hours) from two or t h ree of these groups: WRITING: Approved courses in English (201, 225, 227, 324, 327, 32R, 366) or Communication Arts (283, 384) MANAGEMENT: Approved courses in Business Administration (2RI, 282, 350, 370, 475) or Computer Science ( 1 1 0/210, 144, 220) DESIGN: Approved courses in Art (326, 370, 3%, 426, 470, 4%) or English (332, if taken for 4 credit hours) or Communication Arts (380) 3. Approved practical experience (credit or non-cred it) in an off­ campus internship or with an on-campus publication. See the brochure on this program for furt her details.

I

i1

PROSPECTIVE TEACHERS: Students preparing to teach in junior or senior high school may earn either a Bachelor of Arts in English with certLfication from the School of Educat ion, Or a Bachelor of Arts in Education with a teaching major in English. See the School of Education section of t h is catalog for the additional requirements for certification or the Bachelor of Arts i n Education.

CO URSE OFFERINGS AMERICAN LITERATURE

241 AMERICAN LITERATURE 342 TWENTIETH CENTURY AMERICAN POETRY 343 TWENTIETH CENTURY AMERICAN FICTION AND DRAMA 345 CANADIAN FICTION 440 SEMINAR-A MAJOR AMERICAN AUTHOR

391 VICTORIAN LITERATURE 392 TWENTIETH CENTURY BRITISH LITERATURE 451 SEMINAR-A MAJOR BRITISH AUTHOR BE FORE 1750 452 SEMINAR-A MAJOR BRITISH AUTHOR SINCE 1750 GENRE AND SPECIAL STUDIES 216 217 218 230 231 363 364 365 381 491, 597

WRITING, LANGUAGE, AND PUBLISHING 100 101 201 225 227 321 322 324 327 328 331 332 366 400 402 403 421 100

251 252 381 382 383 384 389 390

ENGLISH LITERATURE: BEGINNINGS TO 1750 ENGLISH LITERATURE: A FTER 1750 STUDIES IN MEDIEV AL LITERATURE CHAUCER AND HIS AGE SHAKESPEARE ENGLISH RENAISSANCE LITERATURE RESTORATION AND EIGHTEENTH CENTURY ENGLISH LITERATURE THE ENGLISH ROMANTIC MOVEMENT

BASIC WRITING SKlLLS COLLEGE ENGLISH INTERMEDIATE WRITING AUTOBIOGRAPHICAL WRITING IMAGINATIVE WRITING I THE BOOK IN SOCIETY PUBLISHING PROC EDURES FRE E LANCE WRITING IMAGINATIVE WRITING II ADVANCED COMPOSITION THE ART OF THE BOOK I THE ART OF THE BOOK II WRITING FOR CHILDREN LINGUISTICS HISTORY OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE MODERN E NGLISH GRAMMAR TUTORIAL IN WRITING BASIC WRITING SKlLLS

An intensive review and practice of mechanics, the fundamentals

of grammar, and the structure 01 sentences and paragra phs. Does not count toward fulfillment of general un iversity writing require­ ment. (2)

101

COLLEGE E NGLISH

201

INTERMEDIATE WRITING

Develops a student's powers to read, think, and write effectively. Emphasis on short papers and guided revision. Includes a unit on library research techniques. I Il ( 4 ) Opportunities to practice and develop writing by explOring sclected topics from various disciplines. Some emphasis on rewri ting-focusing th" material and adjusting the style for d i ffer!'nt ..:l udipnct's. One section may be devoted to autobiographical writing. (Prerequisite: 101 or its equivalc.nt, Advanced Placement, or consent of instructoL) I I I ( 4)

216 BRITISH LITERATURE

POETRY SHORT STORY DRAMA CONTEMPORARY LITERATURE MASTERPIECES OF EUROPEAN LITERATURE CHILDREN'S LITERATURE SPECIAL TOPICS IN CHILDREN'S LITERATURE FANTASY AND FAIRY TALES STUDIES IN MEDIEVAL LITERATURE 492 INDEPENDENT READING AND RESEARCH GRADUATE RESEARCH

POETRY

A study of poems and conventions of poetry from the Greek classics to modern projective verse. I n tended to develop the reader's ability to respond with sensitivty and discrimination to a rich variety of poetic forms, I (4)

21 7

SHORT STORY

Examines the development of short fiction, concentrating on themes and techniques of the genre. Includes stories by American, British, and Continental writers. II (4)

218

DRAMA

A survey of masterpieces from classical Greece to the present, with emphasis on the basic elements of drama ( p lot, character, lan­ guage) and on the traditional genre. II (4)

61


62 225

AUTOBIOGRAPHICAL WRITING

227

An introduction t o a rich l i terary tradition, with analySis in depth of such authors as H. C. Andersen, Tolkien, Lewis, Potter, Wilder, and LeGuin. I II (4)

IMAGINATIVE WRITING I

364

CHILDREN'S LITERATURE

SPECIAL TOPICS IN CHILDREN'S LITERATURE

Emphasis on American fiction since 1 950. 1 (4)

231

365

CONTEMPORARY LITERATURE MASTERPIECES OF EUROPEAN LITERATURE

Representative works of the literature of Western Europe, especial­ ly classical, medieval, and Renaissance. n (4)

241

AMERICAN LITERATURE

The continuity of themes and forms i n American prose, poetry, and fiction fTOm colonization to the First World War. Emphasis on major works of the 19th century. II (4)

251

ENGLISH LITERATURE: BEGINNINGS TO 1750

Emphasis on the continuity and variety of English literature trom Beowulf t h rough Neo-c1assicism and the early novel. I (4)

252

ENGLISH LITERATURE: AFTER 1750

English literature, especially poetry, from the emergence of romanticism to the 20th century. 11 ( 4 )

321

THE BOOK IN SOCIETY

A critical look at the role of books in our history, society, and daily lives. Topics include: The Book Before Printing; the Printing Revolution and Emergence of the Publishing Industry; Paper­ backs; Censorship and Manipulation; Children's Books; Technical and Ethical Horizons. (2)

322

PUBLISHING PROCEDURES

A workshop in troduction to the world o f book publishing, involving students in decisions about what to publish and how to produce it. Editing, designing, and preparing a manuscript for production. Plans for marketing a finished product. ( 4 )

324

FREELANCE WRITING

A course in writing for publication, w i t h primary emphasis on the feature article. I ntended to help students develop research and editorial skills; t o help them produce writing that is c lear, informative, and expressive; to enhance their sense of audience; and to introduce them to procedures for submitting for magazine publication. 11 (4)

327

IMAGINATIVE WRITING II

An advanced workshop in writing poetry and short fiction. Some attention will be given to procedures for submitting manuscript for publication. 11 (4)

328

ADVANCED COMPOSITION

FAIRY TALES AND FANTASY

Selected fairy tales are told, and various ways to interpret them are explored. Fantasy is studied as a genre, with emphasis on kinds of fantasies, such as pure fantasy, sword and sorcery, the detective novel, science fiction, and horror fiction. I (4)

366

WRITING FOR CHILDREN

A workshop i n writing fiction and non-fiction for children and teenagers, with a n i n t roduction to the vadeties of contemporary children's literature. II ( 4 )

381

STUDIES IN MEDIEV AL LITERATURE

Stud ies in the literature of Western Europe from 700 to 1 500, excluding Cha ucer. Consideration of genres, t hemes, and the place o f literature in medieval life. a/y II (4)

382

CHAUCER AND HIS AGE

383

SHAKESPEARE

A study o f Chaucer's major works, especially The Canterbllry Tales, i n their lively 14th cent ury setting. Includes a n i ntroduction to the development o f the English language. II (4)

Ten to twelve representative plays. Recommended as background: 251. 1 ( 4 )

384

ENGLISH RENAISSANCE LITERATURE

Studies the Golden Age of English literature. Selected poets from Wyatt to Marvell, including Sidney, Spenser, Shakespeare, Donne, and Jonson; selected playwrights from Kyd t o Webster; selected prose from More t o Bacone and Browne. (4)

389

RESTORATION AND EIGHTEENTH CENTURY ENGLISH LITERATURE

A study of neo-classic writings and the developing social aware­ ness o f the preromantic age: Dryden and Pope to Johnson and Blake. Examination of the beginnings of the novel in Defoe, Richardson, F ielding, Smollett, and Sterne. I (4)

390

THE ENGLISH ROMANTIC MOVEMENT

A study of the romantic awakening in England: Blake, Words­ worth, Coleridge, Shelley, Keats, Byron, and others. Attention also to novelists of the period such a s Austen and Scott. I (4)

391

VICTORIAN LITERATURE

Selected authors (including Carlyle, Tennyson, Dickens, and Hard y ) and topics from a period of rapid and momentous social change. II (4)

A study of rhetorical princi ples used in writing persuasively and imaginatively. Required for certification b y the School of Educa­ tion. I 11 ( 4 )

392

331

Selected playwrights from Shaw to Beckett; poetry of Yeats, Hardy, Thomas, and Auden; fiction of Joyce, Woolf, Lawrence, Greene, Lessing, and others. II (4)

THE ART OF THE BOOK I

Exploration of the design and mechanical arts of fine book making, focusing on historical models and methods and the contemporary renaissance they've inspired. Use of fine materials and hand processes to create printed, illustrated, and bound texts. (2)

332

(

363

Content varies each year. Possible topics include genres, t hemes, historical periods, and traditions. M a y be repeated for credit with differen t topic. 1 ( 4 )

230

---

CANADIAN FICTION

Novels and short stories b y Anglo-Canadians, with some a t tention to French-Canadian literature i n translation. I (4)

A beginning workshop in writing poetry and short fiction. Includes a study of techniques and forms t o develop critical standards and a n understanding of the writing process. ( P rerequi­ site: ! O I or its equivalent, Advanced Placement, or consent of instructor.) I (4)

-� -

345

Reading autobiography and writing parts o f one's own, with an emphasis on how writing style and personal identity complement each other. 11 (4)

THE ART OF THE BOOK II

Individual projects to explore further typography and fine book­ making. Production of a small edition of an original text-selected, edited, designed, illustrated, printed, and bound by one or a team of students. ( 1 -4)

342

TWENTIETH CENTURY AMERICAN POETRY

Representative poets from the generation of Robert Frost and Ezra Pound to our contem poraries. a/y II (4)

343

TWENTIETH CENTURY AMERICAN FICTION AND DRAMA

Literature and society to the 1 9505, with emphasis on major authors between the Wars, including Hemingway, Faulkner, O'Neill. a/y II (4)

400

TWENTIETH CENTURY BRITISH LITERATURE

LINGUISTICS

See Languages.

402

HISTORY OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE

403

MODERN ENGLISH GRAMMAR

The de.velopment o f English from its Germanic origins to its modern structure, spelling, and rich vocabulary, drawn from many languages. (2)

A study of three major approaches t o grammar: the traditional, the struct ural, and the transformational. Includes introduction to the history of the English language. 11 (4)

421

TUTORIAL IN WRITING

Guided work in an individual writing project. A plan of study must be approved before the student may register for the Course.

( 1 -4)


[

63 440

SEMINAR-A MAJOR AMERICAN AUTHOR

452

SEMINAR-A MAJOR BRITISH AUTHOR SINCE 1750

Con�centrated study of the work, life, influence, and critical reputation of a m aj or A m eri ca n a u t h or, inc l ud i ng substantial l i brary resea rc h . I (4)

Concentrated study of t h e work, life, influence, a n d critical repu t at io n of a m a jo r British aut h o r from t h e age of Blake to the

451

491, 492

SEMINAR-A MAJOR BRITISH AUTHOR BE FORE 1750

Concentrated study of the work, life, intluence, and critical

reputation of a m ajo r British author from th e Renaissance to the age of F i e l d in g and Dr. Johnson, i n c lu d in g substantial libra ry resea rch. aly II (4)

present, incl u d i n g substantial library research. II

(4)

INDEPENDENT READING AND RESEARCH

An in t e ns i ve course in reading. May include a thesis. Intended fo r

upper d i v isi o n majors. I I I

597

( 1 -4)

GRADUATE RESEARCH 0 -4)

English as a The Intensive English Language Institute (operated by the American Cultural Exchange) is an affiliate of PLU offering intensive English classes, which are designed to prepare internationa.i students for studies in US colleges and universities. The institute is aut horized to grant 1-20 forms; how­ ever, admission to the institute does not constitute admission to the university, and no transferable credit is given for institute courses. The primary goal of the In tensi ve English Language Institute (lEU) at Pacific Lutheran University is to prepare students for successful academic careers at American Colleges and universities by providing them with a strong background in English and academic study skills. The sk ills-based curricu­ lum covers grammar in three levels and speaking/ Iiste.ning, reading, and writing, in each of four levels: ELEMENTARY INTERMEDIATE ADVANCED AUDIT/AUDIT REVIEW When new students en ter the Institute, they are given a series of placement tests. On the basis of these tests, students are placed in one of the levels (elementary, intermedia te, or advanced) for each skill area, or in the 15-hour Audit/Audit Review course. Students progress in the use of English through five hours of language instruction each day, Monday through Friday. A typical lEU schedule might consists of Elementary Reading, Elementary Writing, Intermediate Grammar, and I ntermediate Conversation, plus one hour daily of language lab-25 hours per week.

LECTURE PREPARATION ( 5 hou rs ) - A wurse mvc ri n g n or e �

ra ki ng skills, summarization, idcnri�� ng mai n and supporti ng ideas of a !cenm:, and giving opinions a bo u t [he.: le c tu re. Srudcms (om·

plere a ('mock" college - l evel academic (OLIrSe, i nc luding reading in J

colkgc ( e x t , taki n g quizzes and ex a ms , and comp let i ng l spcc i a l projcc.:t for the

coursc.

(Thi!; cou rse is a pn:rcquisitc

fex

Audit/ Audil Review.) AUDIT/AUDIT REVIEW ( 1 5 hours )-The studem and his/ha ESL instructor will aud it a cou rse at PLU, taking. notes on daily kc

turcs,

readi ng req u i red text!;, and taking quizzes

and

exams with

other PLU studenlS. Duri ng J second and third hour, lhe mldems go over the ieerun" notes from the c ou rse , discuss text and s u pp le­

me ntary rcatJ ing as si gnmen ts, e x pl ore diflicuJt or di tfe rent concepts,

prepare for exams, refine writ ing skills. and learn to wri te ;l col lege rescarch paper. Compirtion of all advanced level courses is pre· req u i si t e to e n rol l i ng in this cOllr�e. LANGUAGE LABORATORY/COMPUTER ASSISTED INSTRUCTION El eme ll l ary , Intermediate, and Ad va n ced - H el p with spe lling , vocabulary, and orher language skills. SPECIAL STUDIES ( 5·20 hours)-All lcveb Courses arc desi gne d to he l p th ose who wi s h t o i m p rove t hei r

Eng l i sh for pro fessiona l o r personal reasons_ Under cerrain circum­

stances, J less intensive schcdu le or p rivat e nltorials may be

arranged_ TOEFL PREPARATION (2 hou rs ) Thi� dass CJn be t a ke n as a separat e course. It reviews grammar and voca bulary. g i ve s pra ct i ce in reading and l is t e n ing com p reh ension , and covers te s[. [a ki ng skills and srrale gics.

CREDIT COURSES

Qu al i tied advanced level students may request permissio n to take

regu lar uni ve rsity classes for c red it . This provide s mldents an oppor· nmiry to carn credits toward their dcgrec while co m pl eting their

a dvanced courses in E ngl ish as a second langu age_

Sem in ar se ssio ns nm concurrentlv with PLU's ' arc 14 weeks long. There i s a 4� wcek i n te ri m

and

a.cadem ic calendar in J a nuary and a

full semester's mId)' du ring summer. Classes arc small, u sually

1 0· 1 2 srudems, wilh a maximum of 18.

When srudems have met I ELI's standa rds of proficiency-deter­

CO URSES READING ( 5 hours)-Elementary, I nte rm ediatc , and Advanced WRITING (5 hOllfs)-Elementary, Intermedi ate , and Advanccd G RAMt'vIAR (5 hours)- Elcmcntary, I n termcdiate, and Ad.vanced

L1STENING/SPEAKlNG (5 ho ur s ) - El eme nt.1 IY and Intermediate, and Lecrure Preparation.

by e xi t examinations-in all ski l l a reas of E ngl i sh, they arc to do university level work, and the l E U statT assists in p lJc ,

m ined

re ady

ing t h em in a suitable academic program. PLD's Englis h language

proficicm.,,)' requi reme n t for adm ission Gm be satisfied wi t h a

recommendation from the I E LI di rector. A srudcn t must have a B or belter in the Audit/ Audil Review course to qualitY for th is n:commcndation. Students who arc not planning to anend a college


64 or univl�rsjry 3ftl.: r their language smuics Jrc not n.'quirc..·d (0 rake rhe I S-hour Audit/Audit Rn'i..:w c.-Ollrse Jnd wil rcn:in.' I E L I's l"crtifil-atc o f program (on1pktion aftn finishing rhe adv3l1n:d kvc..'\ c.: ourSl'S.

FACULTY

Mage, Direc/or; Cothren, Schaefer, Sladek, Zeller.

The faculty at lEU has extensive training and experi­ ence in teaching English as a Second Language, and all hold the terminal degree of M.A. in TESL or Linguistics. Having lived, travelled, and taught Eng­ lish in many countries throughout the world, both the faculty and staff have gained an awareness of other peoples, their la nguages, and their cultures. To enhance formal educational experience, the fol­ lowing activities are also available to lEU students: CONVERSAnON PARTNERS: Once into their cou rses, En�lish language studt:'nb are encouraged t o sign up for one o r more cun­ versation partners with whom they can meet on J regular basis (once or twice J \veek) for coffee, lunch, or mor€' exh.�nsive activi· tie!", The AmeriGln students, who participate in the Conve.rsation Partners Program are (lften students who are preparing for careers in �Iobal ,tudies, languases, education, and other fields. Some of these students have lived abroad or are from families who have hosted interna tion,1 1 students and all have expressed inter�st in learnmg more about other people and cultures. Conver­ sation partners are recruited and screened by the Institute and receive a n orientation from the dirt'ctor oi IELI.

HOST FAMIUES: lEU has a long-established community­ based host family pro gram for students who wish to live with a U.5. familv for one or more semesters. The American famjlies-aII screened by the Institute-provide students with room or room and board at reasonable rates. In addition to the standard bed­ room furniture, the rooms are provided with a desk, chair, and good light ing; family rules are agree d upon in advance and a fonnal written agreement is drawn up. The student com pletes a questionnaire that indicates preierences such as: ch ildren in family, urban Or suburban setting, likes and dislikes, smok i n g or non-smoking environment, etc. Students meet their prospective family and only after they have met each other are they asked to decide whether they want to live as a family. Weekend and/or holiday visits with an American family can also be arranged.

lEU assists its students with career choices, college placement, immigration matlers, medic.al and dental referrals, and personal concerns. Special cultural and social activities are planned every week for students. In ,1ddition, three or more field trips per semester add significantly to the cultural enrichment of the students. Discus­ si,ms and readings precede all journeys to insure both a high degree of linguistic and cultural relevance and to maintain throughout the semester a high level of group cohesiveness. lEU students and staff take trips to Mt. Rainier, local museums of natural history, Mt galleries, zoos, children's day care centers, retirement homes, the Ports of Tacoma and Seattle, and the Seattle Ce n t e r. TELl students can " Iso participate in intramural sports ,1(tivities such as soccer, volleyball, and basketball. Six tennis courts, a !\olf course, a swimming pool, and several gym­ nasiums give students additional opportunities for recreation. Th� Intensive English Llnguage Institute is located in Haavik House on the comer of 1 2 1 st Street and Hth Avenue Court South.

Environmental Studies Program S tudents concerned about or wishing to enter graduate study and career programs in such fields as environmental science, environmental law, or resource management, may enroll in the Environmental Studies Progra m. A certificate will be awarded students completing requirements listed below, together with a departmental or school major program. Students interested in the Environmental Studies Program should schedule an appointment with the chair of the Environ­ mental Studies Committee, and should fill out an application. The student and the chair will develop a tentative plan and the chair will appoint a three-member advisory commi ttee. The committee consisting of representatives from each of the three major subject matter groupings will approve each student's course program and integrative experiences. The following specific courses are required: Earth Sciences 222 Economics 1 50 Business Administration 230

4 hours

4 hours 4 hours

As part of graduation requ i rements, all students complete either the distributive core Or the Integrated Studies Program. Recommended core requirements include: Distributive Core Arts/Literature: Art 38 1 and one elective in litera t u re Natural Sciences/Mathematics: Biology I l l ; Chemistry 1 04, 105; Computer Science 144; Earth Sciences 1 3 1 , 202; Mathematics 1 28, 230; Natura l Sciences 106 Philosophy: 125; 225 p l u s 226 Or 323 or 325 Or 326 or 328; 324; 371; 381; 395; or 427 Religion: 226, 365, and one elective from Biblical Studies or Integrative and Comparative Religious Studies Social Sciences: History 460; Political Science 101, 1 5 1 , 345; Psychology 355; Sociology 1 0 1 , 240, 331 (Economics ISO may also be counted as fulfilling a core requirement) OR

8 hours

8 hours 4 hours

8 hours

8 hou.rs


65 CORE II (Integrated Studies Program)

Integrated Stud ies 1 1 1 - 1 1 2, 221 -222 or 223-224, 241 -242 or 243-244, 351 28 hours In the areas of Natural Science� and Mathematics one addi­ tional cou rse (4 hours) is required, which should be selected from those listed above under Distributive Core. Integrative Experience-4 hours: During the senior year or at another approved time, all students participate in a study­ research-action program designed to draw upon the broad back­ ground of the above courses and the expertise of their own major fields. Courses may incl ude, but are not limited to, appro­ priate interim courses; departmental or interdisciplinary seminars;

independent study or research courses; field experience and internship programs; cooperative education; employment or volunteer service within community agencies Or organizations.

Environmental Studies Committee: Churney, Chair; Benham, Bergman, Giddings, D. Hansen, Hansvick, Martinson, Miller, Stivers, Tonn.

Global Studies Program The Global Stu dies Program is a response to global trends which increasingly affect our lives. The program focuses on the formation and emer­ gence of the modern world and its growing eco­ nomic, cultural, political, and ecological interde­ pendence. By combining a regional concentration with that of a specific global issue, the Global Studies Program provides students with the k nowledge and perspectives they need to under­ stand and to function effectively in today's world.

FACULTY

A committee o f faculty administers this program: Kelleher, Chair; Barnowe, Bermingham, Carr, Clausen, Predmore, Rasmussen, Tonn, Toven. GLOBAL STUDIES COMPLEMENTARY MAJOR

The Global Studies major is termed a "complementary" major because it is a second major in addition to a regular disciplinary major. Students electing the Global Studies major are required to declare a traditional disciplinary miljor before they declare a Global Studies major. In addition, the Global Studies major is multid isciplinary, drawing both its courses and faculty from departments of the Divisions of Humanit ies, Natural Sciences, and Social Sciences <lnd from the Schools of the Arts and Business Administration. Students may not apply more than two courses (8 semester hours) from their primary major Or from courses taken to fulfill general university core requirements to the complementary major. However, such special crediting of courses from the pri­ mMY major to the complementary major must be ap proved by a studen t ' s advisory committee and the Global Studies Committee chair. MAJOR REQUIREMENTS

Students take a minimum of 32 semester hours including: A. Global Studies Core 1. The introductory Global Studies course, Ant hropology/History/Political Science 210, Global Perspectives (4 semester hours). 2. Anthropology 102, Exploring Anthropology: Culture and Society (4 semester hours). 3. History 2 1 L The World Since 1 945 (4 semester hours). 4. The Global Studies seminar, Global Studies 4 10, Global Fut ures: Theory and Methods, and 4 1 1 , Research Seminar (2 semester hours eac h).

B.

Four courses from thl' Global Studies concentrations ( [ 6 semester hours). C. Students must demonstrate proficiency in a language relevant to their concentration and at a level consistent wit h Option I of the College of Arts and Sciences foreign language req uirement. This may be accomplished through proficiency examination or through the equivalent of 16 �emester hours of (au rsework. CON CENTRA TIONS

A. REGIONAL 1 . The Industrialized World a. Social Sciences Perspectives (8 semester hours) Anthropology 240-The Peoples of Europe (2) Anthropology 344-The Ant hropology of Contemporary America Economics 38 1 - Comparative Economic Systems History 253-Twentieth Century American History History 328- Nineteen Century Europe History 329-Europe and the World Wars: 191 4- 1 945 Hi�tory 333-Revolutionary Russia History 334- Modern Germany, 184R·1945 History 340-Modern Japan History 356-American Diplomatic History History 471 - History of American Thought and Culture Political Science 338-American Foreign Policy Political Science 385-Canad ian Political Svstem b. Human ities Pl'rspectives (8 semester hou ;s) English 343-Twentieth Century American Fiction and Drama English 391- Victorian Literature French 321 -Civilization and Culture German 32 1 -German Civilization Languages 271 - Li terature and Society in Modern Europe Scandinavian 322-Contemporary Scandinavia Spanish 321 - Civilization and Culture A 400·level literature cuurse offered by the Department of Languages, chosen in consultation with the concentratiun adviser. 2. The DevelopiJlg World (4 courses, 16 semester hours) Anthropology 330- Cultures and Peoples of Native North America Anthropology 340-Cult ures and Peoples of Asia Anthropology 345-Chinese Cuiture and Society History 330-Modern China History 335-Latin American History: Central America and the Caribbean


66 History 336�Southern Africa Political Science 386�African Political Systems Spanish 322-Latin American Civilization and Cul ture Spanish 432-Twentieth Century Hispanic Literature (Spanish America) B. TOPICAL (For each of the topical concentrations, t h ree courses are selected from within the topic and one four­ semester hour course is selected from the regions listed above.) 1. Intl'matiollal Rdatiolls (3 courses, one course from each section) a. Introduction Political Science 336�lnternational Organization and Law b. Foreign Affairs Political Science 321 �Current International Affairs Political Science 33S�American Foreign Policy c. Elective History 356�American Diplomatic History I ntegrated Studies 221� The Experience of War Ant h ropology 375-Law, Politics, and Revolution 2. International Trade (3 cou rses, one course from each section) a. Introduction Economics 331 � lnternational Economics b. International Business Business Administration 340�lnternational Business Business Administration 474-lnternational Marketing c. Elective Political Science 336�l n t ernational Organization and Law A second international business course is chosen in consultation with the concentration adviser. 3. Global RcsOlnces and Environment (3 courses) a. Introduction (] course) b. Electives ( 2 courses) Earth Science 222�Conservati()n of Natural Resources Earth Sciences 341 �Energy and Mineral Resources for the Future In tegrated Studies 241 �Energy, Resources, and Pollution Integrated Studies 242�Population, Hunger, and Poverty Sociology 361 �Population and Development For this concentration, two of these three courses may be lower division. 4. MlIltiCIIltllral Diversity (3 courses, one course from each section) a. Cosmology and Symbolism Religion 1 3 1 �Religions of the World Religion 23 1 �Myth, Ritual, and Symbol Anthropology/Religion 392�Gods, Magic, and Morals b. H u ma n Creations Anthropology 355�Technology in Culture Music 432�Music of the World's People c. Social Relationships Ant hropology 350�Women and Men in World C u l t u res Anthropology 360�Ethnic Groups Anthropology 375�Law, Politics, and Revolution Political Science 281 �Comparative Legal Systems

GLOBAL STUDIES MINOR 1.

Global Studies Core A. Anthropology/History/Political Science 21 0, Global Perspectives (4 semester hours), required of all students.

B. Either Global Studies 4 1 0, Global Futu res: Theon' and Methods ( 2 semester hours) or a fourth course (4 semester hours) in the concentration. To be decided in consultation with the program chair. II. Concentration (3 courses, 12 semester hours) A. The D,'vclopiIl8 World Anthropology 330�Cultures and Peoples of Native North America Ant hropology 340�C ultures and Peoples of Asia Anthropology 345�Chinese Culture and Society History 330�Modern China History 335�Latin American History: Central America and the Caribbean History 336�Southern Africa Political Science 386-African Political Systems Spanish 322�Latin American Civilization and Culture Spanish 432� Twentieth Century Hispanic Literature (Spanish America) B. International Relations (3 courses, one course from each section) 1. I n t roduction Political Science 336�l n t ernational Organization and Law 2. Foreign A1fairs Political Science 231�Current lnternational Affairs Political Science 33S�American Foreign Policy 3. Elective Ant hropology 3?5�Law, Politics, and Revolution History 356-American Diplomatic History Integrated Studies 22 1 � The Experience of War C International Trade (3 cou rses, one course from each sect ion) 1. I n t roduction Economics 331 � lnternational Economics 2. International Business Business Administration 340� l.nternational Business Business Administration 474-lnternational Marketing 3. Elective Political Science 336�lntemational Organization and Law A second international business course is chosen i n consultation w i t h concentration adviser and the program chair.

CO URSE OFFERINGS 410

GLOBAL FUTURES: THEORY AND METHODS (2)

41 1

RESEARCH SEMINAR (2)

Required of all s t udents majoring in global studies. In the first semester (41 0), an analysis of major theories advanced by thin kers involved i n the study of or attempts t o change patterns of global interaction. Examination of both primary documents and secon­ dary sources, learning how to read them and how to assess their worth, and discovering their methods of analysis. I n the second semester ( 4 1 1 ), completion of a major research paper drawing on or adding t o the t h eories and methods discussed in 4 1 0. Offered every two years. Prerequisite for 4 1 0: ANTH/HIST/POLS 2 1 0. Prerequisite for 4 1 1 : 4 1 0. (2, 2)


67

History Through the study of history at Pacific Lutheran University students gain an understanding and appreciation of the historical perspective. Oppor­ tunities for developing analyt ical and interpre­ tative skills are provided through research and writing projects, internships, class presentafions, and study tours. The practice of the historical method leads st udents off campus to their home­ towns, to Europe or China or the American West, and to community institutions, both private and public. The department emphasizes individual advising in relation to both self-directed studies and regular courses. The university library hold­ ings include significant collections in American, European, and non -Western history. The Nisqually Plains Room of the library specializes in Pacific Northwest community studies. Career outlets for majors and minors are either direct or supportive in business, law, teaching, public service, news media, and other occupations.

FACULTY

Browning, Chair; Bermingham, Carp, Clausen, Martinson, Nordquist, Offutt.

BACHELOR OF ARTS MAJOR: Minimum of 32 semester hours, including 4 hours-American field, 4 hours-European field, and 4 hours-nan-Western field. Students are expected to work closely with the department's facuity advisers to insure the most personalized programs and instruction possible. Majors are urged to meet the foreign language requirement of t he College of Arts and Sciences under either Option I or Opt ion II. Those majors who are preparing for public school teaching can meet the state history certification requirement by enrolling in Historv 460. All senior majors are required to take four hours of semin � r credit. MINOR: 20 semester hours, 1 2 hours from courses numbered above )00. The minor in history emphasizes a "program focus" and a "program plan," which is arranged by the student in consultat ion with a departmental adviser. BACHELOR OF ARTS IN EDUC ATION: See School of Education.

CO URSE OFFERINGS Courses i n the Department of History are offered in the following areas: AMERICAN FIELD 251 COLONIAL AMERICAN HISTORY 252 NINETEENTH CENTURY AMERICAN HISTORY 253 TWENTIETH CENTURY AMERICAN HISTORY 352 THE AMERICAN REVOLUTION 354 THE AMERICAN CIVIL WAR 355 AMERICAN POPULAR CULTURE 356 AMERICAN DIPLOMA TIC HISTORY 451 AMERICAN LEGAL HISTORY 460 WEST AND NORTHWEST 471 HISTORY OF AMERICAN THOUGHT AND CULTURE 494 SEMINAR: AMERICAN HISTORY

EUROPEAN fIELD 107, 108 321 322 323 324 325 328 329

HISTORY OF WESTERN CIVILIZATION GREEK CIVILIZATION ROMAN CIVILIZATION THE MIDDLE AGES 'RENAISSANCE RE FORMATION NINETEENTH CENTURY EUROPE EUROPE AND THE WORLD WARS:

332 334 341 342 495

ENGLAND: TUDORS AND STUARTS MODERN GERMANY, 1848-1945 SEVENTE ENTH CENTURY FRANCE THE FRENCH REVOLUTION SEMINAR: EUROPEAN HISTORY

1914- 1945

NON-WESTERN FIELD 109 210 21 1 330 333 335 336 338 340 496

EAST ASIAN SOCIETIES GLOBAL PERSPECTIVES THE WORLD SINCE 1945 MODERN CHINA REVOLUTIONARY RUSSIA LATIN AMERICAN HISTORY: CENTRAL AMERICA AND THE CARIBBEAN SOUTHERN AFRICA THE ARAB WORLD MODERN JAPAN SEMINAR: THE THIRD WORLD

ALL FIELDS 399 401 492 501 590 591 595 598 599

INTERNSHIP WORKSHOPS INDEPENDENT STUDY GRADUATE WORKSHOPS GRADUATE SEMINAR DIRECTED STUDY GRADUATE READINGS RESEARCH PROJECT THESIS

1 07, 1 08

HISTORY OF WESTERN CIVILIZATION

Analysis of institutions and ideas of selefted civilizations. Meso· potamia, Egypt, the Hebrews, Greece, Rome, the rise of Christ­ ianity, and Medieval Europe in the first semester; Europe from the Renaissance t o the present in the second semester. I II (4, 4)

109

EAST ASIAN SOCIETIES

A historical overview of the traditional cultures, traditions, and lives of the people of China and Japan. Discussion of the lives of peasants, emperors, merchants, and warriors in each society. Attention to the great technological and arti» tic developments in each society. (4)


68 210

GLOBAL PERSPECTIVES: THE WORLD IN CHANGE

A survey of global issues affecting t h e human condition i n a rapidly changing and increasingly interdependent world: modern­ ization and development; economic change and international trade; diminishing resources; Wilr and revolution; peace and j u stice; and cultural diversity. These issuE's are examined in a multidisCiplinary light using case studies drawn from non­ Western a n d Western nations. Emphasis on the development of a global perspective which recognizes human commonalities as well as diversity in perceptions, values, and priorities. (Cross­ referenced with ANTH 210 and POLS 2 1 0.) (4)

211

THE WORLD SINCE 1945

A historical survey on how Third World nations have sought independence in the post-World War I I period. Emphasis on events in the Western world leading t o World War I I and the effects of that war on the Th ird World. Case studies of countries from Asia, Africa, Latin America, and the Middle East as examples o f the diversity inherent in quests for independence. ( 4 )

251

COLONIAL AMERICAN HISTORY

American institutions fTom colon i.11 times to the 1 790's; the growth of the colonies .1 nd their relationship to t he British imperial system. (4)

252

NINETEENTH CENTURY AMERICAN HISTORY

From Je fferson to Theodore Roosevelt; interpretation of eras from social. political. economic. and biographical viewpoints. (4)

253

TWENTIETH CENTURY AMERICAN HISTORY

Trends and eVt:� nts in domestic and foreign affairs since 1 900; affluence, urban growth, and social contrasts. ( 4 )

321

GREEK CIVILlZA TlON

The poritical. social, and cultural history of Ancient Greece from the Bronze Age t o the Hellenistic period.5pecial attention to the literature, art. and intellectual historv of the Greeks.( Crossreferenced with C LAS 32 1 ) (4)

322

ROMAN CIVILIZATION

323

THE MIDDLE AGES

324

RENAISSANCE

The hLstory of Rome from the foundation of the city to AD. 337, the death o f Constantine. Emphasis on Rome's expansion over the Mediterrane,m a n d on its constitutional history.Attention to the rise of Christianity within a Greco -Roman context.(Cross-refer­ eneed with CLAS 322) ( 4 ) Europe from the diSin tegration of the Roman Empire to reading and research in medieval materials. (4)

! JOO;

Europe in a n age of transition - I 300 to 1 500. (4)

325

RE FORMATION

328

NINETEENTH CENTURY EUROPE

329

EUROPE AND THE WORLD WARS:

Political and religious crisis in the 1 6th century: Lutheranism, Zwinglianism, Anglica nism, Anabaptism, Calvinism, Roman Cat holic reform; Weber thesis, the beginnings of Baroque arts. (4) The expansion of European civilization from 1800 to 1 9 1 4. (4)

1914-1945

World War I; revolution and return t o "normalcy"; depression and the rise o f fascism; World War II. (4)

330

MODERN CHINA

Ch inese history from 1800 to the present. Emphasis on the Chinese revolution, why it happened, and what it meant for the people of China. Attention to China's relationship with the United States and the Soviet U n ion. (4)

332

ENGLAND: TUDORS AND STUARTS

Political, social. economic, legal, and cultural developments. ( 4 )

333

REVOLUTIONARY RUSSIA

Post-Peter the Great Russia; the establishment o f Czarist auto­ eracl'; the Great Reforms of the 19th centurv; the rLse of the revo"lut ionaries; Bolshevism, Lenin, and the Re"l'olutions o f 1 9 1 7; the consolidation of the Soviet state. ( 4 )

334

MODERN GERMANY, 1848-1945

The Revolutions o f 1848 and unification of Germany; Bismarckian and Wilhemian em pires; Weimar Republic and the rise of National Socialism; the Third Reich. (4)

335

LA TIN AMERICAN HISTORY: CE NTRAL AMERICA AND THE CARIBBEAN

S u rvey of the major aspects of Central American and Caribbean history from colonial to modern times. Use of selected case studies t o illustrate the region's history. Study in inter-American rela­ tions. (4)

336

SOUTHERN AFRICA

338

THE ARAB WORLD

340

MODERN JAPAN

341

SEVENTEENTH CENTURY FRANCE

342

THE FRENCH REVOLUTION

352

THE AMERICAN REVOLUTION

354

THE AMERICAN CIVIL WAR

355

AMERICAN POPULAR CULTURE

356

AMERICAN DIPLOMATIC HISTORY

399

INTERNSHIP

401

WORKSHOPS

451

AME RICAN LEGAL HISTORY

460

WEST AND NORTHWEST

Examination of the history of pre-colonial African k ingdoms, Western imperialism, settler colonialism, and the African struggle for independence. Emphasis on the period since 1800. Focus on the countries of South Africa, Nam ibia, Angola, Mozambique, Zimbabwe, and on the issues of nationalism, racism, and revolu­ tion. ( 4 ) Focus on those states created from the brea k-up of the Ottoman Empire. Arab cultural values and behavior, formative history, cha nges in patterns of rule, and subordination t o the industrial ized West. Linkage of post-World War I events to two themes:(I) conflict with t h e West, including the rise and clash of Jewish and Arab nationalisms, and (2) tension between the goal of Arab unity and the reality of intra-Arab rivalries. (4) Study of how Jap.m became the modern "miracle" in East Asia. Primary focus on traditions that enabled Japan t o change rapidly, the rol(> of the challenge of the West in that change, the industrialization of Japan, the reasons for war with the U.5., and the impact of the WM on contemporary Japan and its social and economic institu tions. (4) Structure of society, development of absolutism, protest of popular classes, role of France in internationdl affairs, origins of the Enlightenment. (2)

Struct ure of society, origins and course o f the Revolution, and its impact on France and Europe. (2) The American Revolution as a series o f essentially political events stretching from the Seve.n Years War in 1763 through Thomas Jefferson ' s defeat of John Adams in the Presidential election of 1800. The Colonists' initial resistance to the reorganization of the British Empire after 1 763; t he evolution of active resistance into revolution; the decision to declare independence; the experience of war; the struggle to establish legitimate and effective govern­ ments; the framing and ratification o f the Constitution; and the Federalist-Republican battles o f the 1 790s. Emphasis on the rail' of political thought and ideology i n the development of republican government in the United States. (4) The Civil War era from the political crises of the 1 850s through Reconstruction. Antebellum sectionalism; the collapse of the 2nd American Party System,; slavery; racism; secession; the military, political. and social aspects of the War itself; emancipation; and reconstruction. Emphasis on the Civil War a s t h e central drama of US. history and consideration of its profound impact on 20th centu.ry social. political. and economic conditions. (4)

Study of motion pictures, popuLar music, radio and televLsion programs, comic strips, and paperback fiction. Insights into the values and ideas of American culture from watching it at play. Examination o f popular entertainment arts and the ways they reflect and i n fluence American attitudes and actions. No pre­ requisites. (4) The practice, function, and structure of American foreign policy with particular emphasis on the twentieth century. (4)

A research and writing project in connection with a student's approved off-campus work o r travel activity, or a dimension of it. Prerequisite: sophomore standing plus one curs e in history, and consent of the department. ( 1 -6 ) Workshops in special fields for varying periods of time. ( 1 -4)

Dimensions of American law a s it relates to changing historical periods. (4) The American West in the 19th and 20th centuries. Frontier and regional perspectives. I nterpretive, iUustrative h.istory, and oppor­ tunities for off-campus research. (4)


J� i

69

--� � --� -�

471

HISTORY OF AMERICAN THOUGHT AND CULTURE

Dimensions of Americiln social and intellectlial history. (4)

590

GRADUATE SEMINAR

Selected topics as announced_ Prerequisite: consent of the instruc­ tor. ( 1 -4)

INDEPENDENT STUDY ( 1 -4 )

591

DIRECTED STUDY ( 1 -4 )

494

SEMINAR: AMERICAN HISTORY (4)

595

GRADUATE READINGS

495

SEMINAR: EUROPEAN HISTORY (4)

496

SEMINAR: THE THIRD WORLD (4)

502

GRADUATE WORKSHOPS

492

Independent Study Card Required. (4)

598

RESEARCH PROJECT (4)

599

THESIS (4)

Graduate workshops in special fields or areas for varying periods of time. ( I -4)

Division

otHumanities

The Departments of English, Langu ages, Philo­ sophy, and Religion offer a wide range of courses that explore language, litera ture, and belief, past and present, from around the world. As academic majors and minors, as integra l components of pro­ fessional programs, and as a means to realizing the excellence in oneself, studies in the humani­ ties remain at the heart of a liberal education. T he primary commitmen t of the Division of Human ities is to excellent undergraduate instruc­ t ion. Classes in the humanities emphasize the development of communication sk iHs, the a bility to a.nalyze rigorously and evaluate fairly texts and ideas, and the critical examina tion of what it means to be h u man. The potential for creative ser­ v ice to the commu nity is nurtured in a variety of ways, including internships in the Publishing and Prin ting Arts program, study abroad, case method stud ies, video programming, community teaching assignments, and writing workshops. F aculty members of the div ision participate extensively in the Integrated Studies and Global Studies programs as well as provide leadership for the interdisciplinary Classics and Scand­ inavian Area Stud ies majors and for the Writing Cet1ter. The division also enriches campus life through t h e Distingu ished Writer in Residence, Humanities film series, Foreign Language Week, pu blic lec tures, and collabora tive projects with local school districts.

T he division takes seriously the charge of the humani ties, as described by one colleague, "to act humanely, compassionately, creatively in an ever­ changing society." To that end, divisional faculty strive to serve as models for lifelong learning, inspired research, and good citizenship.

FACULTY J. Rasmussen, DivisiOlwl Dean; faculty members of the Departments of english, Languages, Philo­ sophy, and Religion. As a d ivision within the College of Arts ilnd Scien ces, the Division of Humanities ofiers program� in each constituent department leading to the BA. degree. Course offerings and degree requirements are listed under: ENGLISH LANGUAGES PHILOSOPHY RELIGION

See also the sections o f t h is catalog on SCilndinavian Area Stud ies and International Education.


70

Integrated Stud ies Prog ram The Integrated Studies Program (Core II) is designed as an alternative mode of satisfying core curriculum requirements. Consisting of a constella­ tion of interdisciplinary courses, the program explores a central theme- The Dynam ics of Change­ from a variety of academic perspectives. The pro­ gram stresses critical t hinking and writing. And it encourages the growth of camaraderie as students progress together through its sequences. A brochure is available from the Admissions Office or the program coordinator in the Office of Special Academic Programs.

FACULTY Selected from Anthropology, Art, Biology, Chemis­ try, Communication Arts, Economics, English, His­ tory, Languages, Mathematics, Music, Philosophy, Physics, Political Science, Psychology, Religion, and Sociology. ISP Committee: Oberholtzer, Chair; P. Benton, Lejeune, D.M.Martin, McGinnis, N.C. Meyer. ISP Coordinator: Carr. REQUIREMENTS I . SEQUENCE I: THE IDEA OF PROGRESS (2 courses, U 1 - 1 1 2 ) :-.Jormally taken in t h e freshman year. 2. novo OF THREE 200-LEVEL SEQUENCES (2 courses each, 4 total) SEQUENCE 1l ( 2 courses in the 220s): 221: The Experience of War 222: Prospects for War and Peace 223: The Emergence of Mind and Morality 224: The Brain, Consciousness, and Transcendence OR SEQUENCE I I I (2 courses in the 230s) 233: Imaging the Self 234: Imaging the World OR SEQUENCE IV (2 courses in the 240s) 24 1 : Energy, Resources, and Pollution 242: Population, H unger, and Poverty 243: Technology and Computers 244: Computers and Models 245: The Development of Third World Underdevelopment 246: Cases in Third World Development 3 . CONCLUDING SEMINAR ( ] course): 351 Taken after or along with the final 2oo-level course. TOTAL: SEVEN COURSES (28 hours) Honors in Integrated Studies may be awarded to students who have at least a 3.5 average in lSI' courses and who present a portfolio of outstanding papers from 200-level lSI' courses and the seminar. Students selected for honors will make a public, oral presentation of their seminar work. The Integrated Studies Committee will determine who qualifies for honors.

POLICIES AND GUIDELINES FOR CORE II I . Students may begin in any sequence, although Sequence I ( t he required sequence) is usually taken first. 2. Because the sequences are designed as consecutive, two­ course series, students should begin i n the first course ( fall), if possible. However, the second course may be taken before the first with the consent of the inst ructors. 3. Sequences may be taken concurrently and in any order.

4. As the program evolves, alternatives are being added under each sequence (11:220s, 1 l l : 230s, IV:240s). Students should complete two courses that have been designed together (for example, 241 -242 on "Technology and the Environment" or 221 -222 on "War and Peace"). If necessary, however, allY two courses from the same sequence series may be used with permission. 5. No more than two courses from any one sequence (11:220s, 1ll:230s, IV:240s) may be counted toward the seven-course Core I I requirement. Additional courses from a sequence may be taken as electives. 6. Not every 200-level sequence will be offered each year; generally three will be available i n any given year. 7. The seminar (35 1 ) is taken as the concluding course in the program, either after or concurrently with the last course of the student's third sequence. R. Students entering Core I I with appropriate previous course­ work at the college level may have certain requirements waived. Students with certain combinations of Core I courses, for exam ple, may have I I I or 1 1 2 waived. See the program coordinator for details. 9. All Core II courses (except the seminar) may be taken as electives by any student. 1 0. Most Core II courses may be taken to fuilfill certain Core I requirements, as i ndicated in t h e course descriptions, subject to the approval of the faculty. 1 I. Students transferring from Core II to Core I may use their Core II courses to meet certain Core I requirements after consulting with the program coordinator. 1 2. The I ntegrated Studies Program is directed by a seven­ person committee of faculty representing the academic areas participating in t h e program. The committee elects a chair and is supported by the associate dean for special academic programs as program coordinator.

SEQUENCE I: THE IDEA OF PROGRESS ( 1 1 1 - 1 12) A survey of Western culture from t h e Renaissance through the 1 9th century, emphasizing the interaction of religious, philo­ sophical, and political beliefs with the emergence of new arts and sciences.

111

NATURE AND SUPERNATURE

A study of the emergence of modern science, the development of democratic political ideas, the renewal of the arts, and the reformulations of religious belief in the Renaissance, Reformation, and Enlightenment. The ideas and accomplishments of Luther, Galileo, Newton, Locke, and Hume are given special emphasis, together with developments i n literature, the visual arts, and politics. Meets Core I requirements in philosophy or i n religious studies (lines 2 or 3). I (4)

112

FROM FINITE TO I N FINITE

Developments i n literature and science, politics and industrializa­ tion in the 18th and 19th cen t u ries. Emphasis is given to the i n fluence of the Enlightenment, the American and French revolu­ tions, the Romantic movement, the impact of Darwinism and Marxism. Prerequisite: 1 1 1 or permission. Meets Core I require­ ments i n literature or in social sciences (line 1 ) . 11 (4)


[

71 SEQUENCE II: HUMAN RESPONSfBlLITY

SEQUENCE IV: TECHNOLOGY AND THE

(Courses numbered in the 220s)

E NVIRONMENT (Courses numbered in the 240s)

WAR AND PEACE (221 -222) This sequence explores the complexity of war and the difficulties of achieving and maintaining a just peace. I t considers the fact of some important wars in our century, invest igates the deeper causes of war, and raises the issues of personal and social ethics during a war and in a society that prepares for war i n a time of peace. When taken as a whole, this two-course sequence meets the Cure I requirement in social sciences (line 1 ) and either philosophy Or religious studies (lines 2 or 3).

221

THE E XPERIENCE O F WAR

Essential background is established by studying the complex history of several major wars of our time (e.g., World War 11, the Vietnam War, the conJlict i n the Middle East). Emphasis is placed on the personal experience of war, both as soldier and as civilian, through i nterviews, films, and literature. The ethical decisions individuals must ma ke in war-time are considered as well as the pressures of our biological heritage and our idealistic causes. (4)

222

PROSPECTS FOR WAR AND PEACE

A study of the institut ions and situations (political, economic, religious, psychological, historicalj that keep the modem world on the brink of war and make a stable, just peace so elusive. Consideration is given to pacifism and the "just war" tradition, as well as to the technology and politics of nuclear war and its balance of terror. Students complete an independent project on topics such as the d raft, the economics of a military sta te, arms control, the competitions for resources, ant i-colonialism and Marxism_ Prerequisite: 243 or permission. ( 4 )

MIND AND BRAIN (223-224)

T� is sequence explores how specifically human qualities-includ­ irig morality, sense of self, and the capacity for religious experience ,1nd belief-are rooted in our biology and to what extent we can transcend that physical heritage.

223

THE MERGENCE OF MIND AND MORALITY

A survey of genetics and evolution, with emphasis on the brain and the emergence of social behavior in animals, prepares for a critical study of the claims of sociobiology that human culture and morality can be explained in terms of our biological origins. Meets Core I requirements in natural sciences (line 2) or philosophy. (4)

224

THE BRAIN, CONSCIOUSNESS, AND TRANSCENDE NCE

A study of the brain as the center of perception, emotion, consciousness, and k nowledge. Includes a study of the brain's functions, an investigation of spiritual, mystical, and other self­ transcending experiences, and an exploration of the relationship between mind and brain, materialistic and non-materialistic explanations, and the nature of personal commitment. Prerequi­ site: 223 or permission. Meets Core I requirements in social sciences (line 2) Or philosophy. (4)

SEQ UENCE 1Il: WORD AND WORLD ( Courses numbered in the 230s) IMAGING SELF AND WORLD (233-234) This sequence explores how we come to k now and partially create various k inds of self and world through the images of ordinary life and through their elaboration in the symbols of the arts and sciences. When taken as a whole, this two- course sequence meets the Core I requirements in art or literat'ure and natural sciences (lines 1 or 3) or religious studies (line 3).

233

IMAGING THE SELF

A series of exercises in the visual and literary arts that reveal how the self is d iscovered and constructed i n our daily world through many kinds of images, including d reams, costumes, songs, child­ hood memories, houses, church services, dances, television, poetry, sk teching, and constructing models. The emphasis is on doing or making, followed by reflective analysis. (4)

234

IMAGING THE WORLD

An explora tion of how humans perceive, interpret, and shape their own worlds. Following an introduction to symbols, symbol systems, and the creating of meaning, the construction of world images in science and theology through myth, model, and paradigm are studied. The model of symbolic logic is built to organize language and thought. Science is then considered as a process of the applicat ion of logic to empirically gat hered data. Views of a variety of scientists and philosophers on the way science is done and the way scientists come to know are considered. Theological language, experience, and use of myth and parable i n theological models are examined. Finally, some images of the world through the eyes of poets are compared to these scientific and theological representations. (4)

RESOURCES, POLLUTION AND POPULATION (241 -242) This sequence considers energy, natural resources, pollution, population and food issues. Scien tific, social scient ific, and ethical perspectives will be used to explore current problems, to project current trends into the future, and to suggest new possibilities. When taken as a whole, this two-course sequence n,,'ets the Core I requirements in science (lines 1 or 2), dnd either the social scie nce. (lines 1 Or 2) 01' religious studies (lines 2 or 3) requirements.

241

ENERGY, RESOURCES, AND POLLUTION

Energy, natural resources, and pollution are the subject matter. Scienrific, soci,1 1 scientific, and ethical methods will be studied and then applied to the practical and political problems of sustaining energy and natural resource production and limiting pollution with a maximum of justice and participative decision-mak ing. 1 (4)

242

POPULATION, HUNGER, AND POVERTY

Population, food, and poverty are the subject matter. Methods learned in the first (Ourse will be reviewed and applied to the practical problems of sustaining food production and reducing population gTowth and poverty. A major Third World country, e.g., Mexico, will serve as a case study for class analysis and student projects. II (4)

TECHNOLOGY, COMPUTERS, AND SOCIAL CHANGE (243-244) A s tudy of modern tech nology, its historical context, its mach ines, and its consequences. The compu ter, as one in a long line of tech nologies, is the special focus_ When taken as a whole, this two-course sequence meets the Core I requirement in natural sciences (line 3) or social sciences (line 1 ).

243

TECHNOLOGY AND COMPUTERS

Modern technology is the prod uction of sweeping changes in Western civiJization. The computer must be seen within the context of these changes. Thus the shift from traditional to technological society, the convergence of forces which produced the shift, and the consequences of the shift on institut ions, ideas, and values will be the object of study. Once this context is established, students will study the computer, its creation and uses, what it is, and what it can and cannot do. (4)

244

COMPUTERS AND MODELS

The modeling of social processes and the programming of models for the computer are two important tools used by planners in education, business, and government. The use of models and computers necessitates the making of assumptions and the reduction of reality. Two or three illustrative models will be developed to demonstrate the skills of modeling and programming and to assess advan tages and limita tions. Simultaneously, s t u ­ dents will s t u d y t h e implications o f using models a n d computers and the ethical and philosophic issues which emerge from their use. Returning to the larger context of technology, students will address the questions of technology, "out of cont ro!," artificial intelligence, the impacts of modern technology on the Third World, and the future_ A student project will conclude the sequence. (4)

THIRD WORLD DEVELOPMENT AND TECHNOLOGY (245-246) This sequence is a study of the emergence of the Third World and the genesis of development and underdevelopment.

245

THE DEVE LOPMENT OF THIRD WORLD UNDERDEVE LOPMENT

This course traces the origins and growth of the concept "Third World" and the models, views, contexts, and ap proaches in interpreting this phenomenon. Particular attention is focused on understanding social and cultural changes in the Third World in terms of development/underdevelopment. PoliticaL economic, literary and religous analyses will be used in trying to determine how the Third World thinks about itself. Core I equivalency: see below. (4)


72 246

CASES IN THIRD WORLD DEVELOPMENT

H o w pe o p le in the Third World think and act t o bring about social change, and t he value they give it, is the focus on this cou rse . Bui ld ing upon the theo ries and methods presented in the first

cou rs e, issues such as education, health, population, resourc e management, urbanization, and industrialization will be examined using case studies. The case studies will be organized regi ona ll y so t hat common and distinctive features can be evaluated. When taken as a whole t h is two-course sequence meets t he Core I rE.'q u i rements in Sl'cial sciences (line I ) and religious stud ies (line 3.

CONCLUDING SEMINAR

351

INTEGRATED STUDIES SEMINAR

A recap it ul a tion a nd i n t egra tio n of t h e m es from the previous sequences, with additional readings and discussion. Students in ves t igate an individual topic from an interdisciplinary perspec­ tiv.·, make a formal oral presentation, and complete a substantial paper. Prerequisite: 1 1 1 - 1 1 2 and two additional sequences. May be taken concurrt'ntlv , with the last course of the final seq u ence. I I I

(4)

(4)

Languag es The study of foreign language benefits us by inc.reasing ou.r sensitivity to the conventions of the English language and helping us to speak, write, Jnd think clearly. It also rewards us by introducing the language, literature, and civili­ zat ion of another people and providing t he skills for cross-cultural communication. ·Foreign languages have alwJys been Jt the core of J good l iberal arts education, but they have become more important in the modern world. The distJnce between the peoples of different languages has dec.reased and the world's inter­ nationJI economy has made us all more dependent on each other. Knowledge of ,m other language is J distinctive, useful, and often v ital addition to career areJS such JS business, journalism, govern­ ment service, law, and medicine. Foreign language sk ills can give individuJls more flexibiLity in choosing a profession, as well JS more mobility within their chosen fields. Students considering a cJreer in educa tion should note that the demand for foreign languJge teachers c.ontinues to rise. The department encourJges students to study abroad J S part of their undergraduate programs. Coopera tion with foreign universities insures a range of such opportunities in Austria, China, Denmark, France, Germany, Mexico, Norway, Spain, and Sweden. Language students may also earn cred it in the International Coopera tive Education Program, which places students in summer jobs in several European countries. Majors are a vailable in Classics, French, German, Norwegian, Scandinavian AreJ Studies, and Spanish. Minors a re offered in French, German, Greek, Latin, Norwegian, and Spanish. Instruc­ tion in Chinese and American Sign Language is also given. Through a special arrangement, PLU st udents may enroll in Ja panese language courses at the University of Puget Sound.

FACULTY S p a n g l e r , C h a i r: A lford, R . Brown, C h a ng, DeSherlia, Faye, Garcies, McKim Predmore, Ras­ mussen, Snee, R. Swenson, Toven, Webster. LITERATURE CORE REQUIREMENT: The department offers literature courses in English translation, as well as in the original l a n gu a ge . All slich courses meet the general university literature requirement (Core 1). PLACEMENT IN LANGUAGE CLASSES: There ,1re no

d e p., rtm en ta l p rerequ isites for the stud y of foreign languages. Students with previl'us experi('nce in a l a n guage may qua.lify for p laceme n t into intermediate or advanced courses. To determine the appropriate level, students take the 1,1J1guage p lac ement examination at the beginning of the fall semester and consult with t he appro p ria te faculty me m ber. Potential majors a re encouraged to obtain as much high school p reparation as poss ib le. Those qualifying for advanced placemen t may be allowed to waive certain major Or minor requirements.

BACHELOR O F ARTS MAJORS: Requirements for t he various ma jors are listed below under the individual languages.

Transfer students will no rma ll y take 1 6 or more of their major hours at PLU.

PROSPECTIVE TEACHERS: A full range of teaching majors and minors is offered. The required professional methods courses is Languages 445. Students preparing to tE.'ach in junior or senior high school may earn either a Bachelor of Arts degree in French, German, or Spanish along with certification from the School of Educ a tio n, or a Bachelor of Arts in Education degree with a t eac hi ng major in French, German, Or Spanish. In Scand i ­ navian Studies, an elementary teaching major a n d seco ndar y and ele men ta r y teaching minors are available. See the Sc.hool of Education sec tion of this catalog for the certification requirements and the Bachelor of Arts in Education req ui re m en ts. HONORS MAJOR: Requirements for an honors majl'r in languages are as follows: ( 1 ) a major in one foreign l anguage; (2) a minor in a second forei gn lan gua ge; (3) one year of study at the college level of a t h i rd foreign language; (4) the seond or third language must be a classical language; (5) a minimum grade point average o f 3.5 in al l courses taken in PLU's Depart­ ment of Languages; (6) at least one departmentally approved term abroad; and (7) p re se n tatio n of a senior paper to the department. MINOR PROGRAMS: Requirements for the various minors are listed below under the individual languages. At least 8 'emester hours mllst be taken in residence.


[

73 CO URSE OFFERINGS Courses in the Department of Languages are offered in the following general fields in addition to elementary, intermediate, and advanced language:

CULTURAL HISTORY A. [n E ngl iSh Scan I SO- Introduc t ion and Sc,mdinavia Scan 321 -Vik ings and Emigrants Scan 322-Contem porary Scandinavia

.....

B. [n Respective Language French l21 - Frcnch Civilization and Cult ure German l 2 1 - German Civilization to 17S0 German l22-German Civilization Since 1 750 Spanish l21 - Spanish Civilizat ion and Culture Spanish 322-Latin American Civilization and Culture

LINGUISTICS Languages 200-Structural Linguistics Languages 445-Met hodology of Teaching Foreign Languages French/Span 442-History of RomanCl' Languages Germ"n 442-History of the German Language

LITERATURE A. In English I.,"guages 271 - Literature and Society in Modern Europe Languages 272-Literature and Social Change in Latin America Chinese 371 -Chinese Literature in Translation Classics 2S0 -Classic.al Myt hology Scan 2S0-Masterpieces of Scandinavian Literature Scan 421-lbsen and Strindberg Scan 422-Twentieth Century Scandinavian Literature B. [n Respective Language Greek 421, 422-Masterpieces of Greek Litera t u re French 421, 422-Masterpieces of French Literature French 4.1 1 , 432- Twentieth Century French Literat ure German 421 - German Literature fro m the Enlightenment to Realism German 422·-Twentieth Century German Literature Spanish 4.21, 422-Masterpiec.es of Hispanic Literature Spanish 4J I , 432-Twentieth Century Hispanic Literat ure

LANGUAGES 200

STRUCTURAL LINGUISTICS

The study of the nature of language; princi ples and techniques of d<'scriptive language analysis; elementary application of linguistic analySiS to selected materials. No prerequiSites. (4)

271

LITERATURE AND SOc[ETY IN MODERN EUROPE

Reading and discu ssion of works in English translation by authors like Flaubert, Ibsen, and Th. Mann, who exemplify Realism and Naturalism in various E u ropean literatures. Emphasis on SOdtl l themes, including life in ind ustrial society, t he changing status of women, and class conflic t . No prereq uisite. Sat isfies the general university core requirement in literature. ( 4 )

272

LITERA TURE AND SOCIAL CHANGE IN LATIN AMERICA

Readings in EngliSh translation of fiction from modern Latin America. Discussions foc us on social and historical change and On literary themes and forms. Aut hors include major figures like Carlos Fuentes, Mario Vargas Liosa, Gabrid Garcia M a rquez, and Jorge Luis Borges. No prerequisite. Satisfies the general univerSity core requirement in literature. (4)

276

INTERNATIONAL WORK AND STUDY

An orientation for foreign study, service learning, or work abroad. Through individual projects t he polit ical and economic systems, geography, artistic heritage, and ethical traditions of count ries where students will live, receive detailed study. Coping with culture shock and the idiosyncrasies of daily living are also emphasized. (2)

445

METHODOLOGY OF TEACHING FOREIGN LANGUAGES

Theory and teChniques of foreign language teaChing; emphasis on developing proficiency in a second language; a t tention paid to special problems in t he individual languages. (2)

491, 492

INDEPENDENT STUDY 0 -4)

597, 598

GRADUATE RESEARCH (2-4)

CHINESE 101, 102

ELEMENTARY CHINESE

Introduction t o Mandarin Ch inese. Basic skills in listening, speak­ ing, reading, and writing. Laboratory practice required. I, II (4, 4 )

201, 202

INTERMEDIATE CHINESE

Develops further the ability to communicate in Chinese, using cultura l l y aut hentic material. Laboratory practice required. Pre­ requisite: 102 or equivalent. I, II (4, 4 )

371

CHINESE LITERATURE IN TRANSLATION

An introduction to the most important works and writers of the Chinese literary tradit ion, from early times to t he modern period. Poetry, prose, drama, vernacular fiction, and literary criticism will be inciuded.Emphasis on historical and cult ural background of the litera t u re. Slide and film presentations supplement the re­ qu ired readings. No prior knowledge of Chines" required. Satisfies the general university core requirement in literature. (4)

CLASSICS The Classics Program is a coopera tive effort among the Depa rt ­ ments of Languages, History, Ph ilosophy, Religion, and Art. Its goal is to unite the "heart o f the liberal arts" with the mind, through history and philosophy, and the soul, through religion, ,l Od to embellish t h is trinity of themes w i t h the visual experience of art. This interdepartmental major requires the completion of 40 semester hours, including ,It least one year of one of the c1assicaj languages and two of the other (Greek and Latin). The remaining courses are selected from the list below in consultation with the program coordinator. Latin 101 -202- Elementary Latin 20 1 - 202-ln termediate Greek 1 0 1 - 1 02-Elementary Greek 201-202-lntermediate Greek 421 -422-Masterpieces of Greek Literature Art l lO-lntroduction to Art Art I SO-History of Western Art I Art 386-[magery and Symbolism Classics 2S0-Classical M y thology Classics 321 -Greek Civilization Classics 322-Roman Civilizat ion English 321 -Masterpieces of European Literature Philosophy 331 -Ancient Philosophy Religion 21 1 - Religion and Literature of the Old Testament Religion 212-Religion and Literature of the New Testament Religion 221 -Ancient Church History ReJigion 330-01d Testament Studies Religion 331 -New Testament Studies Independent Study Courses Selected Interim Courses Students are expected to become familiar with t h e reading list for that part of the program (art, literat ure, history, philosophy, or religion) in w h ich their interest lies. The program is designed to be flexible. In consultation with t he Classics Committee, a student may elect a course or courses not on t he classics course list.

250

CLASSICAL MYTHOLOGY

Introduction to classical myt hology; study of the major myths of Greece and Rome t h rough the texts of Homer, Hesiod, the Greek tragedians, Appolloni us, Vergil, ,l nd Ovid; emphasis on the traditions o f myt hology, going back to pertinent Mesopotamian and Hittite m aterials, and forward to influences of classical myths on later literature and arts; attention to modern interpretations of ancient m y ths. A l l readings in English; sat isfies the general university core requirement in litera t u re. ( 4 )


74 321

GREEK C IVILIZATION

431, 432

TWENTIETH CENTURY FRENCH LITERATURE

The political, social, and c u ltural history of Ancient Greece fTom the Oronze Age to the Hellenistic period. S pec i a l attention to the literature, art, and intellectual history of t h e Gree·ks. (Cross­ referenced with HlsT 321 ) (4)

Selected twentieth century writers from France and other fra nco­ ph o n e co un t ries. M a y include Gide, Camus, sartre, Beckett, Aimee Cesaire, and Anne Hebert. Prerequisite: 202. I, II a/y (4, 4)

322

442 HISTORY O F ROMANCE LANGUAGES

ROMAN CIVILIZATION

The h is tory of Rome from the foundation of the city to A.D. 337, th e death of C o nsta n t ine. Emphasis on Rome's expansion OVeT the Mediterr"nean and on its const i t u t ional history. Attent ion to the rise of Chr i s t i a n it y within a Greco-Roman context. (Cross-refer­ enced with HIST 322) (4)

GREEK

Minor i n Greek: 2 0 se m es t er hours, which m a y include 1 0 1 - 1 02.

1 01, 1 02

ELEMENTARY GREEK

201, 202

INTE RMEDIATE GREEK

Basic s k ills in rea d i n g c.lassical, koille, a n d pa t r i s tic Greek. I , I I (4, 4 ) Review o f basic grammar; reading in selected classical a n d New Testament aut hors. I, Il (4, 4)

421, 422

MASTERPIECES O F GREEK LITERATURE

Available t h rou gh consultation with tht· department. Prerequ i ­ sites: 1 0 1, 102, 20 1 . I, II (4, 4)

491, 492

INDEPE NDENT STUDY (2-4)

H i st orical de vel o p men t of Romance la ng u ages with reference to current I,'nguages; same as Spanish 442. (4)

491, 492

INDEPE NDENT STUDY (2-4)

GERMAN Major in German: A m ini mum of 32 semester hours beyond 1 0 1 102, including 201 -202, 321 -322, 35 1 -352, a n d two 4OO-level courses. Minor in German: 20 semester hours, excluding 1 0 1 - 1 02 and including 201 -202, 351, and two additional upper division courses .

1 01, 1 02

ELEME NTARY GERMAN

I n t roduction to t he German language. Basic skills of oral and written communication in classroom and laboratory p ract ice. Use of materials reflecting con te.mporary Cerm'lI1 life. Meets five hours weekly. I, 11 (4, 4)

LATIN

201, 202

101, 1 02

ELEME NTARY LATIN

Con ti n u ed pra c t ice in oral and written commun ication in class­ room ,1 nd labo ra t o ry. Use of materials which reflect contemporary life as lVell as the German cultural herita�e. Meets four hours weekly. ], 11 (4, 4)

201 , 202

INTERME DIATE LATIN

Minor in Latin: 20 semester hours, which may i n cl u d e 1 0 1 -102.

Basic skills in read ing Latin; an i n t rod u ct i on to R om a n literature and culture. I, II (4, 4) Review of basic grammar; selected readings from Latin authors. I, II (4, 4)

491, 492

INDEPENDENT STUDY (2-4)

FRENCH Major in French: A min i m u m of 32 semester hours beyond 1 0 1 1 02, including 201 - 202, 321, 35 1 - 352 a n d three 400- l eve l C O u rses . Minor in French: 20 semester hours, excluding 1 0 1 -102 and including 201 -202, 351, and two additional upper division

courses.

1 01, 102

E LEMENTARY FRENCH

201, 202

INTERMEDIATE FRENCH

Essentials of pronunciation, intonation, and structure; basic skills in listeni ng, speaking, rea.ding, and writing. Labo ra t o ry at tendance req uired. I, II (4, 4)

Review of basic grammm; development of voc a bu lary and em­ ph as is on spontaneous, oral expression. Re ad i ng selections which reflect France's c u l t ural heritage an d soci e t y. L a b o rato ry atten­ dance required. I, II (4,4)

321

CIVILIZATION AND CULTURE

Present-day France as reflected in current literature, periodicals, television and fi l ms, written compositions and oral reports; conducted in French. Prerequisite: 202. (4)

351, 352

COMPOSITION AND CONVERSATION

Advanced grammar, s tylistics, composition, and conversation on current topics; conducted in Fren ch . Pre req u i si t e: 202. I, II (4, 4)

421, 422

MASTERPIECES OF FRENCH LITERATURE

Authors representative of major periods from the Middle Ages t h rough the nineteenth century; the style and structure and the moral and ar tistic intentions of such a ut h o rs as Rabelais, Mon­ tai�ne, Moliere, Corneille, Pascal, Voltaire, Roussea u, Hugo, and Baudelaire. Prerequisite: 202. I, 1 1 a/y (4, 4)

321

INTERMEDIATE GERMAN

GERMAN CrvIUZATlON TO 1750

From the Middle Ages to the Enlightenment. A survey of German culture and its expression in creative works of art music and literature, with pa rtic u lar em ph a siS on Martin Luther and the Pro test a n t Reformation. Conducted in German. Pre req u isi t e: 202. I aly (4)

322

GERMAN CIVILIZATION SINCE 1750

From the Enli g h te n ment to the present. This survey covers representative works and trends i n German poli tic s, philosophy, literature, art and music, with emphasis on the Age of Goethe and Beethoven. Conducted in German. P rereq u is i te : 202. II aly (4)

351, 352

COMPOSITION AND CONVERSATlON

Intensive review of grammar with emphasis on idiomatic us,1ge; use of contemporary au t hors ,15 models of style. Conversation on topics o f s t uden t interest. Conducted in Ge r man. Pre req u isi te: 202 or eq u i v alent . !, II (4, 4)

421

GERMAN LITERATURE FROM THE ENLIGHTENMENT TO REALISM

Represen tat ive works of German literat u re from about 1750 to I R90, i n c l u d ing SllIrm I/lid Omng Classicism a n d Ro m ant ici s m . Read i ng will include such authors as Goethe, Schiller, Ouchner and Keller. Prerequisite: 202. I all' ( 4 )

422

TWENTIETH CENTURY GERMAN LITERATURE

Represen tative works from Naturalism to the present, including Ex pres s i o nis m and Socialist Rea l i sm . Rea ding s will cover works from both east and west, and will include such authors as Brecht, Kafka, Thomas Mann, Rilke and seghers. Pre req u i s i t e: 202. II aly (4)

442

HISTORY OF lHE GERMAN LANGUAGE

H ist or ical deve lop me n t of German w i t h reference to contemporary language; conducted in Germa n . Prereq u is i t e: 202. II aly (4)

451

ADVANCED COMPOSITION AND CONVERSATION

E mpha sis on i d i o m a t i c German using newspapers and other current sourc es for texts. Strongly recommended for students planning to obtain a credential to teach German i n pu bl ic secondary schools. Students should take t h i s course in the junior or s e n i or year. Conducted in German. Prerequisite: 352. ( 4 )


r

75 491, 492

INDEPENDENT STUDY (2-4)

NORWEGIAN Major in Norwegian: A minimum of 32 smester hours, including tDl - l 02, 201-202, 351 -352, and Scandinavian 421 or 442_ Minor in Norwegian: 20 semester hours, which may include tDl-102.

1 01, 1 02

ELEMENTARY NORWEGIAN

I ntroduces the students t o the pleasure of speaking, read ing, and writing a foreign 1.1nguage. These skills are developed th.rough a conversational approach, using songs and other cult ural materials. I, I I (4, 4)

201, 202

INTERMEDIATE NORWEGIAN

Develops a command of the language while further acquainting students with the Norwegian cultural heritage. Reading selections introduce Norwegian folklore and daily life. I, 11 (4, 4)

351

CONVERSATION AND COMPOSITION

Increases student ability for self-expression, both orally and in writing. Contemporary materials are selected .1S models of style and usage. PrerequiSite: 202 or equivalent. I (4)

352

ADVANCED CONVERSATION AND COMPOSITION

Emphasizes the finer points of structure, sty le, and good taste. Prerequisite: 351 or equivalent. II (4)

491, 492

INDEPENDENT STUDY (2-4)

SIGN LANG UA GE 1 01, 1 02

SPANISH Major i n Spanish: A minimum of 32 semester hours beyond 1 0 1 102, including 20 1 - 202, 321, 332, 351 -352, and tw0 400-level courses. Minor i n Spanish: 20 semester hours, excluding 1 0 1 - 1 02 and including 201 -202, 351, and two additional upper division courses.

101, 1 02

Major in Scandinavian Area Studies: 40 semester hours: A cross­ diSCiplinary approach to the study of Scandinavia. See the section of this catalog on Scandinavian Area Studies.

1 50

201, 202

250

MASTERPIECES O F SCANDINAVIAN LITERATURE

A survey of major a u t hors and works from the Scandinavian countries, beginning with the prose and poetry of the Viking Age. The contributions of Hans Christian Andersen, Knut Hamsun, Selma Lagerlof, and others are discussed. All readings in English translation. Satisfies the general u n iversity core requirement in literature. (4)

321

VIKINGS AND EMIGRANTS

Highlights of Scandinavian history, from the beginning to the presen t . Emphasis on periods and ways in which Scandinavia has contributed to world history. Readings in the original for majors; class conducted in English. aly (4)

322

CONTEMPORARY SCANDINAVIA

Neutrality and occupation; the emergence of the welfare state; social reforms, planned economies, and cultural policies; Sca ndi­ navia and the European community. Readin!ls i n the original for majors; class conducted in English. aly (4)

421

IBSEN AND STRlNDBERG

The great writers of nineteenth century Scandinavian literature­ Henrik Ibsen and August Strindberg-are st udied against the backdrop of their time and the work of other authors who contributed to the breakthrough of modern forms and themes. Emphasis on drama. Class conducted in English; readings in translation for non-majors. Satisfies the general u niversity core requ i rement in literature. aly (4)

422

TWENTIETH CENTURY SCANDINAVIAN LITERATURE

Recent trends in Scandinavian literature are illustrated by leading writers like Isak Dine nsen, Tarjei Vesaas, and Par Lagerkvist. Emphasis on prose fiction and poetry. Class conducted in English; readings in translation for non-majors. Satisfies the general university core requirement in literature. aly (4)

491, 492

INDEPENDENT STUDY 0 - 4 )

INTERMEDIATE SPANISH

A continuation of elementary Spanish; reading selections which reflect the Hispanic cult ural heritage as well as contemporary materials. Laboratory attendance required. I, [[ (4, 4 )

321

CIVILIZATION AND CULTURE

Historic and artistic elements which have shaped Spanish thought and behavior from the beginnings to the present; conducted in Spanish. Prerequisite: 202. I (4)

LATIN AMERICAN CIVILIZATION AND CULTURE

Historic, artistic, literary, sociological, and geographiC elements shaping the development of the Spanish-speaking New World. Both Hispanic and non-Hispanic elements will be studied. Pre­ requisite: 202 or equivalent. [[ (4)

351, 352

INTRODUCTION TO SCANDINAVIA

An overview of the Nordic countries, highlighting contributions in art and music and the cultural life of Denmark, Finland, Iceland, Norway, and Sweden. The roads to parliamentary democracy and current issues in the five nat ions are also outlined. (2)

ELEMENTARY SPANISH

Essentials of pronunciation, intonat ion, and structure; basic skills in listening, speaking. reading, and writing. Laboratory attendance required. I, [[ (4, 4)

322

SCANDINA VIAN

SIGN LANGUAGE

An i n t roduction to the structure of American Sign Language and to the world of the hearing-impaired. Basic signing skills and sign langu.lge vocabula ry; fingerspelling; the particular needs and problems of deaf people. Material presented through demonstra­ tions, drills, mime, recitals, Iec.tures, and discussions. r. [ [ (4, 4)

COMPOSITION AND CONVERSATION

Topics of current interest as a basis of improved or,11 and written expression; conducted in Spanish. Prerequisite: 202. I, I I (4, 4)

421, 422

MASTERPIECES OF HISPANIC LITERATURE

All genres of major literary works from the Poema del Cid, to 1898; forces which produced the literature; appreciation of literature as a work of art. Prerequisite: 202. r. [[ aly (4, 4)

431, 432

TWENTIETH CENTURY HISPANIC LITERATURE

The first course deals with the literature of Spain from the "Generacion de '98" to the present. The second course deals with the literat ure of Spanish America from the modernista movement ( 1 888) to the present. Emphasis on period will vary. (4, 4)

442

HISTORY O F ROMANCE LANGUAGES

Historical development of Romance languages with reference to current languages; same as French 442. (4)

491, 492

INDEPENDENT STUDY (2-4)


76

Legal Studies Prog ram Legal Studies is an interdisciplinary degree pro足 gram focusing on the nature of law and judicial processes. Consistent with the purposes of the American Legal Studies Association, the Legal Studies Program at PLU provides alternative approaches to the study of law from the academic fra mework of the social sciences, the humanities, bus iness, and education. The program empha足 sizes t he development of a critical understanding of the functions of law, the mu tual im pacts of law and societv, and the sources of law. Students in Legal Stu dies pursue these goa1ls through courses, directed research, and internships in offices and agencies involved in litigation and legal processes.

FACULTY Atkinson, Director; Benningham, Brue, D. Burke, DeBower, Dwyer-Shick, Farmer, Jobst, P. Menzel.

BACHELOR OF ARTS MAJOR: 32 semester hours.

I . Required couyses ( 1 2 hours): Introduction to Legal Studies (POLS 1 70) Judicial Process ( POLS 37 1 ) Legal Research (POLS 374) 2. Gel/eral dec/ives (8 hours); Two courses from the following: American Legal History ( HIST 45 1 ) Comparative Legal Systems (POLS 381 ) Philosophy of Law (P HIL 328) Sociology of Law (SOC 35 1 ) 3. Special dec/ives ( 1 2 hours): Three courses from the following (also, courses in group 2 not taken to fulfill general elective requirements may be used to fulfill sp ec i al elective requirements in group 3): Business Law ( BA 435) Civil Liberties (POLS 373) Constitutional Law (POLS 372) Court Administration ( POLS 571 ) Educational Law (EDUC 551 ) I n dustrial Organization and Public Policy ( ECON 37] ) Iinternational Organization and Law (POLS 336) Iinternship in Legal Studies (POLS 471 ) Law and Society ( BA 230) Law and the H u man Services (SOON 458)

MINOR: 20 semester hours, including Political Science 170 and fOllr additional cou rses selected in consultation with the program d irector.

Marriag e and Family Therapy The Marriage and Family Therapy program is a graduate program leading to the M.A. in Social Sciences. For further information, consult t he Graduate Cata log.

CO URSE OFFERINGS 50 1

GRADUATE WORKSHOPS

Gr" duat" workshops in special fields or areas for varying periods of time. ( 1 -4)

503

SYSTEMS APPROACH TO MARRIAGE AND FAMILY THERAPY

An introduction to the systems theory approach for treatment strategy and intervention. Exploration of the fa mily life cycle and family systems oriented assessment models. Strategies for initial i nterviews, hypothesis formulation, designing a strategy o f inter足 vention, and the process of termination. (4)

507

COMPARATIVE MARRIAGE AND FAMILY THERAPY

I n tensive comparative study of the theoretical rationale of the prominent schools of thought within the field of marriage and fa mily therapy. S t u d ies Include the range of strategies, techniques and research of structural, behavioral communication, and ana足 lytical approaches t o marriage and fa mily therapy. (4)


,

4

-, --------�-

510

SEX THERAPY

Basic principles and strategies of treatment for the six most common sexual dysfunctions. The nature of sexual health, a brief review of anatomy and physiology of the sexual response, and the biological and psychological determinants of sexual dysfunction. (2)

511

PSYCHOSOCIAL PATHOLOGY: RELATIONSHIP TO MARRIAGE AND THE FAMILY

The assessment of psychosocial pathology and its relationship to

522

PRACTICUM IV (4)

T h e four semesters of practica are part o f a continuous process toward developing specific therapeutic competencies in work with marriages and families. The practica present a competency­

based program in which each student is evaluated regarding: 1 ) case management skills; 2) relationship skills; 3) perceptual skills; 4) conceptual skills; and 5) structuring skills.

590

GRADUATE SEMINAR

Selected topics as announced. Prerequisi te: consent of the instruc­ tor. ( 1 -4)

591

DIRECTED STUDY (1-4)

regarding such psychosocial dysfunctions as divorce, family

595

GRADUATE READINGS

violence, delinquency, psychosomatic symptoms, drug addiction,

Independent study card required. (4)

family i nterpersonal structures and dynamics. Exploration of the treatment techniques and assumptions of leading family therapists

and disturbed adolescents. (2)

519

PRACTICUM I (4)

520

PRACTICUM II (4)

521

PRACTICUM III (4)

598

RESEARCH PROJECT (4)

599

THESIS (4)

Mathematics Mathematics is a many-faceted subject that is extremely useful in its application, but at the same time is fascinating and beautiful in the abstract. It is an indispensable tool for industry, sc ience, government, and the business world, while the elegance of its logic and beauty of form have intrigued scholars, philosophers, and artists since earliest times. The mathematics program at Pacific Lutheran University is designed to serve five main objec­ tives: ( 1 ) To provide backgrounds for other disci­ plines, (2) to provide a comprehensive pre-profes­ sional program for those directly entering the fields of teaching and applied mathematics, (3) to provide a nucleus of essential courses which will develop the breadth and maturity of mathematical thought for continued study of mathematics at the graduate level, (4) to develop the mental skills necessary for the creation, analysis, and critique of mathematical topics, and (5) to provide a view of mathematics as a part of humanistic behavior. The Department of Mathematics and Computer Science offers majors in both matematics and com­ puter science, information science, and statistics. Many o f the faculty teach both mathematics and computer science.

FACULTY: Mathematics and Computer Science Brink, Chair; Bandy, Batker, Beaulieu, Benkhalti, W. Chang, Cook, Dollinger, B. Dorner, C Dorner, E dison, Engelhardt, Hauser, J. Herzog, M. Herzog, N.C Meyer, CL. Nelson, G. Peterson, Rosenfeld, Ruble, Scott, Spillman, Yiu.

BEGINNING CLASSES Majors in mathematics, computer science, and other sciences usually take Math 151 and 152 (calculus). Those who have had calculus in high school may omit Math 151 and enroll in 152 after consultation with a member of the departmental faculty. Those who have less mathematics background may enroll in 133 (algebra/trigonometry) or Math 1 1 2 before taking 151. A placement test is given in class the first day of Math 151 to determine readiness for calculus. Business majors usually take Math 128. Those wishing a stronger background should take Math 151 and Math 230 or 331 in place of Math 1 28. Ot hers choose from Math 1 1 5, 128, 1 33, or 151 or Computer Science 1 1 0-210 or 144 or an interim class depending on their interests and levels of preparation. Remedial; Math 91 (Intermediate Algebra) is available for those who are not ready for other classes. Math 91 does not count toward graduation requirements. MATIlEMATICS MAJOR The foundation of the mathematics program for majors

is

the

four semester calculus and linear algebra sequence, Math 151,

152, 253, and 331. These courses are usually taken in sequence the first four semesters. Students with a calculus background in high school may receive advanced placement into the appropriate course in the sequence. Upper division work includes courses in modem algebra, analysis, statis tics, applied mathemat ics, and topology. Students majoring i n mathematics are encouraged to include work in computer science. Since many careers involve applying mathematics to other areas, it is a good idea to pick one or more subjects outside mathematics for additional study (perhaps leading to a minor). While many subjects are appropriate, some of the more common ones are economics, business, physics, engineering, chemistry, and biology. A typical major program in mathematics is as follows: Freshman year: Sophomore year:

Math 151, 152 Computer Science 144 Math 253, 331 Physics 153, 154 (if not taken earlier)

Junior & Senior years:

Math 433, 434, 455, 456, and other electives from mathematics and computer

486

science.

77


78 1'51

BACHELOR OF ARTS MAJOR: Minimum of 28 semester hours in mathematics courses, including 1 51, 1 52, 253, 331, 433, 455, 486, and either 434 or 456. The choice between 434 or 456 may be replaced by taking 8 semester hours from 321, 335, 341, 345·346, 351, and 490. Required supporting: Computer Science 1 44, which should be taken in the freshman year. 8 semester hours in p h ysics are strongly recommended. Students planning to do graduate work i n mathematics should complete both 434 and 456. 323, 324, and 446 may not be counted toward the major.

151, 152, 253, 331

and 486 and at least

Analytic geometry, functions, limits, derivatives and integrals with applicat ions, L'Hospital's Rule. Prerequisite: two years of high school algebra and trigonometry (or concurrent registration in 1 1 2) or 133 or equivalent. I II (4)

152

dental functions, polar coordinates, improper integrals, introduc­

20 semester

tion t o vectors and partial differentiation. Prerequisite: 1 5 1 . I II (4)

hours of upper division mathematics courses. 12 hours of the upper division requirements must come from 433, 434, 455, and 456. Required supporting: Computer Science 144, which should be taken in the freshman year; Physics 153·154. Physics 356 or Computer Science 348 or 570 may be substituted for one COurse of upper division mathematics. 323, 324, and 446 may not be counted toward the major.

1 99

BACHELOR OF ARTS IN EDVCA TION: See School of

Admission only by departmental invitation. ( 1 ·2)

230

including some techniques of proof. Prerequisite: 1 5 1 . I II (2)

253

matics courses, including 151, 152, 253, and 8 hours oi upper division mathematics courses. Strongly recommended: Computer Science 144 or 1 10. Interim courses and 323, 324, and 446 may not be counted toward the mathematics minor.

MINOR IN STATISTICS: See Statistics section of this catalog.

An introduction to vectors, multidimensional calculus, infinite these topics as tools for solving physical problems. Prerequisite:

152. I II (4)

and non·Euclidean geometry. Prerequisite: 152 or consent of

A grade of C or higher is strongly recommended in ail prerequisite courses.

graphing. Designed for students whose mathematical preparation is inadequate for Math 128 or Math 133. Does not count toward graduation requirements. I II (4)

323 MODERN ELEMENTARY MATHEMATICS Loncepts underlying traditional computational techniques; a and geometry. Intended for elementary teaching majors. Pre· requisite to EDUC 326. Prerequisite: consent of instructor. I

324

II (4)

ALGEBRA AND GEOMETRY FOR THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL TEACHER

Properties of real numbers, linear and quadratic equations and inequalities, complex n u mbers, polynomials, algebraic structures,

DIRECTE D STUDY IN FUNDAMENTAL MATHEMATICS

functions; a study of informal geometry from a mature viewpoint

Designed for students who need further help with the basics in mathematics to prepare them for higher level courses. Enrollment by arrangement with instructor. Does not count toward gradua· tion requirements. ( 1 ·4)

using modern vocabulary and notation. Geometry topics include congruence, similarity, symmetry, properties of geometry figures such as quadrilaterals and circles, and relationships among geometrical figures. Prerequisite: 323 or by placement exam. (4)

331

PLANE TRIGONOMETRY

Trigonometric and inverse trigonometric functions, identities, graphing, solution of triangles; logarithmic and exponential func· tions and other tools such as complex numbers. This class meets

133 in the second halfofthe semester. Forstudents who

are proficient in algebra but do not know trigonometry. Pre­ requisite: at least two years of high school algebra. I II (2)

LINEAR ALGEBRA

Vectors and vector spaces, matrices, inner product spaces, hnear transformations. Prereq uisite: 152. I I I (4)

334

ANALYSIS OF VARIANCE AND EXPERIMENTAL DESIGN

Random sampling, factors which destroy experimental design, one-way analysis of variance, two-way analysis of variance, factored design, block and latin square design. Students will also

INTRODUCTION TO THE WORLD O F MATHEMATICS A N D COMPUTERS

critique published experiments and perform a n experimental

A study of mathematics and computers in the modern world with a wide variety of applications and a historical perspective. This class is designed for students without extensive k nowledge of mathematics, but who want to acquire a basic understanding of the nat u re of mathematics and computers. Not intended for majors in science or mathematics or computer science. Some BASIC programming is included. P,rerequisite: one year of high school algebra. I II (4)

128

instructor. I (4)

systematic analysis of arithmetic; an intuitive approach t o a lgebra

INTERMEDIATE ALGEBRA

A review of high school algebra: solving linear and quadratic equations, factoring, simplifying expressions, exponents and

115

GEOMETRY

Foundations of geometry and basic theory in Euclidean, projective,

CO URSE OFFERINGS

with Math

MULTIVARIABLE CALCULUS AND DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS

series, d i fferential equat ions, and applications. Emphasis on using

321

1 12

MATRIX ALGEBRA

such as linear programming. A first look at abstract methods

MINOR IN MATHEMATICS: 20 semester hours of mathe·

99

DIRECTED READING

Supervised study of .topics selected to meet the individual's needs or interests; primarily for students awarded advanced placement.

A survey of matrix algebra and determination with applications,

Education.

91

ANALYTIC GEOMETRY AND CALCULUS

Integrations, applications, and techniques of integration, transcen·

BACHELOR O F SCIENCE MAJOR: 40 semester hours, including

ANALYTIC GEOMETRY AND CALCULUS

design project. Prerequisite: STAT 231 or equivalent. aly 11 1988·89

(2)

335

DESCRETE STRUCTURES

A first course in the abstract structures and methods of computer science. The logical structure of sets, relations, functions, combina­ torics, graph theory, Boolean algebras, switching theory, groups and coding theory will be surveyed through problems and theorems whose solutions and proofs clarify logical relationships. Prerequisites: 152 and either 230 or 331 . I II (4)

MATHEMATICS FOR BUSINESS AND THE BEHAVIORAL SCIENCES

341

Algebra review, matrix theory and· linear programming, int-roduc­

MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS I

Introduction to probability (sample spaces, d iscrete and con·

tion t o differential and integral calculus. Concepts are developed

tinuous distributions, expectations), Chebyshev's inequality,

stressing applications. This Course is primarHy for business

special distributions (binomial, Poisson, normal. gamma and chi

administration majors but is open t o all students interested in

square), statement of Central Limit Theorem, sampling distribu· tions, multivariate, marginal and conditional distributions, confi·

business, economics, and behavioral science applications. Pre­ requisite: two years of high school algebra or Math

91

or

dence intervals, t-test, F-tests, hypothesis testing, survey of

equivalent. I I I (4)

analysis of variance and regression. Prerequisite:

1 33

342

COLLEGE ALGEBRA AND TRIGONOMETRY

Solving equations, graphing, functions, inverse functions, loga­ rithms, exponentials, trigonometric functions and their inverses, identities, solution of triangles and other topics such as systems of equations and complex numbers. This course is primarily for students majoring in the sciences and for those needing a precalculus course but is open to all interested students. Prerequi· site: two years of high school algebra Or Math 91 or equivalent. I II

(4)

152. I (4)

MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS II

Statistical estimators and their properties, limiting distributions, moment generating functions and proof of Central Limit Theorem, convergence in probability and convergence in distribution, consistency, sufficient statistics and Lehmann-Sheffe Theorem, Bayesian statistics, order statjstics and non parametric methods, random walks, Markov chains and introduction to continuous time stochastic processes. Prerequisite: 341 . aly II 1 987·88 (4)


79 345

INTRODUCTION TO NUMERICAL ANALYSIS

N u merical t h eory and applications in the areas of solutions of equations, linear systems, interpolation, and approximation. Pre­ requisite: 1 52 and ( 1 44 or 1 1 0) or consent of instructor. II ( 2 )

346

NUMERICAL ANALYSIS

Continuation of 345, including numerical t h eory and applications in the areas of matrix theory, numerical d i fferentiation and i ntegration, and solution of differential equations. Prereq uisites: 253 and 345 or consent of instructor. II a/y 1 987-88 (2)

351

DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS

An introduction to differe ntial equations emphasizing the applied aspect. First and second order differential equations, boundary­ value and eigenvalue problems, power series solutions, nonlinear differential equations, nu merical met hods, the LaPlace transfor­ mation. Prerequisite: 253. 11 a/y 1 988-89 (4)

433, 434

ABSTRACT ALGEBRA

Topics from groups, rings, modules, fields, field extensions, and linear algebra. Prerequisites: for 433, 335 or 33 1; for 434. 331 and 433. 434 offered a/y I I 1 987-88 (4, 4)

446

MA THEMATICS IN THE SECONDARY SCHOOL

Methods and materials i n secondary school math teaching. Basic mathematical concepts; principles of n u m ber operation, rela tion, proof. and problem sol ving in the context of arithmet ic, algebra, and geometry. Prereq uisite: 253 or 331 or equivalent. I (2)

455, 456

MATHEMATICAL ANALYSIS

Extended treatment of topics introduced i n elementary calculus. Prerequisite: 253 and 331. 455 offered [ each year; 456 offered I I all' 1 988-89 (4)

486

SENIOR SEMINAR

Presentation by students of knowledge gained in research under the direction of an assigned professor. Required of all senior math majors seeking a B.A. or B.s. degree. PrerequiSite: senior math major or consent of department chair. 1. I I ( 1 )

490

TOPICS IN MATHEMATICS

Selected topics from the list below. 1\ ( 4 ) a . Combinatorics Elementary counting met hods, inclusion-exclusion principle. recurrence relations, generating functions, introduction to Polya counting theory and Ramsey theory. Prereq uisite: 1 52 and either 230 or 33 1 . b . Complex Analysis Complex n u mbers, function.s of a complex variable, contour integration, Cauchy I n t egral Theorem, power series, residues. Prereq uisite: 253. 1 1 1989 C. Graph Theory Paths, cycles, t rees, planar graphs, Hamiltonian graphs, coloring, 4-color theorem, d igraphs, appUcatiuns. Prerequisite: 1 52 and either 230 or 331 . 11 1988 d. Group Representations I n t roduction to groups, point groups, space groups, representatiuns of groups, applications to problems in physics and physical chemistry. Prereq uisite: 331 . 11 1991 e. Number Theory Prime num bers, divisibility, modular arithmetic. introduction to Diophantine equations, applications. PrerequiSite: 1 52. f. Operations Research Optimization problems, linear programming, network flow analysis, stochastic models, queueing theory. Prerequisite:152 and either 230 or 331 . g. Part ial Differential Equations Solutions and behavior of LaPlace, wave and heat equations. Fourier series and integrals, LaPlace transform. Prereq uisite: 253. h. Stoc.hastic Processes Properties of random variables and distributions, Markov cha ins, random walks, Poisson processes, birth and death processes. Prerequisite: 341 or consent of instructor. L Topology Metric spaces, topological spaces, continuity, compactness, connectedness, homotopy. Prerequisite: 253 or .13 1 . 1 1 1 990 Transform Methods Transform methods, including continuous and d iscrete Fourier t ransforms. fast Fourier transforms, applications. Prereq uiSites: 1 52 and 331.

j.

491, 492

INDEPENDENT STUDY

Prerequisite: consent of department chair. I II ( ] -4)

597, 598

GRADUATE RESEARCH

Open to master' s d egree candidates only. Prere.quisite: consent of department chair. I II ( ] -4)

Music The study of music is, i n these times of stress and rapid change, a type of investment that can provide enduring satisfaction. The staff and facilities of Pacific Lutheran Univer­

sity are such that students may pursue studies in many branches of music leading to academic de­ grees as well as lifelong enjoyment. Degree pro­ grams include the Bachelor of Arts, the Bachelor of Fine Arts, the Bachelor of Music, and the Master of Music, which is offered with concentration in either conducting, composition, education, or per­ formance. The Bachelor of Arts in Education with a major in music is offered for those intending to become teachers in the public schools. Both the undergraduate and graduate programs are accredited regionally and nationally. Pacific Lutheran University is an associate member of the National Association of Schools of Music.

PLU

music graduates find places for themselves as teachers of music in public and private schools and colleges, and as conductors, composers, pri­ vate teachers, and classroom teachers. A

considerable number contribute greatly to church worship as organists, choir directors, or full-time ministers_ Some have found satisfying careers in music merchandising, others in concert manage­ ment. Still others, with emphasis on performance, are in opera and on the concert stage, as well as in popular entertainment, vocally and instrumentally.

Facilities include space and instruments for indi­ vidual practice and recital. Private study in key­ board is available i n piano, organ, and harpsichord_ Other private study includes voice and all string, wind, and percussion instruments, taught by regu­ larly perform ing musicians. Professional-quality experience is available to qualified performers in band, orchestra, cho ir, jazz, and chamber ensembles.


80 E xposure to musical literature is to be gained not only through intensive course work in history and literature, but also in attendance at the large n umber of concerts annuaUy presented by the performing organizations as well as by students, faculty, and guest artists in recital. I t must be emphasized that music majors form but a part of the multi-faceted program of music at PLU. All students are eligible to a udition for the performing organizations and constitute perhaps half of the membership. Introductory music courses during both the regular semesters and the interim are designed for exploration and self-fulfillment.

FACULTY Robbins, Chair; Dahl, K. Vaught Farner, R. Farner, Frohnmayer, Gard, Grieshaber, Harmic, Hoffman, C. Knapp, Kracht, L. Meyer, Ponoto, B. Poulshock, Sparks, Tremaine, Youtz; assisted by Dombourian­ Eby, Harty, S. Knapp, Mazzolini, McCarty, Moore, Odegard, Pressley, N. Poulshock, Shapiro, Timmer­ man, Wall. For in troductory courses to the field of music. set' the descrip­ tinns of Music 1 0 1 . 1 02. 1 03. and 1 04. Students intending to major in music should begin the major music sequi!nces in the first year. Failure t o do so m"y mean an extra semester or year to complNe the major program. Followin� is th., program for all enterin� freshmen who intend to Il1 Jjor in music: Courses Theory: 1 23. 1 24 Mu,ic Historv: 231 E.lr Trainin�: '1 25, 1 26 Class Pi.,no: 201 Private Instruction: Large Ensemble (performance majors in :-;ome area may postpone this) Phvsical Education Gent'ral University Requirements

Fall 3

S pring 2 4

I I I

I

I 4

1 4

by enrollment in specific courses and may not be taken by means of independent study. BACHELOR O F ARTS MAJOR: Maximum of 40 semester hours including Music Core (22 hours), plus 4 hours oi ensemble; 6 hours of literat ure/theory electives from 327-335. 423-439; 8 hours of private instruction, piano ( minimum class level 2). In addition to requirements listed above. candidates for t he RA degree must meet the foreign language/alternative requirement in the College of Arts and Sciences. BACHELOR OF ARTS IN EDUCATION: Bachelor o f Arts in Education-K- 1 2 Choral Bachelor of Arts in Educalio n - K - 1 2 Instrumental ( Band Emphasis) Bachelor o f Arts in Education - K - 1 2 Instrumental (Orchestra EmphaSis) Consult the School of Education section of this catalog. BACHELOR O F K-12 CHORAL Music t Music 360-363 20 1 + 204J404/ 420" 240+ 248+ 340+ 342+ 345+ 34R+ 442+ 443+

445+ 453+

MUSIC CORE: The following core is required in all music degree programs with the exception of Junior High Teaching Minor (non-specialist). Elementary Teaching Major (non-special­ ist ). and Elementary Teaching Minor (non -specialist):

Theory: 1 2:1, 1 24, 223 Music History: 1 32, 231 Ear Training: 1 25. 126. 225. 226 20th Century: 227

7 8 4 3

hours hours hours hours

22 hours The Music Core is fundamental to the pursuit of the music major and is normally completed in sequence in the first four semesters of study. Music Core requireme.nts must be fulfilled

22 7 4 6(6 semesters')

Foundations o f Music Education Guitar Laboratorv Fundamentals o ( Music Education Materials in K-9 M u sic Basic Conducting Practicum in Music Education Methods in K-9 Music Methods and Materials for Secondary Choral Music Advanced Conducting Vocal Pedagogy

3

I 2 2 2

I 2

Total

BACHELOR O F ARTS IN EDUCATION­ K-12 INSTRUMENTAL (BAND EMPHASIS) Music + Cart' Music 370/37 1/ 380 Large Ensemble Jazz Ensemble 375/376 240+ Foundations of Music Education String Laboratory 241 /242+

243/244+ 245/246+ 326+ 340+ 345+ 348+ 2--/4-420" 201 + 444+

MINOR: 20 semester hours. including Music 1 23. 125; M usic 1 24, 1 26 or Music 1 27; 4 hours of Private Instruction ( Music 20 1 2 ( 9); 4 hours o f Ensemble (Music 360-384); one o f t b e following33 1 , .1.15. 353, 354. 43i, 432. 436. 4:17. 43R; I hour o f music elective.

ENTRANCE AUDITION: To be admitted to a music major program. prospect ive students must audition for the music faculty. Music majors should fill out a declaration o f major form d u r­ ing the.ir first semester of enrollment in the program and be assigned to a music faculty adv ist'r. Only grades of "C" or better in music cou rses may be counted toward a music major. Courses in which the student receives lower than a "C-" must be repeated un less substitute course work is authorized b y the department.

Core Large Ensemble Class Piano: Min. Level 6 Private l.nst ruction: Voice

+ Prerequisite for student teaching . • Consecutive fall/spring s<'mesters. .. Half recitaL

MUSIC MINOR

UNDERGRAD UATE MUSIC MAjOR DEGREES

ARTS I N EDUCATION­

445+

2 2 2 58

22 7

1 3

2 2. 5 Woodwind Laboratory 2 Brass/Perc. Laboratory Orchestration 2 2 Fundamentals of Music Education Basic Conducting 2 Practicum in Music Education Private I n s t ruction 6(6 semesters ' ) Class Piano: Min. Le.vel 4 Met'hods and Materials for School Band Music Advanced Conducting

+ Prert'q uisite for student teaching. , Consecutive fall/spring semesters . .. Half recitaL

2

Total

3 2 58

BACHELOR O F ARTS IN EDUCATIONK-12 INSTRUMENTAL (ORCHESTRA EMPHASIS) Music +

Music 370/371 / 380 381 240+ 2 4 1 1242+ 243/244+ 245/246+ 326+ 340+ 345+ 348+ 2--/4-420" 201 + 445+ 454+

Large Ensemble 7 Chamber Ensemble 1 :1 Foundations of Music Education String Laboratory 2 Woodwind L,lboratory 2. 5 2 Brass/Perc. Laboratory Orchestration 2 2 Fundamentals of Music Education Basic Conducting 2 Practicum in Music Education I Private Instruction 6(6 semesters') Class Piano: Min. Level 4 Advanced Conducting Methods and Materials for String Teachers

Prerequisite for student teaching. , Consecutive fall/spring semesters. .. Half recitaL

+

2 2

Total

3 58


J�----BACHELOR OF MUSIC Bachelor of Music in Instrumental Performance Bachelor of Music in Organ Performance Bachelor of Music in Piano Performance B,Khelor of Music in Vocal Performance Buchelor of Music i n Composition Bachelor of Music in Church Music

BACHELOR OF MUSIC­ INSTRUMENTAL PERFORMANCE Core Music 22 Music 3701371/ 380 Large Ensemble 8 323 Counterpoint 2 326 Orchestration 2 345 Basic Conducting 2 2/4 Private Inst ruction 22(8 semesters') 420" 201 Class Piano: Min. Level 4 2 381 Chamber Ensemble 4 384 Contemporary Arts Ensemble 1 Form I 423 2 Form II Or I I I 424 or 425 2 Advanced Conducting 445 2 439 4 Senior Seminar: Topics in Music Literature 75 Total • Consec u t i ve fall/spring semesters. .. Full recital. ViolinlViola majors will take an additional 2 semester hour of Music 491 I ndependent Study: String Pedagogy. Recommended: Music 324 Advanced Counterpoint. BACHELOR OF MUSIC-ORGAN PERFORMANCE Core 22 Music Ensemble (to include Chamber Ensemble) 5 2 323 Counterpoint 324 Advanced CounterpOint 2 331 Music o f ).5 . Bach 2 335 Church Music 2 345 Basic Conducting 2 352 Organ I mprovisation 2 384 Contemporary Arts Ensemble 1 Private I n struction: Oq;an I ,)(H semesters') 203/403 420" llH Private Inst ruction: Harpsichord ( 2 semesters) 2 423 Form 1 424 or 425 Form II or III 2 436 Historv of Organ Building 2 437 Masterpieces of S,ICred Music 2 2 Hymnology and Music of the Liturgy 438 43 9 4 Senior Seminar: Topics in Music Literature Total 75 , Consecutive f�lI/spring semesters. .. Full recital. BAC HELOR O F MUSIC-PIANO PERFORMANCE Music Core 22 LMge Ensemble Music 2 323 Counterpoint 2 324 2 Adva nced Counterpoint 345 Basic Conducting 2 23(8 5emestt�rs') 202/402/ Private Instruction: Piano 420" 1 218 Private Instruction: Harpsichord 351 Accompanying·" 2 2 383 Two Piano Ensemble 184 1 Contemporary Arts Ensemble hHm l 423 2 424 Or 425 Form 1.1 or I I I 2 431 History of Piano Literature ' and Performance 4 451 Piano Pedagogy'" 419 Senior Seminar: Topics in Music Literature 4 201 Class Piano: Min. Level R 2 rotal 75 • Consecutive fall/spring semesters . .. Full recital. """"Piano p<:.'rformance majors may elect additional emphasis in accompanying or pedagogy. Those seeking emphasis i n accompanying shall elect t w o additional hours o f M u s i c 351 and shall accomp a n y two full vocal or instrumental recitals. Those seeking emphasis i n pedagogy shall elect four additional hours of Music 451.

BACHELOR OF Music 360-363 323 345 201 204/4041 420" 253 254 353 354 366 423 4.24 or 425 453 439

MUSIC-VOCAL PERFORMANCE Core 22 Large Ensemble 8 Counterpoint 2 Basic Conducting 2 Class Piano: Min. Level 8 Private Instruction: Voice 19(8 semesters')

Diction I Diction I I Solo Vocal Literature History of Music Theater Opera Workshop Form I Form II or I I I Vocal Pedagogy Senior Seminar: Topics in Music Literature Total • Consecutive fall/spring semesters. .. Full recital. Recommended: Music 324 Advanced Counterpoint PE 241 Modern Dance COMA 250 Fundamentals of Acting BACHELOR OF MUSIC -COMPOSITION Music Core Large Ensem ble 249 Electronic Music Laboratory 323 Counterpoint 324 Advanced Counterpoint 326 Orchestration 327 CompOSition (private study) 345 Basic Conducting 2/4 Priv"te Instruction: Principal Instrument 201 Class Piano: Min. Level R 384 Contemporary Arts Ensemble Form I 423 Form I I 424 Form I I I 425 432 Music of the World's I'<,o ple 445 Advanced Conducting 439 Senior Seminar: Topi(s in Music Literature Tutal BACHELOR O F Music 360-363 203/403 or 204/404

420" 204/404 or 203/403 352 or 201 323 324 331 335 345 381 3R4 423 424 or 425 437 438 445 43')

MUSIC-CHURCH MUSIC Core Choral Ensemble

Principal Instrument (Organ or Voice)

1 I 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 75

22 2

I

2 2 2 I t;

2

6

4 2 2 2

75 22 6

14(H semesters')

Secondary Instrume.nt 4(4 s('mesters') (Voice or Orga n ) Organ I mprovisation or Class Piano: M i n . Level 8 2 Counterpoint 2 2 Advanced Counterpoint Music o f ).5. Bach 2 2 Church Music Basic Conducting Chamber Ensemble 2 Contemporary Arts Ensemble I Form I 2 Form II or IJI 2 2 Masterpiec.es of Sacred Music 2 Hymnology and Music of the Liturgy Advanc. ed Conducting 2 Senior Seminar: TopiCS in Music Literature 4 75 Total fali/spring semesters.

Consecutive . . Full recital. Strongly Recommended: Additional religion courses beyond the required courses of Core I or I I . •

81


82 MASTER OF MUSIC DEGREES Master of Music in Composition, Conductin�, Music Educa­ tion, and Performance Consult the Gmlilllltr Cntaio,X for dt't.1 iis of the Mastt'r of Music progra m.

COURSE OFFERINGS 101

INTRODUCTION TO MUSIC

Introduction to music li terature with emphasis on listening, struc­ t ure, period, a n d style, Designed to enh'lnce the enjoyment and understandin� of music. Not open to mujors. I (4)

102

UNDERSTANDING MUSIC THROUGH MELODY

Introduction to the musical arts through a systematic exploration of melody a s a primary musical impulse i n a wide variety of musical styles including �thnic (folk), popular, ,jazz, rock, classical, opera, ilnd musical theater. Designed t o enhance the ''' njoyment and understanding of all music through increawd sensitivity to melody. 0i'ot open to mUlors. II (4)

1 03

HISTORY O F JAZZ

Survey of America's u n iq u e art form: jazz. Emphasis on history, listening, structure, and style from early developments throu gh recent trends. Meets Core I req uirement in arts/literilture, line 1. I I (4)

1 04

MUSIC A ND TECHNOLOGY

Survey of the impact of technology on the musical arts, from the evolution of musical instruments through the audio/video tech­ nology of today including synthes izers, comput ers. MTV, live concerts, and recording studio techniques. "Hands-on" experience with today's technology and building of original instruments as well as directed study of the broader implications of the current technological revolution. Meets Core I requirements in arts/litera­ t u re, line 1. I (4)

1 23

THEORY I

The studv of musical terms, fundamenta ls, notation, melody writ­ ing, and h ilrmonv.ation through analysis and writing. I (3)

1 24

THEORY II

A continua tion of 123. II (2)

1 25

E AR TRAINlNG I

Development of aural skills in simple rhythmic dictation, inter­ vals, sightsinging using progressive exercises consisting of short mt'lod ies. I ( 1)

1 26

E AR TRAINING II

Continued development of aural skills in sight-singing, melodic and rh y t h m ic dictation. Elementary harmonic dictiltion. II ( ] )

1 27

JAZZ THEORY

L n t roduction to the theoretical basis of jazz, including melodi" harmonic, and formal aspects as well as ear training. Prerequisite: 123, 1 25, or consent of instructor. aly I (3)

1 32.

MUSIC HISTORY I

The evolution of Western music from the earlv Christian era t h rough t h e Middle Ages, Renaissance, and Ba (oque eras. Pre­ requisite: 1 23. 'I ( 4)

211

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: SAXOPHONE 0-4)

212

PRIV ATE INSTRUCTION: TRUMPET ( 1-4)

21 3

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: FRE NCH HORN ( 1-4)

214

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: TROMBONE ( 1-4)

215

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: BARITONE/TUBA ( 1-4)

216

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: PERCUSSION ( 1-4)

217

PRIVATE A N D CLASS INSTRUCTION: GUITAR 0-4)

218

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: HARP 0-4)

219

pruv ATE INSTRUCTION: HARPSICHORD ( 1-4)

1 Credit Fall a nd' Spring Semesters: One half-hour priv.1 te or two one-hour class lessons per week in addition t o daily practice. Interim: Two 45- minute lessons per week in addition t o daily practice. 2-4 Credits Fall and Spring Semesters: Two half-hour lessons per week in addition t o daily practice.

Students in piano, voice, and guitar may be assigned to class instruction a t the d iscretion of the m u s ic fac ulty. SpeCial fee in additilln to tuition.

223

THEORY III

Systematic study of emergent theoretical constructs from the 18th and 19th century a s represented in literature of that period. I (2)

225

E AR TRAINING III

Advanced a u ral skills t h rough extended rhy t h ms and melod ies. EmphasiS on harmonic dictation. I ( ] )

226

EAR TRAINING IV

Sight-singing, includin g pan-tonal melodies. Harmonic dictation of modulatory chord progressions involving chromatic a lteration. Advanced rhythmic dictation. I! ( 1 )

227

20TH CENTURY MUSIC

The evolution of Western art music in the 20th cent ury from early developments to current t rends, including study of emergent theoretical constructs. Prerequisites: 223, 231 . I I ( 3 )

231

MUSIC HISTORY II

T h e evolution o f Western m u s i c i n the Classic and Romantic eras. Prerequisites: 123. I! (4)

240

FOUNDATIONS OF MUSIC E DUCATION

I n t roduction to the basic of teachin g music, including philosophy. content, st udent characteristics, and the nature and orgilnizat ion of musical learning. For students preparing to become music speciillists ( m usic education majors only). I (3)

241 -242

STRING LABORATORY

Methods and materials of teaching and playing string instruments in the public schools. I, II (], 1 )

201

CLASS INSTRUCTION: PIANO ( 1 )

243-244

202

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: PIANO 0-4)

Methods and materials of teaching and playing woodwind instru­ ments in the public schools. 1.11 (], 1 )

WOODWIND LABORATORY

203

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: ORGAN ( 1 -4)

245-246

204

PRIVATE AND CLASS INSTRUCTION: VOICE ( 1 -4)

Methods and materials o f teaching ilnd playing brass and percus­ sion instruments in the public schools. I,I! ( ] , 1 )

205

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: VIOUNIVIOLA ( 1-4)

206

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: CELLA/BASS 0-4)

207

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: FLUTE 0-4)

208

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: OBOE/ENGLISH HORN (1-4)

209

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: BASSOON (1-4)

210

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: CLARINET ( 1-4)

248

BRASS/PERCUSSION LABORATORY

GUITAR LABORATORY

Methods and materials of teaching and playing guitar in the public schools. I ( ] )

249

ELECTRONIC MUSIC LABORATORY

A laboratory experience dealing with materials and methods of elementary electronic m usic synthesis. Real-time experience in t h e electronic m usic s t udio, as well as discussion' of various popular synthesizers, electronic music aesthet ics, and the use of electronic instruments in secondary education_ II ( ] )

253

DICTION I

Rules and techniq ues of accurate pronunciation, enunciation, a n d projection oHtalian and German; class discussions, pt'rformances, a n d critiques. aly I (1 )


83 254

DICTION II

Ru les llnd techniques of accurate pronunciation, enunciation, and projection of French; class discussions, performances, and cri­ tiq ues. a/y n ( I )

323

COUNTERPOINT

Introduct ion to the concept, historical evolution and composi­ tional craft of counterpoint. Major emphasis on eighteenth century style of B"ch and his contemporaries. a/y I (2)

324

ADV ANCED COUNTERPOINT

Advanced techniques of fugue writing. Further analysis of 18th, 1 9t h and 20th century contra p u n t al mus.ic. I n t roduction to Schenker (reductionist) analysis. a/y I I (2)

326

ORCHESTRATION

The range, transposition, sound, and technical characteristics of instruments. Notation, scoring, and arranging for conventional and unique instrument groupings. Prerequisite: 223. a/y (2)

327

COMPOSITION

A systema t ic approach to contemporary musical composition; students create and notate works for solo, small and I"rge ensembles. M" y be repeated for additional credit. Special fee in addition to tuition. ( 1 -4)

328

ARRANGING

Study of orchestrational techniques appLied to commercial music. Prereq uisite: 326 or consent of instructor. all' I (2)

331

MUSIC OF JOHANN SEBASTIAN BACH

A study of selected works representing each of the primary areas of the creative genius of js. Bach. a/y (2)

335

CHURCH MUSIC

Survey of choral music related to the church year suitable for the parish choir. Particular emphasis on building the parish music library. all' (2)

340

FUNDAMENTALS OF MUSIC EDUCATION

Offered spring semester for students planning to be music special­ ists, this course provides detailed planning of curricula for various musical skills at diffe.rent grade levels. Group, individual, and small group instruction, sectionals and large group management also discussed. Evaluation, grading, written notices, objectives, goals, course goals, and rEP's for special educat ion, observ ation of a class a t two di fferent situations, interviewing for a job, working with parents, faculty, administration, and community. Prerequi­ site: 240. I I (2)

341

MUSIC FOR CLASSROOM TEACHERS

Methods and procedures in teaching elementary school music as well as inhlsing the arts in the curriculum. Offered for students preparing for elementary classroom teaching (non-music educa­ tion majors). I I (2)

342

MATERIALS IN K-9 MUSIC

Study of skill acquisit ions, music concepts, and analyzing the range of available resources, including ethnic music and computer assisted instruction. Offered for students preparing to become music speCialists (music education majors only). Prereq uisite: 240, 340. 1 ( 2 )

344

BEGINNING JAZZ IMPROVISATION

Introduction to small group jazz performance emphasizing indi­ vidual improvisation in a variety of jazz styles. a/y I ( 1 )

345

BASIC CONDUCTING

Introduction to basic patterns, gestu res, and conducting tech­ niques; application to appropriate vocal and instrumental scores. ! (2)

348

PRACTICUM IN MUSIC EDUCATION

Fie!d experience including observation and limited teaching in the schools. Discussion and analysis compleme.nts field work. Pre­ requisite: 340; recommended EDUC 251 or 253. I ( 1 )

349

ELECTRONIC MUSIC PRACTICUM

Application of electronic techniques to compositional process. Assigned studio time on a regular basis. Prerequisite: 249. ( 1 -3)

351

ACCOMPANYING

Practice in accompanying representative vocal and instrumental solo literat ure from all periods. Special fee in addition to t u ition. ( 1 )

352

ORGAN IMPROVISATION

Basic techniques of improvisat ion, partic ularly as r"lated to hymn tunes. a/y (2)

353

SOLO VOCAL LITERATURE

Survey of solo vocal literature. a/y (2)

354

HISTORY O F MUSIC THEATER

A general survey of the evolution of "Drama per Musica" from opera to musical comedy including a depth study of selected Scores. all' (2)

360

CHOIR OF THE WEST

A study of a wide variety of choral literature and technique through rehearsal and performance of both sacred and secular music. Auditions at the beginning of faU semester. ( I )

361

UNIVERSITY CHORALE

A study of choral literature dnd technique through rehearsal and performance of both sacred and secular music. EmphasiS on indi­ vidual vocal and musical development through choral singing. Auditions a t the beginning of fall semester. ( 1 )

362

UNIVERSITY MEN'S CHORUS

The study and performance of repertoire for men's voices. Empha­ sis on individual vocal and musical development. ( I )

363

UNIVERSITY SINGERS

The study and performance of repertoire for women's voices. Emphasis on individual vocal and musical development. ( I )

365

CHAPEL CHOIR

Repertoire experience with appropriate literature for ongoing church music programs of d liturgical nature. Regular perform­ ances for University Chapel Worship. Participation without credit available. ( ! )

366

OPERA WORKSHOP

Production of chamber opera and opera scenes. Participation in all facets of production. PrerequLsite: consent o f instructor. ( I )

368

CHORAL UNION

Rehearsal and performance of major works in the choral/orches­ tral repertoire. Open to the community as well as PLU students; membership by " udition. SpeCial fee in addition to tuition. ( I )

370

WIND ENS EMBLE

Study and performance of selected wind and percussion literature using various size ensembles. Membership by audition. ( I )

371

CONCERT BAND

Study of selected band literature through rehearsal and perform­ ance. Designed especially for the non-major; no audition neces­ sary. Prerequisite: having played instrument through at least junior year of high school or consent of instructor. ( I )

375

UNIVERSITY JAZZ ENSEMBLE

Study of selected big band literature t h rough rehearsal and performance. Membership by audit ion. ( I )

376

JAZZ LABORATORY ENSEMBLE

Study of the basic style of playing jazz through rehearsal and performance. Membership by audition. ( I )

380

UNIVERSITY SYMPHONY ORCHESTRA

Study of selected orchestral literature through rehearsal and per­ formance. Membership by audition. ( ! )

381

CHAMBER ENSEMBLE

Reading, rehearsal, and performance of selected instrumental chamber music. Prerequisite: consent of instructor. ( ! ) Section A-String; Section B- Brass; Section C-Wood wind; Section D-Early Instruments.

382

CONTEMPORARY DIRECTIONS ENSEMBLE

Public and laboratory perfonnance of contemporary music. ( I )

383

TWO PIANO E NSEMBLE

Techniques and practice in the performance of two-piano and piano duet Literature; includes sight reading and program plan­ ning. ( 1 )

384

CONTEMPORARY ARTS ENSEMBLE

A performance ensemble integra ting all the arts-literary, visu,,! and performing. Original performance pieces are conceived, developed and performed by the ensemble using techniques from story and song to electronics and video. Prerequisite: consent of instructor. ( 1 )

401

PRIVATE I NSTRUCTION: JAZZ 0-4)

402

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: PIANO 0-4 )

403

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: ORGAN 0-4)

404

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: VOICE (1-4)

405

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: VIOLINIVIOLA 0-4)


84 438

HYMNOLOGY AND THE MUSIC OF THE LITURGY

406

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: CELLOIBASS ( 1-4)

407

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: FLUTE (1-4)

408

PRIV ATE INSTRUCTION: OBOE /ENGLISH HORN ( 1-4)

A survey of Christian hymnody, considered from both a musical and poetic viewpoint. Also considered will be t he concept and performance of music for t he liturgy, both historic and contempor­ ary, p rimarily from the Roman, Anglican, and L u t heran traditions. a/y (2)

439

409

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: BASSOON (1 -4)

410

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: CLARINET ( 1 - 4 )

41 1

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: SAXOPHONE (1 -4)

412

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: TRUMPET (1 -4)

413

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: FRE NCH HORN ( 1-4)

414

PRIV A TE INSTRUCTION: TROMBONE ( 1-4)

41 5

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: BARITON E/TUBA (1-4)

416

PRIV ATE INSTRUCTION: PERCUSSION ( 1-4)

417

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: GUITAR ( 1-4)

418

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: HARP (1 -4)

419

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: HARPSICHORD ( 1-4)

420

PRIV A TE INSTRUCTION: DEGREE RECITAL (1-2)

1 Credit 1',,11 ,l n cl Sprin,; 5enwsterS: One half-hour pri va t e les'' 'l11 per week

in .1dd i tion to d,'ily practice. In t e rim: Two 4 5 - m i n u t e Ie. s sons per <ld d i t illn to daily pra ct ice,

wt.:.'ek i n

2-4 Credits

Fall and Spring St?rnp�ters: Two h.l1f-houT pr i va t e lessons per week in t o daily pr41 c t ice. Special ft'" in addition t o t u i t io n .

423

FORM I

Adv,lnced an" lvsis of literature from Classic. Earlv and Middle Rom.l n t ic s t y les i n re present<ltive genres- tlnd medi; . 11 (2)

424

425

FORM III

Ad vanced a n " l y s is of liter<lture from Modern and Contemporary s t y l I:":' in n::>pn.'se n t J t iv(' genres .l nd rnt'dia. Prereq uisite: 423. i.l /y I

(2)

427

ADVANCED ORCHESTRATION/ ARRANGING

Con t in u a t ion of 32& or 3 28 0n an individual basis.

Prerequisite: 326 or 328. M a y be repe<lted for a d di tional credit. Special fee i n a d d i t i o n t o t u i t i o n. ( 1 -1)

431

Directed s t u d y of selected topics in music liter,J t u re. Prerequisite: senior standing. Open to juniors for non-degree credit. (4)

442

II (2)

443

444

The organization " nd administration of the secondary school music curriculum with particular attention to the needs of the band pro!?,ram. Orga nization, management, teaching methods, rehearsal techniques, and wind-percussion literature appropriate for the various age and experience levels of students in grades 4 - l 2. PrerequiSite: 340, 348. 11 (3)

445

ADVANCED CONDUCTING

451

PIANO PEDAGOGY

453

VOCAL PEDAGOGY

Refinement of patterns, gestures, and conducting techniques; application to approprait.. vocal and instrumen t.,1 Scores. Prerequi­ s i t e : 345. Section A-In strumen tal; Section B--Choral. I I (2) Teaching techniques for prospective teachers of piano, i nclu d i ng techniques of private and class piano inst ruction. Methods and materials from beginning through advanced levels. (2) Section A-Basic; Section B-Lower ElementalY; Section C-Upper Ele­ mentary; Section D-Advanced. Physiological, psychological, and ped,'gogical aspects of singing. a/y (2)

METHODS AND MATERIALS FOR STRING TEACHERS

Methods and techniques of teaching strings t o all ages and levels, from the beginner to the advanced student. Special emphaSis o n t h e physiological ,l n d psychological approach t o t h e instrument. Study of string pedagogy in the classroom as well ,1S individual instruction. Prerequisite: 340, 348 o r consent of instructor. II (3)

491, 492

INDEPE N DENT STUDY

Prerequisite: consent of instructor. May be repeated for additional credit. ( 1 -4)

502

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: PIANO ( 1-4)

503

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: ORGAN (1-4)

504

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: VOICE ( 1-4)

505

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: VIOLINIVIOLA ( 1 -4 )

MUSIC O F THE WORLD'S PEOPLE

506

PRIVATE IN STRUCTION: CELLA/BASS (1 -4)

507

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: FLUTE ( 1-4)

508

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: OBOE/ENGLISH HORN ( 1-4)

to ethnomusicolllf;Y; techniques of studying music within cultural contexts. In-depth cast' s t u d ies o f one American Indian musical culture, followed bv music o f urban American blues, Ghanian, Black American, Balkan, Russian, and Indian s t yl es. Includes field s t u d y project of one musical culture. aly (2)

HISTORY OF ORGAN BUILDING

A t w o - fold study, involving both the technical evolution of the pipe o rga n (key-.lct ions, windch est designs, pipework vilrieities ,l nci construction, the organ case) as well as the historical evolu tion of t he vilfinus concepts of tona I design as t h e s e relate to tht::' p er form(1nc e of organ literature. a/y (2)

437

METHODS AND MATERIALS FOR SCHOOL BAND MUSIC

HISTORY OF PIANO LITERATURE AND PERFORMANCE

I n t roduction

436

METHODS AND MATERIALS FOR SECON DARY CHORAL MUSIC

The organization and administration of t he secondary school music curriculum with pdrticular attention to the needs of the choral program. Organizat ion, management, teaching met hods, rehearsal techniques, and choral literature appropriate for the v."ious age and experience levels o f studt'nts in grades 7 - l 2. 1 1 (2)

A study of rt'presentat ive piano compositions o f all periods.,l/y (2)

432

METHODS IN K-9 MUSIC

Orff-Schulwerk and Kodaly techniq ues for upper elementary and middle school children. Offered for students preparing to become music specialists (music education majors ony). Prerequisite: 342.

454

FORM II

Advanced Jnaly�is of l i t e r a t ure from late Romantic, Impressionist, ''I nd Nat ion(,li:.; t ic s t y1(;,5 in repr�sent a t i v e gen res and media. Pre­ req ui s i t e: �2J. a/y I ( 2 )

SENIOR SEMINAR: TOPICS IN MUSIC LITERATURE

MASTERPIECES OF SACRED MUSIC LITERATURE

A survey of Judeo-Christian music through the s t udy of represent­

(l tive major vocal/choral works.

a/y (2)

509

PRIVATE IN STRUCTION: BASSOON (1-4)

510

PRIVATE IN STRUCTION: CLARINET ( 1 - 4 )

511

PRIV ATE INSTRUCTION: SAXOPHONE (1 -4)

512

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: TRUMPET ( 1-4)


I

85 513 514

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: FRENCH HORN (1-4) PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: TROMBONE (1-4)

515

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: BARITONE/TUBA (1-4 )

516

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: PERCUSSION ( 1-4)

517

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: GUITAR ( 1-4)

518

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: HARP ( 1-4)

519

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: HARPSICHORD (1-4)

520

PRIVATE INSTRUCTION: CONDUCTING ( 1-4)

1 Credit

fOa l l and Spring Semesters: One half-hour private lesson per week in addition to daily practice. I n terim: Two 4 5 - minute lessons per week in addition t o daily practice.

2-4 Credits Fall and Sprin!\ Semesters: Two half-hour private lessons per week in addition to daily practice. Special fee in addition to t u ition.

527

COMPOSITION

A s y s tematic approach to contemporary music composition; ,tudents create, notate, and pe.rform worh for solo, small and lar�e. ensembles. May be repeated for credit. ( 1 -4)

532

MUSIC BIBLIOGRAPHY AND RESEARCH TECHNIQUES

Survey of the main research tools available for advanced work i n music. Course content can b e adapted to needs o f s t u dents i n music education, theory, o r perf() rmance. aly S u m mer Only. ( 2 )

539

TOPICS IN MUSIC HISTORY

Development of a research paper on a selected subject relating t o t h e departmental upper division offerings i n music history and literature. aly Summer Only. (2-4)

545

SEMINAR IN ADVANCED CONDUCTING

Directed s t u d y of selected scores for IJrge a.nd small ensembles, vocal ,1 nd instrumental. May be repeated for credit. (2)

549

ELECTRONIC MUSIC SYNTHESIS

Direc!(,'d study of electronic music literature, techniques, and composition. May be repeated for credit. (] -2)

551

ACCOMPANYING

Practice in accompanying representative vocal and instrumentaJ solo literature from all periods. Accompanying in performance will be req uired. Special fee in addition to tuition. ( J )

560

CHOIR OF THE WEST

A st udy of choral ensemble rehearsal tech niques with emphasis on score analysis. ( 1 )

561

UNIVERSITY CHORALE

A s t u d y of choral ensemble rehearsJI techn ique. with emphasis on vocal pedagogy in the rehearsal. ( 1 )

565

OPERA WORKSHOP

Prod uction of chamber opera and opera scenes. Participation in all facets of production. Prerequisite: consent of instructor. ( 1 )

568

CHORAL UNION

Rehearsal and performance of major works i n the choral/orches­ tral repertoir!' with emph asis on score analysis. Special fee in addition to tuition. ( I )

570

WIND ENSEMBLE

A study of band rehearsal techniques with emphasis on score analysis. ( 1 )

575

UNIVERSITY JAZZ ENSEMBLE

A study of jazz ensemble rehearsal techniques with emphasis on stylistic considerations. ( 1 )

580

UNIVERSITY SYMPHONY ORCHESTRA

A study of orchestra ensemble rehearsal techniques with emphasis on score analysiS. ( I ;

581

CHAMBER ENSEMBLE

Analysis, rehearsal, and performance of selected instrumental cha mber music. Pr!'requisite: consent of instructor. ( J ) Section A-String; Section B- Brass; Section C-Woodwind; Section D ­ Early Instruments. ( 1 )

583

CONTEMPORARY DIRECTIONS ENSE MBLE

P u b l i c and laboratory performance of contem porary music. Emphasis on score a n a l ysis. ( 1 )

583

TWO-PIANO ENSEMBLE

Performance of two-piano and piano duet literature, including score analysis. ( I )

584

CONTEMPORARY A RTS ENSE MBLE

A m u l t i-arts ensemble with emphasis on composition techniques, repertoi re, and performance. ( 1 )

590

GRADUATE SEMINAR

aly Summer Only. ( 1 -4)

596

RESEARCH IN MUSIC 0 -4)

599

THESIS (2-4)


86

of

Division

Natural Sciences Science education at Pacific Lut heran University is directed both toward undergraduate preparation of future science professionals and toward the creation of critical scientific awareness for liber­ ally educated citizens in all walks of life. Science must be taught as fundamental princi­ ples, groups of concepts, bodies of k nowledge, and means for survival. Holistic solutions to g'\obal problems require the ability to interrelate technical k nowledge and human values. Concern for how science is used must not obscure the motivation for pursuit of the best scientific work: the joy of trying and succeeding, the joy of discovery and understanding.

As a d iv is i on within the College of Arts and Sciences, the Division of Natural Sciences offers programs in each constituent department lea d in g to the BA. a n d B.s. degrees a n d to t he B.s. in Medical Techno log y . M.A. and M.s. degrees in Computer Science are also offered. Course offerings and degree req uirements are li sted under: BIOLOGY CHEMISTRY COMPUTER SCIENCE EARTH SCIENCES ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS PHYSICS

s

See al o the sections of this catalog on the Environmental Studies Program and on the Health Sciences (under Pre·profes· sional Programs).

Courses suitable for meeting Core I requirements in Natural Sciences/Mathematics may be found wi t h in ea c h d epa rtm e n t or

FACULTY J . Herzog, Divisional Dean; faculty members of the Departments of Biology, Chemistry, Earth Sciences, Mathematics and Computer Science, and Physics and Engineering.

L

b el o w:

CO URSE OFFERING 1 06

COSMOS, EARTH, AND LI FE

Consideration of the beginnings, evolution, and possible fates of the universe a s revealed b y present evidence. The formation and development of planet earth, geologic processes through geologic time. The impact of civilization on global resources. The a t o m ic and molecular view of chemical prerequisites for life. The origin and formation of the atmosphere and potential threats of alte rin g its constituents. Study of the development and diversification of life by fOCUSing on unifying concepts and control systems. Labo rat o ry experiences to reinforce u nd erstan d i n g of how hypo· t heses are built and c.ritically tested. Fulfills Nat ural Sciencesl Mathematics core requirement, line 1 or 2. (4)

Nurs ing

SChOOl o/

Nursing offers opportunities for a rewarding pro­ fessionall career. lt affords a wide choice of loca­ tion, environment, and type of service. The physi­ cal, mental, social, and spiritual health of people is a universal concern, and those prepared to help others maintain their good health are in constant demand.

pared for beginning positions in professional n ursing in hospitals and other health agencies. There is a special sequence for Registered Nurse students, graduates from diploma or associate degree programs, who wish to earn the Bachelor of Science in N ursing degree. The program pro­ vides a foundation for graduate study in n ursing.

The School of Nursing is a profeSSional school which combines professional and liberal arts studies in assisting students to develop a sense of responsi­ bility for acquiring the attitudes, knowledge, and skills necessary for meeting nursing needs of indi­ viduals, groups, and communities.

Under the direct supervision of its faculty mem­ bers, the School uses facilities of hospitals, health agencies, and schools in the community to provide optimal cljnical learning experience for its students.

The generic program is designed for students with no previous preparation in nursing. Graduates who successfully complete the program are eligi­ ble to write the State Board of Nursing examination for licensure as Registered Nurses. They are pre-

The School of Nursing is accredited by the Wash­ ington State Board of Nursing and by the National League for N u rsing. It is a charter member of the Western Council on Higher Education for Nursing.


87 FACULTY Mansell, Deall; Aikin, Allen, Carpenter, Cone, Egan, Fan slow, Gabel, Ga spar, Gough, C. Hansen, Herman- Bertsch, Hirsch, Kirkpatrick, Klisch, Kottal, Lambert, L. Olson, Page, Rhoades, Schultz, Smith, Stiggelbout, Yumibe. ADMISSION AND CONTINUATION POLICIES Students seeking admission to either the generic program or the sl'q uence for registered nurses must make formal applica­ tion to both the u niversity and the School of NurSing. Applications for admission to the School of Nursing are accepted twice during the year. Students desiring admission to either fall or spring semester of the following academic year must submit applications between january 1 and February 1 5. Additional applications from students wishing to be considered for any remaining admissions for the spring semester must be submitted by September 1 5. Applications are reviewed only if the applicants have been admitted to PLU and have provided official transcripts as requested by the School of Nursing Admissions Committee. The number of spaces in the School of Nursing each semester is limited; t herefore, the selection of "tudents for admission may be competitive. I n making the selection, the School of Nursing Admissions Committee uses grades as t h e major means of determination. Students accepted to begin the nursing sequence in either fall or spring semester, and who have applied by the February 1 5 deadline. are selected for both terms and notified b y May 1 . St udents are admitted t o the term of their choice insofar .15 it is possible. If there are more applicants than can be accommo­ dated, deferred admission to the next term may be necessary. Additional selection for the spring semester is made in the fall with notification by November 1. With satisf" ctory progress, six semesters are required to com­ plete the sequence of nursing courses leading to the Bachelor of Science in Nursing. All potential or pre-nursing students are u rged to seek early academic advisement through t he School of N u rsing Office in order to enroll for appropriate prerequisites and thereby avoid un necessary loss of time. The School of Nursing reserves the right to request with­ drawal of nursing students who fail to demonstrate academic or clinical competence or who fail to main t.l i n professional con­ duct. Unsafe practice constitutes grounds for immediate with­ drawal from t h e clinical component. Minimal criteria for admission to or continuation in the School of Nursing are as follows:

1 . Admission to the university. Applicants must have been admitted to Pacific Lutheran University before consideration of their application to the School of Nu rsing_ Admission to the university does not guarantee admission to the School of Nursing.

2. Completion of or current enrollment in Psychology 101 (intro­ duction to Psychology) and three of t h e following: Biology

201 (in troductory M icrobiology), Biology 205, 206 (Human Anatomy and Physiology), Chemistry 105 (Chemistry of Life). The remaining courses will be completed after enrolling in the nursing program; however, both Biology 205 and 206 must be completed before enrollment in Nursing 253, 263. and 273. Students need to plan their schedules accordingly. 3. Completion of a minimum of 26 semester credit hours. Some of these may be i n p rogress at the time of application.

4. A minimum grade of 2.00 (C) in all required nursing and pre­ requisite courses. A student receiving a grade of less than 2.00 in any course which is a prereq uiSite for a nursing course may not continue in that nursing course until the prerequi­ site course is repeated with a grade point of 2.00 or above.

5. A minimum cumulative grade point average of 2.33.

6.

Physical health and stamina necessary to withstand the demands of nursing.

7. Emotional stability sufficient to cope with the st resses inherent in learning and practicing n u rsing.

8. Completion of a math proficiency test before or during t h e first semester of the nursing program w i t h a minimum score of 7 1 % (prerequisite to entry into t h e third semester of the nurSing program). All tests will be admin istered by t he testing center with the student responsible for the nominal cost of each test. Students receiving a grade of less than 7 1 % may not continue in the nursing sequence until the prereq uisite test is repeated with a grade of 71% O r above. Students who do not have two years of high school algebra ale advised to enroll for a math elective.

9. Progression in the nursing sequence is dependent upon satis­ factory performance (a grade of C or higher) in the prerequi­ site nursing coulses. Nursing majors may have no more than

4 semester credit hours of non-nursing courses to be com­ pleted at t he time of enrollment in the final semester of nursing courses. Registered n u rses are admitted to the RN/BSN special sequence each fall semester. They may choose to be enrolled fulJ-time for a total of sixteen months, or to extend their pro­ gram and enroll on a part-time basis. Registered nurse students must have completed all non-nursing course prerequisites and a minimum of 24 semester credits of the core requirements and electives for a total of 56 semester credits admission. Other

INfore

minimal criteria for admission to Or continuation in t h e nursing program are as outlined above for generic students. Registered nurst'S who are considering making application for admission to the nursing program are advised to contact the School of N u rSing for advice about prerequ isite, to be com pleted, other requirements to be met, and the program to pursue after admission.

HEALTH Nursing students are responsible for maintaining optimal health and are teachers of health. Physical examinations, x-rays, and immunizations are required before admission to the clinical areas, and periodically thereafter, and are the responsibility of students. All students must carry personal health insurance. ADDITIONAL COSTS I n addition to regular univerSity costs, students must provide their own transportation between the university campus and the clinical laboratory areas beginning with the first nursing course. Available public transportation is limited, so provision for private transportation is essential. Students are required to carry profe�sional liability insurance during all periods of dinical experience. This is available under a group plan at a nominal cost to the student. Health examination fees, s t udent uniforms (approximately 5200.00) and equipment (wristwatch, scissors, stethoscope) are also the responsibility of the student. A 525.00 testing fee, payable directly to t h e School of N u rsing, is assessed at the time of enrollment in NurSing 424. This is the cost of standardized testing. RESOURCES AND FACILITIES Good Samaritan Hospital, Puyallup, WA (225 beds) David K. Hamry, M.H.A., President Peggy Cannon. Vice President Lakewood General Hospital, Tacoma. WA Bruce M. Yeats, Administrator

(I�S

beds)

Cat h y Nugent, R.N., M.N., Assistant Administrtor for Nursing Service Madigan Army Medical Center, Tacoma, WA (493 beds) Brigadier General Darryl H. Powell. M.D., Commanding Officer Colonel Neldean Borg. B.5.N., M.N., Chi ef, Department of Nursing Mary Bridge Children's Health Center, Tacoma, WA (68 beds) Karen Lynch, R.N., B.5.N., Associate Administrator Susan Messenger, R.N., M.N., Director of Pediatric Nursing Puget Sound Hospital, Tacoma, WA ( I 5 1 beds) H ugh Hendrix, M . H.A., Assistant Administrator JoAnn Schaeffner, R.N., Director of Nursing St. joseph Hospital, Tacoma, WA (370 beds) Daniel Russell, B.5., M.H.A., C.E.O., President John Ma her, B.B.A., M.B.A., M.N.A., Vice President and Chief Operations Officer Hazel Hurst, R.N., B.5., M.N., Assistant Administrator for NUIsing Services St. Peter Hospital, Olympia, WA (328 beds) David L. Bjornson, M . H.A., Administrator Anne Bertolin, R.N., M.N., Assistant Administrator Tacoma General Hospital, Tacoma, WA (315 beds) Charles Hoffman, Executive Vice President/Administrator Shirley Murphy, R.N., M.5.N., Acting Assoc iate Administrator, N u rsing Services Tacoma Lutheran Home Zina Herbert, R.N., Director of N u rSing Tacoma- Pierce County Health Department, T.Koma, WA Alfred Allen, M.D., M.P.H., Director Nancy Cherry, R.N., M.P.H., Director, Family and Community Health Services Division Tacoma Public Schools, Tacoma, WA Donna Gamble, R.N., M.N., Coordinator of Health and Handicapped, Division of Health Veterans Administration Hospital, Tacoma. WA ( 5 1 2 beds) William E. Claypool. A.B., M.HA., Director Joan Stout, R.N., B.5.N .• M.N., C.N.A.A., Chief, Nursing Service Western State Hospital, Steilacoom, WA (924 beds) R. Darrell Hamilton, M . D., Superintendent jalane Hagerott, R.N., M.A., Director of NurSing


88 BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN NURSING The curriculum plan and its implemen tation are designed to foster growth and to encourage initiative and self-dLrection on the part of students. I n addition to nursing requirements, stu­ dents are expected to meet university requirements. N u rsing courseS are sequential i n nature and all have prerequisites. Students interested in the Bachelor of Science in N u rsing degree should contact the School of N u rsing on entering t he university to avoid time loss. The School of N ursing reserves the right of curriculum modifi­ cation and re\'ision as long as it does not hinder the students' progress toward grad uatinn. For spring semester enrollment the c u rriculum generally follows the fall semester format with modifications as necessary to assure completion of all prerequisite courses by the time they are needed. A schedule of courses is developed individually with each student who begins nursing courses in the spring semester. Nursing courses must be taken concurrently and in sequence as indicated in t he sample curriculum, and normally extend over six semesters. FIRST YEAR-Pre N u rsing Fall Semester Biology 205 Psychology 1 0 1 English 101 G UR/Core P h v sic,,1 Educ<1tion 1 00

I n l l'rim (optional)

4 4 4 4 I

0-4

4 4 4 4

1 17

SECOND YEAR Fall Semester Bicllogv 20[

C U Ri e",,,

Psychology 335 Nursing 2 1 2 NurSing 222 Physic,,1 Education

I

__

3

3 3 4

2 4 3 2

4 15

Interim (optional) Spring Seme�ter N u rsing ,152 Nursing 362 Nursing 372 Nursing 382 CUR/Core

2 2 3 4 [I

A minimum of 1 28 semester credit hours is required for the bacca­ laureate degree.

COURSE OFFERINGS The following courses are being phased out for nursing students. The term of final offering is indicated at the end of each course description. 220

0-4

2 2 2 2 4 14

COMMONALITIES IN NURSING CARE

I n t roduction to the use of the nursing process and psychomotor skills in client care. Emphasison the role of the professional n u rse in implementation o f t he nurSing process. Selected clinical experi­ ence with adult clients in hospitals or nursing home . Prerequi­ sites: BIOl 20 [ , 205, and 206; N U RS 2 1 4; concurrent enrollment in N U RS 224. (4) (fall 1987 only)

HE ALTH ASSESSMENT

Health assessment of children and adults. Emphasis on beginning assessment techniques as part of the nursing process. Introduc­ tion to the use of health resources, the influence of eco-systems, ,wd the role of the health team in wellness promotion. Prerequi­ sites: BIOl 205 and 206; CHEM 1 05; N U RS 2 1 4; prior or concurrent enrollment in PSY 335 (or EDUC 32 1 ); concu rrent enrollment in NURS 220. (4) (last offered spring 1988)

NURSING PROCESS; INDIVIDUALS AND FAMILIES

Basic interruptions in h u m a n bio-psycho-social processes with resultant health disruptions. Selected situational and maturational crises affec ting individuals and families. Deve lopment of psycho­ motor skills and nursing interventions withm the framework of the nursing process. Prereq uisites: 220, 224; concurrent enrollment in 344. (4) (last offered fall [988)

344

1

14 THIRD YEAR Fall Semester Nursing 322 NurSing 324 Nursing 333 Nursing 342 Sociology 330

4 4

Spring Semester NurSing 462 N u rsing 472 Nursing 473 N ursing 474

334 4 4

Spring Semester N u rsing 253 N u rsing 263 Nursing 273 CURICore Phvsic,,1 Education

16 Interim Elective

224 4 4 4 2 2 17

Interim Elective

3 3 3 3 4

"CUR - general university requirement

17

Spring Semester Chemistrv 1 05 C RiCor" (Religion) Biology 206 Elective Physical Ed ucJtion

FOURTH YEAR Fall Semester Nursing 423 Nursing 433 Nursing 436 NurSing 453 CURICore

NURSING IN THE CHILDBEARING YEARS

Individual and family adaptations t h roughout the pregnancy cycle. Physiological and psycho-sociocultural aspects of child­ bearing. Theory and clinical application in physicians' offices, hospitals, and home env ironments. Prereq uisites: 220, 224; con­ current enrollment in 334. (4) (last offered spring 1988)

354

PHYSIOLOGICAL NURSING I

384

PSYCHOSOCIAL NURSING

Content focuses on selected complex pathophysiological d isorders of d'ildren and adults with nursing interventions to facilitate adaptation and restoration to maxi mum level of wellness. Holistic approach t o assist in meeting the physi ological and psychosocial needs of clients and families. Prerequisites: 334, 344; concurrent enrollment in 384, 394. (4) (last offered fall 1 988)

Introduction to selected acute and chronic psychiatric disorders of adults. Emphasis on psychopathological aspects of illness and nursing interventions using interpersonal and othercontemporary modalities i.n the care of clients with mental health problems. Prerequisites: 334, 344; concurrent enrollment in 354, 394. (4) ( l as t offered fall 1.988)

394

CLINICAL PRACTICUM I

Clinical laboratory for Nursing 354 and 384. Application of theoretical principles based on concepts of pathophysiology and psychopathology to the care of clients using the nursing process as a framework for holistic care. Development of interpersonal and technical skills. Prereq uisites: 334, 344; concurrent enrollment in 354, 384. (4) (last offered fall 1988)


[

89 424

PHYSIOLOGICAL NURSING II

Content focuses on selected complex pathophysiological disorders of children and adults of a life-threatening or chronically disabling nature. Nursing intervent ions based on understanding of the bio­ psycho-social disruptions and means of restoring balance to an optimal level of functioning. Prerequisites: 354, 384, 394; concurrent enrollment in 434, 444 . (4) (last offered summer 1989)

434

COMMUNITY HEALTH NURSING

Identification of major public health problems, level of prevention, and communitv health nurses' roles. Models and theories for evaluat ing, rei � forcing, or altering health -seeking behaviors of families, groups, and special populations. Introductions to selected theories, principles, and methods of leadership, and concepts of research in nursing. Prerequisites: 354, 384, 394; concurrent enroll­ ment in 424, 444 . (4) (last offered summer 1 989)

444

CLINICAL PRACTICUM

U

Clinical application of bio-psycho-social, cultural. and spiritual concepts in acute care hospital and community settings. Use of the nursing process includes interpersonal as well as technological skills. Professional responsibility and accountability are empha­ sized. Prerequisites: 354, 384, 394; concurrent enrollment in 424, 434. (4) (last offered summer 1 989)

464

LEADERSHIP IN NURSING

Analysis of health care delivery systems. Emphasis on leadership and economic aspects affecting health professionals and con­ sumers. Prerequisites: 424, 434, 444; concurrent enrollment in 478. (4) (last offered fall 1989)

478

SENIOR PRACTICUM

Clinical application and synt hesis of professional and technical skills in hospitals, health agencies, or other community settings. Prerequisites: 424, 434, 444; concurrent enrollment in 464. (8) (last offered fall 1 989)

The following CQurses are being phased in for nursing students beginning in the fall semester 1987. 1 00

MEDICAL TERMINOLOGY

Study of over 350 word elements and the application of t h ose terms in understanding over 10.000 complex medical words in their appropriate context. Application of these terms to anatomical and pharmacological references. ( 1 )

212

INTRODUCTION TO THE HEALTH CARE SYSTEM

Socio-cultural, political. economic. ethical, and legal issues influ­ encingcontemporary health care. Focus on major health problems and health care delivery systems. Historical perspectives and trends in professional nursing and nursing education. Open to non-majors. Prerequisite: Sophomore standing. (2) ( first offered fall 1 987)

222

SELF C ARE COMPETENCIES

Fa.ctors conrributing t o healthy life styles a n d personal responsi­ bility for health maintenance. Nursing roles in health promotion including stress management. nutrition. self medicat ion. and substance abuse. Framework for effec tive commu.nication skills and helping relationships. Open to non-majors. Prerequisites: Sophomore sta nding, consent of inst ructor. (2) (first offered faU 1 987)

253

COMMONALITIES IN NURSING CARE

Introduction to the use of the nursing process and psychomotor skills in client care. Emphasison the role of the professional nurse in implementation of the nursing process. Selected c1inical experi­ ence with adults in extended care facilities. Prerequisites: Admis­ sion to the School of Nursing. BIOl 201, 205. 206; NURS 2 1 2. 222. (3) (first offered fall 1 987)

263

PATHOPHYSIOLOGY

Pathophysiological concepts associated with human responses to real and potential threats to health. Immune response. reaction to injury and infection. pain, disturbances of circulation and respira­ tion, neurological dysfunction and abnormal cell growth as clinical manifestations of selected disorders organized around a framework of categories of human functioning. Prerequisites: BIOl 201. 205. 206. (3) ( first offered spring 1988)

PSYCHOSOCIAL NURSING: CLINICAL

C1.inical application of the nursing process to promote optimal mental health for clients along the mental health-illness con­ tinuum. Emphasis on implementing a variety of therapeutic techniques and nursing interventions including therapeutic communication. Prerequisites: Prior or concurrent enrollment in NURS 324. (2) (first offered fall 1988)

324

PSYCHOSOCIAL NURSING

Use of the nursing process in the promotion of mental health for clients along the mental health-illness continuum. A holistic approach to understanding a variety of nursing interventions and other con temporary therapeutic modalities in the treatment of clients with mental health problems. Introduction to selected acute and chronic psychiatric disorders. Prerequisites: 253. 263. 273 and concurrent enrollment in 322. (4) ( first offered fall 1988)

333

PHYSIOLOGICAL NURSING I

Basic interruptions in the bio-psychosocial processes with res ul­ tant health deviations. Focus on selected pathophy siologic dis­ orders of adults with nursing interventions to facilitate adaptation and restora tion to maximum level of wellness. Holistic approach to meeting needs of clients and families. Teac hing and learning strategies for health promotion. restoration. and maintenance. Prerequisites: 253. 263. 273. and concurrent enrollment in 342. (3) (first offered fall 1988)

342

PHYSIOLOGICAL NURSING I: CLINICAL

Clinical application o f concepts of pathophysiology and psycho­ pathology to the care of adult clients in hospital settings. The nursing proc.ess as framework for professional practice. Prerequi­ sites: Concurrent enrollment in 333. (2) ( first offered la1l 1988)

352

NURSING IN THE CHILDBEARING YEARS

Individual and family adaptations t h roughout the pregnancy cycle. PhYSiological and psychosocial-cultural aspects of child­ bearing. Prerequisites: 322. 324. 333. 342; SOC 330 (2) ( first offered spring 1 989)

362

NURSING IN THE CHILDBEARING YEARS: CLINICAL

Clinical application of maternal newborn theory and skills in hospital. clinic. community and home environments. PrerequiSites: Concurrent enrollment in 352. (2) (first offered spring 1 989)

372

NURSING OF CHILDREN

Nursing and health care of children from infancy through adole­ scence. Childhood needs. childbearing practices. and parental roles. Prerequisites: 322. 324. 333. 342. SOC 330. and concurrent enrollment in NURS 382. (2) (first offered spring 1989)

382

NURSING OF CHILDREN: CLINICAL

Clinical application of pediatric theory and skills in acute. primary care. and community facilities. Prerequisites: Concurrent enroll­ ment in 372. (2) ( first offered spring 1989)

392

NURSING RESEARCH

Introduction to the research process and basic research skills. Includes purposes of nursing research. problem identification. hypot hesis generation and testing, research design. critique process and use of research in nursing. Prerequisites: 322. 324. 333. 342. (2) ( first offered spring 1989)

423

PHYSIOLOGICAL NURSING II

Selected complex pathophysiological disorders of a life threatening or chronically disabling nat ure in adults. NurSing interventions based on understanding the bio-psycho-social disruptions and means of restoring balance to attain optimal level of functioning. PrerequiSites: 322. 324. 333. 342, 352. 362, and concurrent enrollment in 433. (3) (first offered fall 1989)

433

HEALTH ASSESSMENT

Health assessment of children and adults. Emphasis on inter­ viewing skills and physical. developmental. and psychosocial assessment techniques as part of the nursing process. Prereq ui­ sites: BIOl 205. 206. CHEM 1 05. NURS 212. 222. (3) (first offered spring 1988)

273

322

PHYSIOLOGICAL NURSING II: CLINICAL

Clinical application of bio-psycho-social. cultural. and spiritual concepts in the care of adult clients in acute care settings. Use of the nursing process and emphasis on cognitive. interpersonal. and psychomotor/technological skills. Prerequisites: Concurrent regis­ tration in 423. (3) (first offered fall 1 989)

436

COMMUNITY HEALTH NURSING: FAMILIES

Application of family theory and nursing models to the analysis of needs and care offamily clients in community settings_ Identifica­ tion of major public health problems. levels of prevention. health seeking behaviors. health screening. and nursing management of high-risk families. Prerequisites: 322, 324, 333. 352, 362. and concurrent enrollment in 453. (3) (first offered fall 1 989)


90 453

COMMUNITY HEALTH NURSING: CLINICAL

Clinical application o f professional and technical skills in the care of families in community health agencies. 'Implementation of complex nursing interventions in the home and ambulatory care settings. Refinement of ,i ntervie\'>, ing and case management skills. Opport u n i t y for independent judgment and decision making. Prerequisites: Concurrent enrollment in 443. (3) ( first offered rai l 1989)

462

LEADERSHIP IN NURSING

Analysis of professional roles and functions in health care delivery systems. Evaluation of the impact o f organizational structures on professional nursing practice. Leadership and management styles, concepts of power and aut hority. Prerequisites: Senior standing i n nurSing. (2) ( first offered spring 1 990)

472

ISSUES AND TRENDS IN NURSING

473

COMMUNITY AS CLIENT

474

NURSING SYNTHESIS

Analysis and evaluation of the impact of selected socio-economic, ethico-Iegal, and political aspects on professional nursing practice. Professional issues including entry leveL credentialing, quality asurance, ethical decision-making and life-long learning. Pre­ req uisites: Senior standing in nursing. (2) (first offered spring 1 990) Nursing strategies for problem solving in community or public health environments. Focus on community assessment, health planning, application o f t h e chang., process, and health education for high-risk groups. Prerequisites: 443, 453, prior o r concurrent enrollment in 462, 472, and senior standing in nursing. (3) (first oifered spring 1990) SynthesiS o f critical t h ink ing, independent judgment, decision making, technical and leadership skills in the delivery of health care in acute or chronic situations. Prerequisites: 423, 433, prior or concurrent registration in 462, 472, senior standing in n u rsing. (4) (first offered spring 1990)

491, 492

INDEPENDENT STUDY

Prerequisite: Permission of the dean. ( 1 -4)

Philosophy .....

Philosophy is the parent academic discipline that gave birth to today's variety of arts and sciences. It examines basic issues in all fields and explores connections among diverse areas of life and experience. In philosophy the most fundamental and enduring of questions are addressed: How can human beings gain k nowledge about their world? What limits are there to that k nowledge? What is the ultimate nature of t he universe? In particular, what is the nature of the human per­ son, and what role or purpose is ours? How should we live? Are there moral, aesthetic, and religious values that can be adopted rationally and used to guide our decisions? A course of study in philoso­ phy acquaints students with major rival views of the world, encourages them to think precisely and systematically, and helps them to see life critically, app reciatively, and whole.

FACULTY

Myrbo, Chair, Arbaugh, Cooper, Huber, Menzel, Nordby. USES OF PHILOSOPHY Courses in philosophy meet the needs of a variety of stu­ dents: ( 1 ) those who desire some knowledge of philosophy as a basic element in liberal education; (2) those who wish to pursue some special interest, for example, in ethics, science, religion, the history of thought, or the ideas of particular men or peoples; (3) those who wish to support their work in other fields, for example, literature, history, religion, the sciences, education, or business; (4) those who plan to use a major in philosophy a s preparation for graduate or professional study in another field, for example, theology, medicine, or law; and (5) those who plan to do gradu­ ate work in philosophy itseli, usually with the intention of teach­ ing in the field. Undergraduat" study in philosophy does not train one speci­ fically for a first job. It does provide exposure to important perspectives, a s well as basic skills in interpretation, critical thinking and problem solving, research, analysis, and writing.

These-usually coupled with apecialized training in other disciplines-fit one for a great variety of positions of vocational r�sponsibility. Persons with the highest potential for advance­ ment are generally not those with the most special ized training, but t hose with a broad perspective, flexibility and depth, and skills in thought and communication. SUPPORTING PROGRAMS IN PHILOSOPHY FOR OTHER FIE LDS Philosophy provides a solid foundation for a variety of studies and careers. Students using it to support primary work in other fields may elect a minor or major o r some other combination of courses of interest. On approval of the department, one course (4 hours) in another field of study may be used for the philo­ sophy major if it has a direct relationship to the student's indi­ vidual philosophy program. Both how philosophy relates to a variety of careers ,lnd what specific programs of study are recommended to support work in other disciplines are described in separate brochures avail­ able in the departmental office. These include business, com­ puter science, education, fine arts, health professions, law and public policy, social work, social and natural sciences, and theological studies.

A DISTINGUISHED PROGRAM PLU's department of ph ilosophy offers a distinctive course of studies. The permanent fa culty all hold the doctorate, have studied at leading institutions in this country and abroad, and have participated in professional programs in the United States and Europe. All students, especially majors and minors, receive substantial individual attention and assistance. INTERIM O F FERINGS Special interim courses a t PLU explore a variety of philosophical topics. Cou rses are innovative and unusual, often interdisci­ plinary i n nature, and involve students in the expertly guided exploration of issues that do not always fit well into the regular school year. In recent years, on-campus studies have been con­ cerned with themes of social and legal philosophy, war and morality, bio-medical ethics, religion and science, and the computer revolution. UNrvERSITY CORE REQUIREMENT The gener" l university core requ irement of four hours in philosophy may be satisfied by any course offered except 100 Reasoning, 121 Critical Thinking alld Writing, and 233 In troduction to Logic. A variety of 2-4 credit hour courses dealing with moral issues, 226 Moral ProiJlL7ns, 323 Health Care Ethics, 325 BusinL'Ss EIIr ies, 326 Moral Problems in the Social Sen}ices, and 328 Philo­ soplrical tssues in tire Law, satisfy this requirement only if 225


[

91 ETHICAL THEORY

Ethical Theory (2 hours) is also taken. 341 Ph ilosophy of Malhe­

225

malics-Set Theory, 342 Philosophy of Mathematics-Code! and Truth,

Examination of major moral systems of Western civilization and some contemporary ethical theories. Must be taken concurrently with or before 226, 325, 326, 328, or 323-1, II, Ill, IV in order to use those co urses for t h e philosophy core requirement. I II (2)

and 343 Philosophy of Logics count toward this requirement only when taken in addition to 225 or 233. The initial course in philo­ sophy is customarily 101, 1 25, or 225, though none of these courses is strictly a prereq uisite for any other course. 3OO -level courses are especially suited for students with particular interests. Faculty consent may be required for registration in Some courses. MINOR: 16 semester hours. A minor in philosophy consists of four approved courses; for transfer students, at least two must be taken a t PLU. Students considering a minor should discuss their personal goals with departmental faculty. If they elect a minor in the field, they should formally declare this with the registrar and the department chair. BACHELOR OF ARTS MAJOR: Minimum of 28 semester hours, including 233 Logic and any two of the four courses in the history of philosophy sequence (331 A nc ien i Philosophy, 332 Medieval Philosophy, 333 Modern Philosophy, 335 Contemporary Philosophy). On approval of the department, one course (4 hours) in another field of study may be used for the philosophy major if it has a direct relationship to the student's individual philo­ sophy program. Transfer students will normally take 1 6 or more of t heir 28 hours a t PLU. Students intending to major in philo­ sophy must formally declare this with the registrar and the department chair. They should choose a departmental adviser in consultation with whom they will plan their programs. HONORS MAJOR: 1. 28 semester hours in philosophy, including 233 Logic, at least

2.

3. 4.

5.

two courses in the history of philosophy (331, 332, 333, 335), and 493 Sellior Research Seminar. a senior thesis (part of 493), a research paper under the superv ision of one or more faculty members. a comprehensive senior examination. Performance on this examination will determine one third of the student's grade in the Sen ior Research Seminar. completion of the departmental reading program. Excellent programs in the arts and sciences do not rely exclUSively on lecturing and group study or on secondary works, but also on one-to-one t utorial instruction in primary sources. Majors in philosophy at Pacific Lut heran University are expected to read and discuss a number of classical works under the personal su pervision of various members of the departmental faculty. Not all works will be additions to course materials; some will also be covered in regular cou.rses, and these may be read and discussed simultaneously with class study. With departmental approval, the standard list may be modified in accordance w i t h special needs or interests. The list should be secured at an early date from the departmental office. I t is best that the reading program not be concentrated into a single semester but pursued at a leisurely pace over an extended period. at least a 3.30 grade point average in phi losophy courses.

CO URSE OFFERINGS 1 00

REASONING

Development of reasoning skills and an appreciation for the diverse areas to which they apply, for example, in religion, literature, science, and computer language. Students learn how to ask clear quest ions, recognize and evaluate assumptions, and avoid errors of reasoning in arguments. Does not satisfy philoso­ phy core requirement. I II ( 2 )

101

PHILOSOPHICAL ISSUES

Perennial philosophical issues, systems, a n d think ers; t h e nature of knowledge, the function of science, val ues, human nature and its social implications, religion and knowledge of God. Develop­ ment of critical and systematic philosophical thinking about a l l issues. 1 11 (4)

121

CRITICAL THINKING AND WRITING

Development of the ability to organize and write dear, direct English, and to evaluate explanations critically. The uses and abuses of language and argument among contentious, prejudiced, and superstitious people. Reasoning and writing about unusual natural phenomena, public policy decisions, and other topics of interest. Does not satisfy the philosophy core requirement. Does satisfy the English writing requirement. I II (4)

125

MORAL PHILOSOPHY

Major moral systems of Western civilization; intensive examina­ tion of some contem porary moral theories; critical application to selected moral problems. I II (4)

226

MORAL PROBLEMS

Critical application of major historic and contempoary ethical theories to a broad range of selected moral problems. For philosophy core requirement only when paired with 225. II (2)

233

INTRODUCTION TO LOGIC

A s tudy of the principles of argument and proof using both natural deduction and axiomatic approaches. An introduction to the use of first order logic in ordinary reasoning and cognitive disciplines, and to the properties of formal systems such as consistency and completeness. Includes an introduction to inductive inference. Does not satisfy philosophy core requirement. 1 (4)

HEALTH CARE ETHICS: INFORMED CONSENT

323-1

The underlying reasons for the legal and moral requirement to obtain the informed consent of the patient before treating; special considerations in therapeutic and research settings, and for special grou ps, e.g., prisoners and the mentally incompetent. Not for philosophy core requirement unless paired with 225. I ( I )

HEALTH CARE ETHICS: CHOOSING DEATH

323-1I

The kinds of value we place on life; the relation of the informed consent requirement to an alleged right to die; the criteria for determining when death occurs; the problematic notions of a "natural death," "extraordinary" medical means, and "kill ing" ,1 5 distinct from "letting die." Not for philosophy core requirement unless paired with 225. Interim or II C I )

323-III

HEALTH CARE ETHICS: I N FANTS AND CHILDREN

The special problems of consent and value of life which arise in treating t he young, such as selecting the sex of offs pring; letting defective newborns die; and the consent requirement in clincial research on c h ildren. Not for philosophy core requirement unless paired with 225. Interim or II ( I )

323-IV

HE ALTH CARE ETHICS: DISTRIBUTING SCARCE RESOURCES

How health care should be distributed. What equality means when people have widely differing needs; the meaning and justification of a otrig ht' to health care; dilemmas between preven­ tive and curative care; how to allocate scarce, life-saving resources. Not for philosophy core requirement unless paired with 225. II ( I )

324

PHILOSOPHICAL ANALYSIS OF SOCIAL PROBLEMS

An examination of fundament a) concepts of social thought; human nature, society, authority, community, liberty, equality, justice. Application of these concepts in a discussion of con­ temporary social institutions and their problems: war, racism, poverty, crime. aly (4)

325

BUSINESS ETHICS

An examinat ion, in the context of various ethical theories, ot' the moral values implicit and explicit in the free enterprise system; an assessment of some particular moral problems confronted in employer-employee relations, advertising, managerial decisions, and corporate social responsibilities. For philosophy core require­ ment only when paired with 225. I (2)

326

MORAL PROBLEMS IN THE SOCIAL SERVICES

An examination of governmental social services in relation to moral just ice, moral rights, and human well- being; particular issues such as abortion, suicide, welfare rights, and counseling methods. For philosophy core req uirement only when paired with 225. II aly (2)

328

PHILOSOPHlCAL ISSUES IN THE LAW

An examination of philosophical issues in law using actual cases as well as philosophical writings. Topics include contract law, sentencing practices, tort liability, and various criminal law defenses. Philosophical themes include natural law and legal positivism, and moral reasoning about individual rights. For philosophy core requirement only when paired with 225. Pre- or co-req uisite: one other course in philosophy or legal studies. I (4)

331

ANCIENT PHILOSOPHY

The development of philosophical thought and method from the Presocratic period to the end of the fourth century AD. Special emphasis is given to the philosophies of Plato and Aris totle. I aly

(4)


92 332

MEDIEVAL PHILOSOPHY

The development of philosophy from Augustine to Ockham. Scrutiny of the sources and nature of the Thomistic synt hesis, and t h e reaction to it in the work of Duns Scot us and William Ockham. I a/y (4)

333 MODERN PHILOSOPHY The development of philosophy from the seventeenth through the early nineteenth cent uries; continental rationalism, British empirici� m, and German ideal.ism; Descartes, Spinoza, Leibniz, Locke, Berkeley, H ume, Kant, Fichte, Schopenhauer, and Hegel. I I a l l' (4)

335

CONTEMPORARY PHILOSOPHY

343

PHILOSOPHY OF LOGICS

A study of metalogic, including the properties of first order logic. The philosophical issues raised by d i fferent systems of logic including modal logics, second order logics, quantum logics, and other many-va lued logics. Prerequisite: 233 or consent of instruc­ tor. Counts 2 hours toward philosophy core requirement when taken in addition to 225 or 233. I I all' (2)

350

PHfLOSOPHY O F RELIGION

Classical and contemporary views of traditional religious prob. lems: the existence of God, religious experience, revelation, immortality, and others. II (4)

351

THEORY OF VALUE

The development of philosophy from the late nineteenth century to the present; may include p'ragmatism, empiricism, process ph ilosophy, exi,tentialism and analysis as developed by Mill, James, Dewey, Whitehead, Sart re, Russell, Ayer, and Wittgenstein. II ail' (4)

The nature of human values, contemporary discussion concerning the subjective or objective, absolute or relative character of such v alues as the good and the right, the beautiful and the holy; t h e origin of values, t h e i r place in a world of fact, h u m a n k nowledge o f them; t h e character a n d u s e of the language of evaluation. I I a / y (4)

338

352

KIERKE GAARD AND EXISTENTIALISM

'Modern existentialism, its main themes, and their relation to other philosophical traditions; its impact on such fields as theology, litera t u re. and psychology. Life and thought of two key figures: Soren Kierkegaard and Jean-Paul Sart re; related thinkers including Nietzsche, Heidegger, Ja$pers, Tillich, Buber, Camus, and Marcel. I aty ( 4 )

340

PHILOSOPHY O F SCIENCE

The general character, fundamental concepts, methods, and significance of modern science; some attention to specific areas of science: physical, biological, social; the implications of science and scientific methodology for et hical, aesthet ic, and religious values. I ail' (4)

341

PHILOSOPHY OF MATHEMATICS: SET THEORY

A s t u d y of the his torical development and basic concepts of set theon' and the foundations of mathemat ics. The relationship of logic and set theory to the basic concepts of number and i nfinity; the philosophical implications of this relat ionship. Set theoretical paradoxes and proposed solutions. Prerequisite: MATH 1 2R or higher math coursE'. Counts 2 hours toward philosophy core requirement when taken in addition to 225 or nJ. 11 a/y (2)

342

PHILOSOPHY OF MATHEMATICS: GODEL AND TRUTH

A studv of t h e t raditIOnal accounts of t h e nature of mathematical entities and mathematical truth according to logicism, formalism, .l nd i n t u itionism. A study of Godel's lncompleteness Proof and its significance for these accounts. Prerequisite: 233 or consent of instructor. Counts 2 hours toward philosophy core requirement when taken in addition to 225 or 233. II all' (2)

AESTHETICS

Analysis of the aesthetic experience and its relationship to the fine art�, literatu re, sciencE', and morality; the criteria and concepts employed in artistic expression and aesthetic evaluation. II a/y (4)

435

ADVANCED SEMINAR IN PHILOSOPHY

Topic to be announce.d at the time the course is offered, normally some aspect of contemporary philosophy. Prerequisite: consent of instructor. (4)

491, 492

INDEPENDENT READING AND RESEARCH

P,,'requisite: departmental consent. I n ( 1 -4)

493

SENIOR RESEARCH SEMINAR

The writing of a senior thesis and taking of a comprehensive senior examination. The work on the thesis cons t i t u t es two- t h irds of the course; the exam, one-third. Each spring all students i n t h e seminar w i l l meet periodically to discuss t h e i r projects and present their final papers to each other. Final copy of thesis d u e M ay 1; examination t o be taken May 1 0. For philosophy majors only. Prereq uisite: at least 4 courses in philosophy. 1 11 (4)

501

TEACHING PHILOSOPHY TO CHILDREN

An intensive workshop for training teachers and prospective teachers to introduce reasoning sk ills and the clarification o f ideas to elementary and middle school age children. Participants will be coached in the conduct of classroom philosophical discussions and will participate themselves i n the sort of philosophical reflection that the curriculum is designed to foster. Not for philosophy core requirement. No prerequisites; teaching experi­ ence preferred. (Cross-referenced with EDUC 50l.) S (2-4)

Physical Educatio n School ol

The university's physical education program seeks to ingra in in each student a fundamental respect for the role of physical activity in living.

The school's professional programs prepare pro­ spective leaders for careers in physical education, health, recreation, athletics, and therapeutics.

I nstruction is o ffered in approximately 30 different physical education activities. The activity program is uniquely cha racterized by a timely response to student interests in recreational opportunities available in the Pacific Northwest.

O utstanding modern sports facilities include an all-weather 400 meter track, an Olympic-style swimming pool, six lighted tennis courts, a nine­ hole golf course, two gymnasiums, racquetball and squash courts, a new fitness center, and an all-purpose astro-turf field house.


J�-----,

FACULTY

"ELEMENTARY SCHOOL TEACHING MINOR (11 hours): Physical Education 241, 284, 286, and 322.

D. Olson, Dean; Chase, Hacker, Hoseth, Kluge, Lundgaard, Moore, Officer, M. Seal, F. Westering; assisted by Adachi, Allen, Benson, Haroldson, Johnson, Larson, Marshall, Nicholson, Phillips, Poppen, Ryan, Scott Westering, Susan Westering.

"ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PHYSICAL EDUCATION SPECIALIST (39 hours): The following courses are required: Physical Education 277, 283, 284, 286, 322, 329, 360, 478, 481, 482, 484, 485, and Biology 205-206.

UNIVE RSITY REQUIREMENT: Four one· hour courses 000259), including 1 00, are required for graduation. Eight one-hour activity courses may be counted toward graduation. Students are enco uraged to select a variety of activities a t appropriate skill levels. All pbysical education activity courses are graded on the basis of "A," "Pass," or "Fail" and are taught on a coeducational basis. BACHHOR OF SCIENCE MAJOR: 68-70 hours, including completion of program core requirements and one of two con­ centrations. Core Requirements: Chemistry 1 04, 1 05, (or 105, 1 1 5), Biology 1 6 1 . 1 62, 20S, 206, Physical Education 277, 480, 481, 4H2, and 485. Exercise Science Concentration: 34 hours, including Physical Education 329, 399, 478, Health Education 292, Math 1 33, Com­ puter Science 144, Biology 323, Psychology 221, 33S. Pre-Therapy Concentration: 36 hours, induding Health Education 281, 283, Physical Education 399, Biology 201 or 323, Math 133 or Statistics 231, Computer Science 144, Physics 1 2S, 1 26, 1 47, 1 48, and 4 hours of electives in psychology, as approved by concentration adviser. In addition to the requirements listed above, candidates for the BS. degree must meet the foreign language/alternative requirement in the College of Arts and Sciences. BACHELOR OF ARTS (RECREATION) MAJOR: 46-54 hours, including completion of program core requirements and one of three concentrations. Core Requirements: Physical Education 277, 287, Recreation 330, 399, 483, Business Administration 281, and Psychology 335. Administration Concentration: 16 hours, including Business Administration 350, 354; Communication Arts 285; and Compu­ ter Science 220. (Economics ISO and Statistics 231 are prereq ui­ sites for Business Administration 350.) Programming Concentration: Physical Education 285, 286, 322, 329, 334, and 6 hours of electives approved by program coordinator. Therapeutic Concentration: 26 hours, including Biology .205, 206, Physical Education 329, 478, 480, 481, 482, Recreation 340 and Special Education 296, plus 2 hours of electives in special education approved b y program coordinator. In addition to the requirements listed above, candida tes for t h e B.A. degree must meet the foreign language/alternative requirement in the College of Arts and Sciences. 'B.A. IN E DUCATION-PHYSICAL EDUCATION (K-12) PRIMARY ENDORSEMENT (49 hours): Requ.ired: Biology 205, 206; Health Educat ion 281, Physical Education 277, 283, 285, 286, 287, 322, 328, 329, 478, 480, 481, 484, 485. In addition, students must meet all requirem<'nts established by the School of Education. 'B.A. IN EDUCATION-PHYSICAL EDUCATION (K-12) SUPPORTING ENDORSEMENT (16 hours): Required: Health Education 281, Physical Education 285 or 286, 322, 328, 329, 334. 'B.A. IN EDUCATION-HEALTH EDUCATION (4-12) S UPPORTING ENDORSEMENT (16 hours): Required: Health Education 260, 270, 292, 29S, 321, 323, 325, 327, Physical Educa­ tion 329 or Special Education 190. 'Progra ms to be added, pending final faculty approval, fall 1987. "B.A. IN EDUCATION-SECONDARY SCHOOL PHYSICAL EDUCATION TEACHING MAJOR (44 hours): Required: Physical Education 241, 277, 283, 285, 286, 287, 328, 329, 478, 480, 481, 482, 484, and 485; Biology 205 and 206. For K - 1 2 certification students must also take Physical Educa­ tion 322 and 360 in addition to meeting requirements as set forth by the School of Education. "B.A. IN EDUCATION-ELEMENTARY SCHOOL PHYSICAL EDUCATION TEACHING MAJOR (24 hours): The following courses are required: Physical Education 283, 284, 286, 322, 329, 334, and 7 hours of electives in physical education approved by major adviser. In addition, students must meet requirements as set forth by the School of Education. "SECONDARY SCHOOL TEACHING MINOR (19 hours): The following courses are required: Physical Education 283, 285 or 286, 328, 334, 478, and 2 hours of electives in physical education approved by major adviser.

" Programs to be discontinued, pending final faculty approval, fall 1987. AQUATICS MINOR (18 hours): Required: Physical Education 275, 331. 375, 399, Health Education 292, and Business Adminis­ tration 281. plus 2 hours of electives approved by the aquatics d irector. COACHING MINOR (18 hours): Required: Physical Educa­ tion 334, 4 1 0, 485, and Health Education 28 1 . Electives: JO hours, including at least one course in coaching t heory, from among the following: Health Education 292 ( required for non-education majors), Physical Education 308, 361, 370, 371, 372, 374, 375, 376, 377, 378, and 478. Interim and summer Courses may be included as electives with the approval of the dean. DANCE MINOR (19 hours): Required: Physical Education 242, 243, 244, 250, 282, 362, and 462. Electives: 8 hours from among the following: Physical Education 310, 360, 401, 491, Com­ munication Arts 356, Music 247 and 249. Interim and summer courses may be included as electives with the approval of the dance coordinator. EXERCISE SCIENCE MINOR (22 hours): Required: Biology 205 and 206; Physical Education 360/399, 478, 480, 481, 482, 485. HEALTH MINOR (16 hours): Required: Health Education 260, 270, 292, 321, 323, 325, 327, and 4 hours of electives with the approval of the health coordinator. SPORTS M E D I C IN E ( Specialization-28 hours): Recom­ mended: A teaching major with the Professional Education Sequence and completion of all requirements for the Provisional Certificate. Required: ( J ) Biology 205 and 206, Health Education 260, 270, 281, 327, 382, and 4 hours of electives in health education. Physical Education 329, 480, 481, and 482. (2) U p to 1 ,800 hours of clinical experience, which may include a practicum or internship (as required by NATA). SPORTS ADMINISTRATION (Specialization-20 hours): Required: Completion of a major in business administration, economics, or communication arts; Physical Education 328 or Recrea tion 483, Physical Education 302 (or alternative), 399, 410, and Health Education 292.

CO URSE OFFERINGS Courses in the School of Physical Education are offered in the following areas:

HEALTH E DUCATION 260 FOOD AND HEALTH 270 STRESS WITHOUT DISTRESS 281 INJURY PRE VENTION AND 292 295 321 323 325 327 382 399 425 491 501 597

THERAPEUTIC CARE FIRST AID SCHOOL HEALTH FAMILY LIFE AND SEX E DUCATION EMOTIONAL HEALTH/DISEASE PREVENTION CONSUMER HEALTH ERGOGENIC AIDS INJURY PREVENTION-ADVANCED INTERNSHIP H EALTH PROMOTION/WELLNESS INTERVENTION STRATEGIES INDEPENDENT STUDY GRADUATE WORKSHOPS GRADUATE RESEARCH

93


94 RECREATION

240-249

330 RECREATION PROGRAMMING 340 THERAPEUTIC RECREATION

240 (Beginning Modern Dance), 24 1 (Current Dance), 242 (Inter­ mediate Modern Dance), 243 (Advanced Modern Dance), 244 (Folk and Social Dance), 246 (Beginning Jazz Dance), 247 (Intermediate Jazz Dance). ( I )

399 483 491 501 597

PROGRAMMING INTERNSHIP RECREATION ADMINISTRATION INDEPENDENT STUDY GRADUATE WORKSHOPS GRADUATE RESEARCH

PHYSICAL EDUCATION

FOOD A N D HEALTH

AND DUAL SPORTS

Consideration of stress, what people should know about stress, how to reduce the harmful effects of stress, and the relationship of increased stress to disease p ro ble m s. ( I )

ACTIVITIES

The American Red Cross Water Safety Instructor'S Course. Pre­ requisite: 234. II (2)

286 TEACHING METHODS: TEAM SPORTS 287 TEACHING METHODS: RECREATION 322 PHYSICAL EDUCATION IN THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 328 CURRICULUM DEVELOPMENT AND ADMINISTRATION 329 ADAPTED PHYSICAL E DUCATION 331 AQUATICS MANAGEMENT 332 O FFICIATING 334 SCIENTIFIC BASIS FOR TRAINING 360, 361 PROFESSIONAL PRACTICUM, COACHING PRACTICUM 362 MUSIC RESOURCES FOR DANCE 370-379 COACHING THEORY 399 INTERNSHIP 401 WORKSHOP 410 COACHING-THE PERSON AND THE PROFESSION 462 DANCE PRODUCTION 478 MOTOR LEARNING AND HUMAN PERFORMANCE 480 EXERCISE PHYSIOLOGY LAB 481 EXERCISE PHYSIOLOGY 482 ANATOMICAL KINESIOLOGY 484 MEASUREMENT AND EVALUATION IN PHYSICAL EDUCATION 485 BIOMECHANICS 491 INDEPENDENT STUDY 501 GRADUATE WORKSHOPS 597 GRADUATE RESEARCH PERSONALIZED FITNESS PROGRAMS

To stimulate student interest in functional personally designed programs of physical act i v i ty; assessment of physical condition and skiUs; reco mme nd at i on of specific programs for maintaining and improving p h ysic a l health. Should be taken as a freshman. I II (I)

ADAPTIVE PHYSICAL ACTIVITY

200-200

INDIVIDUAL AND DUAL ACTIVITIES

20 1 (Beginning Golf), 202 (Intermediate and Advanced Golf), 203 (Archery), 204 (Bowling), 207 ( Beginning Gymnastics), 208 (Skiing), 209 (Intermediate Gymn ast ics), 2 1 0W (Slimnastics), 2 1 1 (Beginning Ba dm i n ton), 2 1 2 (Intermediate Badminton), 2 1 3 (Personal De­ fe nse), 214 (Beginning Tennis), 2 1 5 ( Intermediate Tennis), 2 1 6 (Beginning Ice Sk at i ng ), 2 1 8 ( Bac k pa cki ng ), 2 1 9 (Canoeing), 221 (RollerSkating), 222 (Squash and Racquetball), 225 (Aerobics), 227 (Weight Traini.ng), 228 ( Basic Mountaineering), 229 (Eq u i tation ) . (I)

230-239 230

260

EDUCATION

282 RHYTHMS IN ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 283 TEACHING METHODS: GYMNASTICS 285 TEACHING METHODS: INDIVIDUAL

150

TEAM ACTIVITIES

250 ( Directed Sports Participation), 251 (Volleyball and Field H oc key), 252 (Basketball and Softball), 253 (Soccer and Vo iJeyba U), 254 (Team Handball), 259 (Phys ica l education activities completed t h rough inde pend ent study) ( I ) A study of the bas ic req uirements necessary to maintain optimal health through wise food c hoi ces . Topics i ncl u de nutrients and their metabolism, dietary g u ideli ne s, food fa d ism, la beli ng, addi­ tives, vegetarianism, obesity, nut'rit ion-reJated d iseases, nutrition during pregnancy, and nutrition for athletes. ( I )

275 WATER SAFETY INSTRUCTION 277 FOUNDATIONS OF PHYSICAL

100

250-259

RHYTHMS

AQUATICS

(Beginning Swimming), 231 (Intermediate Swimming), 232 (Advanced Swimming), 234 (Advanced Life Saving), 236 (Synchro­ nized Swimming), 237 (Skin and Scuba Dh ..lg). ( 1 )

270

275 277

STRESS WITHOUT DISTRESS

WATER SAFETY INSTRUCTION FOUNDATIONS OF PHYSICAL EDUCATION

The relationship of physical education to ed uc a t ion; the biological, sociological, psychological, and mechanical principles underlying physical education and athletics. Should be the i nit ial professional course taken in the School of Physical Education. II (2)

281

INJURY PREVENTION AND THERAPEUTIC CARE

Prevention, treatment, and rehabilitation of all common inju.ries sustained in at hletics; physical therapy by employment of elec­ tric i t y, massage, exercise, light, ice, and mechanical devices. I (2)

282

RHYTHMS IN THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL

Design.ing and con d uc t ing rh yt h mic activities for elementary school children. (2)

283

TEACHING METHODS: GYMNASTICS

Includes skill development, teaching expert ise, course planning, and safety techniques in gymnastics. The course is designed for both elementary and high school ages. Prereq uisite: intermediate skills level or completion of a beginning activity cou"e, 277. I ( 3 )

285

TEACHING METHODS: INDIVIDUAL AND DUAL SPORTS

Plann i n g, teaching, and e v alu atin g these act iv it ies : tennis, bad­ minton, track and field. Prerequisite: intermediate skill level or completion of a beginning activity course, 277. I (4)

286 TEACHING METHODS: TEAM SPORTS Planning, teaching, and evaluating these team activities: basket­ ball, soccer, volleyball, rugby, field hockey, softball, touch football, team handball. (4)

287 TEACHING METHODS: RECREATION ACTIVITIES Planning, teac hing, an d ev alua t i ng the following: archery, bowlin g, golf, outdoor education, and various recreational sports. Prereq ui­ site: 277. I I (4)

292 FIRST AID This course meets requi re men t s for the American Red Cross Standard F irs t Aid and Personal Sa fet y . II (2)

295

SCHOOL HEALTH

Health concepts which relate to the total school health program, including instruction, services, and environ.me.nt; relationships between health and all levels of education. Not recommended for fresh me n. (2)

321

F AMILY UFE AND SEX EDUCATION

A stud y of a.natomy and physiology, sexual roles, reproduction, res p ons ible relationships, respect for self and others, and physical and emotional well-being. Stress on r esp ons ib le decision making concerning sexuality by prov idin g accurate information and a variety of personal coping skills and by emphasizing a positive self-concept. Evaluation of school curriculum models. (2)

322

PHYSICAL EDUCATION I N THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL

Organization and administration of a developmental program for grades K-6; sequential and progressive programming; la rge reper­

tQ,\!� Q( act\'1\t\� 'l..77 l� (e.c.ommended. I l2 or 4\


[

95 323

E MOTIONAL HEALTH/DISEASE PREVENTION

Topics include interpersonal communication, coopemtion, value­ ing, techniques leading toward a healthier lifestyle through preventive medicine, substance abuse (alcohol, tobacco, caffeine, and other drugs), and related disease problems. (2)

325

CONSUMER HEALTH

Information about consumption as it affects personal health. Examination of consuming habits to achieve greater control over total health status. (2)

326

COMMUNITY HEALTH

Organizations associated with public health and their implications for community health problems. Primarily designed for health minor students. II a/y (4)

327

ERGOGENIC AIDS

A s t u d y of various food, drugs, and t heories of training that may improve a t hletic performance or assist in weight gain or loss. I (2)

328

CURRICULUM DEVELOPMENT AND ADMINISTRA TlON

Organization and administration of physical education and ath­ letics (7-12); curriculum development implementation. Prerequi­ site: 277. Fulfills EDUC 421 certification requirement. I (4)

329

ADAPTED PHYSICAL EDUCATION

The study of physical education for people with metabolic, neurologic, cardiac, respiratory, and emotional abnormalities. (2)

330

RECREATION PROGRAMMING

Supervising and administering recreational progra ms for the school or community. I (4)

331

AQUATICS MANAGEMENT

Topics inlcude training and supervising personne\, financing, programming, pool maintenance and operation, swim meet man­ agement, and safety and emergency procedures. Study of pool chem istry, filter operations, and maintenance. Visita tion to local pools. (2)

332

OF FICIATING

Rules a n d officiating techniques of volleyball, basketball; designed to train qualified officials. Recommended a s an elective for majors and minors. I a/y (2)

334

SCIENTI FIC BASIS FOR TRAINING

Presents physiologic and kinesiologic applications to p h YSical training. TopiCS include the development of muscular strength and endurance, and the relationship of nutrit ion, environment, sex, age, and ergogeniC aids to athletic performance. Prerequisite: 277. 1 (2)

340

THERAPEUTIC RECREATION PROGRAMMING

Awareness and potentiality of leisure needs of the temporarily or permanently handicapped. Adaptation of recreation activities to provide opportunit ies for success and satisfaction by t h e handi­ capped. S t u d y of leadership t e c h n i ques a nd programming methods. (2)

360, 361

PROFESSIONAL PRACTICUM, COACHING PRACTICUM

Assistant coaching teaching experiences; planning and conducting i ntercollegiate. a t h letics and physical education instruction; stu­ dents work under supervision of the head coach or physical education instructors. Prerequisite: one course i n professional activities, departmental approval. I II (2)

362

MUSIC RESOURCES FOR DANCE

Understanding of elementary rhythm techniques. Practical learn­ ing skills for accompaniment for dance classes. Effective uses of existing music and the creation of sound SCores for choreogra phy. (2)

370-379

COACHING THEORY

Techniques, systems, training methods, st rategy, and psychology of coaching; 370 (Basketball), 371 (Football), 372 (Cross Countryl Track and Field), 374 (Soccer), 375 (Swimming), 376 (Volleyball) 377 (Tennis), 378 (SoftbaIl/Baseball). I II a l y (2)

382

INJURY PREVENTION-ADVANCED

An advanced study in the recognition and treatment of specific athletic injuries and vulnerable body struct ures, with emphas.is on evaluation, modalities of treatment, rehabilitation, and cu rrent issues. Prerequisite: 28 1 . (2)

399

INTERNSHIP

Experiences closely assigned to student's career and academic

interests. St1ldent identihes problems

to

be researched, experi­

ences to be gained, and readings pertaining to this interest. A n

approved firm o r organization i s m u t u a l l y agreed upon by t h e student and the coordinator o f t h i s program. Monthly progress reports, evaluations by thle supervisor, and other measures of achievement are used to determine the grade. Prerequisites: declaration of major, at least sophomore status, and completion of at least 10 hours in the major. May be taken as Physical Education, Health Education, or Recreation credit. (4-8)

401

WORKSHOP

Workshops in special fields for varying periods.

410

( ] -4)

COACHING-THE PERSON AND THE PROFESSION

Personal and professional requisites of successful sports programs, including coaching styles, development of leadership qualities, recruiting met hods, development of a philosophy of athlet ics, organization of pre-lin-land post-season programs, award sys­ tems, and program evaluation. Consideration of relationships with sta ff, parents, pl,'yers, faculty, administration, and media. Budgeting, purchase of equipment and maintenance, and facility planning and usage. (2)

425

HEALTH PROMOTION AND WELLNESS INTERVENTION STRATEGIES

Examination of strategies for improving t h e state of wellness through healthier lifes tyles. Topics include the holistic approach to health, behavioral intervention, n u t rition and weight control strategies, health-related fitness, strategies to improve adherence to a fitness program, and the cost-effectiveness of health programs in business and industry. Includes computerized assessments; appraisals of health risks; prescriptions for nutrit